3 HOME

CAN YOU HELP ME? A: Now, please!

B: But, mum!
Student’s Book pages 30–31 A: Now!
B: OK, OK.
Communicative outcomes 2
In this two-page spread, students practise talking C: Wh … what te … temperature is the air
about problems and solutions, and asking people to conditioning on?
do things, using can / can’t. D: 17.
C: Ca … can you turn it up? I’m co ... cold.
Listening D: It’s not cold.
C: P … please.
Aim D: OK.
to give students practice in listening for gist and for C: Thanks.
specific words 3
E: What did he say?
1 Elicit the first match to get students started. Let F: ‘It’s not you, it’s me.’
them compare their answers with a partner before E: Oh … and what was that?
discussing as a class. F: ‘I don’t love you anymore.’
E: OK … What? Can you turn it up? I can’t hear it.
Answers F: It’s old age, Dad. Is that OK for you?
1 e 3 a 5 d 7 g E: Yes, thanks.
2 h 4 b 6 f 8 c G: Can you turn the TV down? I need to study and I
can’t concentrate.
2 Organise the class into groups of four or five to discuss
the questions. In feedback, elicit a few ideas from students 4 19 Start by reading through the eight sentences
and write a few of the things they suggest saying on the and asking if students can remember any words. Don’t
board. You can refer to these phrases later, after listening, to confirm or reject anything at this stage.
see whether students predicted good things to say. • Play the recording again. Students listen and complete
the sentences. Let them compare their answers with a
Possible answers partner before discussing as a class.
a Can you switch it off / turn it down?
b Can you help me? Answers
c Can you turn it up? 1 can’t 3 on 5 not 7 up
d Can you help me / look for them? 2 tidy 4 turn 6 say 8 OK
e Can you turn it up / switch on the heating?
f Can you turn on the air-conditioning / open the
window? Understanding vocabulary
g Can you tidy it up / clean the room?
h Can you clean it?
Collocations
Aim
3 19 Recap the situations in the pictures by asking to introduce and practise the most important kinds of
what problem each picture shows. collocations
• Play the recording. Students listen and match each
conversation to a situation from Exercise 1. Let them 5 Read through the information in the box as a class.
compare their answers with a partner before discussing Ask students to give you other examples of verb + noun,
as a class. adjective + noun and preposition + noun collocations.
• Ask students to work individually to match the verbs
Answers to the groups of nouns. Let them compare their answers
1 g 2 e 3 c, a in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the class.

Answers
19 1 put on 3 turn up 5 wash
1 2 cut 4 brush 6 share
A: Simon!
B: What? 6 Ask students to work individually to match the
A: Look at this room! nouns to the groups of verbs and adjectives. Let them
B: What? compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit
A: It’s a mess! answers from the class.
B: What?
A: I can’t walk across it without breaking something! Answers
B: It’s not bad. 1 towel 3 table 5 alarm clock
A: Can you tidy it, please? 2 air-conditioning 4 sink 6 cupboard
B: Later.

38 OUTCOMES

65752_u03_pp031-040.indd 38 08/12/18 12:00 PM

 3 HOME

7 Model the activity by focusing students’ attention 9 Ask students to work individually to put the words
on the example sentences and either eliciting or in order to make sentences. Elicit the first answer to
providing other examples. Give students two or three get them started. Organise the class into pairs to check
minutes to think of things to say. Then organise the class their answers. Monitor and note how well students
into small groups to share their sentences. understand the use of countable and uncountable nouns.
• In feedback, elicit answers or move on to Exercise 10.
Optional extra activity Ask students to write five true Students will hear the correctly ordered sentences on the
sentences in their notebooks using the collocations from recording.
the lesson.
10 20 Play the recording. Students listen and check
Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable their answers. Play the recording again. Students listen
worksheet on page 232 can be used at this point or at and repeat, and practise saying the sentences.
the end of the unit for further practice.
20 and answers
Teacher development: the importance 1 I can’t sleep.
2 Can you help me?
of collocation 3 Can I use your bathroom?
• Outcomes emphasises the importance of learning 4 Can you turn up the music?
chunks of language. In particular, learning collocations or 5 I can’t find my book.
word partnerships enables students to learn new words 6 Can I wash some clothes?
in a way that is more memorable and more useable. 7 We can’t come next week.
Learning a word in isolation invites errors. It is better to 8 He can’t drive at the moment.
learn watch TV than to learn watch and TV separately.
Encourage your students to notice and learn words in
partnerships (verb + noun, adjective + noun, etc.) rather Background language notes for teachers
than as separate, isolated pieces of language. Encourage
them to notice whether the partnerships are fixed and The modal verbs can and can’t have a variety of uses,
worth learning as a complete chunk (e.g. in the morning) but here students are being introduced to some simple
or whether they are less fixed (e.g. a busy week). uses: can’t means ‘it is impossible to’, can you is used in
• Note that the online Vocabulary Builder extends questions to ask others to do things, and can I is used to
vocabulary from each unit and provides a lot of work on ask for permission.
collocation. • Can and can’t are followed by the infinitive without
to. They are modal auxiliary verbs so can and the subject
Grammar can / can’t noun or pronoun invert to make questions.
• In questions, can is stressed, but in statements it is
Aim reduced to /kən/. Can’t is always stressed.
to introduce and practise can’t to say something is
impossible, and can to ask someone to do something 11 Read the example explanation and question for
or to ask for permission the first set of prompts. Then ask students to work in
pairs to write their sentences.
8 Read through the information in the box as a class.
Ask students to give you other ways of answering the Answers
questions. Then ask students to check in the Grammar 2 I can’t see the board. Can you move?
reference on page 171. 3 I can’t do this exercise. Can you help me?
4 I can’t hear the CD. Can you turn it up?
Possible answers 5 I can’t come to the class. Can you tell me the
OK. I’ll do it now. Yes, of course. No. Sorry. homework?
6 I can’t read the board. Can I sit nearer?
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar 7 Can I go to the toilet? I can’t wait.
reference on page 171.
12 Demonstrate a short conversation using the
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference example given. Elicit possible further ways of answering
1 Can you move? the request, referring back to Exercise 8 if necessary.
2 Can you take me in the car? Ask students to practise conversations in pairs. Monitor
3 Can I phone you later? and correct any misuses or mispronunciations of can
4 Can you set the table? and can’t.
5 Can I open the window?
6 Can I make a sandwich? For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
Grammar reference on page 171.

Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference

1 can’t 3 can’t 5 can
2 can’t 4 can’t 6 can

3 HOME 39

65752_u03_pp031-040.indd 39 08/12/18 12:00 PM

 3 HOME

Speaking Optional extra activities Get students to find two more

words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (/f/,
Aim /v/, /p/ and /b/). Get students to write two collocations
to practise language from the lesson in a free, or phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 16. (These
communicative, personalised speaking activity activities could be set as homework.)

13 This is an opportunity to bring together several Teacher development: using the sounds
parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt.
and vocabulary review
• Ask students to work in pairs to prepare conversations. This section allows you to focus on problem sounds, but
Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. also reviews some key words and develops students’
ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
14 Organise students into groups of four by putting Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
one pair with another, and ask pairs to take turns to act other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see the Teacher
out their conversations. development section in Unit 1, page 19).
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note Sounds and correction
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. • The sounds /v/ and /f/ are both formed by placing the
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that top teeth on the bottom lip – you might exaggerate this
students used and pieces of language they didn’t quite for students.
use correctly during the activity. Show students better • The sounds /b/ and /p/ are made by forcing air
ways of saying what they were trying to say. through the lips which initially come together.
• The sounds /v/ and /b/ are both voiced (feel sound
Optional extra activity Extend this practice into a being made in the throat).
mingle in which students have to meet and improvise • The sounds /f/ and /p/ force air out (you can feel it
conversations based on the pictures. with your hand or see a piece of paper in front of your
mouth moving).
Sounds and vocabulary review
For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
Aim Grammar reference on page 171.
to practise the sounds /f/, /v/, /p/ and /b/; to listen
and write down words in continuous speech Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference page 171
1 There, one, behind / opposite
15 21 Play the recording. Students listen and 2 in, on, next
repeat the sounds. 3 It, front, on

21 Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference page 171

/faɪ/, /bæ/, /bɑː/, /pʊ/, /ʌp/, /lʌv/, /lɪv/, /pæ/, 3 his
/pəʊ/, /pleɪ/, /pliː/, /flæ/, /fɪ/, /fɔː/, /ve/, /fri:/ 4 his
5 their
16 22 Read the words out so that students 6 school’s
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one 7 brothers’
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or 8 your
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to 9 our
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence 10 her
for them to do this. Then play the recording again.
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference page 171
play the recordings further, or play and pause them, but 1 can’t, on, between, Can
students should be able to write complete sentences 2 on, my, his, son’s, can’t
after two or three listenings.

22
1 I need to find a bank.
2 She’s in the bathroom, putting on make-up.
3 They have a lovely living room.
4 I want to send this package to Poland.
5 Put the plates in the sink, please.
6 My flat’s on the left – opposite the post office.
7 A friend has four sofas in her flat!
8 There’s a plate of vegetables in the fridge.

40 OUTCOMES

65752_u03_pp031-040.indd 40 08/12/18 12:00 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS
Words for Unit 4 3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with
someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
Aim other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
of key, useful vocabulary using photos students are doing the task and help if necessary.
• Use the feedback time to correct any errors students
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the words made, or to point out the pronunciation of any words
and phrases to the photos. Elicit the first match to get students found hard to say.
them started (photo 1 is enjoy the nightlife). Go round the
room and check students are doing the task and prompt 4 End this stage by asking your students to say which
if necessary. Students will need help with a dictionary or photos they liked or didn’t like, and why.
teacher help or translation to do the exercise.
Optional extra activity Ask students to work in pairs to
2 23 Play the recording so that students can check find other words they recognise in the pictures. Students
their answers. Let them check again with their partner may well know or guess quite a lot of words (there are
after they have listened once. examples of clothes, food and furniture, for example).
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students There is no need to check or teach these words, but you
to repeat the words. If students have any problems could select five or six of the more useful words they say
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and to write up on the board.
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress Teacher development: using repetition
(see language notes below).
drills and showing stress
23 and answers To ensure your students are attempting to pronounce
1 enjoy the nightlife new words correctly, placing the stress in the correct
2 watch a football match place, it is important to get them used to repetition drills
3 be annoyed in which they repeat the word chorally and individually
4 rent a boat after your model or after the model provided on the
5 get some flowers recording. Here are some tips.
6 have a picnic 1 After playing the recording in Exercise 2 to allow
7 get back home students to check their matched answers, play it
8 have a cold again and pause the recording for students to repeat.
9 see a film Ask the whole class to repeat chorally. Then nominate
10 walk in the mountains three or four individuals to say the word on their
11 do some shopping own. Correct firmly, making sure students try their
12 laugh best to say the words correctly.
13 snow 2 If you are a native speaker, or confident of your
14 celebrate your birthday pronunciation, do a repetition drill after your model
15 stay in a hotel (instead of using the recording). This allows you to be
16 go sightseeing more flexible, only drilling words that your students
have problems with.
3 Use your fingers to show stress. So, hold up three
Background language notes for teachers fingers as you say celebrate, pointing to each of the
three fingers in turn to illustrate the three syllables
Revise the use of a with singular countable nouns (a you are saying. Point to the first finger forcefully to
picnic, a boat), and some with plural countable nouns show that this is the stressed syllable in the word.
(some flowers) and uncountable nouns (some shopping). 4 Write up the phonemic script of difficult words (e.g.
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the laugh /lɑːf/) on the board so students have a record
words except annoyed. of how to pronounce such words.
• Note the difficult pronunciation of flowers /ˈflaʊəz/
and laugh /lɑːf/, a word in which (to Elementary
students) the sound and spelling don’t seem to match.

4 HOLIDAYS 41

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 41 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

I HAD A GREAT WEEKEND 24

1
Student’s Book pages 34–35 A: Hi, Helga. How are you?
B: OK, but very tired!
Communicative outcomes A: Oh. What did you do at the weekend?
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking B: We went to a rock festival.
about past activities. A: Yeah?
B: Yeah. It was fantastic.
Listening A: Really? Who did you see?
B: Oh, lots of bands! The Hives, The Strypes. Who
Aim else now? Oh, yes. I saw The Loons on Saturday
to help train students to listen for gist and for specific night. They were good.
phrases A: Sounds great.
B: Yeah, it was great, but I didn’t sleep much.
1 Start by using the photo on the page to set the 2
theme and create interest. Ask students: Where are they? C: Hello.
Is it the weekend or a weekday? Why? What do you do at D: Hi, how are you? Did you have a nice weekend?
the weekend? C: Yes, it was OK.
• Ask students to read the sentences individually and D: What did you do?
match them to the three options. Let students compare C: Nothing much, really. I did some shopping on
their answers in pairs before discussing as a class. Saturday morning. I played tennis, watched TV –
the usual things.
Answers D: It sounds OK.
a a bad time C: Yeah, I needed to relax.
b a very good time 3
c a very good time E: Did you have a good weekend?
d an OK time F: Not really.
E: Oh! That sounds bad. What did you do?
F: Nothing! I was ill. I had a bad cold. I stayed in bed
Teacher development: using visuals all weekend.
E: Oh, no! Are you OK now?
on the page F: Yes, but I need to work now!
On many pages, Outcomes includes an illustrative photo 4
to show students what the topic of the lesson is. As a G: Detlev! Hi! How are you?
lead-in, use the photo to get students talking about the H: Good.
topic. Here are things you can do with a photo. G: Did you have a nice weekend?
1 Ask questions about what the photo shows as a H: Yes, it was great.
warmer to get students talking in open class or in pairs. G: What did you do?
2 Ask personalised questions related to the photo to H: Well, some friends came to visit, so I showed
get students talking and using vocabulary they have them round the city.
learnt, or to revise language from previous lessons G: That sounds nice. Where did you go?
(e.g. What do you do at the weekend?). H: Well, on Saturday, we went to the cathedral and
3 Pre-teach key phrases students may need in the then had a picnic in the park, and in the evening
lesson (e.g. cook lunch, have a picnic). we went into the old town. Then on Sunday, we
4 Preview language from the lesson. Here, for example, went to the market in the morning, and then I
you could say: This is the Giroud family in France. cooked lunch for everyone.
What did they do last weekend? What did they eat? G: That sounds great.
Where were they? Find out how well students can H: It was. It was lovely.
already use past forms.
3 24 Ask students to read the sentences and decide
2 24 Start by setting up the situation. Make sure whether they can match any to the conversations they
students know there will be four conversations and have heard. Then play the recording again. Let students
they must match each one to a sentence in Exercise 1. compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit
They must also note what the person says about their answers from the students. At the end, you may wish to
weekend. allow students to look at the audio script on page 200 to
• Play the recording. Then let students compare their check their answers.
answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the
students. Answers
1 b, f 2 e 3 c 4 a, d
Answers
1 b 2 d 3 a 4 c
1 good (fantastic) 2 OK 3 bad 4 good (great)

42 OUTCOMES

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 42 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

4 Model the first question: Do you like busy weekends Background language notes for teachers
or quiet weekends? Ask the question two or three times
round the class and elicit responses. Then put students in The past simple in English is likely to surprise many
pairs to ask and answer the questions. Monitor and note of your students in its simplicity. Unlike many other
errors or good uses of language you could feed back on languages, there are no complex conjugations to
at the end of the activity. remember, with changes depending on first person or
third person, masculine or feminine, plural or singular.
Optional extra activity Extend the activity by asking We add -ed or -d to regular verbs in all persons.
students to prepare five more Do you like …? questions • The big difficulty here is remembering all the irregular
about weekend activities. Once students have prepared pasts. They simply need to be learned, so think about
questions, ask them to mingle and interview three or setting homework, doing revision tests, and playing
four different people. memory games with irregular verbs. Many of the most
common verbs in English have irregular past forms, and
Grammar Past simple there are no useful rules for why they change as they do.

Aim 6 Ask students to work in pairs to test each other. In

to introduce and practise the past simple feedback, discuss which forms students found it most
difficult to remember.
5 Read through the information in the box as a class.
Then organise the class into pairs to write the infinitive 7 Ask students to complete the sentences. Do the
forms. Elicit the first answer as an example in open class. first as an example to get students started. Let students
Monitor and note how well students know regular and compare their answers in pairs before going through
irregular forms. the answers as a class. Write up the correct forms on the
• Ask students to check their answers in the Grammar board so students can check and copy if necessary.
reference on page 172.
Answers
Answers 1 had 5 was
1 show 6 go 2 went 6 came
2 cook 7 do 3 stayed 7 got
3 stay 8 have 4 watched 8 spent
4 play 9 be
5 watch 10 come 8 Ask students to prepare their sentences. You could
provide an example by reading out sentences of things
you did in the past which were great, bad or boring.
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar Monitor and help with ideas, vocabulary and spelling.
reference on page 172. • Organise the class into groups of four or five to share
their ideas. Rather than telling them to read out the
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference questions they prepared, tell them to close their books
2 I went shopping and got some new boots. go, get and try to remember and say the sentences without
3 I was lucky. I found €20 on the pavement. be, find reading. Once students are working in groups, monitor
4 I slept badly because I drank too much and note how well they use past forms. In feedback,
coffee. sleep, drink write a few incorrect sentences on the board and ask
5 We met at school. I sat next to her in class. students to correct them.
meet, sit
6 I spent three years in Japan. I taught English For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
there. spend, teach Grammar reference on page 172.
7 I saw her yesterday and she said hello to you.
see, say Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
8 My son made dinner for us yesterday. It wasn’t 1 went 9 was
great, but I ate it. make, be, eat 2 made 10 loved
9 She told me she swam five miles last 3 sat 11 swam
Saturday. tell, swim 4 ate 12 were
5 talked 13 got
6 told 14 had
7 laughed 15 slept
8 watched

4 HOLIDAYS 43

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 43 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

Developing conversations Answers

1 visit 5 wanted, rained
That sounds … 2 visited 6 chatted
Aim 3 played 7 walk, chat
to introduce and practise ways of using the expression 4 tried, play 8 walked
that sounds … to comment on what people say
25
9 Read through the information in the box as a class. 1 My friends visit me a lot.
• Ask students to write their own comments using that 2 We visited the cathedral.
sounds … Elicit an example to get students started. Let 3 I played a game of tennis with a friend.
students compare their ideas in pairs. 4 I tried to phone you yesterday to arrange to play
tennis.
Possible answers 5 I wanted to go out last night, but it rained.
1 That sounds nice / great. 6 I met a friend and we chatted all night.
2 That sounds nice / great. 7 We often walk together and chat.
3 That’s sounds bad. 8 We walked along the river and had a picnic.
4 That sounds nice.
5 That sounds interesting.
6 That sounds great. Background pronunciation notes

10 Ask students to use the ideas they prepared in Many students at Elementary level get into the habit
Exercise 9 to practise conversations. You could act out the of producing regular past forms with a one-size-fits-all
example conversation with a reliable student to show rendering of -ed as /ɪd/. So, they pronounce played as /
the class what to do before they start. As students speak, pleɪˈɪd/, for example. Avoid this by getting students
monitor and listen for errors, and correct students if they to practise the pronunciation a lot, and by correcting
have problems. Encourage students to attempt a good mispronunciations whenever they occur.
intonation pattern when pronouncing the phrase (see • There are rules for when the three pronunciations
below). should be used.
1 Say /d/ after a voiced sound (which includes all vowel
Background language notes for teachers sounds): /reɪnd/, /pleɪd/.
2 Say /t/ after an unvoiced sound: /wɔːkt/, /kɪst/.
Here, that is a pronoun which refers back to what the 3 Say /ɪd/ after words that end with /t/ or /d/ sounds:
previous speaker said. /ˈvɪzɪtɪd/, /dɪˈsaɪdɪd/.
• In order to sound interested in a conversation,
students need to pay attention to their intonation. A 12 Ask students in pairs to look at the audio script
flat intonation can sound disinterested or even rude. for track 24 on page 200 (which relates to the Listening
Encourage students to start their intonation high over exercise students did in Exercises 2 and 3 on page
that, rising over sounds, and falling over nice: 34 of the Student’s Book). Tell them to practise the
conversations. Monitor and correct any misuses or
mispronunciations. Tell students to close their books
That sounds nice. after they have practised a conversation once or twice,
and tell them to try to remember and reproduce the
• Native speakers often miss out that when they use conversation.
this phrase.
A: We went to the country for the day. Optional extra activity Write five to eight key words or
B: Sounds nice. phrases from the first conversation on the board. For
example: How are you? / tired / do at the weekend? / rock
Pronunciation festival / fantastic / see? / lots of bands! / Sounds great.
Ask students in pairs to recreate or reimagine the
Aim conversation from the prompts and practise it.
to help train students to hear the /t/, /d/ or /ɪd/
pronunciation of -ed in regular past forms Conversation practice
11 25 Ask students to read the pairs of verbs and Aim
say which ones are infinitives and which are past forms. to practise language from the lesson in a free,
Play the recording and ask students to circle the verbs communicative, personalised speaking activity
they hear. Let students compare their answers in pairs
before discussing as a class. 13 This is an opportunity to bring together several
• Read through the information in the box as a class, parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
pointing out the pronunciation of regular past forms the language they have learned.
(see below). • Start by saying: What did you do at the weekend?
Elicit a few answers and write any useful phrases on
the board. You could help by saying what you did at

44 OUTCOMES

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 44 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

the weekend, and reminding students of phrases they A PUBLIC HOLIDAY

have learnt which they could use. Once students have
prepared things they did at the weekend, ask them to Student’s Book pages 36–37
practise asking about their weekends with a partner.
Communicative outcomes
14 Organise the class into groups of four or five, or In this two-page spread, students talk about months,
ask them to stand up and mingle, to practise asking and seasons and dates; they talk about what they
answering the questions about their weekends. If you do normally do on public holidays, and what they did on
a mingle, join in yourself, and model saying: That sounds the last one.
nice, and any other useful phrases for students.
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new Vocabulary
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
Months, seasons and dates
15 At the end of the group or whole-class activity, put Aim
students in pairs to discuss what class members did at to introduce and practise months, seasons and dates
the weekend, and to say who had the best weekend and
why. In feedback, look at good pieces of language that 1 Start by reading out the words in the box, and
students used, and pieces of language students didn’t pointing out the pronunciation. You could ask students
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students to listen and repeat.
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. • Ask students to put the months in order. Let them
compare their answers in pairs before discussing as a
6 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM. class.

Teacher development: using the video Answers

January, February, March, April, May, June, July,
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in August, September, October, November, December
various ways:
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice Optional extra activity To help students learn and
2 instead of the listening activity in some units, memorise dates, and practise the pronunciation, play
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first a few games. For example, say a month at random –
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some students must say which month goes before and which
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way goes after the month you say; say three months in
before having a go themselves. sequence – students must say which comes next.
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.
Background pronunciation notes
• Note the stress is on the first syllable of all the months
except the last four: September, October, November,
December.
• Note the difficult pronunciation of January
/ˈdʒænjuːˌɛəri/, and especially February, /ˈfɛbjuːˌɛri/
(in which the first r is silent).

Culture notes

Months will be comfortingly familiar to speakers of other

European languages, particularly speakers of romance
languages. In common with most other European
languages, English takes the names of its months
from the names of Roman Gods (Janus, Mars, Maia,
Juno), Roman emperors (July = Julius Caesar; August =
Augustus Caesar), Roman rituals (Februa was a Roman
purification ritual, April is a corruption of the Roman word
for ‘opening’), and from Roman numbers (September to
December are based on the Roman words for 7 to 10).

2 Organise the class into groups of four or five to

discuss the questions. Monitor and help with ideas. In
feedback, elicit ideas and drill the names of the seasons
in English.
• Read through the information about ordinal numbers
in the box.

4 HOLIDAYS 45

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 45 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

Possible answers 3 26 Focus students’ attention on the list of public

In Europe, the following is more or less true: holidays.
spring: March, April, May • Play the recording. Students listen and write the dates.
summer: June, July, August Let students compare answers in pairs before writing the
autumn (fall in American English): September, dates up on the board so students can check.
October, November
winter: December, January, February 26 and answers
1 January the first
Optional extra activity 1 Give students some initial 2 October the nineteenth
practice in using ordinal numbers by asking them to 3 March the eighth
write and say their birthday. Start by saying your birthday 4 November the second
(e.g. September the twenty-third) and writing it on the 5 June the twenty-fourth
board. Then ask students to write and say theirs. Go 6 the third Monday in January
round and check that they are saying and writing the
date correctly.
Culture notes
Optional extra activity 2 Extend the activity above into
a fun mingle. Students mingle and say their birth date • Mother Teresa (1910–1997) was an Albanian Roman
to everybody in the class with a view to sitting down Catholic nun and missionary who founded and ran
in the order of birth dates. So, people born in January hospices and homes for the poor in India.
should end up to the far left of the class and people born • Women’s Day, or International Women’s Day, is a
in December should be to the right. Students will have celebration of women. In some parts of the world, it is
to work together to rearrange themselves so they are used politically to push for women’s rights. In others,
in order. At the end, ask everyone to say their day and including Russia, it is closer to Mother’s Day, an occasion
month of birth in order to confirm they are sitting in the for people to express their love for women, and to show
right order. love and respect to women they know.
• Day of the Dead (Día de Muertos in Spanish) is a
Background language notes for teachers Mexican holiday which focuses on gatherings of family
and friends to pray for and remember friends and family
• The months and seasons in English don’t take an members who have died, and help support their spiritual
article (e.g. I like summer; I go camping in May). Months journey.
always have a capital letter (e.g. June, September) but • The Feast of Sant Joan (Saint John the Baptist), celebrated
seasons don’t (spring, summer). Autumn has a difficult in Barcelona and other parts of Catalonia, is held on the
pronunciation: /ˈɔːtəm/. Note the silent n at the end. summer solstice and announces the start of the summer.
• Ordinal numbers require some practice. The first Bonfires and fireworks are lit throughout the city and
three are irregular, so one becomes first, two becomes region.
second, and three becomes third. After that, it is a case of • Martin Luther King Day is an American federal holiday
just adding -th. There is a slight change of spelling and marking the birthday of Martin Luther King (1929–1968),
pronunciation between five / twelve (a /v/ sound) and a leader in the African-American Civil Rights Movement
fifth / twelfth (a /f/ sound). who was shot and killed.
• Producing the /θ/ sound at the end of ordinals may
prove a real challenge for your students (see below). 4 Ask students to work in pairs. Tell them to decide
• In British English, people generally say, for example, who is A, and who B, and to find their files (on page 192
June the first, but the first of June is also possible. In and 193 of the Student’s Book). Tell them to complete
American English, saying June first is more common. their files with the missing dates. Then ask them to take
• We say in June but on June the first. turns to ask and answer questions about public holidays.
• When writing, it’s more common to write ordinals as Make sure students write down the dates they hear.
numbers without the, so June 21st or May 5th. Note that Monitor and note any errors which you could point out in
writing 21st June or 5th May is also correct. feedback.

Teacher development: producing the Answers

Student A’s answers:
/θ/ sound Labour Day, Bolivia May 1st
Producing the /θ/ sound at the end of ordinals is Unity Day, Germany October 3rd
challenging. That is because it is a sound that many Youth Day, Morocco August 12th
other languages don’t have. It is made even more Father’s Day the first Sunday in June
difficult when it comes after other consonant sounds, Student B’s answers:
notably the /f/ in fifth /fɪfθ/. Show students how to Immaculate Conception, Italy December 8th
make the /θ/ sound by placing your finger vertically in Teachers’ Day, China September 10th
front of your lips and putting your tongue out to touch Human Rights Day, South Africa March 21st
your finger then withdrawing your tongue as you say /θ/. Independence Day, India August 15th
Students need to practise putting the tip of their tongue
past their teeth as they make this sound.

46 OUTCOMES

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 46 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

Culture notes 27
1 The night before the holiday, we made a fire on the
• Labour Day, or International Workers Day, is celebrated beach with some friends. We sat round the fire all
in many countries on May 1st. night and we drank and ate and sang songs and
• Unity Day commemorates the anniversary of German laughed. We had a great time. Some of my friends
reunification in 1990 (when West and East Germany swam in the sea, but I didn’t. The sea wasn’t very
reunited after the fall of the Berlin Wall). warm. It usually isn’t in June. Then on the 24th, I
• International Youth Day is an international observance slept until four in the afternoon.
on August 12th, officially recognised by the United Nations. 2 I wasn’t in Russia in March, I was in London for
• Father’s Day is a celebration of fatherhood, paternal work, so I missed the holiday. They don’t have this
bonds, and the influence of fathers in society. It takes holiday in the UK. It was sad. On Women’s Day,
place in many countries, but not always on the same day. men usually treat us very well. They do nice things
• The feast of the Immaculate Conception is an and give us presents. But I didn’t go out for dinner.
important Christian celebration and is a public holiday in I didn’t get any flowers. I didn’t have anyone to say
Italy and many other Catholic countries. nice things to me. I just sat in my hotel room and
• In many countries, Teachers’ Day is a special day for the watched TV! It wasn’t very nice.
appreciation of teachers, and may include celebrations 3 For the holiday, we went to Snowshoe Mountain in
to honour them for their special contributions. The date West Virginia. The snow’s good in January. We left
varies from country to country. on Saturday the 16th at three in the morning and
• Human Rights Day in South Africa is linked with we drove to the mountains. It was good because
March 21st, 1960, and the events of the Sharpeville there weren’t many cars on the road. We got there
massacre. On that day 69 people died and 180 were at eight and spent the whole weekend skiing. It
wounded when police fired on a peaceful crowd that had was very clear and sunny. There wasn’t a cloud in
gathered to protest against the Apartheid regime. the sky. We had great views. We came home on the
• Independence Day in India commemorates the afternoon of the holiday Monday, but the traffic
nation’s independence from the British Empire on was bad. We didn’t get back home to Washington
August 15th, 1947. People fly the flag and sing patriotic until two in the morning.
songs on that day.
7 27 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the
5 Organise students into small groups to do this words and say which speaker used them. Ask students
activity. As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, to decide which words are verbs, which are nouns, and
new language or interesting ideas to use in feedback. which are adjectives, and ask them to try to work out
• At the end of the group activity, find out anything their meaning from the other words, or from what they
interesting that students shared. In feedback, look at remember from first listening. Let students check any
good pieces of language that students used and pieces words they are still unsure of in dictionaries.
of language students didn’t quite use correctly during • Play the recording again. Students listen and check
the activity. Show students better ways of saying what their ideas. Let them compare their answers with a
they were trying to say. partner before discussing as a class.

Optional extra activity Ask students to rank the three Answers

most important public holidays they celebrate from first a 2 b 3 c 1
to third. In feedback, students should say why they have
ranked the holidays in the way they have. 8 27 Put students in pairs first to see which of
the missing words they can remember, having already
Listening listened twice. Play the recording a third time. Students
listen and check and complete the sentences. Let them
Aim compare their answers with a partner before discussing
to give students practice in listening for gist and for as a class.
specific words
Answers
6 27 Remind students of the public holidays in 1 made 4 holiday 7 left
Exercise 3. Explain that students need to listen out for 2 sang 5 treat 8 mountains
clues, in particular anything relating to the month, date 3 sea 6 any 9 sky
or time of year.
• Play the recording. Students listen and match each 9 Organise the class into pairs to make sentences
speaker to one of the holidays. Let them compare their using the words in Exercise 7. The aim here is to get
answers with a partner before discussing as a class. students using past forms in whole sentences. In
feedback, try to get the class to reconstruct as much of
Answers the story as they can.
Speaker 1 Sant Joan’s Day
Speaker 2 Women’s Day
Speaker 3 Martin Luther King Day

4 HOLIDAYS 47

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 47 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

Grammar Past simple negatives Optional extra activity 1 Ask students to write three
true sentences about their day using any, anyone,
Aim anything or anywhere.
to introduce and practise past simple negatives
Optional extra activity 2 Write the sentences below on
10 Read through the information in the box as a the board. Ask students to translate them into their first
class. Then organise the class into pairs to complete the language. Then ask them to translate them back into
sentences. Elicit which word goes in the first space as English and compare the English to the original.
an example in open class. Monitor and note how well We didn’t see anyone the first day.
students do the task. I didn’t go anywhere last weekend.
• Ask students to check their answers in the Grammar I didn’t do anything last night.
reference on page 172. We didn’t try any of the food.

Answers Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable

1 weren’t 2 didn’t 3 wasn’t worksheet on page 233 can be used at this point or at
the end of the unit for further practice.

Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar Background language notes for teachers:
reference on page 172.
any
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference In negative sentences, any is used before plural or
1 didn’t 6 didn’t uncountable nouns.
2 wasn’t 7 didn’t • In negative sentences, we can also use anyone or
3 didn’t 8 wasn’t anybody (to refer to people), anywhere (to refer to places)
4 weren’t 9 weren’t and anything (to refer to other things) when we are not
5 wasn’t 10 didn’t being specific about what it is we are referring to.

For further practice, see Exercises 2 and 3 in

Background language notes for teachers the Grammar reference on page 173.

In English, we use the negative form of the auxiliary verb Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
didn’t + the infinitive form, so watch out for errors like He 1 There weren’t any cheap hotels in the old town,
didn’t played or He didn’t drove, where students feel they so we stayed outside the city.
should still use the past form of the main verb. 2 I was only in Cairo for two days. I didn’t have time
to see anything.
11 Elicit the negative form in the first sentence as an 3 I didn’t email or phone anyone for two weeks! It
example. Ask students to work individually to complete was good to relax.
the sentences. Let students compare answers in pairs 4 I was very tired, so I didn’t do anything last night.
before checking the correct answers in feedback. 5 I didn’t go anywhere on Sunday. I just stayed at
home and relaxed.
Answers 6 We stayed in the mountains. We didn’t see
1 didn’t do 5 weren’t anyone for almost a week.
2 didn’t get up 6 didn’t answer 7 I looked in ten different shops, but I couldn’t find
3 wasn’t 7 didn’t have any wine.
4 didn’t take 8 didn’t go out 8 He didn’t try any local food. He just ate burgers
all week.
12 Read through the information in the box as a class.
Elicit the answer to the first sentence as an example. Ask Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
students to work individually to complete the sentences. 2 We didn’t go to bed very late.
Let students compare answers in pairs before checking 3 The hotel wasn’t very cheap.
the correct answers in feedback. 4 I didn’t have a very busy weekend.
5 People weren’t very friendly.
Answers 6 We didn’t stay a very long time.
1 any 5 anywhere 7 My parents weren’t very happy.
2 anything 6 any 8 The water in the room wasn’t very hot.
3 anyone 7 anyone
4 anything 8 anywhere

48 OUTCOMES

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 48 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

Speaking DID YOU GO ANYWHERE NICE?

Aim Student’s Book pages 38–39
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students practise talking
13 This is an opportunity to bring together several about where they usually go on holiday, where they
parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all went recently and what they did there.
the language they have learnt.
• Ask students to work individually to prepare answers Vocabulary Going on holiday
to the questions. Monitor and help with ideas and
vocabulary. Then organise them into groups of four or Aim
five to discuss their answers. You could ask one student to introduce and practise language for talking about
to ask the questions while the rest take turns to answer. things people do on holiday
In feedback, ask different groups to say what they found
out about each other. 1 Start by reading the definition of ‘go on holiday’ as
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note a class. Ask: Where do you go on holiday in the summer?
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. Elicit a few answers.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that • Ask students to match the verbs to the groups of
students used and pieces of language students didn’t words individually, then let them compare their answers
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students in pairs. At the end, allow students to use dictionaries if
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. they are still unsure of any words.

Web research activity Ask students to research public Answers

holidays from around the world. Tell them to choose a 1 b 2 d 3 c 4 a 5 f 6 e
country and find three public holidays. In a later lesson,
students present the country, the three holidays, the 2 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
dates they take place, and one thing people do on that discuss the questions. You could ask one student to ask
public holiday. the questions while the rest take turns to answer. In
feedback, ask different groups to say what they found
out about each other.
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that
students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity.

Reading
Aim
to give students practice in reading for general
understanding and for specific information

3 Start by focusing students’ attention on the photos.

Ask: What can you see in the photos? Where are the
places? Elicit ideas and useful vocabulary (you may wish
to pre-teach capital city, mountains and sheep using the
photos).
• Ask students to read the email and put the photos in
order. Let students compare their answers in pairs. Have
a brief feedback session. Ask students to say which parts
of the text gave them clues.

Answers
1 c (Dublin, the capital … we went out and enjoyed
the nightlife)
2 b (two weeks driving round the country)
3 d (we only saw sheep)
4 a (now we're back in Copenhagen)

4 HOLIDAYS 49

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 49 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

Culture notes Grammar Past simple questions

• Dublin is the capital of the Republic of Ireland. It is Aim
the largest city, and on the east coast. It is famous for to introduce and practise past simple questions
its literary heritage (the writers James Joyce, W.B. Yeats,
Samuel Beckett, George Bernard Shaw and Oscar Wilde 7 Read through the information in the box as a class.
were all from Dublin), the drink Guinness (a type of black, Ask students to work in pairs to prepare questions using
bitter beer), and historical eighteenth- and nineteenth- the prompts. Do the first one together as an example. In
century buildings. feedback, write up or show answers on the board.
• County Mayo is in the far west of the country.
Answers
4 Ask students to read the email again and answer 1 Did you go on holiday anywhere?
the questions. Elicit the first answer as an example 2 Where did you go?
(Nicklas went to Dublin and County Mayo in Ireland). Let 3 Who did you go with?
students compare their answers with a partner before 4 Did you have a good time?
discussing as a class. 5 How long were you there for?
6 Where did you stay?
Answers 7 Was it very expensive?
1 Ireland (Dublin and County Mayo) 8 Was the weather good?
2 No, he went with Helena. 9 Was the food good?
3 three weeks
4 Yes, it didn’t rain once.
5 He went sightseeing, enjoyed the nightlife, drove Background language notes for teachers
round the country, and went walking.
In English, we invert was / were and the subject to
5 Ask students to work individually to complete form questions (e.g. Peter was tired becomes Was Peter
the sentences. Let them compare their answers with a tired?). Notice that was and were are stressed in yes /
partner before discussing as a class. no questions, but in Wh- questions they are generally
unstressed and reduce to a weak sound (e.g. How was
Answers /wəz / your summer?).
1 flew 5 favourite 9 anywhere • With other verbs, we use the auxiliary verb did. You
2 spent 6 walking 10 flights could show this in a table for students:
3 beautiful 7 anyone Q word auxiliary did subject verb (in the infinitive)
4 worried 8 was Where did you go?
Did you have a good time?
Optional extra activity Organise the class into pairs
to roleplay a conversation with Nicklas. Student A asks Pronunciation
the questions in Exercise 4, changing the words Nicklas
and he to you. Student B is Nicklas and answers using Aim
information from the email. to practise the fast pronunciation of did you

Speaking 8 28 Play the recording. Students listen, read and

notice the way did you is pronounced.
Aim • Play the recording again. Students listen and repeat.
to practise language from the lesson in a free, Give students time to practise saying the questions in
communicative, personalised speaking activity pairs. Tell them to start by reading them out, but to try
to memorise them and say them at a fast, natural speed
6 Ask students to work in pairs. Give students two with the correct pronunciation.
minutes to think of things to say first. You could help by
spending a minute telling students about the best places 28
in your country in order to provide a model of what to /djə/
say. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. /dɪ djə/
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note /dɪd jʊː/
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. 1 Did you go on holiday anywhere?
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that 2 Where did you go?
students used and pieces of language students didn’t 3 Who did you go with?
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students 4 Did you have a good time?
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. 5 Where did you stay?

Optional extra activity Extend this practice into a

mingle. If your students come from different countries,
ask them to walk round the class and tell each other
about the best places to do different things.

50 OUTCOMES

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 50 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

9 Ask students to work individually to match the a student. If they say the question correctly, answer it.
answers to the questions. Do the first one as an example. If not, look quizzical until the student or a classmate
Let students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, corrects the question. Use the activity to tell the class
write up or show answers on the board. about a true event in your life as a ‘live listening’.

Answers Sounds and vocabulary review

a 4 c 6 e 5 g 7 i 8
b 9 d 1 f 3 h 2 Aim
to practise the sounds /d/, /t/, /m/ and /n/; to listen
and write down words in continuous speech
Background pronunciation notes
13 29 Play the recording. Students listen and
In natural speech, did you is unstressed and reduced to repeat the sounds.
/dɪdjə/. Encourage students to stress the questions
words and the main verbs that are in the infinitive form, 29
but to try to run did and you together and to say them /uːn/, /aʊnd/, /ent/, /mən/, /maʊnt/, /æm/, /deɪ/,
with very weak stress. /drəʊ/, /tɪd/, /tɪk/, /tɪn/, /təl/, /ɪst/, /aɪt/

For further practice, see Exercises 1 and 2 in 14 30 Read the words out so that students
the Grammar reference on page 173. can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to
1 What did you do last night? reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence
2 What film did you see? for them to do this. Then play the recording again.
3 Was it good? Students listen and complete the sentences. You could
4 Who did you go with? play the recordings further or play and pause them, but
5 Where did you buy your shoes? students should be able to write complete sentences
6 Were they very expensive? after two or three listenings.
7 Did you get anything else?
8 Do you usually go shopping there? 30
1 We drove round the country.
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference 2 We went to Germany in June.
1 f 2 a 3 d 4 g 5 h 6 b 7 c 8 e 3 We missed our flight when we came home.
4 We went walking in the mountains.
5 We rented a boat and swam in the river.
Speaking 6 We spent a day in the capital city.
7 We had a fantastic time.
Aim 8 The weather was warm and sunny.
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity; Optional extra activities Get students to find two more
to practise asking questions in the past simple words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (/d/,
/t/, /m/ and /n/). Get students to write two collocations
10 Ask students to prepare individually. Tell them to or phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 14. (These
choose a topic and to make very brief notes about what activities could be set as homework.)
they want to say.
Teacher development: using the sounds
11 Then ask students to prepare questions for their
partner to ask. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.
and vocabulary review
This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
12 Organise the class into new pairs. Tell them to also reviews some key words and develops students’
hand over their questions and to take turns to interview ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
each other about the event they prepared. Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see the Teacher
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. development section on page 19).
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that Sounds and correction
students used and pieces of language students didn’t • /t/ and /d/ are formed in the same way. Students
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students should press their tongues against the ridge just behind
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. the upper teeth. The difference is that /d/ is voiced,
but /t/ is unvoiced. Note how /t/ and /d/ is often not
Optional extra activity Write one of the topics from pronounced or has a glottal stop /ʔ/ when followed by
Exercise 10 on the board. Tell the class that you will talk another consonant. This is perfectly standard and correct
about that event if people in the class ask you accurate pronunciation.
past simple questions about it. Elicit a question from

4 HOLIDAYS 51

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 51 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

• /m/ and /n/ are both nasal sounds. Air is forced

VIDEO 2: ALEX THE PARROT
through the nose in making the sound. To make /m/
students close their lips together. To make /n/ students Student’s Book page 40
press the end of their tongue behind their upper teeth.
Aim
For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the to find out about an experiment to measure
Grammar reference on page 173. intelligence in parrots; to improve students’ ability to
follow and understand fast speech in a video extract;
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference to practise fast speech using strong stresses
1 worked 6 stayed 11 saw
2 met 7 put 12 walked 1 Lead in to the topic by asking students to look at
3 made 8 sat 13 played the picture. Ask: What can you see? (a cat, a dog and a
4 moved 9 stopped 14 studied parrot); Why do you think they are together? Organise the
5 wanted 10 tried 15 could class into pairs or small groups to discuss the questions
and complete the table with their own ideas. In a brief
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference feedback session, elicit students’ ideas and write up
1 a go b went interesting ideas or pieces of language on the board.
2 a left b leave
3 a feel b felt 2 7 Give students time to read through the
4 a had b have sentences first. Check that students understand cognitive
5 a was b is ability, biologist, basic reasoning, communicate, project
6 a get b got and tests (see language notes below). As students watch
7 a know b knew the video, they should choose the best answer. Let them
8 a sleeps b slept compare their answer in pairs before discussing as a
class.
Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
1 A: Where did you go on holiday? Answer
2 B: We went to the Czech Republic. Sentence 4
3 A: Did you stay in Prague?
4 B: No, we didn’t. We rented an apartment in the
mountains. Background language notes for teachers
5 A: Was it nice?
6 B: Yes, it was. We had a great time. cognitive ability = the ability to solve problems
7 A: What did you do? biologist = someone who studies plants and animals
8 B: We didn’t do much. We read, we swam in the communicate = talk to another person
lake – just relaxed. basic reasoning = a simple ability to solve a problem or
9 A: Did you like the food? find an answer
10 B: Yes, we loved it! We ate out a lot.
11 A: How long were you there? 3 7 Ask students to read the summary and
12 B: Two weeks. We arrived back yesterday. complete it as best they can. Elicit the first answer to get
students started. Ask students to watch the video again
to check their ideas. Let them compare their answers in
pairs before discussing as a class.

Answers
1 African 5 abilities
2 many 6 died
3 different 7 words
4 smaller 8 love

4 This exercise offers students the chance to relate

the topic of the video to their own experiences, ideas and
opinions.
• Give students time to read the questions then put
them in pairs or small groups and give them seven or
eight minutes to ask and answer them.
• Monitor and listen to each group. Help with
pronunciation and ideas if necessary.

52 OUTCOMES

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 52 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 4 HOLIDAYS

• When most students have finished, stop the class

REVIEW
and give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of
the things students tried to say for the whole class or Student’s Book page 41
by asking students to correct or fill in gaps in sentences
you’ve written on the board, based on what you heard Aim
students saying. to consolidate vocabulary and grammar from Units 3
and 4
Understanding fast speech
Answers
5 Tell students to work on their own for a few
8 1
minutes to practise saying the extract. Then play the 1 on 4 him 7 were
recording. Students listen and compare what they said. 2 next 5 can’t 8 at, opposite
3 Simon’s 6 go
6 Encourage students to practise saying the extract 2
several times. 1 had 3 spent 5 took
2 flew 4 saw 6 stayed
7 3
Narrator: Cognitive biologist Dr Irene Pepperberg 1 I can’t come to the next class.
worked with Alex, an African grey parrot, on a 2 Is there a supermarket near here?
project that showed some surprising results. 3 The hotel wasn’t very good.
Dr Irene Pepperberg: Now once more, how many 4 Did he have a nice time?
green wooden blocks, how many green wooden … 5 I didn’t understand everything.
Alex: Four. 6 Can I help you later?
Irene: Good Birdy. On the tray, what sound is yellow? 4
What sound is yellow? 1 Did you have a nice weekend?
Alex: Or. 2 What did you do?
Irene: Or, very good. 3 Where does he live?
Narrator: Many parrots can talk, but Alex amazed 4 What did you see?
scientists. Why? Alex knew what he was talking 5 Was it good?
about. Pepperberg designed special tests for Alex 7
because she did not want him to simply repeat 1 e 2 b 3 a 4 f 5 d 6 c
or mimic information, she wanted him to answer 8
specific questions. local facilities: bookshop, chemist’s, post office,
Irene: He can tell me how many, he can tell me sports centre
what’s same, what’s different, what colour bigger, home: apartment, balcony, cupboard, fridge, kitchen,
what colour smaller or what matter bigger or what sink, sofa
matter smaller. time of year: autumn, March, October, spring, winter
Irene: How many? 9
Alex: Two. 1 share 4 set 7 turn down
Irene: Two is right, good boy. 2 send 5 cut 8 show
What colour bigger? What colour bigger? 3 get 6 wash
Alex: None. 10
Irene: None, very good. OK, good boy. 1 visited 5 view 9 watched
Alex: Treat? 2 rents 6 annoys 10 songs
Narrator: Alex was able to identify an object many 3 sightseeing 7 mess
ways – by colour, size and so on. This shows cognitive 4 nightlife 8 lay
ability similar to those of 4 to 5-year-old humans.
Dr Irene Pepperberg: Green?
Alex: Four. 31 and answers to Exercise 5
Dr Irene Pepperberg: That’s right, good boy. 1 The bank’s on this road on the right.
Narrator: Alex showed that parrots might be able to 2 I think she lives on her own.
communicate and to use basic reasoning. Alex died 3 Can you turn it up? I can’t hear it.
in 2007. During his life he learned about 150 words. 4 How long were you there for?
His last words to Irene were reportedly ‘I love you’. 5 There wasn’t anyone I knew there.
6 I’m sorry. I didn’t hear what you said.

4 HOLIDAYS 53

65752_u04_pp041-053.indd 53 08/12/18 12:02 PM

 5 SHOPS
Words for Unit 5 • Use the feedback stage to correct any errors students
made, or to point out the pronunciation of any words
Aim students found hard to say.
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set
of key, useful vocabulary using photos 4 End this stage by asking your students to say which
colours and clothes they can see in the photos.
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the words
and phrases to the photos. Elicit the first match to get Possible answers
them started (photo 1 is a bar on the top floor). Go round Colours: black trousers (5), white hat and clothes (7),
the room and check students are doing the task and green t-shirt (9), red market stalls (10), yellow, red and
prompt if necessary. Depending on how much they know, green fruit (11), blue jeans (16)
students may need help with a dictionary or teacher Clothes: shirt, pullover (2), scarf (3), tracksuit, trainers
translation to do the exercise. See Unit 1 for further (5), shirt, hat (7), suit (8, 13), T-shirt (9), coat (16)
suggestions.
Optional extra activity Ask students to say what colours
2 32 Play the recording so that students can check and clothes people in the classroom are wearing.
their answers. Let them check again with their partner
after they have listened once. Teacher development: organising pairs
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students
to repeat the words. If students have any problems Outcomes aims to encourage lots of spoken interaction
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and between students by means of pairwork and groupwork.
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the However, this can become frustrating for students if
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress they always end up with the same partner. That’s why
(see pronunciation notes below). the Student’s Book regularly mixes pairs during the unit
opener. Here are some tips for varying pairwork.
32 and answers • Encourage adult students to speak to different people
1 a bar on the top floor in the class, and get to know them, by mixing pairs
2 the menswear department during the initial warmer or lead in parts of the lesson.
3 a man with a brown jumper Use instructions like find a partner you didn’t speak to
4 take the lift in the last lesson or find a partner who has been to the
5 a young woman with a blue top same famous place as you, to empower students to seek
6 have a sale out new speaking partners. This builds relationships and
7 work in a bakery class dynamics.
8 go up the escalator • On the other hand, don’t mix pairs for the sake of it.
9 choose a cake Adult students often want to sit with a partner they are
10 look round the market comfortable with when talking about grammar rules,
11 fruit and vegetables doing vocabulary exercises, or checking answers to a
12 queue to pay reading text, for example. However, aim to change pairs
13 business is growing when the task is creative or productive. So, students
14 a woman with a green dress should have a new partner when they do a speaking or
15 the cheese section writing task.
16 steal some jeans • When preparing to do a speaking or writing activity,
17 a woman with a leather jacket ask students to prepare with one partner. Then do the
activity with another partner.

Background pronunciation notes

• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the

words except: department.
• Words that are difficult to say include vegetables
/ˈvɛdʒtəbəlz/, escalator /ˈɛskəˌleɪtə/ and queue /kjuː/.

3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with

someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and help if necessary.

54 OUTCOMES

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 54 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

HOW MUCH IS THAT RED ONE? Listening

Student’s Book pages 44–45 Aim
to help train students to listen for specific information
Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students will practise asking
questions in shops. 4 33 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students
to look at the photos of three market stalls on page 44,
Developing conversations and ask questions to focus on what they can see, e.g.
What fruit can you see in photo 2? What do they sell in
Questions in shops photo 3? Make sure students know there will be three
Aim conversations and they will need to complete the table.
to introduce and practise common questions used Elicit what might go in the first space to show them
in shops what to do. Point out that the first gaps are for a single
word, but the final answer in conversation 3 is open-
1 Read through the information in the box as a class. ended. Here, students should note what they can.
• Ask students to match the questions to the people • Play the recording and tell the students to listen and
who ask them. Elicit the first answer to get students complete the table.
started. Let students compare their ideas in pairs.
5 33 Let students compare their answers in pairs.
Answers Play the recording a second time (and a third time if
1 A 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A necessary). In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
You could show a record of the answers on the board in
Optional extra activity To revise countable and a table.
uncountable nouns, ask students when we use How
much? and when we use How many? Do a quick drill. Answers
Say different objects and students have to say How 1 6 (red) apples
many? or How much? (e.g. T: Tomatoes. Ss: How many? 2 3 yellow (peaches)
T: Rice. Ss. How much?). 3 £3.10 / three pounds ten
4 lemon
2 Ask students to match the questions from Exercise 1 5 orange
to the pairs of possible answers. Elicit the first question 6 €5.46 / five euros forty-six
to get students started. Let students compare their ideas 7 two red T-shirts with Egypt written on, one
in pairs. A way of checking this in feedback is to get one medium and one small
student to ask a question and another student to give 8 $20 / twenty dollars
the answer. That way you practise the conversations in
open class as well as providing answers.
33
Answers 1
a 4 b 3 c 1 d 6 e 2 f 8 g 7 h 5 A: Who’s next?
B: Me.
3 Organise the class into pairs. Tell student As to A: What would you like?
practise saying the questions while their partners try B: Can I have some apples?
to memorise the answers. When students are ready, tell A: These ones?
them to practise. When they have finished, tell them to B: No, those red ones.
swap roles. As students speak, monitor and listen for A: How many would you like?
errors, and correct students if they have problems. B: Six.
A: OK. Anything else, my love?
Optional extra activity 1 Extend the activity by asking B: Yes. Those things there. What do you call them
students to prepare and practise dialogues based on one in English?
of the three pictures on the page. A: These?
B: Yes.
Optional extra activity 2 Ask students in pairs to write A: Peaches. Do you want the yellow or the orange
ten English words to describe things they can see in the ones?
three pictures on the page. Find out which pair can get B: Three yellow ones.
to ten items first. A: There you go. That’s three pounds ten altogether.
Thank you. Next?

5 SHOPS 55

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 55 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

2 34
C: Those look nice. thirteen fourteen sixteen
D: Mmm. That yellow one especially. thirty forty sixty
C: Hello. Do you speak English?
E: A little. 7 35 Play the recording. Students listen and write
C: You see the yellow cake? Is it lemon? the numbers. Let students compare their answers in
E: Yeah. pairs. In feedback, elicit the answers and write them on
C: Mmm. Can we have some of that? the board.
E: How much? Like this?
D: A bit more. That’s fine. Answers
C: And the brown one above it – with the orange 1 €18 3 15% 5 £14,000
stuff on top? What’s that? 2 $70.16 4 13.99; 17 6 240,000
E: That’s coffee cake with orange.
C: OK. I’ll have a piece of that.
E: Like this? 35
C: That’s great. 1 That’s eighteen euros exactly.
E: Five euros forty-six. 2 That’s seventy dollars and sixteen cents altogether.
3 3 Everything is reduced by fifteen percent.
F: English? 4 Those are thirteen ninety-nine at the moment –
G: Yes. How much are those? reduced from seventeen.
F: Depends – seven dollars fifty, ten, fifteen dollars. 5 It costs fourteen thousand pounds new.
Which do you like? 6 Our apartment cost two hundred and forty
G: How much is that red one? thousand when we bought it.
F: This one?
G: No, the other one, there at the top. With ‘Egypt’
on it. Background pronunciation notes
F: This one?
G: Yes. Hearing the difference between thirty and thirteen or
F: Fifteen. fifty and fifteen can be difficult for students. If so, model
G: Really? the words carefully, stressing the strong stresses very
F: For you, two for twenty five. strongly. Point out the longer sound in -teen and the very
G: You have another one like that? short one in -ty.
F: Of course.
G: What size? Optional extra activity 1 Write the numbers below (or
F: Any size. similar) on the board and ask students to copy them.
G: OK. What about two for twenty dollars? Then organise the class into pairs. Student A says one
F: OK. What size do you want? of the numbers in each pair and Student B points to the
G: Can I have one in medium and a small one? number.
Thanks. 14 40 513 530
F: Here you are. 15 50 16,000 60,000
118 180 17,000 70,000

Pronunciation Optional extra activity 2 Play Bingo. Draw a simple

rectangle with six squares on the board and ask students
Aim to copy the frame and write any six of 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,
to practise the main stress in numbers 18, 19, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 in the squares. Read
out numbers at random. Students tick off any numbers
6 34 Show students what to do by writing thirteen they hear. When all their numbers are ticked off they
on the board, saying the word, and underlining the shout Bingo! Put students in groups of four to play the
main stress: thirteen. Play the recording. Students listen game again, only this time a student reads out the
and mark the main stress. Let students compare their numbers.
answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers and point
out that, with numbers, the strong stress is on the Speaking
second syllable when a word ends with -teen, but on the
first when it ends with -ty. Aim
to practise talking about prices
Answers
thirteen fourteen sixteen 8 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
thirty forty sixty discuss the questions. You may need to remind students
how to say prices and how to express the currency they use
in English. You may also need to translate (or let students
look up) words like price, cost, pay, average and negotiate.

56 OUTCOMES

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 56 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

• As students speak, monitor and note what they say. In Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
feedback, elicit interesting information students shared, 1 The one with pink stuff on top.
and comment on or correct errors that you picked up 2 … I prefer the other ones you tried on before.
during the activity. B: What about these black ones?
A: … Which ones are cheaper?
Grammar 3 … The red ones are five euros a kilo and the green
ones are 4.50.
this / these / that / those 4 … do you have this one in a medium?
Aim B: No. Sorry. There are only extra large ones or the
to introduce and practise this, these, that and those small ones.

9 Ask students to work individually to match the

sentences to the pictures. Elicit the first answer as Conversation practice
an example in open class. Let students compare their
answers in pairs. Aim
• Ask students to check in the Grammar reference on to practise language from the lesson in a free,
page 174. communicative, personalised speaking activity

Answers 12 This is an opportunity to bring together several

1 c 2 a 3 d 4 b parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt.
• Organise the class into pairs. Ask each pair to decide
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar who is A, and who B. A must choose a shop and B
reference on page 174. must try to buy two different things while negotiating
the price. You might want to give students a little
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference preparation time – tell them to look back at the
1 That 5 are questions to ask on page 44.
2 this 6 that • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
3 are 7 those language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
4 ones 8 this • In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
that students used and pieces of language students
didn’t quite use correctly during the activity. Show
Background language notes for teachers students better ways of saying what they were trying
to say.
This, these, that and those are demonstrative adjectives.
They are used before nouns to show (‘demonstrate’) Web research activity Ask students to research the price
which one (or ones) is / are being referred to. We use this of things in different major cities. Ask them to find out
with singular or uncountable nouns to refer to nouns how much it costs for a coffee and a cake, a meal for
that are close at hand, and that to refer to nouns that are two, a litre of petrol and a pair of jeans in three of the
further away. We use these with plural nouns to refer to following cities: London, Paris, Tokyo, Moscow, Beijing and
nouns that are close at hand, and those to refer to nouns New York.
that are further away.
• Note that we can also use them as demonstrative 9 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.
pronouns, replacing the noun (e.g. What’s this called?).
Teacher development: using the video
10 Ask students to complete the sentences
individually. Let students compare in pairs before The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in
checking answers. various ways:
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice
Answers 2 instead of the listening activity in some units,
1 is 2 those 3 are, ones, This particularly with weaker groups. Students can first
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some
11 Ask students to work in pairs to ask and answer of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
the questions. Start by modelling the activity with a before having a go themselves.
reliable student. 3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.
• Once students are working in closed pairs, monitor
and note how well they use this, that, these and those. In
feedback, write a few incorrect sentences on the board
and ask students to correct them.

For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the

Grammar reference on page 174.

5 SHOPS 57

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 57 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

THEY’RE HAVING A SALE 3 Ask students to compare their answers with the
person in their group who read the same text. As they
Student’s Book pages 46–47 check, go round and sort out any problems and deal with
any confusion.
Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students practise talking 4 Ask students to find the person in their group who
about things that are temporary or happening now, read a different text. Tell students to take turns to ask
and practise making excuses. and answer the questions in Exercise 2 to find out about
each other’s texts.
Reading • There is no need for extended feedback. You may wish
to just show the answers on the board and ask students
Aim which ones they didn’t get or were unsure about.
to help train students to do a jigsaw reading – reading
for specific information then sharing what they find Answers
in a text with a partner Text 1 Emily
1 Germany
1 Organise the class into groups of four or five to 2 She manages a bookshop.
discuss the questions. You may need to pre-teach some 3 in a bookshop
key words (buy online, have a sale, get a bargain, reduced) 4 Because the shop is closing.
or ask students to look up the words in a dictionary. 5 She’s sad because the shop is closing and her
• As students speak, monitor and check how well grandfather opened it 60 years ago.
students can use words connected with shopping to 6 She doesn’t know, but she doesn’t want to work
express their ideas. In feedback, point out errors and in a bookshop.
show students better ways of saying what they were
trying to say. Text 2 Dalena
1 Slovakia
Background language notes for teachers 2 She’s a sales assistant.
3 In a big clothes store.
We say something is a bargain when it is good quality 4 It’s a summer sale.
and cheap, e.g. 5 She’s tired because she’s working hard, but she
Everyone is happy when they find a bargain. likes her job.
There are some great bargains in the sales. 6 She wants to become a manager in the same
That’s a bargain! company.

2 This is a jigsaw reading (see below). Start by 5 Ask students to work with their partner to complete
organising the class into groups of four and allocating A the sentences. They will need to help each other by
roles and B roles. Ask students to look at the questions explaining words from the texts they read. At the end,
first, and check any words students are unsure of. Then use examples to check the words, or let students check
ask them to find and read their texts to find answers. words in their dictionaries.

Teacher development: managing a jigsaw Answers

1 retired 5 make
reading 2 hard 6 opportunities
Jigsaw readings require carefully-planned management. 3 sad 7 improve
Here is a way of managing this activity. Start by splitting 4 growing 8 manage
the class in half. The left-hand side of the class should be
As and the right-hand side Bs, or the front As and the back Optional extra activity Ask students to read the other
Bs, or simply go round the room and say AA / BB / AA / BB / text for homework.
AA / BB to pairs around the class.
• Tell the As to read about Emily. Tell the Bs to read Speaking
about Dalena. Give them around five minutes to read
and answer the questions together. Aim
• Now organise the class into A/B pairs (put pairs to practise language from the lesson in a free,
together in groups of four and ask them to swap communicative, personalised speaking activity
partners) to ask and answer questions about their texts.
Listen and note any problems, and help if necessary. Give 6 Organise the class into new pairs to discuss the
them around five minutes for this task. questions. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.
• When most people seem to have finished, stop the In feedback, ask different pairs what they shared with
task. You could ask if anyone has any questions at this each other.
point and answer any that come up.

58 OUTCOMES

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 58 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

Grammar Present continuous Background pronunciation notes

Aim • With pronouns, am, are and is contract to I’m, you’re,

to introduce and practise the use of the present we’re and they’re, and he’s, she’s, and it’s.
continuous to talk about present actions or situations • With nouns, are doesn’t usually contract but is reduced
that are temporary and not finished to a weak, barely discernible /ə/ sound, but is tends
to contract – notice the pronunciation at the end of
7 Read through the information in the box as a class. economy’s /z/ and brother’s /z/.
Then organise the class into pairs to complete the
sentences. Elicit which word goes in the first space as 9 Ask students to look at the sentences and discuss
an example in open class. Monitor and note how well the questions in pairs. In feedback, elicit and write an
students do the task. example of a question and a negative sentence on the
• In feedback, go through the answers. board.
• Ask students to check their ideas in the Grammar
Answers reference on page 174.
1 are 3 is 5 is 7 are
2 am 4 is 6 are 8 is Answers
1 at the moment
2 The shops in town aren’t having sales at the
Background language notes for teachers moment.
I’m not working very hard at the moment.
In English, we use the present simple to express Are the shops in town having sales at the
permanency (I have a job) and the present continuous moment?
to express temporariness (We’re having a sale). Students Are you working very hard at the moment?
often have problems deciding when to use the tenses
because, in their L1, the uses are different. Spanish
speakers, for example, may be familiar with the idea of Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar
using continuous forms to describe things happening reference on page 175.
now, but will naturally feel that they should use simple
forms to talk about something that is happening these Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference page 175
days or temporarily. Russian has no continuous form, 1 Can you come back later? I’m making dinner.
so Russian speakers find it really hard to recognise 2 Where is he going now?
when to use which form. It is a good idea, if you have a 3 Are you looking for something?
monolingual class, to familiarise yourself with problems 4 She’s talking to her mother on the phone.
your students may face. Point out that phrases like now, 5 They’re building some apartments opposite my
at the moment and these days are clues that we should house.
use the continuous form. 6 Shhh! The baby’s sleeping.
7 He’s not ready. He’s getting dressed.
Pronunciation 8 I’m not going outside now. It’s raining.

Aim 10 Set up the task by providing examples of

to practise the pronunciation of the short forms sentences that are true for you, and changing one or
of am, is and are when saying present continuous two sentences that are not true. Ask students to work
sentences individually to change the sentences. Let students
compare their sentences in pairs. In feedback, elicit a few
8 36 Play the recording. Students listen and notice changed sentences from students, and discuss anything
the pronunciation of the short forms. Let students interesting that comes up.
compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, point out the
way the words contract and reduce. Possible answers
The shops aren’t having sales …
36 I’m not working very hard.
1 The shops in town are having sales at the My mother’s driving the car / working / playing
moment. tennis.
2 I’m working very hard at the moment. The economy isn’t growing fast. / It’s growing slowly.
3 My mother’s not here. She’s doing the shopping. My football team is doing badly.
4 The economy’s growing fast at the moment. My brother isn’t studying at university. / My brother’s
5 My football team’s doing really well now. working.
6 You’re really improving.
7 Some friends are staying with me at the moment.
8 My brother’s studying at university.

5 SHOPS 59

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 59 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

11 Organise the class into pairs to prepare sentences. DO YOU SELL …?

Start by eliciting one or two possible answers for the
first situation. Monitor and prompt, and note how well
Student’s Book pages 48–49
students are using the language as they write.
• When students are ready, ask them to make Communicative outcomes
conversations as in the example, to practise making In this two-page spread, students talk about parts of a
excuses. You could model the example dialogue with department store and give directions in a store.
a reliable student to get the class started. As students
speak, monitor and note errors, particularly with the use Speaking
and pronunciation of the present continuous.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that Aim
students used and pieces of language students didn’t to read for information and talk about shops,
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students department stores and profit-sharing
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
1 Start by asking students to look at the photo. Ask:
For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the What is the name of the shop? What type of shop is it? (a
Grammar reference on page 175. department store) What does it sell? What do you know
about John Lewis?
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference • Ask students to read the text and find the answer to
1 do you do the question. Let students compare their answer in pairs
2 Do your parents live before discussing as a class.
3 I’m writing
4 I’m sitting Answers
5 are you looking for, I think John Lewis is an unusual company because all the
6 He’s just brushing, Do you want workers are partners in the business – when the
company makes money, the workers share some of
the profits.

2 Organise the class into groups of four or five to

discuss the questions. You may need to explain, translate
(or let students look up) words like company, workers and
profits.
• As students speak, monitor and note what they say. In
feedback, elicit interesting information students shared,
and comment on or correct errors that you picked up
during the activity. If students don’t know much, you
could share some of the ideas in the culture notes below.

Optional extra activity Ask students to read the text

and find five words that describe places (shops, furniture
shops, factory, farm, department store), four types of
products for sale (cheese, baths, perfume, furniture), and
three words or phrases connected with money and
business (business partners, share profits, make money).

Culture notes

The John Lewis Partnership operates John Lewis

department stores, Waitrose supermarkets and other
services. The company is owned by a trust on behalf of
all its employees – known as partners – who have a say
in the running of the business and receive a share of
annual profits, which is usually a significant addition to
their salary.
• In the UK, few major companies other than John
Lewis have profit-sharing with employees. In France,
by contrast, every company with 50 or more employees
is required to share profits with their employees.
Zara, the Spanish clothing retail group, has introduced
profit-sharing with employees.

60 OUTCOMES

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 60 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

Pros: profit-sharing encourages employees to work In American English, the term ground floor is not used, so
harder, makes them happy to be with the company, and the first floor is at street level.
makes them feel their company is generous • Note the stress in these words is generally on the first
Cons: employees expect extra money, and feel angry syllable. Exceptions: assistant, department, security.
when they don’t get it; owners and investors feel they
get less of the profits Teacher development: using concept check
• The world’s largest department store is Shinsegae
in Busan, Korea. Before it was built in 2009, the largest
questions (CCQs)
store was Macy’s in New York City. The Dubai Mall is the At Elementary level, the best way of showing the
world’s largest shopping mall. In London, Harrods, Liberty, meaning of words is through pictures, mimes and realia.
Selfridges and Harvey Nichols are the most famous However, one useful way of checking that students fully
department stores. understand a word or phrase is to ask a yes / no question.
Here are some example yes / no CCQs for some of the
Vocabulary Department stores words in the activity in Exercise 3.
Assistant: Does she buy things in a shop? (no) Does she sell
Aim things? (yes)
to introduce and practise words connected with Basement: Is it above the ground floor? (no) Is it below?
department stores (yes)
Menswear department: Does it sell dresses? (no) Does it
3 Ask students to work individually to label the plan sell suits? (yes)
with the words, or to match the numbers with the
words. Elicit the number for the first word as an example 4 This student-centred exercise effectively checks and
in open class (assistant, 3). Let students compare practises words by asking a series of more open CCQs.
their answers in pairs. In feedback, use concept check Ask students to work in pairs to answer the questions.
questions to make sure students understand the words In feedback, use other concept check questions to make
(see below), and drill the words for their pronunciation. sure students understand all the words.

Answers Answers
1 the second floor 1 the changing rooms
2 the beauty department 2 the lift
3 an assistant 3 the (main) entrance
4 the lifts 4 the basement
5 the first floor 5 the ground floor
6 the menswear department 6 at the till
7 the changing rooms 7 the menswear section
8 the security guard 8 the womenswear section
9 the ground floor 9 the beauty department
10 the womenswear department 10 an assistant
11 the basement 11 the security guard
12 the escalator 12 the escalator
13 the till
14 the top shelf Optional extra activity Ask students in pairs to make
15 the main entrance three more questions to check words in Exercise 3. Pairs
ask their questions and the rest of the class answer.
Optional extra activity Before doing Exercise 3, ask
students to look at the picture, and ask: What can you Listening
see? Brainstorm as many words as you can from the class.
Alternatively, ask students in pairs to cover the words in Aim
the box and brainstorm words together before they do the to give students practice in listening for gist and for
task. This activity gets students to think about words they specific information
already know.
5 37 Ask students to read through the situations
Background language notes for teachers first, and check any new words (use mime to check
stealing and try … on).
• A lift (or elevator /ˈɛlɪveɪtə/, in American English) is a • Play the recording. Students listen and match the
‘box’ that goes up from one floor to the next, whereas an conversations to the situations. Let them compare their
escalator /ˈɛskəleɪtə/ is a type of moving metal staircase. answers with a partner before discussing as a class.
• A till (or cash register, in American English) is what a
shop assistant uses to register what people buy and to Answers
put money in. a 2 b 4 c 3 d 1
• The basement is below ground, the ground floor is at
street level, and the first floor is above the ground floor.

5 SHOPS 61

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 61 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

37 6 37 Ask students to read the sentences carefully

1 first and note any answers they remember.
A: Excuse me. Do you sell batteries? • Play the recording again. Students listen and check.
B: Yes, madam. They’re over there, by the till. Let them compare their answers with a partner before
A: Really? discussing as a class.
B: No? Let’s see. Yes, look. They’re there. On the
bottom shelf. Answers
A: Oh, yes. Thanks. Oh, wait! They don’t have this 1 F (they are for a camera)
kind. It’s for a camera. 2 F (they intend to but they don’t need to)
B: Oh, right. Try the basement. Take the lift over 3 T
there and the camera section is in front of you 4 T
when you get out. Ask an assistant.
A: OK. Thanks. 7 Ask students to discuss which options are correct
B: You’re welcome. with a partner first. Do the first as an example in open
2 class to get them started. Once students have made their
C: Did you see that? choices, tell them to look at the audio script and check.
D: What? That woman with the blue coat?
C: Yeah. She put that perfume in her bag! Answers
D: I know. Tell the security guard. 1 Do you sell 4 ‘s talking 7 in, to
C: No, you tell him. 2 On 5 on, we’re coming down 8 many
D: Why me? You saw her first! 3 in 6 off, at
C: No – I didn’t.
D: Oh, wait! Someone’s talking to her. Optional extra activity 1 Ask students to practise one of
C: Oh dear … the conversations in the audio script in pairs.
3
E: Hi there. Optional extra activity 2 Write the sentences below on
F: Where are you? the board. Ask students to translate them into their L1.
E: I’m still on the bus, but we’re coming down Then ask them to translate them back into English and
Oxford Street now. compare the English to the original.
F: Oh, OK. Well, I’m just queuing to pay for these Have a nice day. Don’t worry.
things. Take a seat. Don’t get angry.
E: Did you get what you wanted? Have a good time.
F: Yeah, I got a pair of jeans and a really nice skirt
and two tops. Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable
E: That sounds a lot! worksheet on page 234 can be used at this point or at
F: They were all in the sale. the end of the unit for further practice.
E: Right. Anyway. Where do you want to meet?
F: There’s a café on the fourth floor. Speaking
E: Is there?
F: Yeah. Go in the main entrance and up the Aim
escalator and when you get off on the fourth to practise language from the lesson in a free,
floor, it’s behind you. It’s at the back of the store communicative, personalised speaking activity
in the left corner.
E: OK – I’m sure I can find it. See you in a moment. 8 This is an opportunity to bring together several
4 parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
G: Excuse me. Are these all the sizes you have? the language they have learnt.
H: Yes. • Ask students to work individually to complete
G: OK. Can I see if these fit? the sentence starters. You could elicit two or three
H: Of course. The changing rooms are over there in possibilities to get them started. Monitor and help with
the corner. Next to the jeans. ideas and vocabulary as students prepare. Feed back
G: Oh, OK. Thanks. How many items can I take to briefly on what students have written, asking a few
try on? individuals to share the sentences they thought of.
H: Six.
G: Great. Thanks. 9 Organise students into pairs. Ask them to decide
who is A, and who B. Instruct Bs to find information in
the file on page 196 of the Student’s Book. Pairs take
turns to play different roles in the conversations.
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that
students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.

62 OUTCOMES

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 62 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 5 SHOPS

Sounds and vocabulary review For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
Grammar reference on page 175.
Aim
to practise the sounds /ŋ/, /ʃ/, /tʃ/ and /dʒ/; to listen Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
and write down words in continuous speech 1 ‘m, on, coming
2 one, these
10 38 Play the recording. Students listen and 3 are, Do, The, the
repeat the sounds.
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
38 2 Who is Tamara talking to?
/ɪŋ/, /vɪŋ/, /θɪŋ/, /ʃɜː /, /ʃən/, /ɪʃ/, /ɪtʃ/, /ɪdʒ/, /tʃuː/, 3 I’m looking for a job at the moment.
/tʃiː/, /dʒiː/, /dʒʌ/ 4 I’m not feeling very well.
5 Are you waiting for someone?
11 39 Give students a moment to look at the 6 You’re making a mess. Clean the table when you
words in the box. Read the words out so that students finish.
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one 7 He went into town. He’s doing some shopping.
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or 8 Henry and Terry are not coming, so we can start
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to the meeting now.
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could 1 We’re staying in the Grand Hotel.
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but 2 I’m not working at the moment.
students should be able to write complete sentences 3 Who are those people over there?
after two or three listenings. 4 What’s she doing in Australia?
5 They’re having a meeting.
39 6 Can I have that red one?
1 Which one is cheaper?
2 Choose what you want.
3 They’re selling everything they can.
4 My English is really improving.
5 She’s wearing jeans and an orange jumper.
6 Can you manage with all those bags?
7 There’s a big fish section in the market.
8 He’s just changing his shirt.

Optional extra activities Get students to find two more

words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (/ŋ/,
/ʃ/, /tʃ/ and /dʒ/). Get students to write two collocations
or phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 11. (These
activities could be set as homework).

Teacher development: using the sounds

and vocabulary review
This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
also reviews some key words and develops students’
ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
development on page 19.)
Sounds and correction
The /ŋ/ sound is nasal, like /n/ and /m/, which means air
is forced through the nose when it is blocked by pressing
the back of the tongue on the soft palate. Unlike /n/
and /m/, which are common to many languages, the /ŋ/
sound is rare, even in other European languages. Watch
out for students approximating the /n/ sound instead, or
using the voiced velar stop /g/.
• The /ʃ/ sound is made by pursing the lips, with the
tongue back. To make /tʃ/and /dʒ/, the shape of lips and
tongue are the same but the tongue touches the front
of the palate at the start of the sound. A /tʃ/ sound is
unvoiced, but a /dʒ/ sound is voiced.

5 SHOPS 63

65752_u05_pp054-063.indd 63 08/12/18 12:03 PM

 6 EDUCATION
Words for Unit 6 3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with
someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
Aim other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
of key, useful vocabulary using photos students are doing the task and help if necessary.
• Use the feedback time to correct any errors students
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the words made, or to point out the pronunciation of any words
and phrases to the photos. Elicit the first match to get students found hard to say.
them started (photo 1 is solve the problem). Go round the
room and check students are doing the task and prompt Optional extra activity Ask students to work in pairs
if necessary. Students will need help with a dictionary or to find other words they recognise in the pictures.
teacher help or translation to do the exercise. Alternatively, end this stage by asking your students to
say which photos they liked and why.
2 40 Play the recording so that students can check
their answers. Let them check again with their partner Teacher development: using the
after they have listened once.
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students
Vocabulary Builder
to repeat the words. If students have any problems Remember that all the words in this section are recycled
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and in the unit and all appear in the Vocabulary Builder with
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the extra examples. The Vocabulary Builder is online and is a
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress resource that students can use to find more collocations,
(see notes below). revise vocabulary for tests, and generally test and
challenge themselves.
40 and answers
1 solve the problem
2 a boring class
3 police training
4 cause a problem
5 study Engineering
6 help each other
7 a Law student
8 pass the exam
9 a lazy student
10 learn to ride a bike
11 teach PE
12 an angry boss
13 a creative person
14 a modern university
15 a strange teacher
16 make clothes
17 borrow some money
18 learn Arabic

Background language notes for teachers

Point out the use of capital letters in university subjects

(Law, Engineering). Notice that some collocations are
quite fixed (pass an exam, solve a problem) but other
are less fixed (a boring class) or even unusual (a strange
teacher).
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
words except: creative, university, police, Engineering.
Note the difficult pronunciation: Law /lɔː/, clothes
/kləʊðz/, PE /piːiː/ (= Physical Education).

64 OUTCOMES

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 64 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

WHAT ARE YOU STUDYING? Answers

1 Literature, and possibly History, Law, Marketing
Student’s Book pages 52–53 2 Biology, Chemistry, Computing, Engineering,
Medicine
Communicative outcomes 3 school: Biology, Chemistry, Geography, History,
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking Literature, PE, Maths
about school and university; they will talk about how university: Computing, Engineering, Law,
a course of study is going. Marketing, Medicine

Vocabulary School and university 5 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
discuss the questions. Go round the room and check
Aim students are doing the task and help if necessary.
to introduce and practise adjectives to talk about • Use the feedback time to correct any errors students
school and university made, and to find out what students talked about.

1 Ask students to work individually to match the Optional extra activity Ask students to work in groups
adjectives to the nouns. Tell them to match what to rank the subjects in Exercise 4. Tell students to choose
they can before checking any difficult words in their how to rank them. For example: from easy to difficult,
dictionaries. from boring to interesting, from quite important to very
important.
Answers
1 b 2 d 3 a 4 c Listening
2 Organise the class into pairs to check. In feedback, Aim
ask which extra words students thought of, and write to help train students to listen for specific
them up on the board. information and for specific words and phrases

Possible answers 6 41 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students

1 quiet / shy 2 old 3 useful 4 strict to look at the table and ask questions to focus on what
they can see. Ask: What subjects do you know? How can
you say the years? Make sure students know there will be
Background pronunciation notes three conversations and people will talk about studying.
• Play the recording. Let students compare answers in
Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
words except expensive.
Answers
Optional extra activity Use mime to check your 1 Marketing 1st really well / interesting
students’ understanding of the words in Exercise 1. For 2 Geography 2nd not very well / boring
example, mime being a lazy student or a helpful teacher 3 Engineering 3rd OK but difficult
or doing a boring course and ask students to say which
phrase you are acting out. Put students in pairs to use
mime to test each other. 41
1
3 Organise the class into pairs to make and share A: So what do you do, Imke?
sentences. Monitor and note how well students B: I’m a student.
understand, use and pronounce the new language. A: Oh, OK. What’re you studying?
In feedback, briefly find out what students said, and B: I’m doing a degree in Marketing.
check the meaning and / or pronunciation of any words A: Right. And what year are you in?
students had problems with. B: My first. I only started this year.
A: How’s the course going?
Possible answers B: Really well. It’s great. I’m really enjoying it. It’s
Our maths teacher at school was helpful and very interesting and the other students are very
patient. nice and friendly too, so that’s good.
My university is very modern. 2
My classmates are nice and friendly. C: So what do you do, Tom? Are you working?
My course isn’t difficult. D: No, I’m a student at university.
C: Oh, right. What’re you studying?
4 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the D: Geography.
questions and categorise the subjects. Point out the use C: Really? What year are you in?
of the capital letter. In feedback, elicit answers. D: My second.
C: And how’s it going?
D: Not very well, actually. I just find it boring.

6 EDUCATION 65

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 65 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

3 Pronunciation
E: What do you do? Are you working?
F: No, I’m not, actually. I’m at the local technical Aim
college. to practise hearing and saying the weak
E: Oh, right. What’re you studying? pronunciation of are /ə/ in questions
F: Engineering.
E: Wow! OK. What year are you in? 9 42 Play the recording. Students listen and notice
F: My third. I finish next year. the weak and strong pronunciation of are. Play the
E: And how’s it going? recording again and ask students to repeat.
F: OK, but it’s quite difficult. It’s a lot of work!
E: I’m sure. Well, good luck with it. 42
1 How are you?
7 41 Ask students to read the sentences and decide 2 Where are you from?
which option is correct. Let students compare their ideas 3 What are you studying?
in pairs. 4 What year are you in?
• When students are ready, play the recording again. Let 5 Are you enjoying it?
students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, 6 Are you good at English?
elicit answers from the students. 7 Are you doing anything now?
8 Are you hungry?
Answers
1 doing 10 42 Ask students to listen again and write what
2 enjoying they hear. Let students compare their answers in pairs. In
3 at feedback, elicit answers from the students.
4 boring
5 work Answers
6 with See audio script above.

Background language notes for teachers Background pronunciation notes

At this level, it’s best just to get students to notice and Note that in questions, are is usually unstressed and
learn specific uses or collocations rather than trying to reduced to /ə/.
give rules. However, here are some things to note.
do a degree / a course / maths: we use do with a course 11 Organise the class into pairs to practise asking
of study (and make when you create or construct – do and answering the questions. As students speak, monitor
homework / make a cake). and listen for errors, new language or interesting
I’m enjoying it: like is a verb of state so it can’t be used in conversations to use in feedback.
the present continuous to talk about something that is • In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
temporary, but enjoy can be used in the continuous. that students used and pieces of language students
at university: notice we don’t use the here – at school / didn’t quite use correctly during the activity.
college / work / university – because we aren’t interested
in which specific university, but in the fact the person is Optional extra activity Ask students in pairs to think of
studying somewhere. and write three other Are you …? questions. Tell them to
boring not bored: people feel bored but things (films, dictate their sentences to another pair who must write
books, days, courses) are boring. them down, then use them to interview the first pair.
a lot of work: work is uncountable.
Good luck with …: with is the dependent preposition here. Developing conversations
How’s the course going?
8 Ask students to discuss the questions in pairs.
Monitor and note how well students use language from Aim
the lesson to answer the questions. In feedback, ask to introduce and practise ways of asking about a
students what they found out about their partner before course
giving some feedback on errors you heard and examples
of good language use by your students. 12 Read through the information in the box as a class.
• Ask students to complete the answers individually.
Optional extra activity Practice makes perfect. Ask Elicit the first answer to get students started. Let
students to practise one of the conversations in the students compare their ideas in pairs. In feedback,
audio script. Ask them to close their books and try to drill three or four of the phrases so students get some
remember as much as they can and to improvise the rest. practice saying them.

66 OUTCOMES

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 66 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

Answers LEARNING AND TRAINING

1 OK
2 Not very well.
Student’s Book pages 54–55
3 Really well.
4 OK Communicative outcomes
5 Not very well. In this two-page spread, students talk about courses.
6 Really well.
7 Really well. Vocabulary Courses
8 Not very well.
9 OK Aim
to introduce and practise asking and answering
13 Ask students to ask and answer the questions in questions about courses
groups of four or five. Encourage them to use expressions
from Exercise 12. To get students started, you could 1 Start by asking students to read through the texts
model this activity first with a reliable student. As quickly. Set a focus task (see below), e.g. What type of
students speak, monitor and listen for errors, and correct course is described in each text?
students if they have problems. • Ask students to read the texts again more carefully
and put the verbs in the correct spaces. Do the first as an
Optional extra activity Extend the activity by turning it example to get students started. Let students compare
into a mingle. Ask the class to stand up, walk round, and their answers in pairs. In feedback, write up the verbs
ask four or five people. with the collocations in the text (e.g. starts at 8, gives us
advice).
Conversation practice
Answers
Aim 1 starts, finishes, gives
to practise language from the lesson in a free, 2 doing, paying, learning
communicative, personalised speaking activity 3 training, lasts, costs, borrowing, passes
4 went, enjoyed, study, had, failed
14 This is an opportunity to bring together several 5 have, last, comes, gives, share
parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt. Optional extra activity The activity in Exercise 1 reviews
• Organise the class into pairs. Ask pairs to prepare tenses students have learned so far. You could ask
individually before practising the conversations. Student questions to check understanding or ask them to do the
A needs to practise saying the questions. Student B following in pairs.
needs to look at the table and think about how to give Name the verb form/s in each sentence. Decide which
the information. Students should switch roles once A has sentences describe:
asked all the questions. Of course, if your students are – actions at a particular time in the past
actually at university, get them to prepare to give true – actions started but not finished
answers to the questions. – things that are generally / always true.
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback. Background language notes for teachers
• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
that students used and pieces of language students didn’t Point out some of the more interesting verb + noun
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students collocations: give (somebody) advice / information; do a
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. course; it lasts three years; pass an exam; have / pass / fail
an exam; share ideas.
10 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.
Teacher development: setting a focus task
Teacher development: using the video
Whenever students have to read a short text, it is a good
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in idea to set a gist task or a focus task to enable students
various ways: to read and understand the text to some extent before
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice having to do a more detailed task such as working out
2 instead of the listening activity in some units, which verb goes where. In Exercise 1 above, ask students
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first to read the texts and say what type of course is described
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some in each one.
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
before having a go themselves. 2 Organise the class into new pairs. Give students two
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise. or three minutes to prepare things to say individually.
Monitor and help with ideas. When students are ready,

6 EDUCATION 67

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 67 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

ask them to take turns sharing their sentences. Monitor Listening

and note any interesting things students say. In feedback,
write up any useful phrases you heard on the board and Aim
feedback on any errors. to give students practice in listening for gist and for
specific words
3 Ask students to complete the conversations
individually. Elicit the first missing question to get 5 Elicit the first match to get students started. Let
students started. Let students compare their answers in them compare their answers, and discuss which other
pairs before discussing as a class. words they could use with each picture. In feedback, elicit
answers and write up words students suggest on the
Answers board.
1 What’s it about?
2 Why are you doing it? Answers
3 When are the classes? a fashion (cut, scissors, dress, clothes, make)
4 Do you have any homework? b an online course (computer, internet)
5 What time does the class start? c a training session (listen, talk, learn)
6 How long does the course last? d a horse (ride, jump, countryside, helmet, jacket,
7 How much did it cost? boots)
8 Is it good?
Optional extra activity You may wish to pre-teach a set of
4 Ask students to work in pairs to practise the key words and collocations that are used in the recording.
conversation. Before they do, support students by drilling One way of doing this is to write the following verbs on
five or six of the questions in the box chorally and the left side of the board: ride, work, write, do, have. Then
individually (see below). write these nouns on the right: in fashion, a horse, the
chance, a course, a novel. Ask students to match the verbs
Optional extra activity Once students have practised the to the nouns (ride a horse, work in fashion, write a novel, do
conversation twice, with each student playing each role, a course, have the chance) before checking the meaning.
mix the pairs and ask them to practise again. This time
Student B has to improvise answers instead of reading 6 43 Play the recording. Students listen and match
them out. Change roles again. the speakers to the photos. Let them compare their
answers with a partner before discussing as a class.
Background pronunciation notes
Answers
Notice that the intonation of yes / no questions tends to 1 a 2 c 3 d 4 b
rise at the end, whereas the intonation of wh- questions
tends to fall. When drilling the questions in Exercise 3, 43
use your hand to show the intonation pattern. Move it 1 Astrid
up to show rising intonation and down to show falling I’m doing a great course at the moment. I’m learning
intonation. to make clothes. It’s every Monday and Wednesday
evening from 6.30 to 9 and it lasts for ten weeks. It’s
Teacher development: repetition drilling quite expensive, but it’s really good. The teachers are
very helpful and I’m learning a lot. I love seeing what the
Pronunciation, stress and intonation play an important other students make as well. I want to change my job
part in being able to ask questions appropriately. Once and work in fashion, so doing this course is a good start.
students have completed the conversations, ask students 2 Peter
to listen and repeat questions after your model. When We had a training session at work last week. It wasn’t
you model the questions, try to show a rising or falling very long – it only lasted about an hour – but it was
intonation pattern as shown below. awful. My boss told everyone to go, so we didn’t have
any choice. It was about how to make good decisions.
I didn’t learn anything new. I was quite angry by the
How long does the course last? end of it.
3 Kate
I’m learning to ride. I started taking classes about
Do you have any homework? six months ago and I ride once or twice a week. It
• In a repetition drill, use an open arm gesture to get the depends how busy I am. I grew up in the countryside
whole class to repeat after your model. Then, at random, and when I was young I always wanted to ride and
use an open palm gesture to ask individuals to repeat. have a horse, but my parents didn’t have much
Correct here by repeating the phrase and asking them money so I didn’t have the chance. I’m really enjoying
to repeat. Once students have had practice in open class, the lessons. My teacher is very patient and I’m getting
put them into pairs to practise the dialogue with good quite good now.
pronunciation.

68 OUTCOMES

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 68 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

4 Neil Grammar Modifiers

I’m doing an online Creative Writing course at the
moment. My wife started it with me, but she stopped. Aim
She didn’t like it because it’s an open course and she to introduce and practise the modifiers very, really
said it was strange doing it with thousands of other and quite
students. On the course, we watch lots of videos and
people comment. Then we do our own writing. I’m 11 Read through the information in the box as a
trying to write a novel. I’m spending about ten hours class. Ask students to work individually to choose the
a week on it. Another thing I like about the course correct options. Elicit the first answer as an example
is there’s no exam at the end. I hate taking exams. I in open class. Let students compare their answers in
always fail. pairs. Monitor and note how well students do the task.
In feedback, ask students to say why each option they
7 43 Start by asking students to read the eight choose is correct.
sentences and decide whether they are true or false.
Don’t confirm any answers at this stage. Answers
• Play the recording again. Students listen and finalise 1 very 5 very
their answers. Let them compare their answers with a 2 really 6 quite
partner before discussing as a class. 3 very 7 not very
4 quite 8 really
Answers
1 F 2 F 3 T 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 T 8 F 12 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
think of example sentences using the prompts. Monitor
8 Ask students to complete the sentences individually. and note examples of good language use.
Elicit the first answer to get them started. Let students • In feedback, elicit examples from each group, and
compare their answers in pairs. You could give feedback comment on any errors or examples of good language
by eliciting and writing the correct form on the board, or use from the class.
by asking students to check in the audio script on page
203 of the Student’s Book. Possible answers
a Cars / Computers / Holidays are really expensive.
Answers b iPhones are very popular at the moment.
1 am learning c My teacher is quite strange!
2 lasts d TVs and radios are not very modern.
3 lasted e Sundays are quite boring.
4 didn’t have
5 grew up, to ride
6 is, am getting Background language notes for teachers
7 started, stopped
8 hate, fail Very and really (meaning ‘a lot’) and quite (meaning
‘a little’) go before adjectives. The stress is on the first
9 Organise the class into groups of four or five to syllable of each word, and, in sentences, the words need to
discuss the questions. As students speak, monitor be stressed. Note that extremely (meaning ‘very, very’) and
and listen for errors, new language or interesting fairly (meaning ‘quite’) are synonyms of very and quite.
conversations to use in feedback.
Optional extra activity If you have fast finishers, extend
10 Organise the class into pairs to prepare their the activity by asking students to think of people who are:
conversations. Student A must prepare to talk about a very lazy, quite helpful, very friendly, really busy, quite quiet.
course and B must prepare to ask questions. Depending
on your class, you could ask them to improvise from For further practice, see Exercises 1 and 2 in
language on the page, or to script their dialogue first the Grammar reference on page 175.
before practising it. As students speak, monitor and listen
for errors, new language or interesting conversations to Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
use in feedback. 1 It’s quite cold in here. Can we turn on the heating?
2 Thanks for inviting us. We had a really great time.
Optional extra activity Ask students to write five 3 It isn’t very interesting. We always do the same things.
sentences about their current English course or about 4 He’s OK, I guess, but he’s quite strange!
another course they are doing. Tell them to look at the 5 He’s really good at sciences. He gets A grades.
texts in Exercise 1 for ideas of what to write. At the end, 6 My teachers were very helpful, so that made the
collect in the texts and put them on the wall so that all course easier.
the class can go and read them.

6 EDUCATION 69

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 69 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference GROWING UP BILINGUAL

2 a bit difficult
4 a bit boring
Student’s Book pages 56–57
5 a bit lazy
8 a bit strange Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students practise talking
Web research activity Ask students to research an about bilingual schools and comparing things.
online course that they would like to do. Tell them to
decide on a course (e.g. art, guitar, fashion) and choose Vocabulary Languages
an English-speaking city (e.g. London, New York, Sydney).
Then they should use their search engine to find a Aim
course. Tell them to find out where it is, when it is, how to introduce and practise languages and countries
long it lasts, and how much it costs.
1 Ask students to work in pairs to say where each
language is an official language. There are a lot of
possible answers, so only a few of the main countries are
given below. Set a two-minute time limit and find out
which pair has the most correct answers. In feedback,
point out the spelling and pronunciation of both
countries and languages / nationalities.

Possible answers
Arabic: Algeria, Morocco, Lebanon, Tunisia, Saudi
Arabia, Egypt
French: France, Belgium, Switzerland, Canada,
Cameroon, Senegal
Romanian: Romania, Moldova
Turkish: Turkey, Cyprus
Chinese: China, Taiwan, Singapore
German: Germany, Austria, Switzerland,
Liechstenstein
Russian: Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus
English: Britain, Canada, USA, Australia, New Zealand
Japanese: Japan
Spanish: Spain, Mexico, Colombia, Argentina, Peru
(and many other South American countries)

Optional extra activity Write the following stress

patterns on the board and ask students to copy them
and write the languages that follow that stress pattern
next to them. Ask them to add their L1 to the correct
pattern. End by asking students to say the languages
with the correct stress.
Oo English, German, Russian, Spanish, Turkish
Ooo Arabic
oO Chinese
ooO Japanese
oOoo Romanian

Background pronunciation notes

When a language ends in -ish or -ian, the stress is

generally on the syllable before. When a language ends
with -ese, the stress is on the suffix.

2 Organise the class into new pairs or small groups

to discuss the questions. As students speak, go round
and monitor, and note down any interesting pieces of
language you hear.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that
students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity.

70 OUTCOMES

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 70 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

Culture notes 6 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the

questions. End with whole-class feedback. Elicit the views
Chinese, followed by Hindi (an Indian language), are the of students round the class.
most commonly spoken languages in the world. English
is third, then Spanish. 7 Ask students to read the rest of the article to find
• English is the official language in 83 countries/regions, the writer’s opinions. Let students compare their answers
and widely spoken in 105 other countries, including India, in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
the world’s second-most populous country. Ask students to justify answers by saying what they read.
• Spanish is the official language in 21 countries, and
spoken in 44 countries. Mexico contains the largest Answers
population of Spanish speakers. The writer thinks that what they do at Newbury
• Arabic is the official language in 26 countries, and Park can help students to feel more positive. School
spoken (in various dialects) in the Middle East, north is difficult for some students because of bad
Africa, the Arabian Peninsula and other Islamic countries. experiences they have had, not because they are
• French is the official language in 40 countries, but has bilingual. In fact, bilingual children usually do better
fewer first-language speakers than Russian, Japanese at school.
and German.
8 Ask students to discuss the questions in pairs.
Reading However, don’t expect students to say too much – it is
hard for Elementary students to express themselves in
Aim much detail. As students speak, go round and monitor,
to help train students to read for specific information, and note down any interesting pieces of language
and to interpret views expressed on the writer’s opinion you hear.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that
3 This exercise starts the section by pre-teaching students used and pieces of language students didn’t
or reviewing key phrases which will help students quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
understand the text. Ask students in pairs to complete better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
the sentences and to try to work out the meaning
from the context. Point out that some of the words Optional extra activity There are some difficult words
have already been seen in the unit (e.g. creative, cause in the text which students may not know (see below).
a problem and solve the problem were presented at the At the end, ask students to find and underline words
start of the unit). Let students check in dictionaries only they don’t know and try to guess their meaning from
to confirm what they have guessed from context. context. Then explain them with examples, translation or
dictionary work.
Answers
1 creative Background language notes for teachers
2 solving
3 positive Note these difficult words in the text:
4 explaining show the film = put the film on so people can see it
5 caused have a bad experience = a bad thing that happens
grow up = go from child to adult
4 Ask students to discuss the sentences in pairs. Have population = people in the world
a brief feedback session and find out what students said.
Grammar Comparatives
5 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to
look at the title and picture. Ask: What is the text about? Aim
Is it about the good things or bad things of speaking two to introduce and practise comparatives
languages?
• Ask students to read the first two paragraphs of 9 Read through the information in the box as a class.
the article and find the answers to the questions. Let Ask students to work individually to choose the correct
students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, comparative. Let them compare answers in pairs.
elicit answers from the students.
Answers
Answers 1 higher 3 funnier 5 lazier
1 40 2 slower 4 more interesting
2 Turkish, Japanese, Romanian
3 the children
4 one in seven children
5 They think it makes teaching more difficult, and
that the children don’t do as well.

6 EDUCATION 71

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 71 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

10 Ask students to discuss the questions in pairs. (In 12 Model this activity with a reliable student to get
a monolingual class, students could do this discussion them started. Ask: Are you good at swimming? How far
in L1.) At the end, elicit rules of form and use from can you swim? How fast can you swim? How often do you
your class. Then ask students to check in the Grammar go swimming? At the end, say who is better, e.g. Anna is
reference on page 176. better / worse at swimming than me.
• Ask students to work in pairs to have conversations.
Answers Depending on how good your class is, ask them to either
1 high, low prepare questions first, or improvise them. Monitor and
2 slow, fast correct any misuses or mispronunciations of comparative
3 funny, boring forms. At the end, take whole-class feedback, and ask
4 interesting, difficult students to say who is better, nearer, taller, etc.
5 helpful, lazy
For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
Grammar reference on page 176.
For further practice, see Exercise 1 in the
Grammar reference on page 176. Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
1 better
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference 2 warmer
1 easier 3 worse
2 shorter 4 more expensive
3 more popular 5 bigger
4 more friendly / friendlier
5 worse, colder
6 better, more interesting Speaking
7 more difficult
Aim
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
Background language notes for teachers communicative, personalised speaking activity

• In English, we add -er to adjectives with one syllable 13 This is an opportunity to bring together several
(cheaper, older). If the adjective ends consonant + vowel + parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
consonant, the final consonant doubles (hotter, flatter). If the language they have learnt.
the adjective ends with -y, change the y to i and add -er • Ask students to work individually to think of ideas. You
(drier). might want to give them a time frame, e.g. comparing
• We add -ier to adjectives with two syllables when the now with twenty years ago, or forty years ago, or allow
second syllable ends with -y (busier, happier). students the freedom to choose. Monitor and help with
• We use more in font of adjectives with two, three or ideas and vocabulary.
more syllables (more helpful, more interesting).
14 Organise students into groups of four or five to
11 Ask students to work individually to write share their ideas and opinions.
sentences. Elicit the first sentence to get them started. • As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
Organise the class into pairs to check their answers. down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
Monitor and note how well students understand the use • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
and form of comparatives. In feedback, elicit answers or students used and pieces of language students didn’t
ask students to come to the board and write up correct quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
sentences. better ways of saying what they were trying to say.

Answers Optional extra activity Extend this practice by asking

1 I’m better at swimming than you. students to think of other more personal things to
2 My house is nearer to the school than your place. compare then and now (e.g. their cities, their English,
3 I’m taller than you. their personality, their job).
4 You’re more interested in history than me.
5 My school was smaller than your school. Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable
6 It was warmer last week than this week. worksheet on page 235 can be used at this point or at
the end of the unit for further practice.

72 OUTCOMES

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 72 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

Sounds and vocabulary review Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

1 The film’s not very good.
Aim 2 The class was not very interesting.
to practise the sounds /e/, /ə/, /ɔː/ and /ɜː/; to listen 3 The school’s not very big.
and write down words in continuous speech 4 I’m not very warm.
5 The exam was quite difficult.
15 44 Play the recording. Students listen and 6 The rent for my flat is quite cheap.
repeat the sounds. 7 The school I work for is quite near to here.
8 He got quite low grades.
44
/e/, /ə/, /ɜː/, /ɔː/, /lə/, /lɔː/, /lɜː/, /en/, /ɜːn/, /ʃən/, Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
/mənt/, /ɜːs/, /ɔːz/ 2 Your class is a higher level than mine.
3 You are better at sciences than me.
16 45 Give students a moment to look at the 4 Chinese is more useful than French.
words in the box. Read the words out so that students 5 My daughter is taller than my son.
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one 6 My dad is tidier than my mum.
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or 7 This year is more difficult than last year.
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to 8 My exam results are worse than yours.
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could 1 quite / really
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but 2 is
students should be able to write complete sentences 3 bit
after two or three listenings. 4 than
5 very
45 6 more
1 It causes a lot of problems.
2 The last course was more interesting.
3 The government’s made education worse.
4 My classmates are quite friendly.
5 We learned a lot about the law.
6 The sports teacher’s very popular.
7 I spent four hours preparing the talk.
8 The training at work was very boring.

Optional extra activities Get students to find two more

words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (/e/,
/ə/, /ɔː/ and /ɜː/). Get students to write two collocations
or phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 16. (These
activities could be set as homework.)

Teacher development: using the sounds

and vocabulary review
This section allows you to focus on problem sounds, but
also reviews some key words and develops students’
ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
development on page 19).
Sounds and correction
• /e/ is a short vowel sound made with the lips wide.
The sound /e/ is produced with the lips a little wider
than they are when producing the weak, short schwa
sound /ə/, which is made with the lips completely slack.
• The long sounds /ɔ:/ and /ɜ:/ differ in that the lips
are wider and the tongue lower when making the latter
sound.

For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the

Grammar reference on page 176.

6 EDUCATION 73

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 73 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

VIDEO 3: PHOTO CAMP 3 Ask students to match the pairs of sentences, then
check their answers in pairs before feedback.
Student’s Book page 58
Answers
Aim 1 d 2 b 3 a 4 c
to show how refugees can be given the chance to
document their world; to improve students’ ability to 4 11 Ask students to watch the second part of
follow and understand fast speech in a video extract; the video (2.16–3.50), and check and order the pairs
to practise fast speech using strong stresses of sentences. Let them compare their answers in pairs
before discussing as a class.
1 Lead in to the topic by asking students to look at
the picture and say what they can see. Pre-teach refugee Answers
camp (= a place where people who are running from 1 2b 2 1d 3 3a 4 4c
war, terrorism or violence can stay). Organise the class
into pairs or small groups to discuss the questions. In a 5 This exercise offers students the chance to relate
brief feedback session, elicit students’ ideas and write up the topic of the video to their own experiences, ideas and
interesting ideas or pieces of language on the board. opinions.
• Give students time to read the questions then put
Possible answers them in pairs or small groups and give them seven or
The adults are photographers. Perhaps they are there eight minutes to discuss them.
to photograph the situation, or perhaps to help with • Monitor and listen to each group. Help with
aid. The young people are refugees. pronunciation and ideas if necessary.
Things that can help refugees include food, shelter or • When most students have finished, stop the class
housing, medicine and medical care, education, news and give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of
and information, help with documents. the things students tried to say for the whole class or
by asking students to correct or fill in gaps in sentences
2 11 Give students time to read through the you’ve written on the board, based on what you heard
questions first. Then play the first part of the video, students saying.
to 2.15. As students watch the video, they should note
answers. Let them compare their answers in pairs before 6 This exercise provides further personalised speaking
discussing as a class. practice. Ask students to get out their phones and find
some pictures they would like to share first.
Answers • As students chat, monitor and listen to each group.
1 They are photographers, and they work for When most students have finished, stop the class and
National Geographic. give some feedback.
2 They are refugees in a refugee camp in Uganda,
but they come from different parts of Africa. Understanding fast speech
3 To teach them to tell the stories of their lives in
photographs. 7 12 Tell students to work on their own for a few
minutes to practise saying the extract. Then play the
Optional extra activity There is an interesting set of recording. Students listen and compare what they said.
vocabulary in the text connected to photography which Allow them to practise saying the extract again.
you could teach before or after students listen (see notes
below). 8 Encourage students to practise saying the extract
several times.
Background language notes for teachers
11
Note the collocations: take a photo / photograph / picture / Teacher 1: Get down low on the ground, photograph.
portrait, use a camera, tell a story, compose a picture, have Get up high, like up here, and shoot down.
an exhibition, show their work, document their world. Narrator: These are some of the best photographers
• Note the stress: photography, photographer, a / to in the world. They are working with young people
photograph. who haven’t used cameras before.
Teacher 2: She’s so happy to see how it is working.
Culture notes Teacher 3: Take one of Justin.
Narrator: These young people are refugees, they live in
• Reza Deghati (born in 1952 in Iran) is an Iranian- Uganda, they are from many parts of Africa, but right
French photojournalist who has organised photo camps now this camp is their only home. They don’t know
in various places, including recently in Syria. The other what will happen to them in the future. They speak
National Geographic photographers mentioned are Ed many different languages, but award-winning National
Cashy, Chris Reneer and South African photographer Nao Geographic photographer Reza Deghati believes they
Nitsomer. can all understand the meaning of powerful images.

74 OUTCOMES

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 74 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 6 EDUCATION

Reza Deghati: Now I don’t speak your language, REVIEW

but I use photography like language and this is the
pictures I take. Student’s Book page 59
Narrator: Reza and National Geographic
photographers Ed Cashy and Chris Reneer have joined Aim
South African photographer Nao Nitsomer. They are to consolidate vocabulary and grammar from Units 5
teaching 60 young refugees how to tell the stories of and 6
their lives in photographs.
Reza Deghati: This is the way that we say telling the Answers
stories by picture. What is the important for me, what 1
is the good, what is the bad around me. That’s how I 1 those 5 quite
use the photography. 2 Are you 6 one, cheaper
Narrator: The photographers call this ‘photo camp’. 3 more difficult 7 this, better
Reza Deghati: The photography is more than just 4 he’s doing
having pictures of friends standing together. 2
Narrator: In small groups, the young people learn to 1 What do you do?
use cameras and to compose pictures. 2 What are you studying?
Reza Deghati: This is more reflections off the trees in 3 How’s it going?
this, what you can get. 4 What year are you in?
Part 2 5 why are you doing
Narrator: Photo camp is an inspiration for many of 3
the camp residents. Aganzi Grace, for example, wants 1 not 4 It’s
to become a professional photographer. He hopes to 2 I’m 5 those, really
take portraits and passport pictures to help support 3 are 6 this, bit
his family. 5
Reza Deghati: This was in the fish market? You are 1 borrow 5 look for
great, you can be a good photographer. 2 improve 6 pay
Narrator: Life is difficult in the refugee camp but 3 give 7 lasted
Reza and the other photographers are showing 4 leave 8 go up
these young adults how to see their temporary 6
home in a new way, and for half to create something shops: bakery, entrance, security guard, shelf,
meaningful while they are here. vegetables
Near the end of the programme, the students have study: Chinese, Engineering, fail, History, subject,
an exhibition. They are excited to show their work. training
As Reza explained to them at the beginning, their clothes: jeans, jumper, leather, red top, shirt
pictures tell stories that everyone can understand, 7
no matter where they are from or what language 1 popular 5 creative
they speak. These students received more than just 2 tall 6 sad
a certificate and a new skill at photo camp, they also 3 difficult 7 happy
learned how to document their world and to see 4 patient 8 stupid
themselves and their lives in new ways. 8
1 store 6 perfume
2 section 7 took
3 sale 8 ground
4 size 9 came out
5 assistant 10 experience

46 and answers to Exercise 4

1 My son’s studying Law at university.
2 I’m learning to ride a horse at the moment.
3 Excuse me. I’m looking for the changing rooms.
4 Some of my classmates aren’t very friendly.
5 Your English is better than mine.
6 It was much warmer last summer.

6 EDUCATION 75

65752_u06_pp064-075.indd 75 08/12/18 12:04 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW
Words for Unit 7 COUSINS, AUNTS AND UNCLES
Student’s Book pages 62–63
Aim
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set Communicative outcomes
of key, useful vocabulary using photos In this two-page spread, students will practise talking
about their family and describing relationships.
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the words and
phrases to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them Vocabulary Relationships
started (photo 1 is dead). Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and prompt if necessary. Aim
Depending on how much they know, students may need to introduce and practise words to describe people in
help with a dictionary or teacher translation to do the a family
exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions.
1 Elicit the word that goes in the first space in the
2 47 Play the recording so that students can check table to get students started. Then organise the class
their answers. Let them check again with a partner after into pairs to complete the table. In feedback, show the
they have listened once. completed table on the board. You could do a simple
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students repetition drill to practise the pronunciation of each
to repeat the words. If students have any problems word. Note that in English there is no gender-specific
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and word for cousin, unlike many other European languages.
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress. Answers
The strong stress is on the first syllable of all the words grandfather grandmother
except surprised. husband wife
dad mum
47 and answers son daughter
1 dead uncle aunt
2 clever boyfriend girlfriend
3 old friends brother sister
4 funny cousin
5 look after children
6 repair a car
7 a wedding Background language notes for teachers
8 strict
9 feed the dog • Mum and dad are short for mother and father. Young
10 do some housework children say mummy and daddy. In American English,
11 do the washing mom / mommy is more common, and pa as well as dad /
12 nursery school daddy is used.
13 very fit • Gran, granny and grandma are short versions of
14 husband grandmother, and grandad or grandpa are short versions
15 male and female of grandfather.
16 surprised • The word partner is increasingly used as an alternative
to wife / husband. It is also commonly used by people in
3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with same-sex or unmarried long-term relationships.
someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each • Note that the strong stress is on the first syllable of all
other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out the words.
with a reliable student. Go round the room and check • Note the difficult vowel sounds in some of the words:
students are doing the task and help if necessary. daughter /ˈdɔːtə/, aunt /ɑːnt/, uncle /ˈʌŋkəl/.
• Use the feedback time to correct any errors students
made, or to point out the pronunciation of any words Teacher development: hands-on tasks
students found hard to say.
With a little bit of preparation, it is easy to turn
Optional extra activity Ask your students to say which matching, ordering or categorising tasks on the Student’s
photos they liked and why. Book page into memorable, motivating hands-on tasks.
Here are two suggestions for Exercise 1 above.
1 Before the lesson, make fifteen simple cards. Write
a different word from the table in Exercise 1 on

76 OUTCOMES

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 76 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

each card. Have a set of cards for each group of four Listening
in your class. In the lesson, students can play with
the cards – completing a table (as in the exercise), Aim
matching male / female synonyms, categorising to help train students to listen for gist and for specific
according to sex or age, etc. You could even play information
pelmanism (see below).
2 Show the incomplete table on the board (you could 5 48 Start by setting up the situation. Make sure
write it up, or use your classroom technology to students know there will be three conversations and they
project it). Ask students in pairs to decide where to have to listen for words from Exercise 1.
put the words from the box, and to then come up to • Play the recording. Let students compare answers in
the board and write the words. Other class members pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
can come up and write other words, and even correct
what previous pairs have written. Answers
1 brothers
Optional extra activity If you make cards, play pelmanism. 2 cousins, aunts and uncles, dad, brothers and
Alternatively, in class make students write words on pieces sisters
of paper, and turn them over, in order to make their own 3 wife and son
version of pelmanism. Each group of four students has
15 cards with all the words written on them placed face 6 48 Play the recording again. Ask students to
down and mixed up on a table. Student A turns over two listen then briefly write notes with any information they
cards. If they match (e.g. brother / sister, wife / husband), heard about the family members. Let students compare
they keep them. If not, they turn them back face down. their answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from
It is Student B’s turn. Students have to remember where the students. Ask students to justify their answers by
pairs are, turn them over and keep them. The winner is the saying what they heard. At the end, you may wish to
student with most pairs at the end. allow students to look at the audio script on page 203 to
check their answers.
2 Ask students to complete the sentences individually.
Do the first as an example to get students started. Let Answers
students compare answers in pairs before discussing in 1 Her older brother, Neil, is 28 and a teacher, the
feedback. younger one, Tim, is nineteen and studying
chemistry, in his second year at university.
Answers 2 Her cousin is nineteen and English, she has twelve
1 brother other cousins, and nine aunts and uncles. Her dad
2 cousin has eight brothers and sisters.
3 son 3 His wife is a nurse, his son Ted is finishing college
4 sister this year, studying medicine.
5 girlfriend
6 mum, dad, grandmother 48
1
3 Organise the class into pairs to speculate about the A: Do you have any brothers or sisters, Zoe?
photo. Monitor and note how well students remember, B: Yes, I do. I have two brothers.
use and pronounce the new words. In feedback, briefly A: Oh, right. How old are they?
find out what students said, and check the meaning and B: Well, I’m the middle child. My older brother’s 28
pronunciation of any words students had problems with. and my younger one is nineteen.
A: What do they do?
Culture notes B: Neil – my older brother – is a teacher, and my
younger brother, Tim, is in his second year at
The photograph shows a multi-generational family in the university.
village of Lengeri, Svanetia, Georgia. A: Oh, OK. What’s he studying?
B: Chemistry.
4 Write six names from your family on the board, and 2
say: She’s my aunt, Jim’s my brother, etc. Ask students to C: Did you go out yesterday?
write their own list of six names. Put them in new pairs to D: Yeah, I did. I met my cousin and his girlfriend for a
practise talking about them. In feedback, correct any errors drink.
students made and comment on good language use. C: Oh, OK. Is he visiting?
D: No, he lives here. He’s English.
Optional extra activity To help students do Exercise 4, C: Really?
model the question and answer with a reliable student, D: Yes. My uncle Giorgio met my aunt Ruth in London
e.g. Who is Jim? He’s my brother. and they stayed in England.
C: So, how old is your cousin?
D: Nineteen. He’s a year younger than me.

7 PEOPLE I KNOW 77

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 77 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

C: Do you have any other cousins here? Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
D: No, I don’t, but I have twelve back in Italy. 1 is 4 can, can’t
C: Really? How many aunts and uncles do you have? 2 does 5 isn’t
D: Nine. My dad has eight brothers and sisters! 3 didn’t 6 did
3
E: So, are you married, Ted?
F: Yes, I am – 30 years next year. Background language notes for teachers
E: Wow! Really?
F: Yep. • It is important for students to practise manipulating
E: So, what does your wife do? auxiliary verbs as they are so prevalent in English. It
F: She’s a nurse. is also important for students to try using language
E: And do you have any children? meaningfully and realistically. Avoid ‘language lesson
F: Yeah, just one son – Ted junior. He’s finishing English’ (such as Are you married? Yes, I’m married) in
college this year. which students use unlikely language just because it
E: Really? OK. What’s he studying? ‘practises’ a grammatical form.
F: Medicine. He wants to be a doctor. • The rule of form is simple here – when saying yes, the
auxiliary in the question is used in the affirmative; when
saying no, the auxiliary in the questions is used in the
Grammar Auxiliary verbs negative.

Aim Developing conversations

to introduce and practise the use of auxiliary verbs in
short answers
Adding information
Aim
7 Read through the information in the Grammar box to introduce and practise ways of adding information
as a class. Ask students to work individually to complete
the answers. Elicit the first answer as an example in 9 Read through the information in the box as a class.
open class. Let students compare their answers in pairs • Ask students to match the comments to the dialogues
before feedback. in Exercise 7. Elicit the first as an example to get students
started. Let students compare their ideas in pairs.
Answers
1 do 3 does 5 are 7 did Answers
2 is 4 doesn’t 6 aren’t 8 didn’t 1 c 2 g 3 h 4 e 5 f 6 d 7 b 8 a

8 Organise the class into pairs to practise the 10 Ask students to practise the conversations in pairs.
conversations and improvise different answers. Monitor As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, and
and correct if students make any errors. In feedback, correct students if they have problems.
focus on any short answers students had problems with.
• Ask students to check the use of auxiliary verbs in 11 Ask students to work in the same pairs to prepare
short answers in the Grammar reference on page 177. and practise answers to the questions. Start by eliciting
some possible answers to the first question to get
Answers students started.
1 No, I don’t. • Depending on the confidence and ability of your class,
2 No, he isn’t. you could choose to make the preparation a writing
3 No, she doesn’t stage, in which students prepare short written dialogues
4 My son doesn’t, no, but my daughter does. before practising, or an improvisational stage, in which
5 No, we aren’t. students work together to think up and improvise a
6 My mum’s parents aren’t, no, but my dad’s are. spoken dialogue.
7 No, I didn’t. • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors. In
8 Yes, it did. feedback, write up some of the errors you heard on the
board and ask students to correct them. Comment on
Students complete Exercises 1 and 2 in the examples of good language use by your class.
Grammar reference on page 177.

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

1 can’t 5 does
2 did 6 didn’t
3 do, doesn’t 7 do
4 I’m not 8 can

78 OUTCOMES

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 78 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

Pronunciation Conversation practice

Aim Aim
to practise language from the lesson in a free, to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity communicative, personalised speaking activity

12 49 Read through the information in the box 14 This is an opportunity to put together several
as a class. Then play the recording. Students listen and parts of the lesson input and for students to practise
repeat. using all the language they have learnt.
• Ask students to work individually to prepare questions.
49 Elicit two or three further examples to get them started.
Really? Really? Really? Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.

13 50 Organise the class into pairs to respond to 15 Organise the class into groups of four or five, or
the sentences on the recording. Then play the recording. organise the activity as a class mingle. Ask students to
Students listen and respond. The first time you play, be take turns to ask and answer questions, and to improvise
active and encourage students to make their intonation dialogues.
really exaggerated to show interest or surprise, and very • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
flat to show the opposite. language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
• Play the recording a second time. This time allow • In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
students to respond without prompts. At the end, that students used and pieces of language students didn’t
comment on whether your students’ intonation pattern quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
was exaggerated enough or not. better ways of saying what they were trying to say.

Answers 13 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.

1 Really? 4 Really?
2 Really? 5 Really? Teacher development: using the video
3 Oh, OK 6 Oh, OK
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in
various ways:
50 1 as an alternative to the conversation practice
1 My dad has ten brothers and sisters. 2 instead of the listening activity in some units,
2 My brother’s fifteen years older than me. particularly with weaker groups. Students can first
3 My wife is a nurse. practise reading out the dialogues and work on some
4 It’s my birthday today. of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
5 My grandma’s 98. before having a go themselves.
6 My sister’s in her last year at school. 3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.

Background pronunciation notes

Germanic languages like English use a very wide

intonation pattern in comparison to other languages.
Speakers of Slavic or Romance languages may find it odd
to exaggerate the up / down intonation of Really quite
as much as native speakers would do. It is important to
encourage your students to exaggerate, if this is the
case – otherwise, students may sound unintentionally
rude or bored.
Here are two tips:
1 Write the up / down intonation arrow on the board
in a very exaggerated way. Point to the arrow if your
students are getting the intonation wrong or not
exaggerating enough.
2 Use your hand to show the intonation. As students
repeat, or as you correct them, raise your palm up and
down to show how the intonation goes.

7 PEOPLE I KNOW 79

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 79 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

I HAVE TO DO A LOT OF HOUSEWORK Reading

Student’s Book pages 64–65 Aim
to help train students to read for a general
Communicative outcomes understanding and for specific information
In this two-page spread, students talk about jobs and
activities at home; they discuss family life. 5 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to
look at the text. Ask: What is it? (a message board); How
Vocabulary many people are writing? (six). You will need to pre-teach
a nanny (= a person who looks after children as a job).
Jobs and activities in the home • Ask students to read and match the names on the
Aim message board to the family members listed. Let
to introduce and practise jobs and activities in students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback,
the home elicit answers from the students.

1 Start by asking students to look at the photos, and Answers

elicit a few jobs and activities. Write up any interesting or grandmother Bertha
useful phrases on the board. Organise the class into pairs a mother Hannah
to think of more jobs and elicit them in feedback. a father Roberto
a daughter Sophie
Answers a nanny (no match)
pick up children from school / look after children an uncle David
fill / empty the dishwasher a son José
read a story at bedtime
6 Ask students to read the message board again
2 Ask students to do the matching task individually. carefully and decide on the writers’ opinions. Let students
Elicit the first match as an example. Let students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit
compare answers in pairs before discussing as a class. answers from the students.

Answers Answers
1 c 3 b 5 a 7 f 9 h Bertha, good
2 d 4 e 6 i 8 j 10 g José, good
Sophie, bad
3 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the questions. Hannah, good and bad
Pre-teach essential (= very important). In feedback, elicit Roberto, bad
students’ ideas, and comment on any errors or useful David, good
pieces of language students came up with.
7 Organise the class into pairs to discuss their
Optional extra activity Ask students to rank the jobs opinions. In feedback, elicit students’ ideas and views.
from easiest to most difficult, or from best to do to worst
to do. Optional extra activity Ask students to write a comment
expressing their view for the message board. You could
Background pronunciation notes ask students to write short comments on pieces of paper,
then collect them in and put them on the class notice
• Note the stress is on the first syllable of all these board, and ask the class to get up and read the views.
words, except for repair and together.
• Tricky pronunciations include the /dʒ/ sound in jokes Background language notes for teachers
/dʒəʊks/ and the /ʃ/ sound in dishwasher /ˈdɪʃˌwɒʃə/.
Note these difficult words in the blog.
Speaking a nanny = (a job) a person who looks after children
a cleaner = (a job) a person who cleans houses
Aim the children are difficult – here, maybe they don’t do what
to introduce the ideas in the main text and elicit a she says
personal response It’s not fair = It’s not right that I have to do this.
nursery school = a school for children under five
4 Organise the class into pairs to read the private school = a school where the parents pay to send
introduction and discuss the questions. You may need their children
to check key words (e.g. do the housework, earn money,
full-time job). Have a brief feedback session. Expect only
short, simple opinions at this level.

80 OUTCOMES

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 80 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

Grammar have to / don’t have to • Have to is difficult to say accurately. The ‘ve’ becomes
/f/ when pronounced and the ‘o’ in to is reduced to /ə/:
Aim /hæftə/. Doesn’t /ˈdʌz(ə)nt/ is also hard to say. Consider
to introduce and practise the use of have to and incorporating a drill to practise pronunciation by reading
don’t have to to talk about what it is necessary or not some of the sentences in Exercises 8 or 10 and asking
necessary to do students to repeat.

8 Ask students to complete the comments with 10 Set up the task by eliciting the first answer as an
have to / has to or don’t / doesn’t have to. Elicit the example. Ask students to work individually to complete
first answer to get students started. Tell them to try to the sentences. Let students compare their answers in
complete the sentences from memory before looking at pairs before checking the correct answers in feedback.
the text to check. Let students compare their answers in
pairs before feedback. Answers
1 have to 5 don’t have to
Answers 2 don’t have to 6 has to
1 have to 3 don’t have to 7 do, have to
2 has to 4 has to 8 does, have to
3 don’t have to
4 doesn’t have to 11 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
make sentences. Monitor and prompt, and check how
9 Read through the information in the box as a class well students are using the language. In feedback, point
and elicit the correct options. Then ask students to check out any errors or problems you noticed.
in the Grammar reference on page 177.
Optional extra activity Describe what you have to do at
Answers home and at work in a short monologue. Ask students to
1 necessary 2 not necessary listen and note what you have to do and share what they
heard with a partner. Providing a ‘live’ teacher listening
in class, in which you tell students a little about yourself,
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar can be motivating and an easy activity to set up.
reference on page 177.
For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference Grammar reference on page 177.
1 have to 6 have to
2 have to 7 don’t have to Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
3 has to 8 has to 1 have to leave
4 have to 9 sing 2 don’t have to wait
5 doesn’t have to 10 tell 3 has to do
4 have to work
5 doesn’t have to go
Background language notes: have to or
don’t have to
Speaking
Have to is taught simply here using the words ‘necessary’
and ‘not necessary’ to get over the meaning (words Aim
that will be synonymous with words in many European to practise language from the lesson in a free,
students’ L1, or easily guessed). In a non-European class, communicative, personalised speaking activity
students may need to look up ‘necessary’.
• In many ways, the meaning and use of have to is 12 This is an opportunity to bring together several
synonymous with must and need to. Note, however, that parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
don’t have to (it’s not necessary) has a very different the language they have learnt.
meaning to mustn’t (it’s not permitted). • Ask students to work individually to prepare their
• We tend to use have to when the obligation (or lack opinions. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.
of it) is from outside (e.g. with laws or rules: You have
to drive on the left, or when the speaker implies the 13 Organise students into new pairs to share their
obligation is placed on him by others: I have to do the ideas. You could model this briefly with a reliable student,
shopping, I’m afraid, or Do I have to go to bed?). Must using the example dialogue.
differs ever so slightly in that the obligation is a personal • As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
one (I’m so lazy – I must work harder). At this level, there down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
is no need to go into this, but it’s worth knowing! • In feedback, ask different students to tell the class
• Have to is often referred to as modal verb for their partner’s opinions.
convenience. However, it is neither modal nor auxiliary.
It conjugates in all forms like a regular verb using the
auxiliary do.

7 PEOPLE I KNOW 81

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 81 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

• At the end, look at good pieces of language that MY CIRCLE OF FRIENDS

students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
Student’s Book pages 66–67
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
Communicative outcomes
14 Extend the discussion by getting students to In this two-page spread, students practise talking
prepare and discuss further opinions about family life in about friends and people they know.
groups of four or five.
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note Speaking
down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
Aim
Web research activity Ask students to research figures to give students practice in reading for general
from their own country related to the lesson’s topic. For understanding; to share ideas and introduce the
example, ask them to find what percentage of women theme of the lesson
stay at home, what percentage of housework men do,
who does the shopping – men or women. In a later class, 1 Start with a lead-in to the lesson. Write friend on
ask students to show and compare figures they find. the board and ask students to tell you types of friends.
Alternatively, ask students to read the text quickly and
say the types of friends that are mentioned.
• Organise the class into pairs or small groups to discuss
the questions.
• Have a brief class feedback session and elicit ideas. Use
the opportunity to check the meaning of some difficult
words: close to (somebody), stay in touch, a friend of a
friend, (not) get on with (somebody). You may need to
provide examples, translations or ask students to use
dictionaries.

Possible answers
- Either an old friend because you are close or a
family friend because they are reliable and useful.
- Old friends: the old days, memories and shared
experiences; family friends: problems and advice,
family issues; online friend: funny stories, what is
happening in the world; friend of someone you
know: polite conversation – family, weather, job
- students’ own ideas
- boyfriend / girlfriend, classmate, flatmate,
teammate

Listening
Aim
to give students practice in listening for general and
specific understanding

2 51 Play the recording. Students listen and match

the descriptions they hear to the different types of
friends. Let them compare their answers with a partner
before discussing as a class.

Answers
1 an old friend
2 a friend of someone you know
3 an online friend
4 a friend of the family

82 OUTCOMES

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 82 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

51 4 Ask students to match the verbs to the words

1 Johan and I grew up together. We first met at individually. Do the first as an example to get students
school and later we shared a house together in started. Let students compare their answers in pairs. You
Malmö. He’s very creative. He’s a photographer and could ask students to look at the audio script on page
he lives in New York now, but we’re still very close. 204 of the Student’s Book to check and confirm their
We talk all the time. We’re friends for life, I’m sure. answers.
2 I only know Miguel because my husband works
with him. I don’t really get on with him very well, Answers
but what can I do? They were already friends 1 e 2 f 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 d
when we met and I respect that. He likes going
out a lot. He goes to parties all night. I think he’s 5 Organise the class into pairs or small groups to
a bit stupid. He’s 38, but he thinks he’s still 21! He discuss the questions.
also sometimes says stupid things about women. • As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
3 In some ways, Claire and I don’t know each other down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
at all. She lives in Wisconsin and I live in Leeds. • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
We never meet face-to-face. We only meet in students used and pieces of language they didn’t quite
chat rooms and we talk through Messenger. She’s use correctly during the activity.
very sensitive and she really understands me. My
friends think I’m crazy, but when I leave college, I Optional extra activity Ask students to write six
want to go to the US and meet her in person! sentences about people they know using the verb and
4 Liu Bing – or Auntie Liu as I call her – isn’t really my word collocations in Exercise 4.
aunt. She’s an old friend of my mum’s. They went
to school together and she came to our house a Vocabulary Describing people
lot when I was a kid. She’s a strong and confident
woman, and she made me feel good about myself. Aim
When I moved to Shanghai, she helped me find a to introduce and practise adjectives to describe people
place to live and a job, so now she’s not only my
mother’s friend, she’s mine as well! 6 Ask students to work in pairs to categorise the
adjectives. Encourage them to try to use their previous
knowledge to do this (they could look back at the
Background language notes for teachers pictures on pages 60 and 61 to help) before checking any
unknown words in dictionaries.
creative = good at having ideas • Note that there are no black and white answers for
close = very good friends this, and students may have different opinions about
respect = have a good opinion of someone some adjectives, e.g. quiet might be seen as negative by
stupid = not clever some and positive by others.
sensitive = good at understanding how people feel
meet in person = meet someone face to face, in real life, Possible answers
not just online positive: clever, fit, reliable, confident, funny, quiet
negative: loud, strict
Culture notes
7 Ask students to work individually to complete the
• Malmö is a city on the southern coast of Sweden. sentences. Let them compare their answers in pairs. In
• Wisconsin is a state in the mid-west of the USA. feedback, elicit answers.
• Leeds is a city in the north of England.
• Shanghai is a city on the south coast of China. Answers
1 funny 5 loud
3 51 Start by asking students to read the 2 fit 6 strict
summaries carefully and think about which facts are 3 quiet 7 reliable
wrong. 4 clever 8 confident
• Play the recording again. Students listen and check.
Let them compare their answers with a partner before 8 Model the activity by providing examples of
discussing as a class. adjectives that describe people in your family. Then
organise the class into small groups to discuss the
Answers questions.
1 He met Johan at school. Johan lives in New York
now. He’s a photographer. Optional extra activity 1 Ask students to think of
2 Her husband works with Miguel. She doesn’t get celebrities that fit the adjectives in Exercise 6.
on well with Miguel. Miguel is 38.
3 He’s a student. He met Claire online. He wants to Optional extra activity 2 Ask students to match the
go to the US. adjectives to a profession that best helps them remember
4 Liu is a friend of her mum’s. Liu is strong and the adjective, e.g. a strict teacher, a funny comedian, a
confident. She lives in Shanghai. clever scientist, a fit footballer, a quiet librarian.

7 PEOPLE I KNOW 83

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 83 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 7 PEOPLE I KNOW

Background language notes for teachers 53

1 We agreed to meet tonight.
• It’s a good idea to personalise the adjectives by asking 2 I’m not very confident about my English.
students to match them to people they know (see 3 I need to feed my kids.
Exercise 8 and extra activities above). 4 She’s my best female friend.
• The stress in all these words is on the first syllable 5 She swims a lot, so she’s very fit.
except for reliable. 6 I need to leave at six.
• Note that the online Vocabulary Builder extends 7 We’re sisters, but we’re not very similar.
vocabulary from each unit and provides a lot of work on 8 Why is your dad so strict with your sister?
collocation.
Optional extra activities Get students to find two more
Speaking words in the unit with each of the sounds practised
(/iː/ and /ɪ/). Get students to write two collocations or
Aim phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 12. (These
to practise language from the lesson in a free, activities could be set as homework.)
communicative, personalised speaking activity
Teacher development: using the sounds
9 This is an opportunity to bring together several
parts of the lesson, and for students to practise using all
and vocabulary review
the language they have learnt. This section allows you to focus on problem sounds, but
• Ask students to work individually to prepare. Monitor also reviews some key words and develops students’
and help with ideas and vocabulary. ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
10 Organise students into groups of four or five to ask other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
and answer the questions. development on page 19).
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note Sounds and correction
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. /ɪ/ is a short vowel sound made with relaxed lips,
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that whereas /iː/ is a long vowel sound made with the lips
students used and pieces of language they didn’t quite wider and narrower. Italian and Spanish speakers (among
use correctly during the activity. Show them better ways many others) famously confuse these two sounds
of saying what they were trying to say. because /ɪ/ and /iː/ sound similar to a sound in L1 which
is a little longer than /ɪ/ but shorter than /iː/.
Optional extra activity Extend this practice into a
mingle in which students have to meet and improvise For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
conversations. Grammar reference on page 177.

Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

worksheet on page 236 can be used at this point or at A
the end of the unit for further practice. 1 c 2 f 3 e 4 b 5 a 6 d

Sounds and vocabulary review B

1 No, she isn’t.
Aim 2 No, I wasn’t.
to practise the sounds /iː/ and /ɪ/; to listen and write 3 Yes, they are really.
down words in continuous speech 4 Yes, I can.
5 Yes, she does.
11 52 Play the recording. Students listen and 6 No, she didn’t.
repeat the sounds.
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
52 2 … but I do.
/ɡriː/, /ɡlɪ/, /miː/, /kɪ/, /fɪ/, /fiː/, /ʃiː/, /swɪ/, /sɪ/, /strɪ/ 3 … but we always do on Sunday.
4 … but Juan did.
12 53 Give students a moment to look at the 5 … but my sister does.
words in the box. Read the words out so that students 6 … I did too!
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to 1 I have to go.
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence 2 He has to work late.
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. 3 Do you have to pass it?
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could 4 She doesn’t have to travel far to get to work.
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but 5 Do we have to stay?
students should be able to write complete sentences 6 We don’t have to get up early tomorrow.
after two or three listenings.

84 OUTCOMES

65752_u07_pp076-084.indd 84 08/12/18 1:48 PM

 8 PLANS
Words for Unit 8 Culture notes

Aim • Photo 1 shows Milan and its Duomo (cathedral).

to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set • Photo 11 shows the clock tower on the Balmoral hotel
of key, useful vocabulary using photos in Edinburgh. It is a famous landmark on Princes Street,
the main shopping street in the centre of the city.
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started 3 Mix the pairs so that students are working
(photo 1 is the main square). Go round the room and with someone new. Ask students to make as many
check students are doing the task and prompt if connections as they can.
necessary. Depending on how much they know, students • Use the feedback time to elicit ideas, to correct any
may need help with a dictionary or teacher translation to errors students made, or to point out the pronunciation
do the exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions. of any words students found hard to say.

2 54 Play the recording so that students can check Possible answers

their answers. Let them check again with their partner a big clock / the main square (There is often a big clock
after they have listened once. in a main square.)
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students build a house or move house / get married (When you
to repeat the words. If students have any problems get married, you often move to a new house.)
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and have a check-up / do some exercise (After a check-up,
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the you want to do more exercise.)
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress get a taxi / drive someone round (Tourists get a taxi to
(see language notes below). drive them round.)
lose your job / go fishing (You lost your job, so you can
54 and answers go fishing more often!)
1 the main square move house / grow fruit (You moved to a house with a
2 grow fruit big garden so you can grow fruit.)
3 move house lose your job / move house (You lost your job, so you
4 destroy a building can’t pay the rent and have to move house.)
5 win the lottery move house / the main square (You moved to a house
6 provide help in the main square.)
7 go fishing go to the library / save money (I go to the library to
8 have a check-up save money – it’s cheaper than buying books.)
9 go to the library win the lottery / build a house (I won the lottery, and
10 a romantic dinner now I’m building a big house.)
11 a big clock win the lottery / a romantic dinner (I won the lottery,
12 do some exercise so we can go for a romantic dinner to celebrate!)
13 build a house
14 save money Optional extra activity End this stage by asking your
15 get a taxi students to say which photos they liked and why.
16 get married
There are no photos to match ‘lose your job’ or ‘drive Teacher development: drilling and
someone round’.
choosing what to drill
Practising the pronunciation of new words is as
Background language notes for teachers important as learning their form, meaning, use
and collocations. The simplest way of focusing on
• Many of these phrases need to be learnt as fixed pronunciation is to drill the words in the box. Rather
collocations: do exercise, get married, go fishing, win than drilling all the phrases, choose four or five that
the lottery. present the most difficult pronunciation problems or
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the most useful practice. For example, you could drill phrases
words except: destroy, provide, romantic. with hard-to-say words (e.g. do some exercise, go to the
• Difficult pronunciations: library /laɪˌbri/; fruit /fruːt/. library), phrases where there is consonant to vowel linking
between word boundaries (e.g. get a taxi, build a house),
or phrases with the stress on the second syllable (e.g.
provide help). When drilling, say the phrase clearly and
ask the whole class to repeat, then say it again and ask
individuals to repeat. Get students to repeat what you say
and not read words out from their book or the board.

8 PLANS 85

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 85 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

WHAT ARE YOUR PLANS? – We use the with these words when we are talking
about the building or a specific place, e.g. There’s a
Student’s Book pages 70–71 meeting in the school this evening.
– Note that library is not one of this group of words,
Communicative outcomes so you always say go to the library.
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking • go home: here, exceptionally, both to and the are
about plans and making suggestions. always omitted.
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
Speaking words except for romantic.

Aim 3 Organise the class into pairs to make sentences.

to introduce the topic and find out what language Monitor and note how well students understand, use
students know for activities and going out and pronounce the activity phrases. In feedback, briefly
find out what answers students shared, and check the
1 Start by asking about the photo in open class. Ask: meaning and pronunciation of any words students had
What can you see? Where do you think it is? What are the problems with.
people doing? (e.g. walking, sightseeing, pushing a pram,
taking photos, waiting for friends, meeting people). Possible answers
• Organise the class into pairs to discuss the questions. a write a few emails, have a meeting with a client
In feedback, elicit ideas and have a brief class discussion. b go to the library, do homework
You could build up a list of useful phrases on the board c go to the doctor, go home
as students suggest what they do in their free time. d play tennis, go for a run
e–h students’ own answers
Optional extra activity Ask students to interview their
partner and find three free-time activities that they
both share. Listening
Culture notes Aim
to help train students to listen for gist and for specific
The photo shows Plaza Mayor in Madrid. The building in information
the centre with the tower is the Casa de la Panadería.
4 55 Start by setting up the situation. Make sure
Vocabulary Common activities students know there will be three conversations and
people will talk about plans.
Aim • Play the recording. Let students compare their answers
to introduce and practise words for common activities in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.

2 Elicit the first match (1 play) from the students to Answers

get them started. Then organise the class into pairs to 1 b 2 c 3 a
complete the matches. Tell them to match what they can
before checking any difficult words in their dictionaries.
55
Answers 1
1 play 5 go to A: Hey … um … Katie … listen, do you want … um …
2 write 6 have do you have time for a coffee?
3 do 7 go B: No, sorry, I don’t. I’m going to study in the library
4 go for 8 get and do some reading for my Literature course.
A: Oh, OK. Well, maybe later?
B: I can’t really. I’m not going to have time. I’m just
Background language notes for teachers going to go home because I really need to study. I
have my exams next week, you know, so ...
a client = a customer (in a business situation) A: Oh, right. Well, good luck with them. What
a check-up = where the doctor checks to see if you about after your exams? Do you want to go out
are healthy somewhere then? Maybe dinner one night?
• Note go fishing (with activities, we use go + -ing, e.g. go B: I’m really sorry, but I can’t. I … I have to work that
swimming, go running, go skiing). night. Bye.
• With a few places, e.g. hospital, work, school, university, A: But I didn’t say which night!
church, we do not use the when we are focusing on the
purpose or the general idea of the place, e.g. All children
have to go to school, I need to go to hospital for an
operation, etc.

86 OUTCOMES

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 86 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

2 Grammar going to
C: So what’re your plans for today?
D: Oh, I need to write a few emails, so I’m going to Aim
find a café with wi-fi and do that – and I have to introduce and practise going to for plans
to check the details of my flight for next week
as well, so, you know. What about you? What’re 6 Read through the information in the box as a class.
your plans? Then ask students to read the examples and complete
C: I’m going to go running by the river later. I need the rules. Let them compare answers in pairs.
to do some exercise! • Ask students to check in the Grammar reference on
D: Good idea! What about tonight? Are you going to page 178.
be busy then?
C: No. Why? Do you want to meet somewhere? Answers
D: Yes, OK. Where? 1 be 2 infinitive 3 the future
C: How about in the main square at eight?
D: OK. Great.
C: Then I can show you some nice places where Students complete Exercises 1 and 2 in the
there aren’t too many tourists. Grammar reference on page 178.
3
E: Are you going to go to the meeting? Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
F: No, I’m not. I’m going to meet some clients and 1 b 2 f 3 d 4 a 5 c 6 e
have lunch with them.
E: Oh, right. Where are you going to eat? Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
F: A new French place in Harajuku. 1 are going to go
E: Oh, that sounds good. 2 are going to celebrate
F: Yeah. What about you? What’re your plans? 3 am going to get
E: I have to give a presentation at the meeting, but 4 isn’t going to like
after that I’m going to go out somewhere. Do you 5 are your cousins going to stay?
want to come? 6 is it going to take?
F: Maybe, yeah. Call me later, OK? 7 are you going to meet
E: OK. 8 ’m going to miss; ’m not going to see
F: Great. See you.

5 55 Ask students to read the descriptions and Background language notes for teachers
see if they can remember any answers from their first
listening. You may need to pre-teach words at this stage We use be + going to + infinitive to talk about plans
(see language notes below). that have already been made, e.g. We’re going to play
• When students are ready, play the recording again. Let football tomorrow means that the plan was made before
students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, speaking this sentence.
elicit answers from the students. Ask students to justify • At this level, this use is being taught in isolation so
answers by saying what they heard. At the end, you may that students have a clear, useable way of describing
wish to allow students to look at the audio script on plans without getting confused with contrasting uses
page 204 to check their answers. (will + infinitive when no plan has been made, and
present continuous when the plan is an arrangement).
Answers • Note that native speakers often reduce going to go /
a 3 b 2 c 1 d 3 e 1 f 2 come to the present continuous (e.g. I’m going running
not I’m going to go running). However, both forms are
correct.
Background language notes for teachers • The form is complex so watch out for students missing
out words (I going to play, I’m going play, etc.).
Here are some words to pre-teach.
arrange = make a plan 7 Elicit the first missing form in open class to get
ask out on a date = ask to go to a cinema, restaurant, etc. students started, and write it on the board. Ask students
as a boyfriend or girlfriend to complete the other sentences individually. Let students
colleagues = people you work with compare their answers in pairs before checking as a class.
check the details = look at every word of the information
tourists = people on holiday Answers
give a presentation = give a short talk about a topic, 1 is going to take, are … going to go
e.g. to business people or at university 2 ’m going to leave, are you going to get up
3 are going to visit, are they going to stay
4 isn’t going to come, Is he going to go

8 PLANS 87

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 87 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

Pronunciation 12 57 Play the recording. Students listen and check.

Let them compare their answers in pairs before writing
Aim up the order on the board.
to help train students to notice and say the correct
pronunciation of going to in fast speech Answers
1 d 2 g 3 f 4 a 5 i 6 b 7 h 8 c 9 e
8 56 Play the recording. Ask students to note the
pronunciation and try saying it round the class.
57
Answers A: What’re your plans for later?
going to is reduced to /gʌnə/. The /t/ sound is not B: I don’t have any. Why? Do you want to meet
pronounced. somewhere?
A: Yes. Great. Where?
B: How about in the main square, under the
56 big clock?
going to A: Yes, fine. What time?
1 Where are you going to go? B: Is six OK?
2 I’m going to leave tomorrow. A: It’s quite early.
3 What time are you going to get up? B: Oh, sorry. Well, how about seven thirty?
4 Some friends are going to visit. A: Perfect! See you later. Bye.
5 How long are they going to stay?
6 He’s not going to come. 13 Ask students to think of and write their own
responses. You can start by eliciting two or three possible
9 Ask students to look back at the dialogues in responses to the first question as examples. Go round
Exercise 7 first. Elicit a possible final line to the first and prompt students to correct any errors in the
dialogue. Then ask students to spend two minutes sentences they write.
thinking of how to end the other dialogues. • Organise the class into pairs to practise the questions
• Organise the class into new pairs to practise the and responses, or ask the questions round the class,
dialogues. As they speak, monitor closely, and insist on eliciting responses and using the opportunity to correct
good pronunciation. In feedback, point out any errors form and pronunciation. In feedback, write a few
you heard. incorrect sentences on the board and ask students to
correct them.
10 Ask students to work in pairs to talk about their
plans. Start by modelling the activity with a reliable Optional extra activity Extend the activity for fast
student. Give students a minute to think of things to say finishers by giving them other questions to answer
before they start. (What do you want to watch on TV tonight? What are
• Once students are working in closed pairs, monitor and we going to buy for lunch?).
notice how well they use going to. In feedback, write a
few incorrect sentences on the board and ask students to Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable
correct them. worksheet on page 237 can be used at this point or at
the end of the unit for further practice.
For further practice, see Exercise 3 in the
Grammar reference on page 178. Conversation practice
Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference Aim
1 I’m not going to do anything special tonight. to practise language from the lesson in a free,
2 How are you going to get home? communicative, personalised speaking activity
3 Where are they going to go on holiday this year?
4 What is your sister going to study? 14 This is an opportunity to bring together several
5 How much is it going to cost? parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
6 I’m going to have dinner with my parents tonight. the language they have learnt.
• Organise the class into new pairs. Ask pairs to decide
who is A and who B. Ask them to think about how to
Developing conversations complete the unfinished sentences. When they are
ready, tell them to practise the dialogue. When they
Making suggestions have finished, ask them to change roles. Practice makes
Aim perfect, so ask students to practise the dialogues four or
to introduce and practise ways of making suggestions five times, or change pairs so students can practise with
new people.
11 Read through the information in the box as a class. • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
• Ask students to work in pairs to order the sentences language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
in the conversation. Elicit the first line to get students
started. Let students compare their ideas in pairs.

88 OUTCOMES

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 88 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language HOPES AND DREAMS
that students used and pieces of language students
didn’t quite use correctly during the activity. Show Student’s Book pages 72–73
students better ways of saying what they were trying
to say. Communicative outcomes
Optional extra activity Make this a mingle. Ask students In this two-page spread, students talk about hopes
to practise once in pairs. Then ask them to stand up, and dreams.
without books, walk round the class, and ask lots of
people: What’re your plans for today? Listening
14 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM. Aim
to give students practice in listening for gist and for
Teacher development: using the video specific words

The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in 1 Ask students to look at the pictures, and make sure
various ways: students understand that they show what the people
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice want to do. Ask: What can you see? Elicit ideas. Put
2 instead of the listening activity in some units, students in pairs to discuss the question in the Student’s
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first Book. The listening in the next exercise will confirm
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some their ideas.
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
before having a go themselves. 2 58 Play the recording. Students listen and match
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise. the speakers to the pictures. Let them compare their
answers with a partner before discussing as a class.

Answers
Speaker 1: Picture c
Speaker 2: Picture b
Speaker 3: Picture d
Speaker 4: Picture a

58
1
I’m from the Czech Republic, but at the moment, I’m
living in Manchester. I’m doing a degree here. I also
work part-time and I’m saving money because, after
university, I’d really like to go to China to study kung
fu. I practise three times a week here, and I’d like to
take it to the next level.
2
I work for a big design company in São Paulo, but I’d
like to leave and start my own business sometime in
the next two or three years. I don’t like having a boss.
I’d like to work for myself. I’d also like to start a family,
have children, but maybe that has to wait!
3
I’m going to retire next year, after working for 38
years. It’s going to be strange, but I’m looking forward
to it. I’d like to spend more time gardening. I have a
small piece of land and I’d like to grow my own fruit
and vegetables. I’d also like to spend more time with
my wife and children.
4
I’d like to be really famous. I’d like to have my own TV
show and I’d like to have lots and lots of money. I’d like
someone to drive me round in a big car and I’d like to
eat in expensive restaurants – and I’d like everyone in
the world to know my name!

8 PLANS 89

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 89 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

3 58 Play the recording again. Students listen and to check the words (e.g. mime a pregnant woman for
tick the true sentences. Let them compare their answers going to have a baby). At the end, allow students to use
with a partner. dictionaries if they are still unsure of any words.
• Note that these verbs all appear in the irregular verb
4 Tell students to check their answers by looking at list on page 191 of the Student’s Book. Tell students to
the audio script on page 205 of the Student’s Book. In use the verb list for help if they need to.
feedback, ask different pairs to justify their answers by
saying which words they underlined and why. Answers
1 a have b had
Answers 2 a moved b move
Sentences 2, 5 and 7 are true. 3 a stopped b stop
The other sentences are incorrect: 4 a started b start
1 He’s from the Czech Republic. 5 a won b win
3 She wants to leave in the next two or three years. 6 a get b got
4 She says having children will have to wait. 7 a left b leave
6 He wants to grow fruit and vegetables. 8 a become b become
8 She wants someone else to drive her.

Background language notes for teachers

Background language notes for teachers
• Note the following:
Note these words you may wish to check. move house but move to a city, country, etc.
do a degree = do a course at university stop / start + -ing / noun
work part-time = work a few hours a week (not all week) get married / divorced: we use get when there is a change
a boss = a manager of state (here a change from not being married to being
someone to drive me round in a big car = i.e. a chauffeur, a married, or vice versa – compare get engaged, get old,
person paid to drive your car while you sit in the back. get angry).
• Note that the stress is on the second syllable in
Teacher development: checking in pairs become.

After completing a grammar or vocabulary exercise, or 7 Organise the class into new pairs. Give students two
after reading or listening to a text, encourage students to or three minutes to prepare things to say individually.
check their answers in pairs. This is positive in a number Monitor and help with ideas. When students are ready,
of ways. ask them to take turns talking about life events and
1 It allows students to confirm they have got answers plans. Monitor and note any interesting things students
right, or wrong, before having to share them with the say. In feedback, ask what different students found out
class. This makes them more confident about giving an about their partner and write up any useful phrases you
answer in open class. heard on the board for students to notice.
2 It allows you, the teacher, to go round and see how
well students have done. You may need to offer help Optional extra activity Ask students to write five
or redirect the task if students have problems. It is sentences to say what their plans are for next year.
better to find this out when students are checking in
pairs than in whole-class feedback when students are Grammar would like to + verb
getting answers wrong.
3 It varies interaction and helps create supportive Aim
relationships in class, and it encourages peer teaching. to introduce and practise would like to + infinitive to
talk about things we want or hope to do in the future
5 Organise the class into groups to discuss the
questions. At this level, students can’t do this in full 8 Read through the information in the box as a
sentences yet, so encourage your students to use class. Then ask students to work individually to make
short answers, e.g. Yes, kung fu, because … Monitor and sentences from the prompts. Elicit the first answer to
note language use. In feedback, write a few incorrect get them started, and write it on the board. Let students
sentences on the board and ask students to correct them. compare their answers in pairs before confirming
by writing up, or asking students to write up, correct
Vocabulary Life events and plans sentences on the board. Alternatively, note that the
correct answers are on the recording in Exercise 9. Play
Aim that to confirm answers.
to introduce and practise phrases used to describe life • Students can check their ideas in Exercise 9.
events and plans

6 Ask students to complete the sentences with verbs

from the box. Do the first as an example. Let students
compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, use mime

90 OUTCOMES

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 90 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

Answers Optional extra activity Ask students to practise saying

1 I’d / I would really like to spend a year in the full sentences from Exercise 8, paying attention to
South America. the pronunciation of the ’d form.
2 I’d / I would really like to meet him sometime.
I love his music! 10 Set up the task by asking students to study the
3 My brother would like to learn how to cook. example. Ask students to work individually to think of
4 She’d / She would like to change jobs sometime things to say. Then organise them into groups of four or
soon. five to discuss plans. Monitor and prompt, and check how
5 I wouldn’t like to be famous! well students are using the language. In feedback, point
6 It’s a nice apartment, but I wouldn’t like to live in out any errors or problems you noticed.
that area.
7 Would you like to get something to eat after Optional extra activity Here are some other things
class? to discuss: buy a motorbike / yacht, eat less meat, do
8 Would you like to come shopping with me volunteer work, change my job, learn to ski, climb a
tomorrow? mountain.

11 This activity provides further personalised

Background language notes: would like to speaking practice. Ask students to work individually to
think of things to say. As students speak, monitor and
+ verb prompt, and check how well students are using the
Would behaves like a modal auxiliary verb. You add n’t to language. In feedback, point out any errors or problems
it to make a negative, and invert it with the subject to you noticed.
make a question. It has a similar meaning to want but
is more polite and tentative, and more commonly used For further practice, see Exercises 1 and 2 in
when expressing hopes and wishes. It is better and more the Grammar reference on page 178.
common in the question form to make invitations.
• Students are likely to have problems with the form. Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
They may miss out ’d (e.g. I like to go to France one day.) 1 get, lose
or misapply rules in question or negative forms (e.g. Do 2 retire, relax
you would like …?). Note that the abbreviated ’d form is 3 learn, go
more common, and pronouncing would can sound over- 4 start, become
exaggerated. 5 leave, get
6 save, buy
Pronunciation
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
Aim A
to introduce and practise the pronunciation of the 1 Would you like a cup of tea?
contracted ’d form in would like 2 Would you like a seat?
3 Would you like a cigarette?
9 59 Play the recording. Students listen and check 4 Would you like a drink?
their answers to Exercise 8, and notice the pronunciation 5 Would you like some more cake?
of the ’d form. In feedback, briefly drill I’d, we’d, etc. 6 Would you like milk in your coffee?
B
Answers 1 b 2 f 3 a 4 c 5 d 6 e
We use the contracted form of would in the
affirmative with pronouns (e.g. I’d, we’d, she’d). Web research activity Ask students to find as many
song titles as they can beginning with I’d like to … (e.g. I’d
like to teach the world to sing, I’d like to be, I’d like to be
59 everything you want, A song I’d like to sing).
1 I’d really like to spend a year in South America.
2 I’d really like to meet him sometime. I love his
music!
3 My brother would like to learn how to cook.
4 She’d like to change jobs sometime soon.
5 I wouldn’t like to be famous!
6 It’s a nice apartment, but I wouldn’t like to live in
that area.
7 Would you like to get something to eat after
class?
8 Would you like to come shopping with me
tomorrow?

8 PLANS 91

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 91 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

FOR AND AGAINST Possible answers

Better wi-fi is going to help businesses / be good for
Student’s Book pages 74–75 the economy.
A bigger library is going to improve education.
Communicative outcomes Improved roads are going to help businesses / be
In this two-page spread, students practise discussing good for the economy.
opinions for and against plans. More schools are going to improve education.
More street lights are going to provide a useful
Speaking service.
A new hospital is going to provide a useful service /
Aim create jobs.
to introduce the theme, check students’ existing A new metro line is going to help businesses / be
knowledge and get students talking good for the economy / provide a useful service /
create jobs / cut the number of cars on the road.
1 Start by asking students to look at the photo. Ask: A new museum is going to improve education /
What are they building? Do you think it is improving the provide a useful service.
city? Why? Why not? A new stadium is going to provide a useful service /
• Organise the class into groups to discuss the cause a lot of noise and pollution.
questions. You may need to check key words (e.g.
improved roads = better roads). Have a brief feedback 4 This activity aims to encourage students to try to
session. Expect only short, simple opinions at this level. memorise new vocabulary. Set a two-minute time limit
for students to try to memorise the verbs in Exercise 2.
Culture notes Tell them to concentrate on learning the verb + noun
collocations.
The photo shows the Titanic Belfast under construction. • Students complete the sentences from memory. Let
The landmark building is a visitor centre and monument them compare their answers in pairs before looking back
on the site of the Harland and Wolff shipyard in Belfast, at Exercise 2 to check their answers.
where the Titanic was built. It houses interactive galleries
telling the story of the Titanic, its construction and the Answers
disaster that befell it in 1912 on its first voyage. 1 be 4 cut, cause
2 save 5 improve, provide
Vocabulary For and against 3 create 6 losing, help

Aim
to introduce going to and practise talking about Reading
results we predict for the future
Aim
2 Read through the information in the box as a class. to help train students to read for a general
Ask students to give you other going to sentences to understanding and for specific information; to use
say what the results of building schools are going to the text to set up a discussion
be (e.g. children are going to get better grades; there are
going to be better facilities; there are going to be smaller 5 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to
classes). look at the text. Ask: What is it? (a website); How many
• Ask students to read the comments and decide if the people are expressing opinions? (six).
people who say them are for or against the plans. Let • Ask students to read and complete the headings on
them compare their ideas with a partner. You may need the website. Let students compare their answers in pairs.
to pre-teach some words (cause = make happen, create = In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
make, cut = make smaller, lose = not have).
Answers
Answers 1 build a new airport
For: 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8 2 cut spending / spend less money
Against: 5, 6, 9 3 build a sports stadium

3 Organise the class into pairs to make sentences. 6 Ask students to read the website comments again
Monitor and check how well students use going to. In carefully and find the people who match the opinions
feedback, briefly find out what ideas students came up in 1–6. Let students compare their answers in pairs. In
with, and check the meaning and pronunciation of any feedback, elicit answers from the students.
words students had problems with.
Answers
1 Gloria and Jamila 4 Gavin
2 Elijah 5 Gloria
3 Jamila 6 Cass

92 OUTCOMES

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 92 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

7 Organise the class into pairs to discuss their 61

opinions. In feedback, elicit students’ ideas and views. 1 They’re going to create 800 new jobs.
2 I’m going to drive there so I can take you.
Optional extra activity Ask students to write a comment 3 I do exercise every day to keep fit.
for the website expressing their view on each of the 4 The university has a famous library.
three topics. You could ask students to write short 5 I’d like to move to a nicer place.
comments on pieces of paper, collect them in and put 6 The school provides all the books.
them on the class notice board, and ask the class to get 7 I’m saving money to buy a motorbike.
up and read the views. 8 It’s going to improve the situation.

Speaking Optional extra activities Get students to find two more

words in the unit with each of the sounds practised
Aim (/eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /u:/). Get students to write two
to practise language from the lesson in a free, collocations or phrases for each word in the box in
communicative, personalised speaking activity; to Exercise 11. (These activities could be set as homework.)
have a class discussion
Teacher development: using the sounds
8 This is an opportunity to bring together several
parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
and vocabulary review
the language they have learnt. This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
• Ask students to work individually to read and decide also reviews some key words and develops students’
on their opinions and prepare reasons. Monitor and ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
help with ideas and vocabulary. You could put students Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
in pairs to help each other by sharing the reasons they other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
prepared and correcting each other’s work. development on page 19).
Sounds and correction
9 When students are ready, organise them into groups • The diphthong /eɪ/ is made by starting with the
of four or five to discuss their opinions. As students mouth in the position for /e/ (a short vowel sound
speak, go round and monitor, and note down any made with the lips relaxed but wide) and moving the
interesting pieces of language you hear. tongue back.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that • By contrast, the diphthong /aɪ/ is made by starting
students used and pieces of language students didn’t with the mouth in the position for /a/ (the mouth is
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students more rounded) and moving the tongue back.
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. • /uː/ is a long vowel sound pronounced with rounded
lips.
Sounds and vocabulary review
For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
Aim Grammar reference on page 179.
to practise the sounds /eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /u:/; to listen and
write down words in continuous speech Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
1 is 5 would
10 60 Play the recording. Students listen and 2 to 6 to
repeat the sounds. 3 like 7 are
4 are 8 not
60
/eɪ/, /aɪ/, /u:/, /eɪv/, /aɪv/, /u:v/, /eɪt/, /feɪ/, /deɪ/, Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
/baɪ/, /laɪ/, /du:/, /ju:/ 1 I’m not going to
2 I’d like to
11 61 Give students a moment to look at the 3 I’m going to
words in the box. Read the words out so that students 4 I wouldn’t like to
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one 5 Would you like to
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or 6 I’m going to
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. 1 this weekend
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could 2 later this afternoon
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but 3 sometime in the future
students should be able to write complete sentences 4 this summer
after two or three listenings. 5 sometime in the next few weeks
6 later this evening
7 in the next few years
8 sometime in the next three or four months.

8 PLANS 93

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 93 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

VIDEO 4: TWO KENYAN GUYS IN TEXAS 3 15 Ask students to watch the second part of
the video, and answer the questions. Play the video
Student’s Book page 76 (2.08–4.44). Let them compare their notes in pairs before
discussing as a class.
Aim
to find out about and compare cattle farms in two Answers
very different cultures (Texas and Maasai land) 1 the son and daughter, the grandfather and
grandmother
1 Lead in to the topic by asking students to look at the 2 the dining room, the bedroom, the living room
pictures and say what they can see. Organise the class 3 The Maasai house only lasts a few years, because
into pairs or small groups to discuss the questions. In a the Maasai move around.
brief feedback session, elicit students’ ideas and write up
interesting ideas or pieces of language on the board. 4 15 Ask students to work individually to choose
the options. Let them compare their answers in pairs,
Answers then play the second part of the video again so they
The first photo shows Maasai people herding cattle. The can check.
Maasai are a group of semi-nomadic people who live in
southern Kenya and northern Tanzania. Answers
The second photo shows cowboys in Texas using a 1 grandmother’s 4 every three years
lasso to round up cattle. 2 A prime minister 5 the rain
Similar: rearing and herding cows (cattle), living 3 was used in a war 6 become cowboys
outdoors
Different: cows look different, the men wear different 5 This exercise offers students the chance to relate
clothes, the Maasai use spears not lassos, the Texans the topic of the video to their own experiences.
wear cowboy hats and use horses, the Maasai cows • Give students time to read the questions then put
are in the open, not behind fences them in pairs or small groups and give them seven or
eight minutes to discuss them.
2 15 Give students time to read through the • Monitor and listen to each group. Help with
summary first. You will need to explain who the Maasai pronunciation and ideas if necessary.
are, and pre-teach key words (see below). Ask students to • When most students have finished, stop the class and
guess missing words. give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of the
• As students watch the video, they should complete things students tried to say, or by asking students to
the summary. Let them compare their answers in pairs correct or fill in gaps in sentences you’ve written on the
before discussing as a class. board.

Answers Understanding fast speech

1 America 3 world 5 Kenya
2 Texas 4 Jimmy 6 difficult 6 16 Tell students to work on their own for a few
minutes to practise saying the extract. Then play the
recording. Students listen and compare what they said.
Background language notes
7 Encourage students to practise saying the extract
ranch = big American cattle farm several times.
accent = the way people in a region speak (Texans have a
southern drawl in which vowel sounds are very long.) 15
rifle = a long gun 1st Kenyan: We have been in America for two weeks
earn your spurs = (idiomatic expression) prove yourself, now, and we decided to go down to Texas. We heard
show that you are good enough to do something that Texas is where they have all the cows in America.
up to par = (idiom) good enough 2nd Kenyan: Do you see those big cows?
Note the phrases connected with cows and horses: 1st Kenyan: The Maasai in Samburu believe that all
treat / own cows, ride a horse the cows all over the world belong to them, so we
Howdy = hello decided to head down and check out what they are
How y’all?, How y’all doin’? = How are you? (Texan) doing with our cows. When we got to the bus station
Jimmy was already there waiting for us. Big Jimmy.
Culture notes Jimmy: Hello. … Welcome, howdy.
1st Kenyan: Thank you.
• Prime Minister of Tanzania – the Maasai live in Kenya Jimmy: Jimmy Wynne, welcome to Texas!
and its neighbouring country Tanzania. Kenyans: Thank you very much.
• American Revolution = a political upheaval that took Jimmy: It’s gonna be fun, we’ll take you out, take you
place between 1765 and 1783, during which colonists in out to the ranch and show you some, how we do our
the American Colonies rejected the British monarchy and cattle around here.
aristocracy and founded the United States of America.

94 OUTCOMES

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 94 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

Kenyans: Fine. Thank you very much. Kenyan: Different from our culture because we don’t
1st Kenyan: This is the first time we’ve met Jimmy, live in the same house for that many years, because
but he’s well known because he’s got a big ranch in we are nomadic and you know, what that means is
Africa, in Maasai land. every three years we move somewhere else to follow
Jimmy: OK, we’ll get on the road. the grass, to make sure that all our cows don’t die.
2nd Kenyan: Come on, ladies first! So the houses are built very simple using sticks and
Kenyan: So we knew Jimmy would be very welcoming cow dung, and when we leave, the house will just get
and would show us around in Texas. washed away when it rains, and everything comes
Thanks a lot, Jim. back to nature. Everything is biodegradable.
… If I say all the cows belong to the Maasai? Fallon: For the heaven above us, the ground below
Jimmy: I did not know you owned all the cows, but we us, the friends around us and the food before us we
look forward to showing you how we treat our cows thank you Lord. Amen.
here and I think you’ll be very happy, and while you’re Everyone: Amen, thank you.
here you’re gonna have to know some Texas sayings. Jimmy: Why don’t y’all tell them some of the things
You know ‘Howdy’, ‘How y’all’, ‘How y’all doin’? we’re gonna do the next few days?
Kenyans: How, you, ally, all doin … Todd: Well, we’re gonna show you what it takes
Jimmy: How y’all … How y’all … all of you … to become a true cowboy. So you think you can
Kenyan: I don’t know, myself, I’m finding it difficult to handle it?
understand your accent. Kenyan: What exactly do we have to do?
Jimmy: I’m having a little trouble understanding Fallon: First you have to dress like a cowboy, have
yours, so we’ll get it together. to have the hat, the boots, and you have to earn
Well, this is coming into Star Brand, home your spurs.
sweet home. Todd: So we gotta see how your riding skills if they are
Kenyan: When we got there to the gates he said, ‘Boys up to par.
this is my ranch, it’s 8,000 acres.’ Big ranch. Jimmy: Earning your spurs.
Kenyan: Oh wow. Look at the cows. Are those all Todd: Yeh.
your cows? Kenyan: I never rid … I never rid a horse before.
Jimmy: They’re all on the ranch. Come show you Jimmy: Alright, well that’s no problem, you might be
the home. a natural!
Kenyans: Yeh, thank you, beautiful. Todd: … just like a zebra, riding a zebra!

Part 2
Jimmy: My daughter, Fallon.
Kenyan: We met his daughter, Fallon, and his
son, Todd.
Todd: Nice to meet you.
Fallon: Welcome, come on in.
Kenyans: Thank you, thank you very much, asante
sana, it’s cool, thank you very much.
Jimmy: Welcome to your home away from home.
Kenyan: Ah, it’s a beautiful house.
Jimmy: Now let me show you this gentleman here,
Todd Lee Wynne, my grandfather, his hobby was cattle,
he loved cows, he just loved them, and this is his wife
Imogen Wynne, my grandmother, and the ranch came
from her side of the family.
Fallon: Kinda like the women in your culture, she
brought the cows to the marriage.
Jimmy: One of the last guests that stayed here was,
the Prime Minster of Tanzania stayed here, and he
was our guest.
Kenyan: Jimmy and his family are showing us around,
and it’s a very old house, you know, a lot of small
details but it has a lot of meaning to them. Their
house has a lot of story.
Jimmy: This rifle is an original piece.
Kenyan: Wow!
Todd: In the American revolution where we fought for
our independence against the British this rifle was,
was actually used during that time.
Kenyan: Wow.

8 PLANS 95

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 95 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 8 PLANS

REVIEW 4
Student’s Book page 77

Aim
to consolidate vocabulary and grammar from Units 7
and 8

Answers
1
1 going, am 5 don’t
2 don’t 6 to
3 to, are 7 does
4 can 8 would
2
1 I’m not going to see him today.
2 She doesn’t have to come to the meeting.
3 Would you like to be famous some day?
4 I wouldn’t like to work for that company.
5 Is he going to stay here?
6 Do I have to wait?
7 We don’t have to go to the meeting.
8 Would she like a cup of coffee?
3
1 She doesn’t have to drive me to the station. I can
take a taxi.
2 My parents speak Chinese and my older brother
does too.
3 My grandfather’s tall and my dad is too.
4 It’s OK. You don’t have to do it. You decide.
5 Would you like to get something to eat?
6 My husband is going to go, but I’m not.
6
1 cut 5 create
2 stop 6 improve
3 save 7 build
4 provide 8 help
7
1 fit 6 funny
2 clever 7 strict
3 quiet 8 loud
4 reliable 9 confident
5 romantic 10 surprised
8
1 move 6 repair
2 have 7 get
3 pick up 8 do
4 play 9 lose
5 go 10 start

62 and answers to Exercise 4

1 She’s not going to like the idea.
2 I don’t have to work tomorrow, but my wife does.
3 What time are you going to arrive tomorrow?
4 I’d really like to stop working and travel more.
5 Would you like something to eat?
6 My daughter still lives at home, but my sons don’t.

96 OUTCOMES

65752_u08_pp085-096.indd 96 08/12/18 12:06 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES
Words for Unit 9 Possible answers
Good: get a great view, go up a tower, visit a palace,
Aim win the match, an exciting ride, lie on the beach, buy
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set fresh fish
of key, useful vocabulary using photos Bad: make a mess, call an ambulance, hurt myself,
break a glass, fall down, forget to bring, start crying,
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases lose the game
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started
(photo 1 is get a great view). Go round the room and 4 Mix the pairs so that students are working with
check students are doing the task, and prompt if someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
necessary. Depending on how much they know, students other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
may need help with a dictionary or teacher translation to with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
do the exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions. students are doing the task and help if necessary.
• Use the feedback time to correct any errors students
2 63 Play the recording so that students can check made, or to point out the pronunciation of any words
their answers. Let them check again with their partner students found hard to say.
after they have listened once.
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students Optional extra activity Ask students to work in pairs
to repeat the words. If students have any problems to match pairs of phrases that go together in a story
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and (e.g. fall down and hurt myself; lose the game and start
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the crying; go up a tower and get a great view).
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress
(see language notes below). Teacher development: using phonemes
and stress to point out problems
63 and answers
1 get a great view Encourage your students to notice, record and remember
2 go up a tower the pronunciation of new words by getting them to mark
3 visit a palace stress and pronunciation problems on new words as they
4 make a mess learn them. Here are three ideas.
5 call an ambulance 1 Write up new words on the board with the stress
6 hurt myself marked (underline or put a dot over the strong stress)
7 break a glass and with any weak or difficult sound shown.
8 fall down o /ə/ /ɔː/ /aʊ/
9 win the match ambulance fall down
10 an exciting ride 2 Ask students to match phrases to stress patterns.
11 forget to bring OoO lose the game, win the match
12 lie on the beach OooO lie on the beach
13 start crying OOo start crying
14 buy fresh fish 3 Ask students to find particular sounds in different
15 lose the game words.
/aɪ/: ride, lie, crying

Background language notes for teachers

• Note forget to bring (verb + infinitive) and start crying

(verb + -ing).
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
words except: exciting, forget.

3 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the

questions. In feedback, you could build up a list of good
and bad experiences on the board.

9 EXPERIENCES 97

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 97 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

HAVE YOU EVER BEEN THERE? 6 The Empire State Building in New York
7 The Sydney Opera House in Australia
Student’s Book pages 80–81 8 The Burj al-Arab tower in Dubai
9 The Louvre in Paris
Communicative outcomes 10 Hagia Sophia in Istanbul
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking
about places they have been to. Optional extra activity Ask students to order their top
four buildings from most interesting to least interesting.
Speaking Ask students to say why in feedback.

Aim Grammar Present perfect

to get students talking about famous buildings and
places; to introduce the theme of the lesson Aim
to introduce and practise the present perfect to
1 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the ask about an action before now when we feel it is
questions. In feedback, elicit students’ ideas and write connected to the present situation
them on the board. Encourage any students who have
been to Istanbul, or know about the city, to share their 4 Read through the information in the box as a
ideas. class. Then organise the class into pairs to look at the
dialogues and complete the rules. Elicit the first answer
Optional extra activity 1 Ask students to come up with as an example in open class. Monitor and note how well
facts and opinions and write them on the board. students understand the rules.
• Ask students to check their ideas in the Grammar
Optional extra activity 2 If you think your students may reference on page 179.
know little or nothing about the subject, write a set of
words and phrases (take them from Culture notes below) Answers
and ask students to say which ones they think may be 1 have 2 -ed 3 been
true about Istanbul and the building.

Culture notes Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar

reference on page 179.
• Hagia Sophia (which means Holy Wisdom in Greek)
was built as a Greek Orthodox Cathedral in 537. It is Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
famous for its huge dome, and was the greatest building 1 Has, to 4 tried, haven’t
of the Byzantine era. It became a mosque in 1453 2 been, like 5 visited
when the Turks captured the city of Constantinople and 3 ever, have, you
changed its name to Istanbul. In 1935, it was secularised
and turned into a museum.
• Historically known as Constantinople and Byzantium, Background language notes for teachers
Istanbul is Turkey’s most populous city and the country’s
economic and cultural centre. The city straddles Europe • In English, we use the present perfect tense (the
and Asia, divided by the Bosphorus strait which goes auxiliary verb have / has + past participle) when asking
between the Sea of Marmara and the Black Sea. It is about experiences. The speaker is not interested in when
famous for the former sultan’s Topkapi Palace (built something happened, and doesn’t say when it happened.
in the fifteenth century), the Grand Bazaar (full of • All students need to know is that we use this form to
merchants selling herbs and spices, rugs and carpets), describe experiences when we don’t say when (i.e. we
and the Galata Tower (a fourteenth-century tower with don’t use a past time marker). You could show this by
views over the city). asking concept check questions and drawing a timeline.

2 Ask students to prepare lists individually (or in pairs I’ve been to Istanbul.
if you think your students may struggle for ideas). ????
Past Now
3 Then organise the students into groups of four to Did he go in the past? (yes)
compare their lists. Do we say when? (no)
Is when important (no)
Possible answers What’s important? (his experience)
One ‘top ten’ website listed the following most iconic • We use the past simple when we ask for more
buildings in the world: information about the experiences (and want to know
1 Pyramids at Giza in Egypt when they happened).
2 The Colosseum in Rome
3 Big Ben in London
4 The Eiffel Tower in Paris
5 The Taj Mahal in India

98 OUTCOMES

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 98 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

5 Start by modelling this activity in open class. Ask Answers

Have you ever …? questions about places students came 1 e 2 h 3 g 4 d 5 b 6 a 7 c 8 f
up with in Exercise 2 and elicit responses from four or
five students in the class. Once students have got the
idea, put them in pairs to ask and answer. 64
• Once students are working in closed pairs, monitor and A: Have you been to Istanbul before?
check how well they use the form. In feedback, write a B: Well, it’s my first time, but Harry’s been here
few incorrect sentences on the board and ask students to before.
correct them. C: Yeah, once – but it was for work. I didn’t see
much then.
6 Read through the information in the box as a class. A: When did you arrive?
Point out the use of the past simple when the time is B: Friday. We’re really enjoying it.
mentioned. Let students work individually to choose A: So where have you been?
the options. Organise the class into pairs to check their B: Well, this morning we went round the Bazaar.
answers before feedback. In feedback, refer students back That was great. Then we went over to Galata and
to rules of use if they make errors, or ask students to say walked round there.
why they have chosen a particular tense. A: Did you go up the Galata Tower?
C: No. There was a long queue and we didn’t want
Answers to wait.
1 went A: Really? You get a great view from the top.
2 Have, went, was C: Yeah, I heard. Another time, maybe.
3 went, Did you visit, wanted, were only A: Have you been to Topkapi Palace?
4 have you tried, I went, didn’t really like B: Yes, we went there at the weekend. It’s amazing,
and it’s so big!
7 Organise the class into new pairs to have A: I know. How long did you spend there?
conversations using the present perfect and past simple. B: All day! We were tired at the end.
Start by modelling this activity with a reliable student. C: Yeah, really tired!
Once students have got the idea, ask them to improvise A: I’m sure.
conversations. B: We also went to the Hagia Sophia.
• Once students are working in pairs, monitor and note A: Did you? I’ve never been in there.
how well they use the forms. In feedback, write a few B: But you live here!
incorrect sentences on the board and ask students to A: I know, but sometimes you don’t think about
correct them. visiting places when they’re near.
B: That’s true. We live in London and I’ve never been
For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the to Buckingham Palace.
Grammar reference on page 180. A: So, what are your plans for this evening?
C: We’d like to go out for dinner somewhere, but
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference we’re not sure where.
1 Have you been, went A: Well, have you tried the fish here?
2 I’ve been, I came, did you stay B: No, we haven’t.
3 did you arrive, have you been, we went, loved A: Oh, you should! It’s very good – very fresh. There’s
4 Have you tried, took, it was a great place quite near here. I can take you there,
5 Have you visited, I’ve been, I went, did you like if you want.
C: Oh, that sounds great. Thank you.

Listening 9 64 Ask students to work in pairs to note down

any answers they can remember. Monitor to see how
Aim much students understood from first listening.
to help train students to listen for specific • Play the recording again for students to complete their
information answers. Students compare their answers in pairs. In
feedback, elicit answers from the class. Students could also
8 64 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students use the audio script on page 205 to check their answers.
to look at the photo of Hagia Sophia on page 80, and ask
them to say what they remember about the building and Answers
the city. Write the following tourist sites on the board 1 e It’s my first time, but Harry’s been here before.
so students will understand the words when they hear 2 h Friday
them: Topkapi Palace, Galata Tower. You may wish to pre- 3 g This morning we went round the Bazaar, then
teach queue (= stand in a line and wait) and amazing we went over to Galata.
(= very, very good). Ask students to read the questions 4 d No, there was a long queue.
carefully before they listen. 5 b Yes, we went there at the weekend.
• Play the recording. Let students compare their answers 6 a All day.
in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students. 7 c We’d like to go out for dinner.
8 f No, we haven’t.

9 EXPERIENCES 99

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 99 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

10 Organise the class into groups of four or five to Optional extra activity 1 Extend the activity into a
discuss the questions. Monitor and note any errors or mingle. Students walk round and speak to three or four
interesting pieces of language students try to use. At different students.
the end, in feedback, write up six to eight sentences
students said on the board. Include incorrect sentences Optional extra activity 2 Ask students to write
and correct sentences. Ask students to correct errors, and recommendations for the places they thought of in
point out examples of good things students said. Exercise 11. Tell them to use: you should go to …, try …,
visit …, and don’t go to …, don’t try … This prepares
Optional extra activity Practice makes perfect. Ask students for the Conversation practice activity.
students to practise improvising the conversation from
the listening. One student asks the question in Exercise 8. Conversation practice
The other student must remember or invent responses.
Aim
Teacher development: recognising errors to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity
As students speak, monitor, listen carefully to what they
say, and collect errors. Write them on the board, and ask 13 This is an opportunity to bring together several
students to correct them. An alternative activity is to parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
use the error correction stage to note both good and the language they have learnt.
incorrect uses of language equally, and to write up a mix • Ask students to work in A and B pairs to do the
of correct and incorrect sentences on the board. Students roleplay. Student A must prepare by practising questions.
then have to say which are correct, and which are not. Student B must prepare by thinking of answers. You
They also get a positive sense that you are praising could model this by acting out a conversation with a
accurate use as well as correcting inaccurate use. reliable student first, or by asking one well-prepared pair
to model their conversation for the class. Give students
Developing conversations time to look at the questions and prepare thoroughly
before doing the role play.
Recommending • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
Aim language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
to introduce and practise ways of recommending • In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
that students used and pieces of language students
11 Read through the information in the box as a class. didn’t quite use correctly during the activity. Show
• Ask students to look at the phrases in bold in the students better ways of saying what they were trying
box. Ask them to practise the conversations in pairs. to say.
Encourage them to stress should and don’t strongly.
• Elicit two or three examples of good and bad places to Optional extra activity Play Find someone who. Ask
get students started. Let students make a list of places pairs to prepare six Have you …? questions, e.g. Have you
individually then compare their ideas in pairs. Help been to Moscow? Have you tried caviar? Have you ever
students with the English spelling and pronunciation of been to an opera? When students are ready, ask them to
places they want to talk about. interview other students. Tell them to ask their Have you
…? questions, and to ask follow-up questions with Did you
Background language notes for teachers …? or When did you …? if students answer yes. You could
do this in pairs, groups or as a mingle. To add competition,
Manipulating auxiliary verbs is an important aspect of ask students to do it as a mingle and to keep asking
learning to communicate in English. It helps students questions until they find six positive answers.
communicate in a way that sounds natural. Note the use
of auxiliary verbs in short answers (No, I haven’t tried the Web research activity Ask students to research famous
fish here), in reduced recommendations (Oh, you should places in Istanbul and find out five facts about them to
try the fish here) and in reduced imperatives (Don’t visit share with the rest of the class.
the palace). In all these uses, there is a strong stress on
the auxiliary verb. 17 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.

12 Organise the class into new pairs. Ask students Teacher development: using the video
to use the ideas they prepared in Exercise 11 to practise
conversations. As students speak, monitor and listen for The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in
errors, and correct students if they have problems. various ways:
• Note that this is a controlled drill, where the answer is 1 as an alternative to the conversation practice
basically presented as a No to ensure practice. It doesn’t 2 instead of the listening activity in some units,
take into account the possibility someone might answer particularly with weaker groups. Students can first
Yes, I have. Encourage students to ask follow-up questions practise reading out the dialogues and work on some
if their partner says yes, e.g. When did you get there? Did of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
you like it? Who did you go with? before having a go themselves.
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.

100 OUTCOMES

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 100 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

WHAT’S HAPPENED? Possible answers

Made a mess / a cake / the bed / a mistake /
Student’s Book pages 82–83 a phone call
Take a train / a bus / a course / an exam / a test /
Communicative outcomes a minute
In this two-page spread, students talk about everyday Break your leg / your arm / a record / a habit /
problems. your heart
Fall down a mountain / into a hole / in love / over /
Vocabulary Problems off your bike
Miss a flight / a bus / a train / a lesson / your
Aim boyfriend / the point
to introduce and practise phrases to describe Lose your passport / your bag / a match / your heart /
problems your mind
Hurt your girlfriend / your parents / your leg
1 Start by asking students to look at the photo. Ask: Feel happy / sad / like a superstar / ill
What’s happened? Elicit suggestions from the class.
• Ask students to match the verbs to the sentence Optional extra activity 1 You could make Exercise 3 into
endings individually. Do the first as a class to get them a class competition. See which pair can think of nine
started. Let students compare their answers in pairs collocations first. When the first pair finishes, ask them
before giving feedback. You could ask students to listen to say their ideas, and as you check them get other ideas
and repeat the correct collocations to check answers and from the class.
practise pronunciation.
Optional extra activity 2 Ask students to look up
Answers make or take in the dictionary and find as many
1 I forgot to turn off the gas. useful collocations as they can. This works well with
2 I made a mess. an elementary or essential learner’s dictionary which
3 I took the wrong train. restricts the possibilities.
4 I broke my glasses.
5 It fell on the floor. Listening
6 I missed my flight.
7 I lost my passport. Aim
8 I hurt myself. to give students practice in listening for gist and for
9 I felt a bit ill. specific words

4 65 Set up the situation by asking students

Background language notes for teachers to read the five problems. You could ask students to
speculate about what words they expect to hear in each
• Note the common verb + noun collocations (make a conversation.
mess, miss a flight, take a train). • Play the recording. Students listen and match the
• Note the use of reflexive pronouns (hurt myself) and problems to the conversations. Let them compare their
the use of the infinitive after forget (forgot to turn off answers with a partner before discussing as a class.
the gas).
Answers
2 Organise the class into pairs to categorise the 1 b 2 a 3 e 4 c 5 d
problems. Do the first as an example. In feedback, ask
students to justify their answers. Work with the students’
ideas here as many of these depend on the context. 65
1
Possible answers A: Have you seen my glasses?
Very serious: I forgot to turn off the gas, I missed my B: No. Have you checked in your jacket pocket?
flight, I lost my passport. A: Yeah. They’re not there. They were on the table
Quite serious: I took the wrong train, I broke my before.
glasses, it fell on the floor, I hurt myself. B: Maybe they’ve fallen on the floor.
Not very serious: I made a mess, I felt a bit ill. A: I can’t see them. Can you?
B: No. You went to the toilet. Did you look there?
3 Organise the class into new pairs. Give students two A: No. … I’ve found them!! They were by the sink!
or three minutes to prepare things to say individually. 2
Monitor and help with ideas. When students are ready, D: Sammy! No!
ask them to take turns saying sentences. Monitor and C: Can I help?
note any interesting things students say. In feedback, D: Yes, sorry. My son’s thrown the plate on the floor.
find out who got most points and write up any useful C: Don’t worry. These things happen. Let me clean
phrases you heard on the board. everything.

9 EXPERIENCES 101

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 101 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

D: Do you have a cloth or some tissues? There’s sauce 6 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
on my trousers. discuss the topics. Give students a minute to think of
C: Oh, yes, of course. And do you want more spaghetti things to say and ask about any language they need
for your son? before they start.
D: Er … no, that’s OK. • As students speak, monitor and collect errors and
3 examples of good language use. In feedback, correct
E: Do you have any water? student errors and point out good examples of language.
F: Yeah – there’s some in the bag.
E: I can’t see any. Optional extra activity Do a live listening either before
F: Really? I filled a bottle this morning. the activity in Exercise 6 (as a model), or after (as an
E: No. There’s no bottle. extension). Talk for two or three minutes about how
F: It’s not in the pocket? often you or people you know do the things in Exercise
E: No. 6. Students must listen, take notes, and repeat what you
F: I guess I left it at home then. said back to a partner.
E: Don’t worry. I can buy some.
4 Grammar Past participles
G: Ow!
H: What have you done? Aim
G: I’ve cut my hand. to introduce and learn regular and irregular past
H: Ffffff! participles
G: Do you have a plaster or something?
H: Yeah, but go to the sink and wash it under the cold 7 Read through the information in the box as a class.
water first. Then organise the class into pairs to write the past
5 participles of the verbs in the list. Elicit the first two as
I: I think we’ve come the wrong way examples in open class to get students started. Monitor
J: It’s just two or three more streets. and check how well students do the task.
I: Please. Can we ask someone? • Ask students to check their answers in the Grammar
J: Oh … OK. Excuse me. Do you speak English? reference on page 180. There is a chart there showing
K: Sure. the main regular and irregular past participles, and there
I: We’re looking for Stockmann’s. is also a more comprehensive list on page 191 of the
K: Oh! You’ve come the wrong way. Do you have a Student’s Book.
map?
J: Yes, but it’s not very good. Answers
K: Let me look. OK. You’re here … and Stockmann’s Regular: arrived, checked, happened, missed, planned,
is here. So you need to go back and then turn stopped, studied, tried, visited
right here. Irregular: been, broken, come, cut, done, fallen, felt,
J: OK. Thanks. forgotten, found, hurt, lost, made, seen, taken, thrown
I: I told you it was that way.

Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar

Culture notes reference on page 180.

Stockmann’s has sixteen major department stores in • Note that the above grammar practice activity is
Finland, Russia and the Baltic countries. The flagship intended as a discussion activity. Encourage students
store in the centre of Helsinki in Finland covers 50,000 to point out any patterns they see; there is no right
square metres. or wrong answer and anything they notice could be
interesting. See the answer key for ideas.
5 65 Organise the class into pairs to complete as
much of the conversations as they can. Possible answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
• Play the recording again. Students listen and check. – past simple and past participle the same: had-had,
Let them compare their answers with a partner before left-left, made-made
discussing as a class. – past simple and present form similar, past participle
different (often a different vowel sound): see-saw-seen,
Answers take-took-taken, throw-threw-thrown
1 jacket pocket 6 the pocket – past participle ending in -n or -en: broken, fallen,
2 the sink 7 my hand taken, thrown
3 My son 8 a plaster – past participle ending in -t: leave-left, feel-felt
4 my trousers 9 wrong way – past participle and / or past simple changes vowel
5 I filled 10 turn right sound: break-broken, find-found, forget-forgot, go-gone,
lose-lost, take-took, leave-left, feel-felt (Note this is
often combined with a t or n ending on the past
participle)

102 OUTCOMES

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 102 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

Background language notes for teachers • In 2, 3, 5, 7 and 8, it’s /v/ and /z/ (contractions after
pronouns).
Regular past participles look the same as regular past • In 4, it is /əv/ (we don’t pronounce /h/ when have or
simple forms. Irregular past participles are sometimes has links with the previous word – here What).
the same (made / made; cut / cut) but often different • In 6, it is /hæv/ (negatives are stressed).
(took / taken; threw / thrown). Often -n or -en is used as
an ending to irregular participles. However, there really 10 67 Play the recording of track 67, which has the
are no useful rules for irregular forms – students simply slower version only. Students listen and repeat.
need to learn and memorise them. It is worth giving
them plenty of practice to learn and test the forms. 11 Organise the class into pairs to prepare dialogues.
Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.
Optional extra activity Play past participle tennis.
Students work in pairs. Student A serves a verb (e.g. 12 When students have prepared dialogues, tell them
break), Student B returns with the past simple (broke), to practise in pairs.
Student A replies with the past participle (broken) and • Organise pairs so that one pair who prepared together
wins the point, 15–0. Student A serves a second verb, and is with another pair. Pairs then take turns to act out their
a third, etc. until they or their opponent wins the game. conversations for each other. Monitor and note errors or
Then it is Student B’s turn to serve. examples of good language use to focus on in feedback.

8 Ask students to complete the sentences. Elicit the For further practice, see Exercises 2 and 3 in
first answer as an example. Let students compare their the Grammar reference on page 180.
answers in pairs before feedback.
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
Answers 1 seen
1 Have you seen 2 forgotten
2 I’ve forgotten 3 (correct)
3 Someone has taken 4 taken
4 have you done? 5 (correct)
5 I’ve broken 6 made
6 Our bags haven’t arrived 7 (correct)
7 we’ve missed 8 cut
8 has Martin gone
9 Has anyone called Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
1 saw, Have you seen
2 Have you lost, left, took
Pronunciation 3 got up, missed, haven’t stopped, haven’t eaten

Aim
to practise the pronunciation of have in fast speech Speaking
9 66 Play the recording. Students listen and notice Aim
how have is pronounced. In feedback, ask students why it to practise language from the lesson in a free,
is pronounced in different ways in different sentences. communicative, personalised speaking activity

66 and 67 13 This is an opportunity to bring together several

1 Have you seen my keys? parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
2 I’ve forgotten your name. the language they have learnt.
3 Someone’s taken my bag. • Ask students to work in pairs to discuss the questions.
4 What have you done? In feedback, ask different pairs to say what they found
5 I’ve broken a glass. out about each other.
6 Our bags haven’t arrived. • As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
7 We’ve missed our flight. down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
8 Where’s Martin gone? • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
9 Has anyone called the police? students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
Background pronunciation notes
Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable
• Have can sound like /hæv/, /həv/, /əv/ or /v/. worksheet on page 238 can be used at this point or at
• The third person form has can be /hæz/, /həz/, /əz/ the end of the unit for further practice.
or /z/.
• So, in sentence 1 on track 66, have is /həv/ (i.e. in yes /
no questions), and in 9, has is /həz/.

9 EXPERIENCES 103

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 103 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

MEMORABLE EXPERIENCES 7 sad / scary

8 embarrassing / annoying
Student’s Book pages 84–85 9 exciting / scary / stressful
10 relaxing, or possibly stressful / boring
Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students talk about good and
bad memorable experiences. Background language notes for teachers

Vocabulary Describing experiences theme park = e.g. Disneyland

the plane was delayed = it left later than expected
Aim cooler = a type of fridge you find in a hotel
to introduce and practise adjectives to describe a couple of = two
experiences
Optional extra activity 1 Ask students to work in groups
1 Start by asking students to look at the pictures. Ask: to discuss this question: Do you know anyone who’s had
What can you see? Elicit suggestions from the class, and any similar holiday experiences to the ones in Exercise 3?
see how many words students already know. Who were they with? Where were they? What happened?
• Ask students to match the sentences to the pictures
individually. Do the first as a class to get them started. Optional extra activity 2 Write the following words on
Let students compare answers in pairs before feedback. the board: course, holiday, film, book, student, dog, flight.
You could ask students to listen and repeat the sentences Ask students to think of adjectives that go with the nouns
to check answers and practise pronunciation. and say why.

Answers Reading
1 c 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 d 6 h 7 e 8 g
Aim
to help train students to read for a general
Background language notes for teachers understanding and for personal response

Watch out for false friends here. For example, annoying 4 Start by setting up the situation. Pre-teach
is similar to the Italian and French words for boring, and memorable experiences and ask students to discuss the
embarrassing is similar to the Spanish word for pregnant. questions in groups. You could model the activity by briefly
European students often confuse these words because telling the class how you would answer the questions.
they assume they are the same as in their L1.
• Note the stress is on the first syllable of most words 5 Ask students to read the text and find the answers.
here, but note: relaxing, annoying, embarrassing, exciting. Let students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback,
elicit answers from the students.
2 Organise the class into pairs to categorise the
problems. Do the first as an example. In feedback, ask Answers
students to justify their answers. 1 Laura 4 Jack
2 Tariq 5 Juana
Answers 3 Krissu 6 Manuela
Good: relaxing, exciting
Bad: annoying, boring, sad, embarrassing, scary, 6 Ask students to read again and rank the experiences.
stressful
7 Let students compare their answers in pairs. In
3 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the words feedback, elicit answers from the students. Ask students
and match the sentences to the adjectives in Exercise 1. to justify their answers.
Elicit answers to the first sentence to get students
started. Encourage students to use the context of the 8 Ask students to work individually to complete the
sentences to try to work out any words they are not sure collocations. Elicit the first answer to get them started.
of. At the end, let students check any words they are still Let students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback,
unclear about in dictionaries. elicit answers from the students.

Possible answers Answers

1 exciting / scary 1 create 4 call
2 annoying / boring / stressful 2 use 5 wait
3 scary / stressful 3 give 6 lose
4 relaxing / boring
5 annoying / stressful / embarrassing (for the Optional extra activity Ask students to write true
airline) sentences using verbs and collocates from Exercise 8.
6 exciting / scary / annoying / embarrassing

104 OUTCOMES

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 104 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 9 EXPERIENCES

9 Start by checking the meaning of festival and a 69

speech. Ask students to discuss the questions in pairs. In 1 Sorry. I’ve broken your window.
feedback, ask a few pairs to share interesting experiences 2 I forgot to tell you.
with the class. 3 I found it on the floor.
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note 4 We lost the match.
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. In 5 Have you planned your holiday?
feedback, point out any phrases worth remembering. 6 I can show you round the town.
7 He sounded sad when we spoke.
Optional extra activity Write Have you ever …? on 8 He stopped me and stole my phone.
the board. Tell students to ask you Have you ever …?
questions. If the grammar and pronunciation of the Optional extra activities Get students to find two more
question they ask is correct, answer it. If not, wait until words in the unit with each of the sounds practised
the class correct it. Encourage a teacher Q&A session. (/æ/, /ɒ/, /aʊ/ and /əʊ/). Get students to write two
collocations or phrases for each word in the box in
Speaking Exercise 13. (These activities could be set as homework.)

Aim Teacher development: using the sounds

to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity
and vocabulary review
This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
10 This is an opportunity to bring together several also reviews some key words and develops students’
parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
the language they have learnt. Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
• Ask students to work by themselves to prepare. other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
You could start by eliciting a few examples of scary or development on page 19).
embarrassing or stressful situations, just to get students Sounds and correction
thinking. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. Note the different mouth positions for these sounds. The
lips are very spread and rounded when making the short
11 When students are ready, organise them into sound /æ/. The short /ɒ/ sound is not quite a fully back
groups of four or five to take turns telling stories. The vowel. It is between low-mid and low in tongue height,
rest of the group must guess the adjective. and the lips are slightly rounded. It commonly occurs in
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note words spelt with o (pot, not, fog).
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. • When producing the diphthong /aʊ/, the lips start
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that wide and round, then close to a rounded but more closed
students used and pieces of language students didn’t position. The diphthong /əʊ/ is made with rounded lips.
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students To make /əʊ/ the lips narrow and tighten.
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
Sounds and vocabulary review Grammar reference on page 180.

Aim Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

to practise the sounds /æ/, /ɒ/, /aʊ/ and /əʊ/; to listen 1 bought 8 got
and write down words in continuous speech 2 choose 9 known
3 come 10 leave
12 68 Play the recording. Students listen and 4 cut 11 put
repeat the sounds. 5 done 12 sell
6 drove 13 stole
68 7 feel 14 took
/æ/, /ɒ/, /aʊ/, /əʊ/, /æn/, /aʊn/, /raʊ/, /rəʊ/, /læ/, /lɒ/,
/əʊl/, /gɒ/, /əʊk/ Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
1 h 2 c 3 e 4 d 5 b 6 g 7 f 8 a
13 69 Give students a moment to look at the
words in the box. Read the words out so that students Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one 1 Have you visited
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or 2 did you arrive
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to 3 have you been
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence 4 Did you enjoy
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. 5 Have you looked
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but
students should be able to write complete sentences
after two or three listenings.

9 EXPERIENCES 105

65752_u09_pp097-105.indd 105 08/12/18 12:08 PM

 10 Words for Unit 10
TRAVEL
3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with
someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
Aim other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
of key, useful vocabulary using photos students are doing the task and help if necessary.
• Use the feedback time to correct any errors students
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases made, or to point out the pronunciation of any words
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started students found hard to say.
(photo 1 is a lovely pool). Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and prompt if necessary. Optional extra activity End this stage by asking your
Depending on how much they know, students may need students to say which photos they liked and why.
help with a dictionary or teacher translation to do the Alternatively, ask students to work in pairs to find other
exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions. words they recognise in the photos. Students may well
know or guess quite a lot of words. There is no need to
2 70 Play the recording so that students can check check or teach these words, but you could select five
their answers. Let them check again with their partner or six of the more useful words they say to write up on
after they have listened once. the board.
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students to
repeat the words. If students have problems saying any Teacher development: brainstorming
of the words, model the words yourself, and encourage
students to try again. Write up some of the long, difficult At this level, students have to learn a lot of words, and
words on the board, and mark the stress (see language it is easy to forget words, especially if students are not
notes below). doing much homework, study or practice between
lessons. Brainstorming words from pictures is a way of
70 and answers getting students to remember and recycle language they
1 a lovely pool have previously learned. Here are two ideas.
2 a lot of crime 1 At the start of the lesson, ask students in pairs
3 get off the train to look at the photos but not the box of words in
4 go to the gym Exercise 1. They have two minutes to brainstorm
5 get in the car as many words and phrases as they can think of
6 an animal on the line connected with the photos. In feedback, find out who
7 vote for it has the longest or best list.
8 charge for the motorway 2 At the end, ask pairs to choose one photo and make
9 wait on the platform sentences about it. Tell them they can express facts
10 pay in cash and opinions. So, for photo 4, students might say:
11 get a haircut People are doing exercise in the gym. They are jogging.
12 cycle in a bike lane You can only see their legs. I don’t do a lot of exercise.
13 watch a live band My nearest gym is in the city centre, etc.
14 travel first class
15 taste delicious
16 park the car
17 change money

Background language notes for teachers

You could point out get in / out of a car but get on / off
a bus or train. Notice how we use on: on the line, on the
platform, on the motorway.
• Note that the phrase in the box is cycle in a bike lane,
but on a bike lane would also be quite normal.
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
words except delicious.

106 OUTCOMES

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 106 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

WHEN’S THE NEXT TRAIN? 3 Organise the class into pairs to practise. Monitor and
note how well students understand, use and pronounce
Student’s Book pages 88–89 the phrases. In feedback, check the meaning and
pronunciation of any words students had problems with.
Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students will practise telling Optional extra activity After students have practised
the time and buying tickets at train stations. saying the questions and answers in pairs, write the
words in bold in the exercise on the board. Ask students
Vocabulary Trains and stations to close books and try to remember or improvise
questions and answers including the words on the board.
Aim
to introduce and practise words and phrases used at a Listening
train station
Aim
1 Elicit the first answer from the students to get to help train students to listen for specific
them started (a train company worker is asking which information and words
ticket a passenger wants). Then organise the class into
pairs to discuss who usually says each question. Elicit 4 71 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students
and discuss answers in feedback, and check the words to read the questions and check any words, then predict
in bold. Encourage students to try to guess words from possible answers. Make sure students know there will be
the context or their own knowledge. Let them use one conversation in a station.
dictionaries to check. • Play the recording. Let students compare answers in
pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
Answers
1 T 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 T 8 P Answers
1 two second-class singles
Optional extra activity Before doing Exercise 1, ask 2 €27.10 each
students to look at the photo and brainstorm as many 3 by Visa (credit or debit card)
words or phrases as they can. Write them up on the 4 12.25
board for students to refer to later. 5 platform 6

Culture notes
71
The photo shows London Waterloo railway station. There A Hello. I’m sorry. Do you speak English?
are lots of useful words you could elicit from it: station, B: Of course. How can I help?
timetable, toilets, information desk, Way Out, Underground, A: Hi. We’d like two tickets to Groningen, please.
bus station, noticeboard, passengers, platforms, shops. B: Groningen. Certainly. Travelling today?
A: If possible, please, yes.
2 Elicit the first answer to get students started. Ask B: No problem. The next train is at twelve twenty-
students to match the questions and answers individually five, so you have lots of time.
before comparing their answers with a partner. A: Good.
B: A single or return?
Answers A: Return, I think, but we’re not sure when we’re
1 d 2 h 3 f 4 b 5 g 6 e 7 a 8 c going to come back.
B: Ah, so it’s probably best to buy two singles.
Return tickets only last one day.
Background language notes for teachers A: Oh, OK. How much are the single tickets?
B: First class is fifty-two Euros fifty and second class
single ticket = one way is twenty-seven Euros ten.
return ticket = there and back A: Two second class is fine, thank you.
discount = lower price, or money off the full price B: That’s fifty-four Euros and twenty cents, please.
platform = where you stand to wait for the train How would you like to pay?
(e.g. Platform 5) A: Is Visa OK?
direct = a train that goes to the station you want – you B: Yes, of course. Please enter your PIN. Great.
don’t have to change train Thank you.
a delay = when the train is late A: Thank you. What platform does the train leave
cash = money (compared to a credit or debit card, or a from?
cheque) B: You need platform six, and you have to change at
line = the tracks the trains go on Hilversum.
first-class = the best and most expensive ticket (compare A: Oh, really? It’s not direct?
standard or economy) B: No, there are no direct trains to Groningen from
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the here.
words except delay.

10 TRAVEL 107

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 107 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

A: I see. How long does the journey take? Background language notes for teachers
B: It’s about two and a half hours in total. You have
to wait thirty minutes in Hilversum. You arrive • In formal situations, such as train announcements,
around three o’clock. times are usually said two thirty, three forty-five, etc.
A: OK. And it’s platform six, yes? • In less formal situations, both ways of saying times are
B: Yes, platform six at twelve twenty-five. used interchangeably, i.e. two thirty or half past two.
A: OK. Thanks for your help. • Other languages have very different ways of saying
C: Did you get the tickets OK? times (e.g. half before eight, instead of half past eight),
A: Yes, it’s at twenty-five past twelve. What time is it so don’t assume that the English way of saying times is
now? Do we have time for a coffee? natural for students.
C: Yeah – plenty of time. It’s quarter to twelve. • Students should learn that we say five past, ten past,
quarter past, etc. until half past, but then switch to to,
5 71 Ask students to read the sentences and so twenty-five past nine, half past nine, then twenty-five
complete as many as they can. to ten.
• When students are ready, play the recording again. Let • If we are being very specific about time, we say nine
students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, twenty-seven (9.27) not twenty-seven past nine.
elicit answers from the students. At the end, you may • Native speakers generally say, for example, It’s quarter
wish to allow students to look at the audio script on to four, but note that that It’s a quarter to four is also
page 206 to check answers. possible.
• The ‘o’ in o’clock is usually unstressed and reduced to a
Answers weak /ə/ sound.
1 How 5 change • The words half, quarter and the times are generally
2 next 6 take stressed: It’s quarter to seven.
3 best 7 arrive
4 enter 8 help Optional extra activity Do a whole-class drill before
asking students to work in pairs in Exercise 8. This helps
Optional extra activity Write the sentences below on to reinforce form and practise pronunciation. You could
the board. Ask students to translate them into their own take in a kitchen clock, with hands that are easy to move,
language. Then ask them to translate them back into or a cardboard clock with moveable hands, or just write
English and compare the English to the original. six different times on the board (e.g. 8.00, 8.30, 4.45, etc.).
How long does the journey take? Show or point to a time, and model how to say it. Ask the
The drive usually takes about an hour and a half. whole class to repeat. Point out the pronunciation and
It usually takes me half an hour on the train. form. Once students have repeated chorally after your
It took me three hours to get here today! model, show or point to times without speaking, and
ask individuals to say the times. Once they have done
6 Organise the class into groups of four or five to this, point to times, and say, for example, three forty-five.
discuss the questions. In feedback, elicit any interesting Students must say the times the other way – quarter
views, and check the meaning and pronunciation of any to four.
words students had problems with.
8 Ask students in pairs to practise saying the times.
Optional extra activity Do a live listening. Describe a Remind them of the two different ways of saying the
favourite train journey you once took. Ask students to times, and elicit the two ways of saying 3.45 (quarter
listen and think of a question to ask you about it at to four and three forty-five) to get students started. As
the end. students speak, monitor and listen for errors, and correct
students if they have problems.
Developing conversations
9 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
Telling the time discuss the questions. In feedback, elicit any interesting
Aim answers to share with the class, and correct the form or
to introduce and practise ways of telling the time pronunciation of any times students had problems with.

7 Read through the information in the box as a class. Pronunciation

• Ask students to match the times to the pictures. Elicit
the first match as an example to get students started. Aim
Let students compare their ideas in pairs. to practise /tə/, the weak pronunciation of to, in
sentences
Answers
1 f 2 a 3 d 4 b 5 c 6 g 7 e 8 h 10 72 Play the recording. Ask students to listen and
notice the weak pronunciation. In feedback, ask students
to say what they heard.
• Play the recording again. Students listen and write
what they hear. Let students compare their answers in
pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.

108 OUTCOMES

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 108 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

Answers GETTING AROUND

In all these sentences to is pronounced /tə/.
Student’s Book pages 90–91
72
1 Quarter to seven. Communicative outcomes
2 Five to twelve. In this two-page spread, students read about taxis
3 Twenty-five to three. and talk about transport problems and ways of
4 Ten to ten. making their town or city better.
5 Talk to me.
6 I’d love to go to Thailand. Vocabulary Transport
7 We have to change here.
8 I don’t have to go to work today. Aim
to introduce and practise ways of talking about
11 72 Play the recording again. Students listen and transport
repeat. Make sure they are attempting weak sounds.
1 Start by reading out the words in the box, and
Conversation practice pointing out the pronunciation. Elicit the first match to
get students started, then ask them to work individually
Aim to do the matching task.
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity 2 Let students compare their answers to Exercise 1 in
pairs and discuss what they knew and didn’t know.
12 This is an opportunity to bring together several • In feedback, use mime to check the words (e.g. mime
parts of the lesson, and for students to practise using all waiting at a bus stop, locking your bike, etc.). At the end,
the language they have learnt. allow students to use dictionaries if they are still unsure
• Ask students to work in A and B pairs. First, A must of any words.
find File 8 on page 195 and think about how to say the
information, while B must prepare questions to ask. Set a Answers
time limit and monitor to help with ideas and vocabulary. 1 bus 3 train 5 taxi
2 car 4 bike 6 flight
13 Ask students to practise. You could model this
activity by acting out a conversation with a reliable
student first, or by asking one well-prepared pair to Background language notes for teachers
model their conversation for the class.
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new • Note get in / out of the car / taxi but get on / off the
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback. bus / train.
• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language • Note you can catch a bus / train but not a taxi or a
that students used, and pieces of language students didn’t flight.
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students • Note a bus stop (or station if it is the main centre) but
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. a train / railway station and a taxi rank.

14 Once students have practised the first 3 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
conversation, tell them to change roles (or mix pairs) to discuss the questions. Monitor and note any interesting
prepare and practise the second conversation. things students say. In feedback, write up any useful
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new phrases you heard on the board for students to notice.
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language Optional extra activity Ask one person in each group
that students used and pieces of language students didn’t to lead the discussion in Exercise 3. It is their job to ask
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students questions and make sure each student contributes.
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
Teacher development: organising a group
speaking activity
18 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.

Teacher development: using the video Many sections in the Student’s Book end with a
personalised student discussion in which students say
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in what they think or share personal experiences. Here are
various ways: some things to think about.
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice • A good group size is four (or five, in case of odd
2 instead of the listening activity in some units, numbers in your class). Any larger and not everybody will
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first get the chance to say much.
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
before having a go themselves.
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.
10 TRAVEL 109

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 109 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

• Ask students to choose what to discuss. In Exercise 3 Answers

above, there are 22 questions. Students don’t need to ask 1 There are 320 routes on the London taxi course,
all of them. Tell them to choose which questions or set of only 25% of people pass the exam.
questions they have most to talk about. 2 The hippocampus is the part of the brain
• Make one student in each group the chair or question- connected to memory and learning
master. It is their job to ask questions, encourage 3 In Uzbekistan, anyone with a car can be a taxi
contributions, and move the discussion on. Change driver.
question masters each time you do a group discussion. 4 In South Africa in the 1990s, 2,000 people died in
• Make one student a secretary. It is their job to note or taxi wars.
remember what people say and tell the class what was 5 A company in Puebla has pink taxis for women
discussed in feedback. only.
• Use time limits and preparation time. If you give 6 In 1930 a 7,000-mile taxi trip cost £300.
students two minutes to think about what to say and 7 The couple wanted to go to Olden but went to
go round to help with preparation, students will be more Halden, 550 kilometres further away.
confident about speaking. If you set a five-minute time 8 Seoul provides a translating service into
limit to the discussion, students will get on with the 17 languages.
activity and have more purpose. 9 Britain has some of the worst transport problems
• Monitor, listen carefully, and feed back on errors in Europe but is number 1 for taxis.
or good language use. Students need to know that
practising speaking is important and that you are there Optional extra activity Write some difficult words from
to assess and comment on their performance. the text on the board (see language notes below). Ask
students to find and underline the words in the article
Reading and guess the meaning from the context.

Aim Background language notes for teachers

to help train students to read for a general
understanding and to scan read Note these difficult words in the article:
negotiate a price = talk together and agree on a price
4 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to pick (somebody) up (in a taxi) = stop so that somebody
look at the title. Ask: What is the article about? What can get in (the taxi)
information is in the article? provide a service = do something that people need,
• Ask students to read the article and decide which usually for money, e.g. provide a cleaning service
paragraph is not true. a translator = somebody who rewrites a text or
information in a different language
5 Organise the class into groups of three or four to reliable = do what they say they will do
discuss their ideas, and briefly elicit possible answers. Ask
students to check in File 10 on page 195. Culture notes

Answers • The hippocampus /hɪpə(ʊ)ˈkampəs/ plays important

Paragraph 3 is not true. roles in the consolidation of information from short-term
A photo of the ‘Ferrari taxi’ was shown on the memory to long-term memory and spatial navigation.
internet, but the taxi wasn’t real. Someone used • Tashkent is the capital of Uzbekistan, a landlocked
image-editing software to create the photo and country in central Asia which was once part of the
then they invented the story about how much the Soviet Union.
taxi cost. • Muscat is the capital of Oman, an Arab country on the
south-eastern coast of the Arabian Peninsula.
6 Ask students to look at the nine things, places and • Located southeast of Mexico City, Puebla is a large city
numbers. Elicit what 320 might refer to in the first item. famous for the dish mole poblano.
Then ask students to compare their ideas in pairs. • Traditional London taxis are black and designed to look
similar to taxis from the 1950s. They are often called
7 Once students have discussed what they think, cabs, black cabs or taxicabs by Londoners.
ask them to scan the text to check their answers. In
feedback, elicit answers from the students. Ask students Teacher development: scanning a text
to justify their answers by saying where they found the
information in the text. Scanning a text is a specific skill and it is worth
instructing students in how to do it. They don’t have to
read the whole text again in detail. To answer question
1 in Exercise 6, they need to quickly scan the text to find
320 and 25%, and then read the words around them to
find the information they need. To answer question 7,
they scan for 550 and Olden, etc.

110 OUTCOMES

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 110 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

Grammar Possible answers

There is too much traffic. / There are too many cars.
too much, too many and not enough There is too much pollution.
Aim There are too many children on the bus. They are
to introduce and practise too much, too many and not making too much noise.
enough There is too much luggage on the bus.
The boy is carrying too many pizzas. He is going
8 Read through the information in the box as a class. too fast.
Then organise the class into pairs to complete the rules.
Monitor and check how well students do the task.
• In feedback, elicit the full rules. Then ask students to For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
check in the Grammar reference on page 181. Grammar reference on page 181.

Answers Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference

1 too much 2 too many 3 not enough 1 too many
2 too
3 too much
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar 4 too much
reference on page 181. 5 too many, too much
6 enough, too
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
1 is 3 are 5 are
2 are 4 is 6 is Speaking
Aim
Background language notes for teachers to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity; to
• We use too much + uncountable nouns and too practise using too much, too many and not enough
many + plural countable nouns to say that the amount
or number of something is higher than necessary or 11 This is an opportunity to bring together several
desirable. We want less or fewer. parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
• We use not enough + uncountable or plural countable the language they have learnt.
nouns to say that the amount or number of something is • Ask students to work individually to prepare ideas.
lower than necessary or desirable. We want more. You could elicit one or two ideas to get students started.
• A common problem is for students to misuse these Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. Then
terms with adjectives. These are some typical mistakes. organise them into groups of four or five to discuss ideas.
✗ I am too much tired. ✓ I am too tired. In feedback, ask different groups to say what they found
✗ I am not enough clever. ✓ I am not clever enough. out about each other’s town or cities.
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
9 Set up the task by eliciting the first correct option as down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
an example. Ask students to work individually to choose • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
the options. Let students compare their answers in pairs students used and pieces of language students didn’t
before checking the correct answers in feedback. quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
Answers
1 aren’t enough Web research activity Ask students to research taxis in
2 too many English-speaking cities. Ask them to choose a city (e.g.
3 is New York) and find out five interesting facts (e.g. what
4 aren’t local people call taxis, how much they cost, what colour
5 many they are).
6 time

10 Organise the class into groups of four or five to

say sentences about the picture. Monitor and prompt,
and check how well students are using the language. In
feedback, find out which group has the most, and point
out any errors or problems you noticed.

10 TRAVEL 111

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 111 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

WHERE’S THE BEST PLACE TO GO? 3 Organise the class into new pairs. Give students a
minute to prepare what to say before they start. Pairs
Student’s Book pages 92–93 change roles to act out the conversation a second time.
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
Communicative outcomes down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
In this two-page spread, students practise talking • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
about places to go, using superlative forms. students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
Developing conversations better ways of saying what they were trying to say.

Where’s the best place? Optional extra activity Extend this activity into a mingle.
Aim Ask students to stand up, walk round, and interview
to practise asking for and giving recommendations three or four different people.

1 Read through the information in the box as a class. Listening

• Ask students to match the questions to the
suggestions. Elicit the first match as an example to Aim
get students started. Let students compare their ideas to give students practice in listening for gist and for
in pairs. specific words

Answers 4 73 Set the situation. Ask: What do you think the

1 b 2 h 3 d 4 f 5 c 6 a 7 e 8 g guests say? What does the receptionist say? Make sure
students understand the questions.
2 Set up the activity by discussing the meaning of • Play the recording. Students listen and note their
bike lanes as a class. Point out that there are clues in the answers. Let them compare their answers with a partner
context (see Teacher development below). before discussing as a class.
• Ask students to discuss the words in pairs. Have a brief
feedback session. Use definitions or translations to check Answers
the meanings, or ask students to check in dictionaries. Where’s the best place to eat? (Captain Nemo’s)
Where’s the best place to go shopping? (a market in
Background language notes for teachers the main square)

bike lanes = parts of the road marked for bikes

atmosphere = the feeling of a place 73
live bands = if a group of musicians play ‘live’, it means A: Good evening, sir, madam. How can I help you?
they are playing and you are listening now (i.e. not a B: Hi. We’d like to go out for dinner. Where’s the best
recording) place to eat?
(exchange) rate = e.g. $1 = 0.88 euros A: Try Captain Nemo’s. It’s a lovely little restaurant
selection = choice (e.g. a selection of ten different types by the sea. It’s not the cheapest place in town,
of breakfast cereals) but the fish there is really excellent.
(the hotel is) good value for money = the room, food and C: Oh, that sounds great. Do we need to book?
place is good for the price you pay A: I can do that for you, if you like. What time would
• Note the stress is on the first syllable of all the words you like your table?
in bold except selection. B: About half past eight?
C: Yes, that sounds fine. What’s the easiest way to
Teacher development: working out get there? Can we walk?
A: Not really. It takes about half an hour to walk
meaning from context there. It’s probably best to take a taxi. Would you
Encourage students to use the context of the sentences like me to book one for you?
to work out what the words mean. For example, point C: Yes, please. That’s great.
out that the meaning of bike lanes is shown by the B: Oh, there’s one other thing, before I forget. We’d
following: like to buy some presents. Where’s the best place
1 Students know this is a plural, countable compound to go shopping?
noun. A: There’s a nice market in the main square
2 Students already know what bike means. tomorrow. They have some nice things. Try
3 They know that you find bike lanes in a park and that there. It starts at around eight and goes on until
you go cycling there, and that it is safe to go cycling about two.
there. B: It sounds perfect. Thanks for your help.
A: No problem. It’s my pleasure.

5 73 Ask students to read the sentences and

choose the correct options. Let them compare with
a partner.

112 OUTCOMES

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 112 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

• Play the recording again. Students listen and check. Let Background language notes for teachers
them compare their answers with a partner again before
discussing as a class. • Superlatives, like comparatives, can be tricky for
students because English has two forms. Romance
Answers languages like French and Spanish just use the
1 can I 6 easiest equivalent of most (so watch out for errors like most big
2 We’d like 7 takes and most busy) while many Germanic languages just
3 the cheapest 8 Would use the -er form (so a German might say intelligenter,
4 Do we need 9 in for example).
5 What time 10 It’s my • There is a slightly confusing overlap of rules when
it comes to two-syllable adjectives. When two-syllable
6 Organise the class into new pairs or small groups. adjectives end with -y, they take -est (busiest, happiest,
Give students a minute to read through the questions etc.) but, when they don’t, they take most (most boring,
and decide which ones to discuss, and think about what most useful, etc.). However, some adjectives break these
to say. rules (e.g. we say narrowest but NOT most narrow, but
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note commonest and most common are both correct).
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. • When we use -est, the stress is on the adjective, so
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that the and -est are weakly stressed, e.g. the biggest (-est is
students used and pieces of language students didn’t pronounced /ɪst/).
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students • When we use most, the stress is on most and the
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. adjective, but the adjective has the main stress, e.g. the
most boring.
Optional extra activity Extend this activity into a survey.
Ask pairs to choose three questions they would like to 8 Ask students to work individually to complete the
ask. Then tell them to stand up, walk round and ask their conversations. Elicit the first answer to get them started.
questions. After five minutes, ask students to sit down Organise the class into pairs to check their answers.
in pairs again and to collate their information. Ask pairs • In feedback, elicit answers and ask students to justify
what they found out about their classmates. their answers by referring back to the rules in the
grammar box.
Grammar Superlatives
Answers
Aim 1 the quickest
to introduce and practise superlatives 2 the most beautiful
3 the cheapest, the most expensive
7 Read through the information in the box as a class. 4 the most dangerous
Ask students to complete the table. Then ask students to 5 the worst
check in the Grammar reference on page 181. 6 the most difficult

Answers
good better best For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
bad worse worst Grammar reference on page 182.
fast faster fastest
small smaller smallest Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
big bigger biggest 1 the best, better
strange strange strangest 2 hottest, hotter
hot hotter hottest 3 the oldest, older, the youngest
early earlier earliest 4 the quietest, louder
boring more boring most boring 5 smaller, biggest
interesting more interesting most interesting 6 the most boring, better

For further practice, see Exercise 1 in the Speaking

Grammar reference on page 181.
Aim
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference to practise language from the lesson; to practise
1 the hottest 5 worst forming and using superlatives
2 most 6 easiest
3 loudest 7 nicest 9 This is an opportunity to bring together several
4 busiest 8 tallest parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt.
• Ask students to work individually first to think about
how to form the superlatives in the questions. Have a
brief feedback session to check answers.

10 TRAVEL 113

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 113 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

Answers 75
1 Where’s the best place to live in your town / 1 I booked a return ticket.
city? 2 You can’t park the car near here.
2 And where’s the worst place to live? 3 Their flight’s at half past two.
3 Where’s the oldest part of your town / city? 4 The train journey took too long.
4 What’s the easiest way to get around your 5 Which route do you prefer?
town / city? 6 First-class seats aren’t good value.
5 Where’s the cheapest place to eat? 7 It’s the worst place in the world.
6 What’s the biggest city in your country? 8 Would you like me to ask?
7 What’s the most beautiful part of your country?
8 What are the most popular places for tourists? Optional extra activities Get students to find two more
9 Who’s the most famous person from your words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (/ʊ/,
country? /u:/, /ɜː/ and /aː/). Get students to write two collocations
10 What’s the most delicious food from your country? or phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 12. (These
activities could be set as homework.)
10 Organise students into groups of four or five to ask
and answer the questions. Once students have asked and Teacher development: using the sounds
answered their questions, encourage them to discuss
whether they agree with each other or not.
and vocabulary review
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. also reviews some key words and develops students’
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
students used and pieces of language students didn’t Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. development on page 19).
Sounds and correction
Optional extra activity Extend this practice into a mingle • It’s important students distinguish between long and
in which students have to interview three or four people short vowel sounds. The sounds /ae/ and /a:/ can be
while walking round the class. distinguished by touching the tip of your tongue as you
say the sound – the tongue is at the front of the mouth
Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable for /ae/ and the back for /a:/. Also exaggerate a little the
worksheet on page 239 can be used at this point or at lengthening of the sound /a:/.
the end of the unit for further practice. • The long sound /ɜ:/ differs from /a:/ in that the lips
are more rounded and less loose when making the latter
Sounds and vocabulary review sound.
• The sounds /ʊ/ and /uː/ are pronounced with rounded
Aim lips. The sound /uː/ is longer. Compare the short sound in
to practise the sounds /ʊ/, /u:/, /ɜː/ and /aː/; to listen pull with the long sound in pool.
and write down words in continuous speech
For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
11 74 Play the recording. Students listen and Grammar reference on page 182.
repeat the sounds.
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
74 1 too many cars
/wʊ/, /wɜː/, /haː/, /ʊk/, /aːk/, /gʊ/, /dʒɜː/, /fɜː/, /du:/, 2 too many people
/paː/, /ru:/ 3 the easiest way
4 too much rubbish
12 75 Give students a moment to look at the 5 not enough
words in the box. Read the words out so that students 6 fastest
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to 1 cheapest 5 nearest
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence 2 quickest 6 most exciting
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. 3 funniest 7 hottest
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could 4 most interesting 8 nicest
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but
students should be able to write complete sentences Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
after two or three listenings. 1 the 5 the
2 much 6 really
3 enough 7 worst
4 lots 8 too

114 OUTCOMES

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 114 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

VIDEO 5: BARCELONA’S STREET LIFE Canaletes, a famous fountain, the Palace of the Virreina
and the Liceu Theatre. La Boqueria market is off the
Student’s Book page 94 street. It is full of tourists day and night.

Aim 3 This exercise offers students the chance to relate

to look at a different culture and way of life; to the topic of the video to their own experiences, ideas and
improve students’ ability to follow and understand opinions.
fast speech in a video extract; to practise fast speech • Give students time to read the questions then put
using strong stresses them in pairs or small groups and give them seven or
eight minutes to ask and answer them.
1 Lead in to the topic by asking students to look at • Monitor and listen to each group. Help with
the photo. Ask: What can you see? (a street performer, pronunciation and ideas if necessary.
a crowd, a silver hat and jacket, some fruit on a table). • When most students have finished, stop the class
Organise the class into pairs or small groups to discuss and give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of
the questions. In a brief feedback session, elicit students’ the things students tried to say for the whole class or
ideas and write up interesting ideas or pieces of by asking students to correct or fill in gaps in sentences
language on the board. you’ve written on the board, based on what you heard
students saying.
Possible answers
Kinds of street performers: buskers (people singing 4 19 Ask students to read the sentences carefully
or playing music), performance artists (particularly and order them as best they can. Elicit the first answer
the ‘living statues’ like the person in the picture), to get students started. Ask students to watch the video
street artists (who paint in or on the street), jugglers, to check ideas. Let them compare answers in pairs before
tightrope walkers, acrobats, clowns, balloon twisting, discussing as a class.
fire breathing, celebrity lookalikes (who you pay to
pose with for photos) Answers
1 b 2 c 3 a 4 f 5 e 6d
2 19Give students time to read through the
sentences first. Check that students understand the 5 This exercise offers students a further chance to
words. As students watch the video, they should choose relate the topic to their own personal experiences.
true or false. Let them compare their answers in pairs • Organise the class into groups of four or five to
before discussing as a class. prepare lists. In feedback, elicit the lists of different
groups and decide which is best, or open the activity into
Answers a class discussion in which you make a definitive class
1 F (we see all except the woman performing list of the three best streets and places.
magic) • Monitor and listen to each group. Help with
2 T pronunciation and ideas if necessary.
3 F (many of them are foreign: Dutch, Scottish) • When most students have finished, stop the class
and give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of
Optional extra activity Notice the adjectives used to the things students tried to say for the whole class or
describe the city. You could explain or translate them for by asking students to correct or fill in gaps in sentences
students. you’ve written on the board, based on what you heard
• Words that mean a lot is happening: lively, vibrant. students saying.
• Words that mean a place has a special feeling
of life and energy: alive, vital. Note that the correct Understanding fast speech
pronunciation of vital in English is /ˈvaɪt(ə)l/, not as
pronounced by the Dutch speaker on the video. 6 20 Tell students to work on their own for a few
• Word that means it makes you feel creative: inspiring. minutes to practise saying the extract. Then play the
recording. Students listen and compare what they said.
Culture notes
7 Encourage students to practise saying the extract
Barcelona is the second largest city in Spain, and the several times.
capital of the region of Catalonia.
• Las Ramblas (La Rambla in Catalan, the language 20
spoken in Barcelona) is a tree-lined avenue through the Speaker 1: There is something very special about
centre of Barcelona which leads to Plaça de Catalunya, Barcelona, like any time you go out of your house
a large square generally considered to be at the city’s there is always something going on, you’ll always find
centre. Along the avenue are kiosks selling newspapers a friend on the streets, it’s where living is … you’re not
and souvenirs, other kiosks selling flowers, street traders in your place you’re on the streets.
and performers, and pavement cafés and bars. Notable
sights include a mosaic by Joan Miró, the Font de

10 TRAVEL 115

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 115 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 10 TRAVEL

Speaker 2: You can go out on the street at night and REVIEW 5

its always lively. It’s never … nobody in the Ramblas,
for example, they are always … every hour of the day Student’s Book page 95
there’s life. I came here, I felt somehow better than in
Amsterdam, more alive, more vital … er understand? Aim
Vital? Er yeah, that makes it more enjoyable for me to consolidate vocabulary and grammar from Units 9
and inspiring too. and 10
Musician 1: It’s a very nice place, because, erm, in the
Ramblas you can find, er, I don’t know, theatre, music Answers
from Argentina, from Spain, from Africa, from all 1
the world. 1 ever 5 ever
Musician 2: Things that on the street happen, will 2 the 6 too
never happen in the theatre, for example if we play 3 ago 7 much
and like 10, 15 people start to dance then you think 4 most 8 enough
like, yeah this is, this is beautiful you know? 2
Las Ramblas is the street in Barcelona and I think in 1 Have you ever been, I went
Europe and maybe in the world that like, you’re gonna 2 Has your son seen, He saw
be entertained, no matter how, I mean if you walk 3 Have they visited, they came
past by the flower shops, I mean the way they build 4 Has she met, We had
it up is beautiful. Even the street is decorated. I mean, 5 Have you tried, I didn’t like
you get entertained, it’s worth coming to Barcelona. 3
Mime artist: It’s a way of life, Ramblas is … you have 1 That’s her best book.
everything, you have traffic of people, you have 2 He has / ‘s done this hundreds of times before.
tourists, you have thieves, you have performers. 3 The easiest way to get there is by taxi.
Ramblas is everything. It’s a vibrant life, yeah, it’s a 4 I’ve never read anything by Günter Grass.
way of life. Truly a way of life, I love it. 5 There’s not enough time to do it now.
6 There are too many guns in our society.
7 The Alhambra is the most beautiful building
in Spain.
8 I played a really good computer game yesterday.
9 There aren’t enough places to park in the city
centre.
10 His books are much too long.
6
1 j 3 g 5 c 7 e 9 d
2 a 4 b 6 i 8 f 10 h
7
problems: feel ill, hurt myself, lose my bags, make a
mess, steal money
trains and stations: buy a single, enter your PIN, first
class, get a discount, pay in cash
8
1 get off 5 miss
2 take 6 break
3 arrive 7 charge
4 book 8 lose
9
1 died 5 cycle
2 accident 6 motorways
3 driver 7 lanes
4 public 8 popular

76 and answers to Exercise 4

1 She’s one of the funniest people I know.
2 I’ve never been there, but I’d love to go.
3 There’s too much pollution and there are too
many cars on the road.
4 I visited them in Madrid a few weeks ago.
5 There aren’t enough chairs here for everyone.
6 I need your help. Something terrible has
happened.

116 OUTCOMES

65752_u10_pp106-116.indd 116 08/12/18 12:09 PM

 11 Words for Unit 11
FOOD
3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with
someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
Aim other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
of key, useful vocabulary using photos students are doing the task and help if necessary.
• Use the feedback time to correct any errors students
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases made, or to point out the pronunciation of any words
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started students found hard to say.
(photo 1 is a lot of spices). Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and prompt if necessary. Optional extra activity End this stage by asking your
Depending on how much they know, students may need students to say which photos they liked and why.
help with a dictionary or teacher translation to do the
exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions.

2 77 Play the recording so that students can check

their answers. Let them check again with their partner
after they have listened once.
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students
to repeat the words. If students have any problems
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress
(see language notes below).

77 and answers
1 a lot of spices
2 order food online
3 a cookery book
4 ask for the bill
5 fried chicken
6 buy some sweets
7 steak and chips
8 look at the menu
9 a lot of garlic
10 want to lose weight
11 a pregnant mum
12 cut some onion
13 tomato soup
14 sell soft drinks
15 a vegetable dish
16 a fruit dessert

Background language notes for teachers

• Many of these phrases need to be learnt as fixed

collocations, their meaning reinforced with a visual and
a mime. Collocations like put on make-up and set the
table are unlikely to translate exactly into L1 so it is best
to learn them as fixed expressions rather than separate
verbs and nouns.
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
words except: dessert, tomato.
• Note the unusual pronunciation: vegetable
/ˈvɛdʒtəbəl/, onion /ˈʌnjən/, weight /weɪt/.

11 FOOD 117

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 117 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

ARE YOU READY TO ORDER? Answers

1 customer
Student’s Book pages 98–99 2 waiter
3 waiter
Communicative outcomes 4 waiter
In this two-page spread, students will practise 5 waiter
ordering in a restaurant. 6 customer

Speaking Optional extra activity Ask students to read out the

dialogue in pairs, taking turns to play both roles. Practice
Aim makes perfect. Ask students to cover the dialogues and
to introduce the topic and get students talking try to remember or improvise them.

1 Organise the class into groups of four or five to Listening

discuss the questions. In feedback, elicit answers and
comment on any interesting things students say. Use the Aim
feedback time to correct any errors students made, or to to help train students to listen for specific
comment on examples of good language use. information

Optional extra activity If your students are in or from 4 78 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students
the same city, write the names of five well-known to look at the photo and ask questions to focus on what
local restaurants on the board and ask groups to order they can see. Make sure students have time to read the
them from 1 to 5. Students can decide criteria, e.g. best questions.
to worst, cheapest to most expensive, most to least • Play the recording. Let students compare their answers
popular, etc. in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.

Vocabulary Restaurants Answers

a They haven’t booked, they don’t understand the
Aim menu, and the fish is finished.
to introduce and practise words and phrases used in b a bird similar to chicken, and the fish, then a steak
restaurants because the fish is finished
c Yes, they say it was delicious.
2 Elicit the first missing word (a table) from the d No, because service is included.
students to get them started. Then organise the class
into pairs to complete the dialogues. Elicit the answers
in feedback. 78
A: Hello. I’m sorry. Do you speak English?
Answers B: A little, yes.
1 a table, booked A: Great. Can we have a table for two, please?
2 ready, decide B: Have you booked?
3 order, the soup A: No, I’m afraid we haven’t.
4 course, like B: Ah. We are very busy tonight. Can you wait
5 dessert, the ice cream ten minutes?
6 the bill, service A: Yes.
…
C: Can we see the menu, please?
Background language notes for teachers B: Of course.
C: Ah. You don’t have English menus?
Note that many of these phrases are quite fixed (Are you B: We don’t. I’m sorry, but I can help you. This is
ready to order? Can we have the bill, please?) and need to chicken, this is fish – but I don’t know the name
be learned as whole phrases. of the fish in English – this is steak, this is soup
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the and this is a bird – I don’t know the name – it’s
words except dessert. similar to a chicken, but smaller. It’s very, very
• It is important to use a positive, rising intonation when good. I recommend this.
asking the waiter’s questions. C: Oh. I’d like to try that, please.
B: Certainly, madam. And for you, sir?
3 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the question. A: The fish, please.
In feedback, elicit answers. …
B: I’m sorry, sir, but the fish is finished. We don’t
have any more.

118 OUTCOMES

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 118 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

A: Oh, right. Well, can I get a steak, please? Well Background language notes for teachers
cooked. No blood.
B: As you prefer. • Arguably, I’d like … is a little more polite and tentative
… than the other functional phrases used to place an order.
B: Can I take your plates? However, they are all equally common. It is important
C: Thank you. That was delicious. to say please. English lacks a polite form, so missing out
B: Would you like any dessert? please can make a request seem abrupt.
A: No, I’m fine. I’m really full. Can we have the bill, • Note the strong stress in these sentences is on the
please? thing being ordered (soup, chicken, etc.). The intonation
B: Of course. One moment. pattern is important, so make sure students attempt it
… when repeating the recording. The intonation should
B: Here you are. start high, and it should rise at the end over the word
A: Thanks. Does this include service? please. A flat intonation sounds rude.
B: Yes, we add 15 per cent.
C: OK. Thank you. Teacher development: listening to slow
then fast versions of natural speech
5 78 Ask students to work in pairs and discuss
what the words refer to. Note that while the first read through on the recording
• When students are ready, play the recording again. Let is fairly slow, but still linked, the second has normal
students discuss their answers again in their pairs. In elision and linking. Students may hear I’ll-lave-the-soup-
feedback, elicit answers from the students. At the end, please as one chunk, and the ’d in I’d like becomes barely
you may wish to allow students to look at the audio noticeable.
script on page 207 to check the answers. • Get your students to listen to both fast and then slow
versions BEFORE they attempt to say their own versions.
Answers Don’t expect them to try to say both fast and slow – just
The restaurant is very busy. to hear the fast version then try to say the slow version.
The meal was delicious.
The fish is finished. 8 Ask students to put the parts of the conversation
The people are full. in the correct order. Elicit the first part to get students
The man wants the steak well-cooked. started. Let students compare their ideas in pairs.
Students may need to use dictionaries to check unknown
6 Organise the class into groups of four or five. Ask words.
students to prepare their ideas individually before they
discuss the sentences in their group. 9 80 Play the recording. Students listen and check
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new their answers. Ask students to practise the conversations
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback. in pairs. Monitor and correct any errors of form or
• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language pronunciation.
that students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students Answers
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. Conversation 1
1 c 2 a 3 e 4 b 5 f 6 d
Optional extra activity Here are some other things to Conversation 2
discuss – write them on the board if fast finishers want 1 c 2 a 3 e 4 d 5 f 6 b
to continue their discussions.
Home cooking is better than eating out.
Only tip if the service is good. 80
It’s better to eat out at lunchtime than in the evening. 1
A: Are you ready to order?
Developing conversations B: Yes. Thanks. I’ll have the salad for starters, please.
A: Certainly. And for your main course?
Ordering food and drink B: Can I get the chicken, please?
Aim A: I’m afraid the chicken’s finished.
to introduce and practise ways of ordering food and B: Really? Oh. OK. Well, can I have the fish then,
drink please?
2
7 79 Read through the information in the box as a C: Would you like any dessert?
class. Then play the recording. Students listen and repeat. D: Yes, please. Can I get the ice cream?
C: Of course. And for you, madam?
79 E: I’m really full. I’ll just have a coffee, please.
1 For starters, I’ll have the soup, please. C: With milk – or without?
2 I’d like the chicken, please. E: Without, please, so just black.
3 Can I get a steak, please?
4 Can I have the ice cream?

11 FOOD 119

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 119 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

Conversation practice WHAT’S THIS ON THE MENU?

Aim Student’s Book pages 100–101
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students talk about food.
10 This is an opportunity to bring together several
parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all Vocabulary Food
the language they have learnt.
• Ask students to work in A and B pairs. First, they must Aim
decide on their roles and prepare. Direct A (the customer) to introduce and practise kinds of food
to the information in File 9 on page 195. Ask B to
prepare questions. 1 Start by reading out the words in the box, and
pointing out the pronunciation. You could ask students
11 When students are ready, they should use the to listen and repeat.
guide to practise the conversation. You could model this • Ask students to match the kinds of food in the box to
by acting out a conversation with a reliable student the photos. Elicit an example to get students started. Let
first, or by asking one well-prepared pair to model their them compare their answers in pairs. At the end, allow
conversation for the class. Encourage students to change students to use dictionaries if they are still unsure of
roles and try out the conversation two or three times. any words.
Practice makes perfect.
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new Answers
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback. a vegetables f beans
• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language b nuts g seafood
that students used and pieces of language students c fish h fruit
didn’t quite use correctly during the activity. Show d dairy products i meat
students better ways of saying what they were trying e drinks
to say.
Optional extra activity You could brainstorm words
21 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM. students already know before doing the matching
activity. Ask students to look at the photos but cover the
Teacher development: using the video words. Tell them to say all the words they already know.

The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in Background language notes for teachers
various ways:
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice • Milk, cheese and butter are dairy products.
2 instead of the listening activity in some units, • Prawns, crab and lobster are seafood.
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first • Fish, fruit, meat and seafood are uncountable nouns.
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some • Note the stress is on the first syllable of all these
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way words.
before having a go themselves. • Note the pronunciation of vegetables which is often
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise. pronounced in three syllables: /ˈvɛdʒtəbəlz/.

2 Organise the class into new pairs. Ask them to look

at the example, and explain the task. Elicit a possible
answer for 2. Monitor and help with ideas as students
talk. In feedback, ask pairs to share their sentences.

Answers
2 a cream 5 d carrots
3 f wine 6 b lemons
4 g eggs 7 e tomatoes

3 Ask students to work in pairs to match the

individual foods in the photos to the words in Exercise 2.
Elicit answers in feedback. At this stage, explain or
translate any words student are unsure of, or let them
look in dictionaries.

120 OUTCOMES

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 120 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

Answers 3
photo a: potatoes, onions, tomatoes, spinach, beans A: What are you going to have?
photo d: cream, milk, cheese, butter B: I can’t decide.
photo h: apples, oranges A: Me neither.
photo i: lamb C: Hmm. it all looks delicious. What about the
mussels?
4 Organise students into pairs to do this activity. The A: Oh, I don’t like seafood.
idea is that students take turns to describe the foods in C: Really? I do! I love it.
their list using language from Exercise 2. Give them time B: Me too. Don’t you like any seafood?
to study their lists on pages 194 and 196, and help them A: Not really. I’ve eaten prawns before, but I
prepare. Note that they can also use mime or draw. prefer meat.
• As students speak, monitor, note errors, and give B: OK.
feedback on language use. C: OK. I’ve decided. Talking of prawns, I’m going to
have the prawn curry.
Listening B: Hmm. Good choice. I saw Jamie Oliver on TV last
night and he made a prawn curry.
Aim C: Oh yeah. I saw that too. Maybe that’s why I
to give students practice in listening for gist and for thought of it!
specific words B: Yeah.
A: OK, I think I’ll have the steak.
5 81 Start by setting up the situation. Give B: Oh, right – decisions, decisions. OK. I’m going to
students time to read the five sentences a–e. have the lamb.
• Play the recording. Students listen and match each
conversation to one sentence. Let them compare their
answers with a partner before discussing as a class. Culture notes
Answers Jamie Oliver is a world-famous, British celebrity chef. He
1 a 2 b 3 d has made numerous TV programmes and written many
cookbooks. In the UK, he has opened a chain of restaurants
81 and leads campaigns to improve the diet of children.
1
A: So where do you want to eat? 6 81 Start by reading through the first
B: I don’t mind. I eat anything. conversation and asking if students can remember any
A: Yes, me too. missing words. Don’t confirm or reject anything at this
C: Actually. I don’t eat meat. stage. Let students read the other conversations and
A: Oh, really? guess which words are missing.
C: Yeah, but if the restaurant has some fish or • Play the recording again. Students listen and check
vegetable dishes, that’s OK. their ideas, completing the sentences with two words
A: Have you been to the place on the corner? in each space. Let them compare their answers with a
C: No. partner before discussing as a class.
B: Me neither. What’s it like?
A: It’s nice. It’s Italian – more or less. Answers
B: OK. That’s fine with me. 1 vegetable dishes 6 ever had
C: Me too. 2 it like 7 I’ve eaten
2 3 with me 8 that’s why
A: Did you go away anywhere in the summer? 4 too far 9 decisions, decisions
B: Yeah, we went to Australia. 5 the food
A: Really? I’d really like to go there.
C: Oh, I wouldn’t.
A: No? Why not? Teacher development: playing and pausing
C: It’s too far and I don’t like planes.
B: It IS a long way, but it’s amazing. You should go. Playing and pausing is helpful when training your
C: Hmm. I’m not sure. What’s the food like? Is it all students to hear how sounds run together in continuous
meat and barbecues? speech. In natural speech, some words are often
B: No, not at all! There’s lots of great Asian food and contracted or weakly stressed and hard to hear. In
all kinds of different things. Exercise 6, students have to listen very intensively to
A: Yeah. I saw a programme about it on TV. hear particular sounds and recognise the words and the
C: Really? meaning. Support your students by playing and pausing
B: Yeah. In fact, I had some of the best food I’ve ever key parts of the listening text a number of times until
had there. students have trained their ears to hear and recognise
A: It sounds great. I’d LOVE to go there. When I have words or chunks, notice aspects of stress, linking or
more money – or time. intonation, and understand the exact meaning of
phrases.

11 FOOD 121

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 121 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

7 Organise the class into groups of four or five to 9 Organise the class into groups of three. Set up the
discuss the questions. You could ask one student to ask task by asking students to look back at Exercises 1 and
the questions while the rest take turns to answer. In 2 and prepare things to say individually. Once students
feedback, ask different groups to say what they found have ideas, ask them to study the example conversation,
out about each other. then try out similar conversations. Alternatively, model
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note the activity by acting it out with one of the groups.
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. • As students speak, monitor and note errors and
At the end, look at good pieces of language that students examples of good language use. In feedback, correct
used and pieces of language students didn’t quite use errors and point any really good language students used.
correctly during the activity.
10 Set up this task by telling students about your
Grammar own experiences using the sentence frames. Then ask
students to complete the sentences with their own ideas.
me too, me neither and auxiliaries Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.
Aim
to introduce and practise using me too, me neither 11 Organise the class into pairs to improvise
and auxiliaries to agree or disagree conversations. Monitor and prompt, and note how well
students are using the language. In feedback, find out
8 Read through the information in the box as a class. which students are similar, and point out any errors or
Then organise the class into pairs to complete the rules. problems you noticed.
Elicit which phrase goes in the first space as an example
in open class. Monitor and note how well students do Optional extra activity Organise this activity as a mingle.
the task. Students walk round the class and talk to three or four
• In feedback, provide answers. Ask students to check in different people. In feedback, they report on similarities
the Grammar reference on page 182. and differences.

Answers For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the

1 me neither 3 do Grammar reference on page 183.
2 me too 4 would
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
1 neither, too
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar 2 can, too
reference on page 183. 3 Me neither, I don’t, Me too

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

1 Me too. Speaking
2 Me neither.
3 I don’t. Aim
4 I do. to practise language from the lesson in a free,
5 I wouldn’t. I don’t. communicative, personalised speaking activity
6 Me neither. I’m not.
12 This is an opportunity to bring together several
parts of the lesson, and for students to practise using all
Background language notes for teachers the language they have learnt.
• Ask students to work individually to prepare a menu.
• Me too and me neither are easy-to-learn expressions If your students are all from the same country, you could
used to agree with a positive or negative sentence. They briefly brainstorm ideas first. If not, briefly brainstorm
avoid the complexity of phrases such as So do I or Neither two or three well-known dishes. Monitor and help with
can I, which mean the same, but involve manipulating ideas and vocabulary.
auxiliary verbs. Save these for later in the students’
learning. 13 Organise the class into pairs to discuss and
• To disagree, students must practise manipulating describe menus. In feedback, ask different pairs to say
auxiliaries. Students will need practice in recognising who had the best menu and why.
which auxiliary to use. Compare the following: • As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
A: I love cheese. B: Oh, I don’t. down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
A: I wouldn’t go. B: Oh, I would. • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
A: I can swim. B: I can’t. students used and pieces of language students didn’t
• In these short answers, the auxiliaries are stressed. quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
• There is a sharp rise-fall intonation pattern over better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
phrases like me too and I don’t. Students should practise
this to avoid a flat intonation that shows disinterest.

122 OUTCOMES

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 122 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

Optional extra activity Bring in some menus from A HEALTHY DIET

local restaurants, or download menus for world-famous
restaurants from the internet. Ask students in groups Student’s Book pages 102–103
to look at three menus each, describe and explain the
dishes, and decide which one they would like to go to. Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students practise talking
Web research activity Ask students to think of an about diet and eating habits, using words to explain
English-speaking country and find a menu online from quantity.
a restaurant that serves typical food from that country.
Alternatively, ask students to find the following British Grammar Explaining quantity
dishes online and find out what is in them: a full English
breakfast, toad-in-the-hole, spotted dick and custard, Eccles Aim
cakes, Hunter’s chicken. to introduce and practise ways of explaining quantity

1 Read through the information in the box as a class.

Then organise the class into pairs to complete the
matching task. Monitor and note how well students do
the task. In feedback, provide answers.

Answers
1 c 2 a 3 e 4 b 5 d

2 Ask students to discuss the questions in pairs.

Follow this up with a class discussion and check the
rules. Alternatively, ask students to check in the Grammar
reference on page 183.

Answers
1 any, a lot of, some 3 much
2 many 4 any, much and many

Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar

reference on page 183.

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

1 a lot of
2 any
3 a lot of / quite a lot of
4 a lot of, any
5 much
6 any / many, a lot of
7 many / any, No, not many / Yes, quite a lot.
8 much, some / quite a lot

Background language notes for teachers

• We use a lot of (= a large quantity) and some

(= a regular quantity – not large or small) with both
countable and uncountable nouns in the affirmative.
• We use any with both countable and uncountable
nouns in the negative.
• We use much (= a large quantity) with uncountable
nouns in the negative and in questions.
• We use many with countable nouns in the negative
and in questions.
• Note that a lot of is often used by native speakers in
the negative, and in questions, too. At this level, however,
it is best for students to learn much and many as
exclusive ways of expressing large quantities in negative
sentences.

11 FOOD 123

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 123 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

• It is likely that students will express quantity very Reading

differently in L1. For example, they may use the same
word for much, many and a lot of, or not differentiate Aim
between some or any, or these expressions may change to help train students to read for a general
according to the gender of the noun rather than any understanding and for specific information
other rule. Consequently, don’t assume this is obvious to
students, and provide plenty of accuracy practice to make 5 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to
sure they understand the rules. look at the title, and ask them questions to focus on
what they can see, e.g. What is the article about? How
3 Ask students to work individually to complete the many people describe what they eat?
sentences. Elicit the first answer to get them started. Let • Ask students to read the article and find the answers
students compare their answers in pairs before giving to the questions. Let students compare their answers in
class feedback. pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.

Answers Possible answer

1 any Robin: fruit, vegetables, nuts and beans are a
2 many healthy diet.
3 some
4 much 6 Ask students to read through the eight sentences
5 any and decide if they are true or false. You may need to
6 lot, quite check phrases like lose weight and have a baby. You could
also check words from the text at this stage (see below).
4 Organise the class into groups of three or four. Set • Students read the article again to check if the
up the task by asking students to look back at Exercises sentences are true or false. Let students compare their
1 and 2 and prepare things to say individually about the answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the
different foods. Once students have prepared, ask them students. Ask students to justify their answers by saying
to start their discussion. what they read.
• As students speak, monitor and note errors and
examples of good language use. Use the feedback Answers
time to correct and point out any really good language 1 T 5 F
students used. 2 T (at the moment) 6 T
3 T 7 F
Optional extra activity Organise this activity as a mingle 4 F 8 T
and a survey. Students prepare questions using Do you
eat much …? and Do you eat many …? Then they walk
round the class, ask the questions, and note students’ Background language notes for teachers
answers. At the end, pairs compare their information and
present the results of their survey to the class. avoid = try not to have / eat
leather = material from the skin of cows (e.g. leather
For further practice, see Exercises 2 and 3 in jacket / shoes)
the Grammar reference on page 183. fresh = recently picked (also meaning not frozen or
preserved in a jar or a tin)
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference raw = not cooked
1 many pregnant = going to have a baby
2 a bit of
3 a few 7 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the
4 much questions. Let them read the questions and prepare ideas
5 much first. Once students have ideas, ask them to start their
6 a few discussion.
7 a bit of • As students speak, monitor and note errors and
8 many examples of good language use. In feedback, correct any
errors and point out any really good language students
Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference used.
1 different, a bit of is less
2 different, any is less Optional extra activity Ask students to find and
3 different, any is less (any means ‘do you ever eat underline words they don’t know in the article and try
sweets?’, many means ‘do you eat a lot?’) to guess their meaning from context. Then explain them
4 same with examples, translation or dictionary work.
5 same
6 different, some is less

124 OUTCOMES

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 124 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 11 FOOD

Understanding vocabulary Students listen and complete the sentences. You could
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but
Forming negatives by adding un- students should be able to write complete sentences
Aim after two or three listenings.
to introduce and practise negative forms of adjectives
83
8 Read through the information in the box as a class. 1 Do you know anywhere good to eat near here?
Ask students to give you other examples of adjectives 2 I hate the taste of beer.
with un- (e.g. unfit, unlucky). 3 I’d like my steak well-cooked – no blood.
• Ask students to work individually to complete the 4 She can’t eat any dairy products.
sentences. Let them compare their answers in pairs. In 5 Here are your drinks.
feedback, elicit answers. 6 I can’t eat nuts because they make me ill.
7 It has a very unusual taste.
Answers 8 There’s a great vegetarian restaurant near here.
1 healthy 5 friendly
2 unhappy 6 untidy Optional extra activities Get students to find two more
3 popular 7 unfair words in the unit with each of the sounds practised
4 unemployed 8 unforgettable (/ɪə/, /eə/ and /ʌ/). Get students to write two
collocations or phrases for each word in the box in
9 Ask students to work individually to think of ideas Exercise 12. (These activities could be set as homework.)
first. Let them compare answers in pairs. In feedback,
elicit answers. Teacher development: using the sounds
and vocabulary review
Possible answers
unfit, unlucky, unusual, unwell, uncomfortable This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
also reviews some key words and develops students’
10 Ask students to work in groups of four or five. Give ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
students one minute to prepare things to say. Monitor Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
and help with ideas and vocabulary. other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note development on page 19).
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. Sounds and correction
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that • /ɪə/ and /eə/ are both diphthongs. The lips are wider
students used and pieces of language students didn’t and the tongue higher when producing the /ɪ/ sound
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students than they are when producing the /e/ sound.
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. • The short /ʌ/ sound is a mid-central vowel slightly
lower and farther back than the schwa sound. It is
Optional extra activity Extend this practice into a pronounced with unrounded lips. It commonly occurs in
mingle. words spelt with u, o or ou (but, love, enough).

Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
worksheet on page 240 can be used at this point or at Grammar reference on page 184.
the end of the unit for further practice.
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
Sounds and vocabulary review 1 a lot of 4 any
2 any 5 a lot of, many
Aim 3 quite a lot of 6 some, a few
to practise the sounds /ɪə/, /eə/ and /ʌ/; to listen and
write down words in continuous speech Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
1 some 5 little
11 82 Play the recording. Students listen and 2 me 6 (correct)
repeat the sounds. 3 do 7 wouldn’t
4 (correct) 8 do
82
/weə/, /ɪə/, /nɪə/, /hɪə/, /bɪə/, /blʌ/, /eəri/, /nʌts/, /ʌn/ Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
1 some 4 few
2 lot 5 a
12 83 Give students a moment to look at the 3 a 6 much
words in the box. Read the words out so that students
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence
for them to do this. Then play the recording again.

11 FOOD 125

65752_u11_pp117-125.indd 125 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 Words for Unit 12
FEELINGS
• In feedback, correct any errors students made and
point out the pronunciation of any words students found
Aim hard to say.
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set
of key, useful vocabulary using photos 4 Read through the examples with the class and
ask for one or two further examples from the class to
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases get them started. Then ask students to work in pairs to
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started match the phrases to people they know and explain their
(photo 1 is it’s badly damaged). Go round the room choices. In feedback, ask students to give examples and
and check students are doing the task and prompt if explain them.
necessary. Depending on how much they know, students
may need help with a dictionary or teacher translation to Optional extra activity End this stage by asking your
do the exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions. students to say which photos they liked and why.
Alternatively, ask them to tell you the story behind one of
2 84 Play the recording so that students can check the photos using a phrase from the box.
their answers. Let them check again with their partner
after they have listened once. Teacher development: associations
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students
to repeat the words. If students have any problems Asking students to connect phrases to people they
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and know is a way of helping them to use the phrase and
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the remember it better. Think of other ways of associating
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress new words or phrases to things they know, as that will
(see pronunciation notes below). help the phrases be meaningful, useable and memorable.
For example, students could match them to their own
84 and answers personal life events, to characters in soap operas, to
1 it’s badly damaged situations that are in the news, to good days and bad
2 she’s a bit upset days.
3 I burnt my hand • Remember that the Vocabulary Builder has activities
4 she’s fallen asleep to revise, extend and practise vocabulary students are
5 my stomach hurts coming across during their learning.
6 protest against it
7 have a big smile
8 complain to the staff
9 put on sun cream
10 read the news
11 fans celebrating
12 get some fresh air
13 stop infection
14 a big storm
15 put ice on it
16 stop shouting!
There is no photo to match ‘not interested in
politics’.

Background pronunciation notes

Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the

words except: complain, protest, upset, asleep, infection.
Note the /dʒ/ sound in damaged /ˈdæmɪdʒd/.

3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with

someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and help if necessary.

126 OUTCOMES

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 126 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

ARE YOU OK? 3

E: Are you OK?
Student’s Book pages 106–107 F: No, I feel a bit sick.
E: Maybe you should go out and get some fresh air.
Communicative outcomes F: Yes, I think I will. I’ll be back in a moment.
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking E: OK. Take your time. There’s no rush.
about health problems and giving advice. 4
G: Are you OK?
Listening H: Yeah, yeah.
G: Have you been to the doctor?
Aim H: No. It’s just a cold.
to introduce words for parts of the body and listen to G: Are you sure? You have a very bad cough. I really
conversations about health problems think you should see someone. Maybe it’s an
infection.
1 Start by modelling the activity. Describe the first H: Honestly, it’ll be fine in a couple of days.
picture by saying: She has a problem with her back. 5
Perhaps she played too much tennis. Once students have I: Are you OK?
got the hang of the activity, ask them to work in pairs to J: Yeah, I’m fine. My back hurts a bit, that’s all.
match the parts of the body to the pictures and discuss I: Maybe you shouldn’t play tennis, then.
the problems. In feedback, elicit students’ ideas. Make J: It’s OK. I told Kevin I’m going to.
sure students understand all the words in the box, and I: Yeah, but are you sure you can play?
check their pronunciation by drilling (note the difficult J: Yeah, I’ll be fine after I warm up.
pronunciation of stomach /ˈstʌmək/).
3 Start by eliciting which conversation sick and fresh
Answers air went with. Then ask students to discuss the other
Picture a: back – she has a problem with her back – pairs of words. Encourage them to recall and reconstruct
perhaps she played too much tennis as much of the conversations as they can remember.
Picture b: stomach – perhaps he ate something bad Monitor closely to prompt and support students.
Picture c: stomach – he is hungry
Picture d: arm – he broke his arm falling off his bike Answers
Picture e: foot – he hurt / broke / burnt his foot 1 c 2 e 3 a 4 b 5 d
when he dropped a hot pan; hand – he cut his hand
with the knife 4 85 Play the recording again as students read the
Picture f: head – she has a cold and a cough, perhaps audio script on page 208. Have a brief feedback session
because she is smoking and check any words students still have problems with.

2 85 Play the recording. Students listen and match Optional extra activity 1 Ask students to act out one of
the conversations to the pictures. Let them compare their the conversations in their pairs.
answers in pairs before discussing as a class.
Optional extra activity 2 Do a language patterns activity.
Answers Write the sentences below on the board. Ask students
1 c 2 d 3 b 4 f 5 a to translate them into their language. Then ask them
to translate them back into English. Ask students to
85 compare their English to the original.
1 It’ll be fine in a couple of days.
A: Are you OK? I’ll be fine in a moment.
B: Yeah, I’m OK. My stomach hurts a bit. It’ll be fine by the weekend.
A: Maybe you should lie down. I’ll be fine after I have something to eat.
B: No, it’s OK. I think I’m just hungry. I’ll be fine after I warm up.
A: Are you sure?
B: Honestly, I’ll be fine after I have something to eat. Vocabulary Health problems
2
C: Hi, it’s Johnny. Aim
D: Johnny! How are you? to introduce and practise words to describe health
C: Basically, I’m OK, but I fell off my bike and I’ve problems
broken my arm!
D: Oh dear. Maybe we should cancel the meeting for 5 Elicit the first missing word (headache) from the
tomorrow. students to get them started. Then ask students to work
C: No, it’s OK. It’s my left arm, so I can write. individually to complete the sentences. Organise the
D: Are you sure? class into pairs to check answers. In feedback, use mime
C: Yeah, honestly, it’s fine. It doesn’t really hurt. or examples to help explain the words in the box. Tell the
class to use context to guess meaning before checking
any difficult words in their dictionaries.

12 FEELINGS 127

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 127 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

Answers Grammar should / shouldn’t

1 headache 6 infection
2 cut 7 cold Aim
3 hurts 8 stiff to introduce and practise should / shouldn’t +
4 cough 9 sick infinitive to give advice
5 hungry 10 burnt
7 Read through the information in the box as a class.
Then organise the class into pairs to complete the
Background language notes for teachers sentences. Elicit the first answer as an example in open
class. Monitor and note how well students understand
• Note the verbs that commonly collocate: the use of should and shouldn’t.
Verb + adjective: be / feel ill / well / sick / stiff / hungry • Ask students to check in the Grammar reference on
Verb + noun: have a headache / toothache / stomach page 184.
ache / a cold / a cough / an infection
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the Answers
words except infection. Note the words that are difficult 1 should 4 should
to say: cough /kɒf/, headache /ˈhɛdˌeɪk/. 2 shouldn’t 5 shouldn’t, should
3 shouldn’t
Optional extra activity Drill the pronunciation of
difficult words: cough /kɒf/, headache /ˈhɛdˌeɪk/, infection.
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar
6 Organise the class into groups of four or five reference on page 184.
to discuss the questions. Monitor and check how
well students understand, use and pronounce the Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
health problems. In feedback, briefly find out about 1 you should 4 we should
students’ experiences, and check the meaning and / or 2 you shouldn’t 5 they shouldn’t
pronunciation of any words students had problems with. 3 he should 6 she should

Optional extra activity Do a live listening. Tell a story

about a health problem you once had. Background language notes for teachers

Teacher development: live listening Should and shouldn’t are modal verbs and are followed
by an infinitive without to. They express obligation, so
Telling stories or anecdotes from your own life experience when used to give advice, it is strong advice. At this level,
is a real, fun and motivating activity. Here’s why: however, it is best to get over the meaning in terms of ‘a
1 It’s a way of modelling the activity you want students good idea’ and ‘a bad idea’.
to do. If they are to talk about an experience, it • In their L1, students may express advice in different
is good for them to listen to a good version of a ways. Their language may not use a modal in this way,
story from you first. It shows them what to do, and and may choose a longer phrase, or it may use a modal
encourages them to attempt something creative. that looks different. It is a good idea to give students
2 It’s a way for students to get to know a bit more plenty of practice in context to make sure students see
about you, their teacher. This builds class morale and how to use should to express advice.
is often fun and interesting.
3 It’s a way of improving students’ listening skills. In 8 Ask students to look back at the pictures on page
many classrooms, listening to recorded audio may 106, and remind students of the problems. Elicit a
be challenging. There are acoustic and equipment piece of advice for the first picture in open class to get
problems, and it is hard to listen when you can’t students started. Ask students to work in pairs to think
see who is speaking. A live listening is more real of other things to say. Monitor and help with ideas and
and students feel more confident that they can vocabulary. In feedback, elicit and comment on some of
understand what you are saying. Set simple tasks – the best ideas.
e.g. What were the two problems I had? What
happened at the end? Write these on the board so Possible answers
students have a task as they listen to you. a You should rest / go and see a doctor / stop playing
4 It involves minimal preparation and can be short or tennis.
long depending on how much time you have in class. b You should take a pill / drink some water.
c You should have something to eat.
d You should rest your arm / stop cycling / wear
a helmet.
e You should be careful in the kitchen / use an
oven glove.
f You should stop smoking.

128 OUTCOMES

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 128 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the Developing conversations

Grammar reference on page 184
Saying no
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference Aim
1 cook more to introduce and practise ways of saying no
2 longer
3 do more 11 Read through the information in the box as a class.
4 more exercise • Ask students to look at the phrases in the box. Ask
5 less sugar them to suggest two or three other ways of saying no.
6 harder • Elicit an example to get students started. Ask them to
5 concentrate more work in pairs to write conversations. Monitor and help
6 less time, more time with ideas and vocabulary.

Possible answers
Pronunciation 1 No, it’s OK, it’s not serious. I’ll be fine in a moment.
2 Honestly, I’m fine. I’m really full. It was delicious.
Aim 3 Honestly, it’s just a cold. I’ll be fine when I get
to give students practice in saying should and to work.
shouldn’t 4 Really, it’s fine. I’ll read my book.

9 86 Play the recording. In feedback, ask students 12 Ask students to practise conversations. As students
whether they heard /d/ or /t/. speak, monitor and listen for errors, and correct students
if they have problems.
86
1 You should try it. Optional extra activity Ask some pairs to act out their
2 We should go. conversations for the class to listen to.
3 I should stop.
4 You should call him. Conversation practice
5 They shouldn’t be here.
6 He shouldn’t do that. Aim
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
10 86 Play the recording again. Students listen communicative, personalised speaking activity
and repeat.
13 This is an opportunity to bring together several
Background pronunciation notes parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt.
• Should /ʃʊd/ and shouldn’t /ʃʊdənt/ are quite hard for • Ask students to work in A and B pairs. First, they must
students to say because of the difficult consonant and prepare what they are going to say using the guide. You
vowel sound at the start of the word. could model this by acting out a conversation with a
• In natural speech, the /d/ and /t/ sounds at the end of reliable student first, or by asking one well-prepared pair
the words are lost when the next word begins with /t/ or to model their conversation for the class.
/d/ or when it starts with a hard sound like /g/ or /k/. • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
• Getting the intonation right is important when giving language or interesting ideas to use in feedback. Change
advice. Get students to start their intonation high, let it pairs so students can practise three or four times.
rise over should, then fall over the rest of the phrase. A • In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
flat intonation suggests disinterest. that students used, and pieces of language students
didn’t quite use correctly during the activity.
Optional extra activity Mime a health problem (e.g.
coughing, blowing your nose, holding your leg) and ask 22 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.
students round the class to suggest a solution using
you should. Only say that’s a good idea if the phrase is Teacher development: using the video
accurate with good pronunciation ad intonation.
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in
Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable various ways:
worksheet on page 241 can be used at this point or at 1 as an alternative to the conversation practice
the end of the unit for further practice. 2 instead of the listening activity in some units,
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
before having a go themselves.
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.

12 FEELINGS 129

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 129 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

FEELING GOOD? Vocabulary Feelings

Student’s Book pages 108–109 Aim
to introduce and practise adjectives used to describe
Communicative outcomes feelings
In this two-page spread, students talk about feelings
in different situations. 2 Start by reading out the words and asking students
to mark the strong stress (see below) or repeat the
Speaking words. Then ask students if angry is positive or negative.
• Organise the class into pairs to categorise the words.
Aim Tell them to explain words to each other, but let them
to introduce the theme with a short reading text; to use dictionaries if they are not sure about the meanings.
discuss the ideas in the text In feedback, use mime or examples to help explain the
words in the box.
1 Start by asking students to predict what the text is
about from the title, the map and the picture. Elicit ideas. Answers
Give students two minutes to read the text. Then put Positive: happy, excited, relaxed
them in small groups to discuss the questions. Negative: upset, annoyed, stressed, angry, tired
• In feedback, elicit a few interesting things students
discussed, and write up any useful phrases or words
students used in their discussions. Background language notes for teachers

Possible answers • If you have students from European countries in your

– Switzerland is a rich country with a good standard class, be aware that adjectives that describe feelings
of living, low crime rates, high employment, and include many ‘false friends’. In Italian and French, for
beautiful scenery (mountains, lakes, etc.). example, annoyed looks similar to a word that means
– In 2015, there was a civil war in Syria. bored. Make sure you check the words carefully and use
– With children, you have to be responsible and them in context. If you have a monolingual class it is
in charge, and you worry about them hurting a good idea to find out which words are cognates and
themselves or other people. With friends, you can which aren’t.
relax and be yourself. • Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
words except: excited, relaxed, annoyed and upset.
• Tired has a triphthong and is hard to say – the /r/ is
Teacher development: predicting content silent: /taɪəd/.

It is a good idea to get students to use any clues on the Optional extra activity Ask students to match the words
page to predict the content of a text before they read. to their stress pattern.
Here are five ideas. Oo: angry, tired, happy
1 Ask students to look at photos or illustrations oO: relaxed, annoyed, upset
connected to the text, and use them to guess what oOo: excited
the text is about or what words they might read. Use
the photos to elicit and pre-teach key words in the 3 Ask students to work individually to complete the
text. sentences. Let them compare their answers in pairs
2 Ask students to look at the layout and design of the before discussing as a class. In feedback, point out the
page or text and predict what type of text it is (a words in the sentences that explain the adjectives
story, blog, article, etc.). (e.g. you cry when you are upset, you shout when you
3 Ask students to predict the content of the article are angry, you are excited when you look forward to
from the title. This could reveal not just the topic, but something).
also the type of text, the point of view of the writer, • Note that the online Vocabulary Builder extends
the main point of the text, etc. vocabulary from each unit and provides a lot of work on
4 Ask students to predict from any other clues on the words that go together.
page – maps, visual data, etc.
5 You could also ask students to predict from the first Answers
line of the text, the first line of each paragraph, or 1 upset 5 stressed
from words from the text. Choose six key words or 2 angry 6 annoyed
phrases from the text and write them on the board 3 happy 7 relaxed
before students read. They should be able to predict 4 tired 8 excited
content from these words and phrases.

130 OUTCOMES

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 130 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

4 Organise the class into pairs. Tell them first to look 87

back at the sentences in Exercise 3 and find the new 1 I got the bus to work. I was lucky because there
words. You could choose to check these in class with was a seat. I sat and read my book. It was quite a
mime or definitions, or you could ask students to guess nice journey.
their meaning from context, and use dictionaries to 2 When I got to work, we had a meeting. The boss
check what they think they mean. was quite angry. He shouted a bit and told us we
• Once students know the words, ask them to discuss need to work harder. It was really horrible, but I
the questions. In feedback, briefly find out about tried not to cry.
students’ experiences, and check the meaning and 3 After the meeting finished, I sat and thought
pronunciation of any words students had problems with. about everything I had to do. I got a headache. I
sent a few emails and tried to concentrate.
Possible answers 4 I had lunch with my aunt. She lives near work.
– Because you are upset. She always makes me smile. I felt better after
– Because you are angry or stressed. seeing her.
– English tests, music tests, hearing or sight test, 5 In the afternoon, I went to see some clients. It was
medical tests a successful afternoon. I sold a few things, and it’s
– in bed, on a bus or train, at the airport always nice meeting people.
– Because the food is cold, or not what you asked for. 6 Back in the office, I had to answer about 30 emails.
– When you are happy, or something is funny. It was slow and not very interesting.
– a holiday, a day off work, a trip, an evening out, 7 After work, I had to wait for the bus for half an
a meal hour and then it was full, so I couldn’t sit and read.
8 When I got home, I went for a run with my friend,
Viv. We’re going to go on holiday together, so we
Background language notes for teachers talked about that. It was a lovely warm evening.
9 After dinner, I watched the news on TV. I wanted to
• The following words are best explained with a mime – watch a film as well, but I fell asleep on the sofa.
act them out: cried, shouted, fell asleep.
• Use an example situation to explain these: 7 Organise the class into pairs to discuss why she had
complained = My neighbours were noisy so I complained the feelings. Students have to remember as much as they
to the police; my new TV didn’t work so I complained to can from the recordings.
the manager of the shop.
looking forward to = I’m looking forward to the weekend / 8 87 Play the recording again. Students listen and
the summer / my holidays – I can’t wait! check their answers. Let them compare their answers
with a partner before discussing as a class.
5 Organise the class into new pairs to share their
personal experiences. Monitor and note any errors or Answers
interesting uses of language by students. In feedback, 1 Because she got a seat on the bus.
point out and correct errors and comment on good 2 Because her boss was angry and shouted.
language use. 3 Because she had a lot to do.
4 Because she saw her aunt.
Optional extra activity Do a live listening. Tell a story about 5 Because it was a successful afternoon.
the last time you did one of the things in Exercise 4. 6 Because she had to answer lots of emails.
7 Because she had to wait for the bus and it was full.
Listening 8 Because she talked with her friend about their
holiday.
Aim 9 Because she’d had a long and difficult day.
to give students practice in listening for gist and for
specific information Optional extra activity Let students check their
answers by looking at the audio script on page 209 of
6 87 Give students a moment to read through the Student’s Book.
the adjectives, and explain the task. Play the recording.
Students listen and circle or write down the correct
adjective. Let them compare their answers with a partner
before discussing as a class.

Answers
1 happy 6 bored
2 upset 7 annoyed
3 stressed 8 excited (or relaxed)
4 happy 9 tired
5 positive

12 FEELINGS 131

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 131 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

Grammar because, so and after 11 This is an opportunity to practise using all the
language students have learnt in this lesson in a
Aim personalised speaking activity.
to introduce and practise because, so and after to show • Ask students to prepare ideas first. Set a two-minute
why something happens, the result of something time limit and monitor to help with ideas and vocabulary.
happening or when something happens • Organise the class into groups of four or five to
describe their days. In feedback, ask different groups to
9 Read through the information in the box as a class. say what they found out about each other.
Ask students to complete the rules and check their • As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
answers with a partner. Then ask students to check in down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
the Grammar reference on page 185. • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
students used and pieces of language students didn’t
Answers quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
1 after better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
2 because
3 so Optional extra activity Set up this activity by telling a
4 because, after story of a day you remember. Try to use adjectives and
linking words from the lesson. Providing a teacher model
of what to say is a good idea as it shows students exactly
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar what you want them to produce, and it motivates them
reference on page 185. to attempt something interesting.

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

1 so 5 because
2 After 6 so
3 because 7 after
4 After 8 because

10 Ask students to work individually to complete

the sentences. Elicit a possible first answer to get them
started. Organise the class into pairs to compare their
answers. Monitor and note how well students use the
linking words.
• In feedback, elicit some good examples of sentences
students made.

Possible answers
I’m really stressed because I have important exams
next week.
I was really tired after I cleaned the house.
After work, I usually go to the gym.
He cried when he watched the love film.
She shouted at me because I broke her favourite vase.

For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the

Grammar reference on page 185.

Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference

2 I’m very stressed because I have my final
exams soon.
3 He really wanted the job, but he didn’t get it, so
he’s quite upset.
4 After they lost the final, he sat on the sofa and
cried for an hour!
5 I really love opera, so I’m really looking forward to
going to see La Traviata.
6 After I moved to London, I met my wife.
7 I’m happy because I’m going to go on holiday
next week.

132 OUTCOMES

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 132 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

GOOD AND BAD NEWS 4 Organise the class into new pairs to test each other.
In feedback, ask students if they can think of other words
Student’s Book pages 110–111 or phrases that the verbs collocate with.

Communicative outcomes Optional extra activity Play collocation tennis. Student

In this two-page spread, students talk about good and A serves a verb, e.g. Open. Student B returns with a
bad news, and practise telling news stories. collocation, e.g. Open a restaurant. Student A gives
another collocation, e.g. Open to the public. Students
Speaking keep returning with a new collocation until one student
can’t think of another answer. The other student wins
Aim the point: 15–0. Students continue playing using the
to introduce and practise words for types of news tennis scoring system.

1 Organise the class into groups of four or five 5 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
to discuss the questions. Note the stress is on the produce true sentences. In feedback, elicit some of the
first syllable of all the words in the box, except for more interesting sentences students came up with.
entertainment. Start by checking that they know all the
words in the box. Monitor and note interesting uses of Reading
language by students. In feedback, comment on good
language use. Aim
to help train students to read for a general
Optional extra activity A way of checking the words in understanding and to scan a text to find out what
the box is to produce example headlines (e.g. 10% tax numbers refer to
rise, Brad Pitt wins Oscar, President wins election, Brazil
win World Cup, Thieves steal £1m, Germany and Argentina 6 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to
sign treaty, Satellite goes to Mars, Rain and snow for the look at the title and photos. Ask: What are the news
weekend). Read them out in a random order and ask stories about? How many stories are there?
students to say which kind of news it is. This previews • Ask students to read the stories and match them to
the use of headlines in the next activity. the adjectives.

Vocabulary In the news 7 Let students compare their answers in pairs and
explain their ideas. In feedback, elicit answers from the
Aim students.
to introduce and practise newspaper language and
phrases used in newspaper articles Answers
a 2 b 4 c 1 d 3
2 Ask students in pairs to discuss the headlines and
decide if the stories are good news or bad news. Start 8 Ask students to remember what they can about the
them off by eliciting the first answer in open class. In article without reading it again, and tell their partner
feedback, elicit answers. what the numbers refer to. Monitor and check how much
students remember. Have a brief feedback session, and
Answers find out what students can tell you.
1 and 2 could be seen as good or bad depending on
the circumstances and your view. 9 Ask students to read the articles again to check their
3–5 are bad answers. This is a scanning task, so encourage them to
6 is good find the numbers, then read round them to find what
7 and 8 are bad they refer to. Let students compare their answers in
pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students. Ask
3 Ask students to match the verbs to the pairs of students to justify answers by saying what they read.
phrases. Start them off by eliciting the first match in
open class. Let students compare their answers in pairs Answers
before feedback. 1 They are planning to cut 2,500 jobs.
2 A small number of people started throwing
Answers bottles.
1 d 2 a 3 c 4 b 5 g 6 h 7 e 8 f 3 It’s 77 years since they last won the cup.
4 The Bears won 2–1.
5 Eleven people were killed in the storm.
Background pronunciation notes 6 The storm destroyed over 100 houses.
7 Hundreds of fans queued to get seats.
Note the stress is on the first syllable of all these words, 8 The singer is planning to take a break for six
except for protest, environment, delay, independence. months.

12 FEELINGS 133

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 133 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

Speaking Optional extra activities Get students to find two more

words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (/h/,
Aim /θ/ and /ð/). Get students to write two collocations or
to practise language from the lesson in a free, phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 12. (These
communicative, personalised speaking activity activities could be set as homework.)

10 This is an opportunity to bring together several Teacher development: using the sounds
parts of the lesson, and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt.
and vocabulary review
• Ask students to work individually to prepare their This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
stories. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. Then also reviews some key words and develops students’
organise them into groups of four to take turns telling ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
their story. Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. development on page 19).
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that Sounds and correction
students used and pieces of language students didn’t • The sound /h/ in English is an unvoiced fricative which
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students is only lightly aspirated. Students often use too much
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. friction when producing the sound, or drop the sound
altogether (especially in the case of French speakers).
Optional extra activity If you think students will have • To make /θ/ and /ð/, students need to push the tip
problems remembering and telling stories, brainstorm of their tongues slightly past their upper teeth. Many
stories that are in the news currently, and write a students attempt the sounds with their tongue behind
short description on the board (e.g. Family die in fire). their teeth, approximating /t/, /d/ or /z/ sounds as a
Brainstorm three or four useful words or phrases for each result. Ask students who have problems to place their
story. Then ask students to prepare to describe one of the index finger vertically in front of their lips. Then tell them
stories on the board. to push their tongue out so the tip touches their finger.
Now, they can say/θ/ and /ð/ properly.
Sounds and vocabulary review • /θ/ is unvoiced but /ð/ is voiced. You can also place
your hand on your throat to feel the voiced /ð/, as
Aim opposed to the unvoiced /θ/.
to practise the sounds /h/, /θ/ and /ð/; to listen and
write down words in continuous speech For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
Grammar reference on page 185.
11 88 Play the recording. Students listen and
repeat the sounds. Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
1 should see 4 should take
88 2 shouldn’t drive 5 shouldn’t eat
/haʊ/, /ɜːθ/, /hɜː/, /hæ/, /hed/, /həʊ/, /helθ/, /hæf/, 3 should be 6 shouldn’t carry
/hɒs/, /hʌŋ/, /ðə/, /weðə/, /wɪð/, /wɪðaʊt/
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
12 89 Give students a moment to look at the 2 We should take the bus.
words in the box. Read the words out so that students 3 I’ve been tired all day because I didn’t sleep well
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one last night.
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or 4 He shouldn’t drive so fast.
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to 5 After the accident, he didn’t need to go to the
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence hospital.
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. 6 He’s not feeling very well, so he’s gone to bed.
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
students should be able to write complete sentences 1 shouldn’t 5 more
after two or three listenings. 2 more 6 should
3 watch 7 so
89 4 because 8 doesn’t
1 How are you going to celebrate your birthday?
2 How did you hurt your hand?
3 I had a headache so I stayed at home.
4 It’s really bad for your health.
5 I have to go to hospital.
6 I’m really hungry because I haven’t eaten all day.
7 I’m happy the weather is warm.
8 Do you want your coffee with milk – or without?

134 OUTCOMES

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 134 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

VIDEO 6: WEARING A GLOVE OF 4 23 Ask students to watch the video and complete

VENOMOUS ANTS the sentences. Let them compare their answers in pairs
before discussing as a class.
Student’s Book page 112
Answers
Aim 1 pain 5 dance
to look at a different culture and way of life; to 2 gloves 6 trust
improve students’ ability to follow and understand 3 turn 7 mind
fast speech in a video extract; to practise fast speech 4 24 hours 8 boat
using strong stresses
5 This exercise offers students the chance to relate
1 Lead in to the topic by asking students to look at the the topic of the video to their own experiences, ideas and
photo. Ask: What can you see? Where is the man? What is opinions.
he doing? How does he feel? Use the opportunity to pre- • Give students time to read the questions then put
teach glove, venomous (= poisonous and aggressive), ants. them in pairs or small groups and give them seven or
• Ask students to read the text and, in feedback, ask eight minutes to discuss them.
them to define initiation. • Monitor and listen to each group. Help with
pronunciation and ideas if necessary.
2 Organise the class into pairs or small groups to • When most students have finished, stop the class
discuss the questions. In a brief feedback session, elicit and give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of
students’ ideas and write up interesting ideas or pieces the things students tried to say for the whole class or
of language on the board. by asking students to correct or fill in gaps in sentences
you’ve written on the board, based on what you heard
Possible answers students saying.
Hindu diksha, Christian baptism or confirmation and
Jewish bar or bat mitzvah; acceptance into a fraternal Understanding fast speech
organisation, secret societies or religious orders;
graduation from school or recruit training. 6 24 Tell students to work on their own for a few
minutes to practise saying the extract. Then play the
recording. Students listen and compare what they said.
Culture notes
7 Encourage students to practise saying the extract
The photo shows wildlife scientist Pat Spain during several times.
filming for Beast Hunter, a television series on National
Geographic Channel. In each episode, Spain travels to 23
a different part of the world to investigate the alleged Narrator: The boy struggles not to show his pain
existence of animals unknown to science. In this episode, and we dance to help him through the ordeal.
Spain meets local tribes in the Amazon rainforest in After five minutes, the gloves come off.
Brazil, to seek a mythical creature called the mapinguari. And then go back on to the next initiate.
And all too soon it’s my turn.
3 23 Give students time to read through the Five minutes feels like an eternity, but as the gloves
questions first. As students watch the video, they should come off, it’s only just beginning. Wave after wave,
note their answers. Let them compare their answers in the pain keeps building … and it’ll last for 24 hours.
pairs before discussing as a class. The dance ends and I’m alone with my pain.
Pat Spain: How long does this last?
Answers Cameraman: 24 hours.
He has to do something difficult, something painful. Pat Spain: How long has it been?
People dance and sing. Cameraman: Less than an hour.
Narrator: I’m starting to lose my grip on reality.
Optional extra activity There is an interesting set of Pat Spain: I want the gloves off.
idiomatic vocabulary in the video (see below). Write the I really ******* want the gloves off.
phrases on the board and ask students to guess their Narrator: I had hoped this ordeal would simply earn
meaning before explaining or translating. me some trust, but I have bitten off more than I can
chew.
Background language notes Pat Spain: Please … please.
Narrator: Here, in a forest in Brazil, I’m losing my
It feels like an eternity = It feels like a very long time mind.
I’m losing my grip on reality = I’m going crazy; starting to Pat Spain: Oh the ice. When I put my hands in the
imagine things ice water, it’s the best feeling on earth, it feels so
I have bitten off more than I can chew = I am doing good. I’ve never felt anything this good. I have hands,
something that is too difficult for me I can feel them … and it hurts so bad, this feels so
I’m losing my mind = I’m going crazy good. How did we get on the boat?
struggle = fight or find something difficult
ordeal = a very difficult or painful experience
12 FEELINGS 135

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 135 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 12 FEELINGS

REVIEW 6
Student’s Book page 113

Aim
to consolidate vocabulary and grammar from
Units 11 and 12

Answers
1
1 should, 5 some
2 too, neither 6 many
3 have 7 after
4 didn’t 8 any
2
1 a few
2 much
3 I don’t think you should
4 a lot of
5 any
6 because
7 earlier
8 so
3
1 Me neither 4 a lot of
2 I do 5 any
3 so 6 much
5
restaurants: the bill, dairy products, include service, a
well-cooked steak
health problems: an infection, put a plaster on, take
antibiotics, a terrible cough
news: build a new stadium, cause delays, kill twelve
people, protest against cuts
6
1 bored 6 healthy
2 full 7 annoyed
3 fried 8 tired
4 excited 9 busy
5 delicious 10 unfair
7
1 cut 5 open
2 burn 6 order
3 hit 7 celebrate
4 damage 8 cancel
8
1 weight 5 fat
2 desserts 6 soft
3 cream 7 sweets
4 vegetables 8 sugar

90 and answers
1 We eat quite a lot of rice and fish.
2 I was sick after I ate some seafood.
3 There aren’t many places to eat near here.
4 Maybe you should tell him you’re feeling stressed.
5 They didn’t have any tables so we didn’t eat there.
6 I don’t think we should pay more than thirty
pounds for it.

136 OUTCOMES

65752_u12_pp126-136.indd 136 08/12/18 12:10 PM

 13 Words for Unit 13
NATURE
of their life. This activity aims to get students using
language by applying it to their own experience.
Aim
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set Optional extra activity End this stage by asking your
of key, useful vocabulary using photos students to say which photos they liked and why.

1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases Teacher development: playing with words
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started
(photo 1 is an icy road). Go round the room and check
and collocations
students are doing the task and prompt if necessary. By this stage of the course, your students will have got
Depending on how much they know, students may need used to being exposed to a set of vocabulary which they
help with a dictionary or teacher translation to do the have to learn and practise to set them up for the rest of
exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions. the unit. Here are a few alternative activities you could
do here by way of variation:
2 91 Play the recording so that students can check 1 Ask students to brainstorm words and phrases from
their answers. Let them check again with their partner the photos before looking at the box. When they do
after they have listened once. the matching task, find out how many words and
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students phrases they predicted.
to repeat the words. If students have any problems 2 Ask students to change the collocations in the
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and phrases (e.g. change climb a hill to climb a mountain
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the or climb the stairs, change surrounded by fields to
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress. surrounded by people or hills).
Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the 3 Ask students to invent a story using five of the
words except: surrounded, attention. phrases.
4 Ask students to find as many adjectives as they can
91 and answers in the phrases (windy, cloudy, empty, icy, crowded,
1 an icy road scared, surrounded and warm).
2 a bit windy
3 a cloudy day
4 a farmer using chemicals
5 an empty road
6 climb a hill
7 pick up rubbish
8 the top of a wall
9 scared of spiders
10 check the forecast
11 a warm summer’s day
12 a crowded street
13 surrounded by fields
14 chase each other
15 want attention
16 jump off a mountain
17 don’t let it bite
18 it smells bad

3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with

someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and help if necessary.
• In feedback, correct any errors students made, or
point out the pronunciation of any words students found
hard to say.

4 Ask students to work individually to put phrases

into the two groups. Then ask them to compare with
a partner. In feedback, elicit any interesting comments
students have to make about why a phrase is part

13 NATURE 137

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 137 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

WHAT’S THE FORECAST? 3 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
discuss the questions. Monitor and note how well
Student’s Book pages 116–117 students use the new language. In feedback, briefly find
out what students discussed and check the meaning and
Communicative outcomes pronunciation of any words students had problems with.
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking
about the weather and future plans. Listening
Vocabulary Weather Aim
to help train students to listen for gist and for specific
Aim information
to introduce and practise words to describe weather
4 92 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students
1 Elicit an example for the first sentence starter from to look at the table. Make sure students know there will
the students to get them started (e.g. It’s going to snow be three conversations.
/ rain). Then organise the class into pairs to complete • Play the recording and ask students to write notes
the sentences in as many ways as possible. In feedback, in the table. After listening, let students compare their
check the meaning and use of the words in the box (see answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the
language notes below). students.

Answers Answers
1 It’s going to rain, snow. Forecast They decide to
2 It’s going to be cloudy, cold, dry, hot, sunny, warm, 1 quite hot go to swimming pool,
wet, windy. have lunch at café.
3 There’s going to be a lot of rain, snow, ice. 2 rain this morning, dry relax in morning, walk
4 There’s going to be a storm. this afternoon in the hills.
3 cold, might snow go shopping, back for
football.
Optional extra activity To check meaning, draw the
sort of weather symbols often used on the TV weather
forecast on the board. Ask students to match words to 92
the symbols. The picture in the Student’s Book is a good 1
way to check storm. A: What do you want to do tomorrow?
B: I don’t know. What’s the forecast?
Background language notes for teachers A: It’s going to be quite hot. They said it might reach
35 degrees.
• To complete the sentence starters, students will need B: Really? Why don’t we go to the swimming pool?
to recognise that some words are verbs (snow, rain), A: Oh, we could do. Which one?
some are uncountable nouns (ice, snow and rain) and one B: The open-air one – and we can have lunch at
(storm) is a countable noun. The rest of the words are the café.
adjectives (note that we add -y to some nouns to form A: OK. Let’s do that.
weather adjectives – cloudy, windy, sunny as well as icy, 2
stormy, rainy, foggy, misty, etc.). C: What do you want to do today?
• The best way to explain the meaning is through D: I don’t know. What’s the forecast? It looks a bit
mimes or visuals. Use weather symbols or pictures from cloudy.
the internet, or act out the meaning. C: It said it might rain this morning, but it’s going to
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all be dry this afternoon.
the words. D: OK. Well, why don’t we relax this morning and
then go for a walk this afternoon?
2 Check that students know what a forecast is (when C: Could do. Where?
you say what the weather is in the future). Organise the D: How about taking the car and going to the hills?
class into pairs to produce a weather forecast. You could C: OK. Let’s do that. We haven’t been to the hills
either ask students to improvise sentences in pairs or ask recently.
them to work together to write three or four sentences 3
before reading them out. Monitor and check how E: Do you want to go away at the weekend?
well students understand, use and pronounce the new F: I’m not sure. What’s the forecast?
language. E: I think it’s going to be cold. They said it might
snow.
Optional extra activity Write four different cities on F: Really? Why don’t we just stay here? I don’t want
the board (e.g. Moscow, Nairobi, Bangkok, London). Ask to drive if there’s snow or ice on the roads.
students to choose a city and prepare a forecast. Ask E: That’s true. Maybe we should do some shopping
students to read out the forecast. Other students guess for Christmas.
which city is being described. F: We could do. When exactly?
E: Early on Saturday morning. We can take the train.
138 OUTCOMES

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 138 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

F: Can we be back before the football starts? Pronunciation

E: Maybe. What time?
F: It starts at three. Aim
E: I guess – if we go early. to practise the pronunciation of might in natural
F: OK. Let’s do that. We have to do it sometime. speech

Optional extra activity Organise the class into pairs. 7 93 Play the recording. Students listen and notice
Ask them to look at the audio script on page 209 and the pronunciation. Feed back briefly, and ask whether
practise the conversations. students heard the final /t/. Play again and ask students
to write sentences. You may need to play and pause.
Grammar might and be going to
93 and answers
Aim 1 There might be a storm later.
to introduce and practise might and be going to + 2 They said it might snow tonight.
infinitive to talk about the future 3 I might go for a run after class.
4 We might go to Spain in the summer.
5 Read through the information in the box as a class. 5 I might not come to class tomorrow.
Then elicit the missing words to complete the rules. 6 I might have to work this weekend.
• Ask students to check in the Grammar reference on
page 186. 8 93 Play the recording again and ask students to
repeat. You may need to play and pause.
Answers
1 going to 2 might 9 This is an opportunity to practise using might in a
personalised activity with an emphasis on fluency.
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar • Ask students to prepare ideas first. Monitor and help
reference on page 186. with vocabulary.

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference 10 Organise the class into groups of four. Encourage
1 We’re going to 4 It’s going to students to take turns to share ideas and to respond
2 We might 5 possibly to what the others say. You could model the speaking
3 We’re going to 6 She may activity briefly with a reliable student first to get
students started.
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
Background language notes for teachers language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
• In feedback, look at good pieces of language that
• We use the modal auxiliary verb might + infinitive students used and pieces of language students didn’t
without to when talking about future possibility. It tends quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
to be used when there is a less than 50% likelihood of better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
something happening.
• Students may confuse going to with the present Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable
continuous. It is formed with the verb be (which worksheet on page 242 can be used at this point or at
conjugates: am, is, are) + going to + infinitive. Watch out the end of the unit for further practice.
for form errors such as It’s going very hot or It’s going be
very hot. For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
• Going to is presented here as a way of expressing Grammar reference on page 186.
certainty about plans. The plan is made before the
moment of speaking, e.g. They’re going to build some new Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference page 186
flats (there was a council meeting last month and this 1 f 2 d 3 a 4 b 5 c 6e
was decided for certain).

6 Elicit the first answer in open class to get students Teacher development: feeding back on
started, and write it on the board. Pre-teach pull down
language use in a fluency activity
(= If you pull down a building, you destroy it because it
is dangerous or you want to build something else there In Exercise 10, students are chatting in a ‘real’,
– mime the word ‘pull’) and flooded (= covered in water). personalised speaking activity in which, hopefully, they
Ask students to complete the sentences individually. Let are genuinely interested in sharing information, and in
students compare in pairs before checking answers. which they are concentrating on communicating as well
as on using particular language points. Consequently,
Answers listen in on both content and language use as you
1 might 4 is … going to, might monitor, and note or remember any interesting points
2 are going to 5 is going to, might that are made, as well as any really good phrases or any
3 might errors. When monitoring a fluency stage, it is best not to
interrupt unless there is a language breakdown.

13 NATURE 139

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 139 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

In feedback, you can choose to concentrate on the errors. Use these errors for an error feedback stage at
content of what students said if you feel that this is the end.
most useful. However, this is also an opportunity to help
students to broaden or improve their language use. Here Optional extra activity 1 Write up all the short questions
are three ways to do this. from the lesson at random on the board. Ask students in
1 Write on the board five short sentences or phrases pairs to prepare and write a short dialogue using three of
that different students said during the speaking the questions. Ask some pairs to act out their dialogues
activity. Three or four should be structurally incorrect but tell them to pause and be silent for a moment
and one or two correct. Students work in pairs to instead of saying the short question. The rest of the class
decide which are incorrect and correct them. must say what the three missing short questions were.
2 Write on the board a handful of phrases that
students said which may or may not be correct. Ask Optional extra activity 2 Write the sentences below on
students to come up with better or different ways of the board. Ask students to translate them into their own
saying them. This is a way of not just repairing but language. Then ask them to translate them back into
improving what students say. English. Ask students to compare their English to the
3 Write on the board a handful of phrases that original.
students didn’t say but could have said. Ask students Why don’t we just relax this morning?
to think of when they might have used these phrases. Why don’t we go to the swimming pool?
This cuts straight to the ‘here is a better way of saying Why don’t you talk to him about it?
this’ stage. Why don’t you go to the doctor?
Why don’t I do it for you?
Developing conversations
Short questions
Conversation practice
Aim Aim
to introduce and practise short questions without to practise language from the lesson in a free,
verbs communicative, personalised speaking activity

11 Read through the information in the box as a class. 14 This is an opportunity to bring together several
• Ask students to read the dialogues briefly. Set a simple parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
focus question or two: How many dialogues are there? the language they have learnt.
(six); Why does one speaker want to go on holiday? (He’s • Ask students to work in A and B pairs. First, they must
stressed). use the guide to prepare conversations. Monitor and
• Ask students to work individually to choose the short help with ideas and vocabulary. You could model this
questions. Let students compare their ideas in pairs. Elicit by acting out a conversation with a reliable student
answers in feedback. Ask students to say why they chose first, or by asking one well-prepared pair to model their
each question (see notes below). conversation for the class.

Answers 15 Ask students to roleplay their conversations.

1 What time? 4 How long for? As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
2 Where? 5 Why? language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.
3 What for? 6 How? • In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
that students used and pieces of language they didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
Background language notes for teachers better ways of saying what they were trying to say.

• We use short questions when there is no need to say Optional extra activity Extend this activity into a mingle.
the full question as it is understood from the context. Students walk round the class, talk to three or four other
Often, saying the whole question would be repetitive. students, and improvise dialogues.
• You could show this by eliciting what the full question
is for some of the short questions in Exercise 11: for 25 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.
example, What time (is it on)? and Where (might you go)?
• Notice that we sometimes use prepositions with the Teacher development: using the video
questions: Who with? (=Who do you want to go with?)
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in
12 Ask students to practise the conversations in pairs. various ways:
Ask them to change roles and try out the conversations 1 as an alternative to the conversation practice
two or three times. As students speak, monitor and listen 2 instead of the listening activity in some units,
for errors, and correct students if they have problems. particularly with weaker groups. Students can first
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some
13 Once students have had plenty of practice, of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
change the pairs and ask them to try to improvise new before having a go themselves.
conversations. As students speak, monitor and listen for 3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.

140 OUTCOMES

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 140 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

COUNTRY GIRL? 4 Ask students to work in pairs to prepare and give

opinions and examples. Start by giving an example for
Student’s Book pages 118–119 the first sentence. Monitor and help with ideas and
vocabulary as students speak. In feedback, elicit some of
Communicative outcomes the best examples different pairs came up with.
In this two-page spread, students talk about the
countryside and the city. Possible answers
Students’ own opinions, but 2, 5 and 6 are positive
Vocabulary opinions about the country and 12 is a positive
opinion about the city; 13 is positive and could be
The countryside and the city about a village or the city. The other sentences are
Aim negative.
to introduce and practise words used to describe the
countryside and the city Optional extra activity Bring in or show photos of a
country scene and a city scene. Ask students to describe
1 Start by eliciting one or two animals in the the photos using as many words and phrases from the
countryside to get students started. Then put students in lesson as they can.
pairs to think of examples for the different categories.
Reading
2 Put pairs with other pairs to compare ideas. Elicit
ideas from the class in feedback. Aim
to help train students to read for a general
Possible answers understanding and for specific information
City Country
1 cat, dog cow, sheep 5 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to
2 gym, cinema walking, hunting look at the photos and ask questions to focus on what
3 crime, pollution cows, the dark they can see. Ask: What is the blog about?
4 crime, noise, pollution poor transport, lack of • Ask students to read the introduction and complete
facilities the title. Let students compare their answers in pairs.

Optional extra activity Before doing Exercise 1 write Answers

City, Country and Countryside on the board. Explain that move to the country
the nouns country and countryside mean the same but
you can also use country as an adjective (a country girl). 6 Ask them to predict the six reasons. In feedback,
Brainstorm any words your students can think of that elicit answers from the students.
refer to either heading (City or Country / Countryside).
They may say adjectives, places, etc. Write words at Optional extra activity Ask follow-up questions about
random on the board and ask students to say if their the information in the introduction: How much is the
view of cities or countryside seems positive or negative house? Why do they want to escape the city? How does
from the words on the board. the writer feel?

3 Organise the class into groups of three or four to 7 Ask students to read the blog again to match the
read and discuss the descriptions. Encourage students headings to the paragraphs. You may need to pre-teach
to explain words to each other, and to use the context smell (mime this) and scenery (= the whole picture you
to work out meaning. Monitor and help with ideas and can see – fields, hills, rivers, etc.). Let students compare
vocabulary. their answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from
the students. Ask students to justify answers by saying
Answers what they read.
Countryside: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
City: 1, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 Answers
1 b (smell bad)
2 d (doesn’t like cows)
Background language notes for teachers 3 c (you can’t buy anything)
4 f (clothes and shoes get dirty)
Use visual clues to teach most of these words. The 5 e (boring – field, field, field)
picture on page 119 will help with flat and fields. You 6 a (work is very limited)
could bring in pictures to show other words, or use your
class technology to project images. 8 Ask students to read the article again and decide if
surrounded = (flats/fields) on all sides the sentences are true or false. Elicit the first answer to
crowded = a lot of people get them started. Let students compare answers in pairs.
convenient = very close (to shops or a metro station) In feedback, elicit answers from the students. Again, ask
• Note the stress is on the first syllable of all these words, students to justify answers by saying what they read.
except for surrounded, condition, pollution, convenient.

13 NATURE 141

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 141 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

Answers THEY’RE LOVELY ANIMALS

1 F (chemicals on the fields)
2 F (it followed and looked at him) Student’s Book pages 120–121
3 T (you can’t buy milk in the evening)
4 T (clothes and shoes get dirty from all the earth Communicative outcomes
and grass) In this two-page spread, students practise talking
5 T (field, field, field … very boring) about animals and how long they have had animals
6 F (where do you get cafés … with wi-fi in the or known people.
country?)
Vocabulary Animals
9 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the reasons.
You could set this activity up by briefly eliciting opinions, Aim
or providing examples of opinions, about the first reason. to introduce and practise words used to describe
In feedback, briefly find out whether your class agree or animals
disagree with the reasons.
1 Elicit the answer to photo a to get students started.
Optional extra activity There are some words in the Then put students in pairs to label the other pictures.
blog which students may not know (e.g. following, scary, Elicit answers from the class in feedback and drill the
No chance!, earn money, the choice of work). At the end, words for pronunciation.
ask students to find and underline words they don’t
know and try to guess their meaning from context. Then Answers
explain them with examples, translation or dictionary a cat c horse e cow g pig
work. b rat d dog f fox h sheep

Speaking
Background language notes for teachers
Aim
to practise language from the lesson in a free, • Sheep is an irregular plural (one sheep, two sheep).
communicative, personalised speaking activity • Note the difficult pronunciation when drilling: horse
/hɔːs/, cow /kaʊ/.
10 This is an opportunity to bring together several
parts of the lesson, and for students to practise using all 2 Organise the class into groups of three or four to
the language they have learnt. discuss the questions. In feedback, elicit any interesting
• Organise the class into pairs and ask them to choose answers to share with the class.
task a or b. Ask students to work together to prepare a
list or discuss the questions. Monitor and help with ideas 3 Ask students to work individually to choose the words.
and vocabulary. Let them compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note answers and ask students to explain their choices.
down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that Answers
students used and pieces of language students didn’t The following words can be used:
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students 1 sit, jump 5 play with, ride
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. 2 exercise, attention 6 mess, noise
3 smell, bite 7 chase, kill
Optional extra activity Ask students to prepare six 4 milk, leather 8 damage, disease
reasons not to have a boyfriend, watch sport, vote, drink
beer or have a dog. You could set this for homework.
Background language notes for teachers
Web research activity Ask students to research one of
the ‘Six Reasons’ topics on the page (or think of a topic • Notice the collocations here: need attention, make a
of their own). On the internet, there are lots of lists of mess / noise, cause damage / disease.
reasons why you should or shouldn’t do something, • Note the stress is on the first syllable of all these
so students will be able to find six reasons for almost words, except for attention, disease.
anything. Ask students to present their lists in a later
lesson. 4 Ask students to work in pairs to describe the
animals in the photos. Monitor and note language use. In
feedback, comment on examples of good language use,
and correct errors.

142 OUTCOMES

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 142 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

Optional extra activity Ask students in pairs to think of D: Woah! Scary!

another farmyard or countryside animal and prepare a C: No, it’s fine. And he’s very funny too. I mean, he
description. Ask some pairs to present their descriptions plays very well with our cat, Kira. He chases her
and see if the class can say which animal it is. If students around – and they’ve never had any fights or
are unsure of the name, despite understanding the anything.
description, either tell them the name or ask them to 3
look up the word in dictionaries. Other common animals: E: What’s that noise?
goat, duck, chicken, goose, wolf, mouse, badger, deer, rabbit. F: That? Oh, we have rats in the house. Didn’t I tell
you?
Listening E: No. How annoying! How long have you had
them?
Aim F: Well, we’ve been here a year now and they’ve
to give students practice in listening for gist and for been here the whole time.
specific words and phrases E: Ugh!
F: I know. They eat our food and I worry they’ll bite
5 94 Review the names of the animals in the the kids one day.
photos and give students a moment to read the E: So what’re you going to do?
questions. You could pre-teach huge (= very big) and F: Well, we’ve tried all kinds of things already, but
scared and scary (= frightened and frightening). nothing has worked, so I think we need to pay
• Play the recording. Students listen and note their someone to come in and kill them.
answers. Let them compare their answers with a partner
before discussing as a class. 6 Start by asking students to say where the first
phrase is from. Then ask students to discuss the other
Answers phrases in pairs.
a 1 foxes 2 a dog 3 rats • If your students have all the answers more or less
b 1 Because the foxes are living in the garden. correct, elicit and confirm them. If not, play the recording
2 Because she’s showing a photo of her dog. again, or ask them to look at the audio script on page
3 Because they hear the noise of the rats living in 210 of the Student’s Book. Let them compare their
the house. answers with a partner before discussing as a class.

Answers
94 a 3 b 2 c 3 d 1 e 2 f 1 g 1 h 2 i 3
1
A: Hey, did I tell you? I have foxes in my garden. 7 Ask students to work in groups of four or five to
B: Really? Living there? describe their experiences. Monitor and note students’
A: I think so, yes. I see them quite a lot, anyway. language use. In feedback, comment on examples of
B: Wow! So how long have they been there? good language use, and correct errors.
A: For a few months, I guess.
B: And are they OK? I mean, do they cause problems? Optional extra activity Do a live listening. Tell an animal
A: Not really, no. Well, sometimes they use the story of your own to either model and set up Exercise 7
garden as a toilet ... but I love having them there or as a follow-on and extended listening practice.
and watching them play.
B: Have they ever tried to come inside? Grammar
A: Once, yes. They stole one of my shoes, actually! I
found it outside the next day – half-eaten.
Present perfect to say how long
B: Oh! Aim
A: I haven’t had any problems recently, though, to introduce and practise using the present perfect to
because I have a cat now and I think they’re a bit express duration
scared of her!
2 8 Read through the extracts and the information in
C: Look. This one’s a picture of my dog. Here. the box as a class. Ask students to give you the correct
D: He’s huge! options to complete the rules. Then ask students to check
C: I know. He weighs fifty-one kilos. in the Grammar reference on page 186.
D: Really? That’s amazing. What’s his name?
C: He’s called Sheriff. Answers
D: And how long have you had him? 1 b 2 b
C: Five years. I got him when we moved out of the
city. We have more space now, so …
D: Mmm. For further practice, see Exercise 1 in the
C: He’s very friendly. He always jumps on you when Grammar reference on page 186.
you come home.

13 NATURE 143

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 143 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference 12 Organise the class into groups of four or five. Elicit
1 How long have you been here? possible questions students need to ask to find the first
2 How long have you lived here? piece of information, e.g. Do you have a pet? How long
3 How long have you done that? have you had it? Ask students to prepare other questions
4 She has had that dog for five years. to ask individually. Then tell them to take turns to ask
5 I have lived here for three months now. and answer questions to find out the information.
6 I haven’t had it very long. Monitor and note students’ language use. In feedback,
find out which person in each group has done things
9 Ask students to work individually to complete the the longest.
questions. Elicit the first question to get them started. • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
Organise the class into pairs to check their answers. students used and pieces of language students didn’t
Monitor and note how well students understand how to quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
form the questions. better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
• In feedback, elicit answers or move on to Exercise 10.
Students will hear the correct questions on the recording Optional extra activity Organise a class survey. Ask
and can check their answers. students in pairs to think of five new How long …?
questions, e.g. How long have you had your mobile
Answers phone? How long have you known your teacher? How
1 have you had long have you lived in this city? When students are
2 have you been ready, tell them to mingle and ask four or five different
3 have they been students their questions. At the end, student sit down
4 have they known with their original partner, compare their information,
5 have you lived and present their findings to the class.
6 has she worked
For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
10 95 Play the recording. Students listen and Grammar reference on page 186.
check their answers. Play the recording again. Students
listen and write the answers. Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
• Point out that not very long means a short time, and 1 For about ten years.
ages means a very long time. 2 Quite a long time now – nine or ten years, maybe.
3 so it’s twelve years now.
95 4 Not very long – only a few months.
1 A: How long have you had your cat? 5 so it’s almost twenty years now.
B: Two years.
2 A: How long have you been together?
B: A few months now. Sounds and vocabulary review
3 A: How long have you been married?
B: For 15 years now. Aim
4 A: How long have they known each other? to practise the sounds /kr/, /dr/, /tr/ and /str/; to
B: Not very long. listen and write down words in continuous speech
5 A: How long have you lived in this house?
B: All my life! 13 96 Play the recording. Students listen and
6 A: How long has she worked there? repeat the sounds.
B: Ages.
96
/kr/, /kraɪ/, /kraʊ/, /dr/, /draɪ/, /tr/, /tri/, /træn/, /str/,
Background language notes for teachers /stri/, /streɪ/

This use of the present perfect form (have + past 14 97 Give students a moment to look at the
participle) is to talk about a state or an action that began words in the box. Read the words out so that students
in the past and continued to now. Its use emphasises the can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one
duration and its effect on now. It is possible to draw a sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or
timeline on the board to show how this form works: parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence
two years ago now
for them to do this. Then play the recording again.
Past Future
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could
I’ve had my cat for two years play the recordings further or play and pause them, but
students should be able to write complete sentences
11 Ask students to work in pairs to practise the after two or three listenings.
conversations. Monitor and correct any misuses or
mispronunciations of the form.

144 OUTCOMES

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 144 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 13 NATURE

97
1 I love living in the countryside.
2 I don’t take public transport because of the crime.
3 The streets in the centre are always crowded.
4 I need to drive a friend to the station.
5 It’s always dry in April.
6 I agree it was a very strange article.
7 He lives three streets from me.
8 There are lots of problems with transport.

Optional extra activities Get students to find two more

words in the unit with each of the sounds practised
(/kr/, /dr/, /tr/ and /str/). Get students to write two
collocations or phrases for each word in the box in
Exercise 14. (These activities could be set as homework.)

Teacher development: using the sounds

and vocabulary review
This section allows you to focus on problem sounds, but
also reviews some key words and develops students’
ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
development on page 19).
Sounds and correction
The difficulty of these consonant clusters will depend on
students' L1.

For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the

Grammar reference on page 186.

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference

1 They said it might rain later.
2 I might not be in the office tomorrow.
3 She might call you this afternoon.
4 It said there’s going to be a storm tonight.
5 We’re going to go to Bulgaria for our holiday
this year.
6 My dad’s going to drive us to the station.

Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference

1 known 5 had
2 been 6 seen
3 lived 7 felt
4 wanted

Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference

1 I might not see you tomorrow.
2 We are going to finish the work by Tuesday.
3 She has been there for twelve years now.
4 I’m not going to do it. I’m too busy.
5 They might possibly move to the country next year.
6 How long have they lived there?

13 NATURE 145

65752_u13_pp137-145.indd 145 08/12/18 12:11 PM

 14 Words for Unit 14
OPINIONS
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
words except: insurance, election, efficient, economy.
Aim
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set 3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with
of key, useful vocabulary using photos someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started students are doing the task and help if necessary.
(photo 1 is a strong economy – only in a strong economy • In feedback, correct any errors students made, or to
are large building projects undertaken). Go round the point out the pronunciation of any words students found
room and check students are doing the task and prompt if hard to say.
necessary. Depending on how much they know, students
may need help with a dictionary or teacher translation to Optional extra activity End this stage by asking your
do the exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions. students to say which photos they liked and why.
Alternatively, ask students to predict which topics will be
2 98 Play the recording so that students can check in the unit from the photos and words.
their answers. Let them check again with their partner
after they have listened once. Culture notes
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students
to repeat the words. If students have any problems • Photo 1 shows a construction site in Dubai, UAE. Dubai
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and is famous for its high-rise buildings and skyscrapers, and
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the it has the world’s tallest building, the Burj Khalifa. Dubai
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress has one of the world’s fastest growing economies, and
(see language notes below). construction and property is the biggest contributor to
the economy.
98 and answers • Photo 3 shows a road sign signalling the approach
1 a strong economy of the border crossing between the Netherlands and
2 extra wages Germany. It shows the European Union flag and, in
3 arrive at the border Dutch, it reads Federal Republic of Germany.
4 there’s been a murder
5 get treatment
6 use violence
7 don’t get on well
8 leader of a team
9 advert for a musical
10 injure herself
11 lost the election
12 start peace talks
13 more efficient
14 a scary film
15 have insurance
16 support each other
17 go and see a play
There is no photo to match ‘the acting was bad’.

Background language notes for teachers

In this spread, the connection between the phrases and

the photos is less obvious than in other spreads, as they
express more abstract ideas. Be prepared for a degree
of discussion and debate about which phrases go with
which pictures.
support each other – used to refer to each member of a
group when each does something to or for other members
injure herself – the reflexive pronouns myself, yourself,
themselves, etc. are used when the same person or
people are both the subject and the object of the verb.

146 OUTCOMES

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 146 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

WHAT WAS THE FILM LIKE? 3 Elicit the first answer (sentence 1 is positive) from
the students to get them started. Then ask pairs to
Student’s Book pages 124–125 discuss the other sentences. In feedback, ask students
to justify answers.
Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking Answers
about films. positive: 1, 2, 6, 10
negative: 3, 5, 7, 9
Speaking could be either: 4, 8

Aim Optional extra activity Drill the adjectives for

to introduce the theme; to get students talking about pronunciation. Point out the strong stress and give
the topic of the lesson in a personalised activity students a chance to say all the words chorally
and individually.
1 Start by modelling the activity. Describe the last
film you saw briefly. Once students have got the hang Background language notes for teachers
of the activity, ask them to work in pairs to discuss the
questions. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. If you have a monolingual class, it is worth finding out
In feedback, correct errors or point out useful ways of which words are cognates or near cognates, which are
saying things students attempted to say. false friends, and which look completely different to
L1 for your students. This will dictate what needs to be
Optional extra activity Films inevitably date very quickly. checked, and which words are most difficult.
Use your classroom technology to find and show posters • hiding behind the sofa – it is a cliché in the UK to say that
of films your students will be familiar with (or just write if something on TV is scary, people don’t switch off the TV –
the names of recent films on the board). they hide behind the sofa until it stops being scary.
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the
Culture notes words except: depressing, entertaining, predictable.
• Note the weakly stressed syllables in brilliant
• Slumdog Millionaire is a 2008 British drama film /ˈbrɪljənt/, violent /ˈvaɪələnt/.
directed by Danny Boyle. Set and filmed in India, it tells the
story of a teenager from the slums of Mumbai who wins Optional extra activity Ask students in pairs to think
the Indian version of the game show Who Wants to Be a of films they know that could match the sentences in
Millionaire? It won eight Oscars including Best Picture. Exercise 2.
• Filmed in Germany, The Grand Budapest Hotel is a
2014 comedy film which starred Ralph Fiennes and was Listening
written and directed by Wes Anderson. It was nominated
for 11 Oscars. Aim
• The Hurt Locker is a 2008 American war film about to help train students to listen for general
a team of American soldiers whose job it is to defuse understanding and for specific words
bombs and booby traps. Directed by Kathryn Bigelow,
it is the only film by a female director to have won an 4 99 Start by setting up the situation. Make sure
Academy Award for Best Picture or Best Director. students know there will be two conversations.
• Play the recording. Let students compare their answers
Vocabulary in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.

Describing films, plays and musicals Answers

Aim Conversation 1
to introduce and practise words to describe films, 1 no
plays and musicals 2 The first person says it’s brilliant and really scary.
3 No, they say it’s ‘not my kind of film’ and they
2 Elicit the first answer (funny) from students to don’t like violent films.
get them started. Then organise the class into pairs to
complete the sentences. Tell them to try to work out the Conversation 2
meaning from the context before checking any difficult 1 yes
words in their dictionaries. 2 One person thought it was brilliant and funny, the
other thought it was a bit stupid and predictable.
Answers
1 funny 6 brilliant
2 sad 7 terrible
3 violent 8 strange
4 scary 9 depressing
5 predictable 10 entertaining

14 OPINIONS 147

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 147 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

99 6 Mix the pairs so that students are working with

1 someone new. Ask students to discuss the questions. Go
A: Have you ever seen a film called 28 Days Later? round the room and check students are doing the task
B: No, I haven’t. I’ve heard of it, but I’ve never seen it. and help if necessary.
What’s it like? • In feedback, comment on any interesting language
A: It’s brilliant. It’s really, really scary. It’s about a used and correct any errors students made.
terrible disease that makes people hungry for
blood, and they want to kill. Optional extra activity Do the language patterns
B: Really? It sounds very violent! activity. Write the sentences below on the board. Ask
A: Yeah, it is, but it’s great! It’s a very clever film. It’s students to translate them into their own language.
not a normal horror movie. It’s also about the Then ask them to translate them back into English. Ask
environment and politics and everything. students to compare their English to the original.
B: It sounds terrible – definitely not my kind of film! I found it really sad.
A: No, it’s great! Honestly! I find grammar really difficult.
2 How are you finding the course?
C: Have you seen that new musical Dogs yet? I can’t find my keys.
D: Yes, I have. I saw it last week, actually. I found £20 on the street yesterday.
C: Oh really? We went to see it last night. What did Did you find your phone?
you think of it?
D: It was OK. Nothing special. It was quite entertaining Developing conversations
in places, I suppose, but the story was stupid.
C: Really? Do you think so? I thought it was brilliant
What’s it like?
– one of the best things I’ve seen in a long time. Aim
D: Yeah? OK. to introduce and practise asking What’s it like?
C: The dancing and the music were great and it was
very funny. I couldn’t stop laughing! 7 Read through the information in the box as a class.
D: But what about the ending? It was so predictable! • Ask students to match the questions to the answers.
C: Not for me! I found it really sad. I started crying! Elicit a match to get students started. Let students
D: Really? Oh well. I suppose we just don’t share the compare their answers in pairs. Students may need to
same tastes. use dictionaries to check words.

Answers
Culture notes 1 d 2 c 3 f 4 a 5 h 6 b 7 g 8 e

• 28 Days Later is a 2002 British post-apocalyptic thriller

film directed by Danny Boyle. The plot depicts the Background language notes for teachers
breakdown of society following the accidental release of
a highly contagious virus, and focuses upon the struggle Here, like is a preposition. It is used in the structure
of four survivors to cope with the destruction of the life What is / are … like? when asking for a description of
they once knew. something. What was the film like? means ‘Describe the
• Dogs is fictitious, but there is, of course, a musical film to me’. This use is difficult because it will be very
called Cats. different from what students would say in L1. Students
may get confused with the verb like (What was the film
5 99 Ask students to read the sentences and recall like? Yes, I like it), or feel they should use like in the answer
or guess the missing words. Let them compare their (It is like very funny). Give them time to practise the
ideas with a partner. structure and response in drills and controlled activities.
• When students are ready, play the recording again. Let • Here, both the thing being asked about and the word
students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, like are stressed when asking questions: What was the
elicit answers from the students. At the end, you may band like? Make sure you drill this.
wish to allow students to look at the audio script on
page 210 to check their answers. Optional extra activity Before moving on to pairwork in
Exercises 8, 9 and 10, do a repetition drill. Ask students
Answers to close their books and repeat the questions after you.
1 called Once students have got the hang of this, do a prompt
2 of drill (see below).
3 like
4 sounds Teacher development: drills
5 Honestly
6 of • It is important to give students practice in saying these
7 places questions accurately. You could do this with a simple
8 dancing repetition drill: say a question – students repeat chorally
9 ending – use an open palm gesture to then ask some individuals
10 found to say the question.

148 OUTCOMES

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 148 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

• You could also use prompt drills. With books closed, • In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
you say the film, and students say: What is the film like? that students used and pieces of language students
Then you say your parents, and students say: What are didn’t quite use correctly during the activity. Show
your parents like? If you want students to switch between students better ways of saying what they were trying
present and past, use gestures to show now (point to to say.
your feet) or the past (hitchhike over your shoulder).
• You could also prompt students to say the question by Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable
reading out answers, e.g. My mum’s great but my dad’s worksheet on page 243 can be used at this point or at
rude, and elicit: What are your parents like? the end of the unit for further practice.

8 Ask students to work in pairs to practise 26 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM.
conversations. As students speak, monitor and listen for
errors, and correct students if they have problems. Teacher development: using the video

9 Once students have had a go at just reading out The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in
questions and answers, encourage them to change roles various ways:
and try improvising answers and then questions. Practice 1 as an alternative to the conversation practice
makes perfect, so give students plenty of time to have 2 instead of the listening activity in some units,
a go at these questions and try to get to a stage where particularly with weaker groups. Students can first
they are feeling confident using them. practise reading out the dialogues and work on some
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way
10 Ask students to work individually to prepare before having a go themselves.
questions. Monitor and help with ideas. 3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.
• Once students have questions, organise the class
into small groups and tell students to take turns to ask
and answer. You could model this by asking one or two
questions of your own first. Alternatively, do a mingle.
Ask students to stand up, walk round, and interview four
or five people.
• As students speak, monitor and note errors or
examples of good language use. Use the feedback to
correct errors and point out good things your heard.

Optional extra activity Set topics to ask about. For

example, last summer’s holiday (What was the weather /
hotel like on your last holiday?), work (What are the
people / bosses like where you work?). You could extend
this lesson into a mingle in which you write four or five
topics on the board, shout one out, and get students to
improvise questions about that topic until you shout out
the name of another topic.

Conversation practice
Aim
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity

11 This is an opportunity to bring together several

parts of the lesson, and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt.
• You could start by brainstorming a few films or
musicals to get students started. Let them produce their
own list individually, and monitor to help with ideas and
to translate the names of films or plays they want to talk
about into English.

12 Organise the class into pairs. Ask pairs to follow

the model to ask and answer questions about their lists.
In this activity, students need to improvise a little.
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.

14 OPINIONS 149

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 149 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

WHAT DO YOU THINK WILL HAPPEN? 4 Next, pop music. Last year’s TV Idol winner,
Shaneez, has got engaged. The singer is planning
Student’s Book pages 126–127 to marry her boyfriend of two months, actor and
model Kevin Smith.
Communicative outcomes 5 And finally, France go into their important World
In this two-page spread, students practise making Cup match against Brazil tonight without their
predictions about different situations. captain and star player, Florian Mendy. Mendy
injured himself in training yesterday and there’s
Listening now a chance he won’t play in the rest of the
competition.
Aim
to give students practice in listening for gist and for 4 100 Start by giving students time to read
specific information through the sentences. Ask them to decide whether they
are true or false according to the news reports. Then let
1 Start by checking that students understand the them compare their ideas in pairs. Don’t confirm or reject
categories in the box. Then ask students in groups of anything at this stage.
three or four to discuss different news stories they can • Play the recording again. Students listen and check.
think of. You could elicit one or two examples to get Let them compare their answers with a partner before
them started. discussing as a class.
• Note that sentence 5 is considered to be true: the
2 Organise the class into pairs to order the kinds of talks started, then failed. However the use of the present
news. In feedback, elicit ideas and build up a class order perfect might suggest that the talks are still continuing,
on the board. which they are not. Accept students’ answers if they
understand it in this way.
Possible answers
Major national or international news come first on a Answers
news report. 1 F (… they will probably have to share power.)
Business news and entertainment news come in 2 T (… they’re expecting the final result early on
the middle. Monday morning.)
Sports news is usually at the end. 3 T (The company lost 385 million dollars last year …)
The weather forecast often comes after the 4 F (… it is going to cut 5,000 jobs.)
news report. 5 T (talks have failed – so, already started)
6 T (the border between them)
3 100 Play the recording. Students listen and match 7 F (boyfriend of two months)
the stories to the areas of news. Let them compare their 8 F (He’s an actor and model.)
answers with a partner before discussing as a class. 9 F (injured himself in training yesterday)
10 F (now a chance he won’t play)
Answers
1 national news
2 business Background language notes for teachers
3 international
4 entertainment Note the sets of vocabulary that help students
5 sport understand each story.
1 general election / close / win / share power / voting /
final result
100 2 cut jobs / lost … dollars / factories
1 Tomorrow’s general election will probably be the 3 peace talks / war / disagree / border
closest in many years. Both the People’s Party 4 pop / idol / engaged / marry / actor
and the Popular Front say they expect to win, but 5 World Cup match / captain / star player / injured /
most people think that they will probably have to play / competition
share power. Voting starts at seven in the morning
and closes at ten, and they’re expecting the final Culture notes
result early on Monday morning.
2 The country’s largest chemical company, NBE, has In case students ask, NBE, Adjikistan, Kamistan, Shaneez
said that it is going to cut five thousand jobs. The and Florian Mendy are not real names.
company lost 385 million dollars last year and
now plans to close its two biggest factories in the 5 Ask students to work individually to prepare what
north of the country. they want to say. Monitor and help with ideas and
3 Abroad, peace talks between Adjikistan and vocabulary. You could let students compare ideas in pairs
Kamistan have failed and there are worries that if you think students need more help.
war will now follow. The two countries disagree
about where the border between them should be.

150 OUTCOMES

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 150 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

6 Organise the class into small groups to share their Answers

stories. As students speak, monitor and note errors and a and b are pessimistic, c, d and e are optimistic
examples of good language use which you could focus
on in feedback. 9 Ask students to complete the sentences. Elicit the
first answer to get them started. Organise the class into
Optional extra activity Find and write three headlines pairs to check their answers. Monitor and note how well
on the board from current stories in the news. Choose students understand the use.
examples which are funny or interesting, and have • In feedback, elicit answers.
simple words, but where students will have to use a bit
of guesswork to work out what the story is about. Ask Answers
students in pairs to guess one of the stories or invent 1 won’t 5 won’t
their own story to go with the headline. 2 won’t 6 will
3 will 7 will
Grammar 4 won’t 8 won’t

will / won’t for predictions

Aim Pronunciation
to introduce and practise will / won’t for predictions
Aim
7 Read through the information in the box as a to practise the pronunciation of ’ll and won’t in
class. Point out that we use will + infinitive without sentences
to, and that won’t is an abbreviated version of will not.
Ask students to check the rules of use in the Grammar 10 101 Play the recording. Students listen and
reference on page 187. notice the pronunciation.
• Ask students to match the comments to the stories
in Exercise 3. Let them compare answers in pairs before 101
feedback as a class. 1 It’ll be fine.
2 I probably won’t vote this year.
Answers 3 It won’t be easy.
a 2 b 4 c 5 d 3 e 1 4 It won’t cost much.
5 I think he’ll have a few problems.
6 We’ll probably be a bit late.
Background language notes for teachers 7 We won’t win.
8 It won’t kill you. You’ll live.
We use will / wont + infinitive without to. In natural
speech, the abbreviated form ’ll is generally used with 11 101 Play the recording again. Students listen
pronouns but the full form tends to be used with nouns. and repeat, and practise saying the sentences.
• Many student grammar and course books will tell • Note that in natural speech, ’ll is weakly stressed and
students that will is used to make a future prediction reduced to a very small /əl/ sound your students may
when it is based on a personal opinion (I’ll be rich one find hard to hear. By contrast, won’t /wəʊnt/ is stressed.
day; I don’t think Ron will like this much) and going to is
used when there is some outside evidence that enables 12 Elicit a possible dialogue to get students started.
the speaker to predict the future (Julie’s going to have a Then ask them to work in pairs to prepare and practise
baby; Look at those clouds – it’s going to rain). While this conversations. Monitor and correct any misuses or
rule sounds neat, the truth is that native speakers often mispronunciations of ’ll and won’t.
interchange the forms. At this level, it is best to point out
that both will and going to are used for predictions, but 13 Start by eliciting two or three possible predictions
that we generally, but not exclusively, say I think with will. to get students started. Then set a short time limit and
ask students to prepare their own. Go round and help
Optional extra activity Point out the native speaker with ideas and vocabulary, and make sure students are
English in paragraph c in Exercise 7: make a difference. using the grammar forms correctly.
If something makes a difference, it changes a situation in
a good way. If something doesn’t make any difference, it 14 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
doesn’t change a situation in any way. share their ideas. Mix students so they are working with
This loss won’t make any difference. people they don’t often get to talk to in class. As students
He’s made a real difference to people’s lives. speak, monitor and notice examples of good language
The course made a big difference to the way I do my job. use as well as errors to focus on in feedback.
It doesn’t make any difference to me what you think!

8 Ask students to discuss the comments in pairs. Elicit

the first answer to get them started. In feedback, elicit
answers and ask students to explain their choices.

14 OPINIONS 151

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 151 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

Teacher development: providing A BETTER LIFE

preparation time and a model Student’s Book pages 128–129
Outcomes aims to encourage students to use new
language to relate their own individual stories or Communicative outcomes
experiences. This can often be daunting if students are In this two-page spread, students talk about life and
expected to speak without adequate preparation. society and whether things are better or not.
• It is a good idea to provide a short, useable model
of what you want students to say from your own Vocabulary Life and society
experience. By doing this, you provide a live listening, a
model of good pronunciation and accuracy, and avoid Aim
lengthy instructing. to introduce and practise words and phrases
• It is also a good idea to give students three or four connected with life and society
minutes to think of things to say, and to note down
words or phrases to use. It is a chance for nervous 1 Start by reading out the words in bold and pointing
students to ask for some support. The more time out the pronunciation. You could ask students to listen
students spend preparing, the better the result. and repeat. Note the stress is on the second syllable
in economy.
For further practice, see Exercises 1 and 2 in • Ask students to choose the sentence in each pair
the Grammar reference on page 187. (a or b) that has the meaning most similar to the head
sentence (1–5). Let students compare their answers
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference in pairs. In feedback, use explanations to check the
1 they’ll words (see below). At the end, allow students to use
2 there’ll be dictionaries if they are still unsure of any words.
3 will the meeting start
4 won’t Answers
5 won’t 1 a 2 b 3 a 4 a 5 a
6 you’ll
7 probably won’t
8 will Background language notes for teachers
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference unemployment = people without jobs
A wages = money you get when you work (low / high wages)
1 I expect you will need to take a test. insurance = an arrangement with an insurance company,
2 I don’t expect it will be necessary. where you pay money so that if something bad happens
3 I expect next year will be quite difficult. (e.g. your car crashes, your house falls down) the company
4 I doubt they will offer me the job. will give you money to pay for a new car, house, etc.
5 I doubt it will be very expensive. get on with = have a good relationship
6 I doubt he will listen, but I can ask him. neighbours = the people who live near you
climate = the weather in your country or region
B treatment = the process of giving medical care
4 I don’t think they will offer me the job. efficient = it works well – it is good for the time and money
5 I don’t think it will be very expensive.
6 I don’t think he will listen, but I can ask him. Culture notes

The picture shows an employment agency (Agentur

für Arbeit) in a German town. Here, people who are
unemployed sign on for benefits and seek work.

2 Organise the class into new pairs. Give students two

or three minutes to memorise the sentences individually.
When they are ready, ask them to take turns testing
each other.

3 Ask students to work in pairs to prepare sentences.

Start by writing an example sentence on the board.
Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.

Possible answers
The economy: prices are high; there are no jobs;
people have no money.
Crime: the city centre is dangerous; there are vandals.

152 OUTCOMES

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 152 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

The people: they are rude and unfriendly; they are Possible answers
lively and love life. Reasons for moving to another country: to do a
The climate: it’s sunny, warm, wet, windy. course at school or university, to learn the language
The health system: there are long queues; there aren’t of the country, to get a new job, to make money,
enough doctors, nurses, hospitals. to be with or marry someone from that country, to
escape from war, poverty or violence in your country.
4 Ask Student A in each pair to join with other
Student As to form new groups of four or five, so 6 Organise the class into groups of four. Ask each group
that students don’t work with the partner they to sort themselves into two A and two B students. Make
prepared their sentences with. Students take turns sure students are clear about which text to read. Before
to read out their sentences. students read, go through the questions with them so
that they know what information they need to find.
Optional extra activity Ask students to write five true
sentences about the economy, crime, people, climate and Answers
health system of their countries. Student A: Maja
1 Five years.
Teacher development: organising pairs 2 To work.
3 Yes, I love it.
and groups 4 I get on well with them, they are relaxed and open.
• In a communicative classroom, students are often 5 It’s nice and warm, but there is snow in
asked to work in different groupings, e.g. pairs, small the mountains.
groups, mingles. In order to make sure you organise 6 It’s quite expensive, but I have health insurance,
your groups clearly and quickly, it is a good idea to think so it isn’t a problem.
carefully about your management beforehand. Here are 7 Very well, wages are high and there are lots of jobs.
some tips. 8 There is some gun violence, but I’ve never
Pairwork seen anything.
1 When checking the answers to exercises or the answers 9 No, I don’t miss anything.
to reading or listening tasks, adult learners feel happy
working with the person next to them. Often this is Student B: Adnan
someone they know. If your students sit in rows, you 1 Two years.
could vary pairs by asking students to turn round to 2 Because there was a war in my country.
work with the people behind them. 3 It’s OK, but I miss some things, and I can’t get a
2 In contrast, when doing a more fluent speaking or good job here.
writing activity, a roleplay or interview, for example, it 4 They are polite, but it’s difficult to get to know them.
is a good idea to mix pairs so that students work with 5 I like it. It rains a lot, but that’s ok. It’s too hot in
someone new. Give everyone a number and ask them my country.
to find a partner (e.g. in a class of 12, number them 6 It has been great for me. I had really good
1 to 6, then 1 to 6, and ask 2s to sit together, 3s to sit free treatment.
together, etc.). Alternatively, ask students to stand up 7 It’s OK.
and find someone they haven’t worked with for a while. 8 There is some crime but it isn’t dangerous.
Groupwork 9 Yes, I hope so one day.
1 You can mix students into groups in the same way and
for the same reasons as with pairwork (e.g. in a class of 7 Let students compare answers with the person in
12, number them 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, etc. round the class to their group who read the same text, then discuss the
get four groups of three). If they are in rows, ask pairs new questions. Monitor and help with any problems
to turn round to work with the pair behind. of vocabulary or understanding. In feedback, elicit the
2 If students are in groups, make sure they are in a answers to the two questions.
position to speak to and hear everybody. Make them
put their chairs in a circle, or make them find space in Answers
the classroom and stand in a circle. Planning pair- and Student A text – from somewhere in the northern
groupwork carefully, and taking time to make sure hemisphere, maybe Scandinavia or Russia, has
everybody is comfortable and ready before starting on moved to somewhere warmer, maybe the southern
a activity pays dividends. part of the USA (she watches ice hockey, the health
service is expensive)
Reading Student B text – has come from somewhere where
there is a war, e.g. Syria, or Somalia (it’s hot and
Aim there is not enough water), probably now living
to help train students to do a jigsaw reading and to in the UK (it rains a lot, the health service is free,
read for specific information people are polite but it’s difficult to know them)

5 Start by setting up the situation. Ask students to 8 Ask students to change pairs in their groups so that
discuss the questions in pairs. Elicit ideas in feedback and there are two A/B pairs. Students ask and answer the
open up ideas for debate if necessary. questions in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the

14 OPINIONS 153

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 153 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

students. Ask students to justify answers by saying what Possible answers

they read. (See Exercise 6 above for answers.) 1 It’s easy to get to work / make friends / find a job.
2 It’s important to speak the language.
9 Ask students to discuss and respond to the texts 3 It’s nice to go cycling in this city.
personally in pairs or in their groups of four. You could 4 It’s cheap to eat out.
open this up to a class discussion at the end. 5 It can be difficult to find a good job / get to
know people.
Optional extra activity There are some difficult words in
the text which students may not know (see below). Ask
students to find words they don’t know and try to guess For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the
their meaning from the context. Then explain them with Grammar reference on page 187.
examples, translation or dictionary work.
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
Background language notes for teachers 1 c 2 b 3 e 4 f 5 d 6 a

Note these difficult words in the texts:

Maja Speaking
miss (things) = feel sad because you cannot see people or
do things you did in your home country Aim
lock the door = use a key to close the door to practise language from the lesson in a free,
steal (stole, stolen) = take things illegally communicative, personalised speaking activity
Adnan
complain = talk about things you don’t like 12 This is an opportunity to bring together several
injured = physically hurt (e.g. leg broken in an accident) parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
support (my family) = make money to get food, clothing, the language they have learnt.
etc. for your family • Ask students to work individually to prepare things
to say. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.
Grammar Adjective + verb Then organise students into groups of four or five to
discuss the topics. You could ask one student to chair
Aim the discussion while the rest take turns to express their
to introduce and practise constructions with adjective views. In feedback, ask different groups to say what they
+ to + infinitive found out about each other’s countries or cities.
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
10 Read through the information in the box as a down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
class. Then organise the class into pairs to answer the • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
questions with sentences from the text. In feedback, students used and pieces of language students didn’t
point out that adjectives are followed by to + the quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
infinitive of the verb. better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
• Ask students to check their answers using the
Grammar reference on page 187. Web research activity Ask students to research one of
the areas (crime, health system, climate, etc.) in a city
Answers or country they know well. Ask students to find five
1 It’s difficult to find time to do things like watch interesting pieces of information to share with the class
ice hockey. in the next lesson.
2 It’s dangerous to walk at night.
3 It was dangerous to live in his own country. Sounds and vocabulary review
4 It’s difficult to really know people.
Aim
to practise the common word endings /əns/,
Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar /mənt / and /ʃən /; to listen and write down words
reference on page 187. in continuous speech

Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference 13 102 Play the recording. Students listen and
1 to find 5 to read repeat the sounds.
2 to walk 6 to see
3 to park 7 not to worry 102
4 not to offer 8 not to vote əns: violence, difference, insurance
mənt: treatment, environment, comment
11 Set up the task by eliciting one or two examples ʃən: election, situation, solution
from the class. Ask students to work individually to
complete the sentences. Let students compare their
answers in pairs before eliciting a few sentences in
open class.

154 OUTCOMES

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 154 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

14 103 Give students a moment to look at the VIDEO 7: NATIONAL SYMBOLS

words in the box. Read the words out so that students
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one
Student’s Book page 130
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to Aim
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence to find out more about the countries that make up the
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. United Kingdom, and look at some national symbols
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could around the world
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but
students should be able to write complete sentences 1 Lead in to the topic by asking students to look at the
after two or three listenings. photos. Ask: What can you see? (leeks, a lion, a thistle, a
flower called flax). Organise the class into pairs or small
103 groups to discuss the questions. In a brief feedback
1 I’ve noticed a few differences. session, elicit students’ ideas and write up interesting
2 There were celebrations when she won the election. ideas or pieces of language on the board.
3 The government should do more for
the environment. 2 Students read the text to find the answers. Let them
4 They stole my phone, but I had insurance. compare their answers with a partner before discussing
5 The president didn’t comment on the situation. as a class.
6 There’s no easy solution to unemployment.
7 My insurance paid for my treatment. Answers
8 I really hate all violence. leek = Wales; lion = England; thistle = Scotland; blue
flax flower = Northern Ireland
Optional extra activities Get students to find two more The four countries are part of the United Kingdom
words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (see below).
(/əns/, /mənt/ and /ʃən/). Get students to write two Leek – once worn by soldiers; used for medicine
collocations or phrases for each word in the box in Lion – from Richard the Lionheart
Exercise 14. (These activities could be set as homework.) Thistle – a Viking stepped on one and woke a
Scottish army
Teacher development: using the sounds Flax flower – because of the linen industry (linen
comes from the flax plant and makes a good
and vocabulary review quality cloth)
This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
also reviews some key words and develops students’
ability to hear English through a dictation exercise. Culture notes
Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
development on page 19). Ireland, commonly known as the United Kingdom (UK)
or Britain, is made up of the island of Great Britain
For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the (comprising England to the south, Scotland to the north
Grammar reference on page 188. and Wales to the west) and the north-east corner of the
island of Ireland, which is called Northern Ireland. The
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference rest of the island of Ireland is a separate nation – the
1 They won’t win. Republic of Ireland.
2 Will he get the job? • Richard the Lionheart lived in the late twelfth century.
3 It was difficult not to laugh in that situation. He was famous as a warrior king who led crusades.
4 I probably won’t see you before Christmas. • The rose is the national (flower) symbol of England.
5 I don’t think the economy will improve this year. The mythical unicorn is the animal symbol of Scotland.
6 Is it easy to find work? The mythical dragon is the symbol of Wales and appears
on the flag.
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
1 to read 5 to move 3 Organise the class into groups of four or five to
2 will lose 6 won’t happen discuss the questions. In a brief feedback session, elicit
3 to eat out 7 not to help students’ ideas and write up interesting ideas or pieces
4 to travel 8 will make of language on the board.

Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference Optional extra activity Many national sports teams
1 It was lovely to see you again. name themselves after animals that are national
2 It won’t cost too much. symbols. Here are some from the sport of rugby: kiwis
3 What will you do with the money you won? (New Zealand), wallabies (Australia), springboks (South
4 Was it difficult to learn Russian? Africa), pumas (Argentina). Write up the animals and see
5 It’s difficult not to think about it. if students can guess the rugby-playing countries.
6 It’s not rude to talk about money in my country.

14 OPINIONS 155

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 155 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

4 27 Organise the class into teams of three. As Part 2 (4.34–8.37)

they watch the video, students should note down what So, the answers.
they think is the correct answer to each question. At the Number 1: Egypt, Mexico and the United States all
end, they discuss answers with their team and agree on have eagles as national symbols. On the Mexican
an answer. national flag, you can see an eagle eating a snake.
And there’s an eagle on Egypt’s red, white and black flag,
5 27 Students watch the second part of the video while the United States uses eagles in lots of different
and note, in their teams, whether they got the answers ways too.
right or not. In feedback, go through the answers, and The national symbol of Italy is actually the wolf.
find out what extra information students heard. Find out So, number 2. The two countries that have lions as
which team got most correct answers. You could award symbols are Kenya and … Belgium, believe it or not.
bonus points for the extra information. Now, of course, lions live in Kenya, so no surprise
there. They don’t, though, live in Belgium, but lions
Answers have been a popular symbol there for over five
1 D Italy (symbol is a wolf) 6 China hundred years!
2 A Kenya D Belgium 7 D Pakistan Number 3: You can find the cobra in all four countries
3 B India 8 D Denmark – Vietnam, India, Thailand and Ghana, but the only
4 B Bangladesh (mango tree) 9 A Argentina country where it’s a national symbol is … India. Over
5 C South Africa 10 C Tanzania 30,000 people die in India every year, by the way, after
snakes bite them!
Right. On to Number 4. Oak trees are a very popular
27 symbol in many countries. They’re the national tree
1 Which country does NOT have an eagle as a in Germany, Croatia and Poland … but NOT
national symbol? in Bangladesh.
A Egypt C the United States The national tree there is the mango tree, and the
B Mexico D Italy country is famous for this delicious fruit.
2 Apart from England, which two of these Number 5: This lovely flower is called the King Protea
countries also has a lion as a symbol? and it’s the national flower of … South Africa. This flower
A Kenya C Peru generally grows well in hot, dry areas. It grows to two
B Saudi Arabia D Belgium metres and the flower can be 30 centimetres across.
3 Which country has this snake – the cobra – as a Number 6 now – and you probably don’t need me to
national symbol? tell you that the country that has dragons like this
A Vietnam C Thailand as a symbol is China. The Chinese believe dragons
B India D Ghana are symbols of power and can bring luck. In fact, in
4 Which country does NOT have the oak tree as a spoken Chinese, if someone is really really good at
national symbol? something, you can compare them to a dragon! That’s
A Germany C Croatia how important they are in Chinese culture.
B Bangladesh D Poland Next up, number 7: This strange animal is called a
5 Which country has this beautiful flower as a markhor. It’s a kind of goat and there aren’t many of
national symbol? them left in the world. It’s the national animal of …
A the Netherlands C South Africa Pakistan, where it lives – in the north of the country.
B Sweden D Mongolia Number 8 – a difficult one, because the flags of all
6 Which country has a dragon like this as a four countries contain red and white. However, the
symbol? Write your answer. flag you can see here is … the Danish one. The flag – a
7 Which country has this strange animal as a white cross against a red background – has been used
national symbol? since at least 1379.
A Iceland C Kazakhstan Number 9 is another difficult one. You might know
B Venezuela D Pakistan that Argentina, Finland and Greece all have blue and
8 Which country is this the flag of? white flags, but rugby is only popular in one of those
A Turkey C Canada countries, and only one team plays in sky blue and
B Japan D Denmark white stripes – and that’s Argentina. Their football
9 Which national team can you see in this photo? team may be more famous, but their rugby team is
A Argentina C Greece also very good. In 2015, they reached the semi-finals
B Finland D France of the Rugby World Cup.
10 Which country is home to this world-famous And to finish things off, number 10. The mountain
mountain? you can see here is Mount Kilimanjaro, and at 5,895
A New Zealand C Tanzania metres, it’s the highest mountain in Africa. It is, of
B Switzerland D Japan course, in Tanzania.

156 OUTCOMES

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 156 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 14 OPINIONS

6 This exercise offers students the chance to relate REVIEW 7

the topic of the video to their own experiences, ideas
and opinions. Student’s Book page 131
• Give students time to plan their talk. Monitor and help
with ideas and vocabulary. Aim
to consolidate vocabulary and grammar from
7 Organise new pairs and ask students to take turns Units 13 and 14
to tell each other their information.
• Monitor and listen to each pair. Answers
• When most students have finished, stop the class 1
and give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of 1 supposed 5 might
the things students tried to say for the whole class or 2 will 6 go
by asking students to correct or fill in gaps in sentences 3 to 7 long
you’ve written on the board, based on what you heard 4 to 8 chance
students saying. 2
1 They said it might not be very cold next weekend.
Optional extra activity Ask students to research national 2 They said it’s going to be very cold and it may
symbols on the internet and find other animals or plants snow tonight.
that are connected to different countries. 3 How long have you worked here?
4 Let’s go out somewhere. It’s too hot to stay in all day.
5 I’ve had a cough for a few days now.
6 I don’t think things will get any worse.
7 I haven’t known him very long.
8 Do you think you’ll ever move?
3
1 I won’t do it before Friday.
2 It’s easy to find work there.
3 I might not go to the party.
4 I think they’ll miss her.
5 It isn’t good to be scared at times like that.
6 Do you think they’ll win?
6
1 famous 5 weak
2 violent 6 expensive
3 scary 7 huge
4 flat 8 sunny
7
1 check 5 find
2 vote 6 fail
3 have 7 make
4 grow 8 need
8
weather: cloudy, a good climate, reach 40 degrees,
wet and windy
animals: cause disease, provide leather, smell terrible,
ride across the fields
society: friendly neighbours, a lot of unemployment,
low wages, win the election
9
1 crowded 5 edge
2 rubbish 6 surrounded
3 murder 7 condition
4 pollution 8 provide

104 and answers to Exercise 4

1 She’s lived there all her life.
2 How long have you known about this?
3 It’s difficult not to worry about what will happen.
4 You can try, but I don’t expect it’ll change things.
5 I doubt the economy will be stronger next year.
6 They said it’s going to be hot and there might be
a storm.

14 OPINIONS 157

65752_u14_pp146-157.indd 157 08/12/18 12:12 PM

 15 Words for Unit 15
TECHNOLOGY
Optional extra activity Ask students to work in pairs to
find other words they recognise in the pictures. Students
Aim may well know or guess quite a lot of words. There is no
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set need to check or teach these words, but you could select
of key, useful vocabulary using photos five or six of the more useful words they say to write up
on the board.
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the words
and phrases to the photos. Elicit the first match to get
them started (photo 1 is produce electricity). Go round
the room and check students are doing the task, and
prompt if necessary. Depending on how much they know,
students may need help with a dictionary or teacher
translation to do the exercise. See Unit 1 for further
suggestions.

2 105 Play the recording so that students can check

their answers. Let them check again with their partner
after they have listened once.
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students
to repeat the words. If students have any problems
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress
(see pronunciation notes below).

105 and answers

1 produce electricity
2 very heavy
3 plug it in
4 shelves of food
5 various apps
6 read the instructions
7 do a search
8 install solar power
9 save energy
10 press the button
11 I dropped it
12 design a website
13 try to repair it
14 keep files
15 change the battery

Background pronunciation notes

Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all the

words except: design, install, produce, repair (note how
verbs often have stress on the second syllable), and
electricity, instructions.

3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with

someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and help if necessary.
• In feedback, correct any errors students made or point
out the pronunciation of any words students found hard
to say.

158 OUTCOMES

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 158 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

CAN YOU RECOMMEND ANYTHING? Background language notes for teachers

Student’s Book pages 134–135 Note that turn on and turn off are separable phrasal
verbs. The particle can go before or after the noun (turn
Communicative outcomes on the TV; turn the TV off). It has to go after a pronoun
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking (turn it off but not turn off it).
about machines and technology and things they plan
to buy. Optional extra activity Ask students to take out any
technology they have on them. In pairs, students say as
Vocabulary much as they can about the machine they have.

Machines and technology Listening

Aim
to introduce and practise words to describe machines Aim
and technology to help train students to listen for gist and for specific
information
1 Elicit the word for the first photo (laptop) from
the students to get them started. Then organise the class 4 106 Start by setting up the situation. Make sure
into pairs to complete the labelling. Tell them to label students know there will be three conversations and
what they can before checking any difficult words in people will talk about machines.
their dictionaries. In feedback, elicit answers and drill the • Play the recording. Let students compare their answers
words for pronunciation. in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.

Answers Answers
a laptop 1 a laptop – he’s thinking of buying one
b washing machine 2 a phone – he dropped the old one and needs to
c vacuum cleaner replace it
d mobile phone 3 a digital camera – he wants to get one for a
e dishwasher birthday present for his brother
f digital camera
g hairdryer 106
h tablet 1
A: Do you know much about computers?
B: A bit. Why?
Background language notes for teachers A: I’m thinking of buying a laptop. Can you
recommend anything?
dishwasher = machine to wash plates, dishes, etc. B: Well, it depends. How much do you want to spend?
washing machine = machine to wash clothes A: I’m not sure – about five or six hundred pounds.
• Note the strong stress is on the first syllable of all B: OK. Well, for that price, try a Bell. They have quite
the words. a lot of memory, they’re not too heavy and the
• Note the two hard to say /ʃ/ sounds in dishwasher and battery lasts quite a long time.
washing machine. A: That sounds perfect. Thanks.
• Note vacuum /ˈvækjʊəm/. 2
C: What happened to your phone?
2 Organise the class into groups of four or five to D: Oh, I dropped it last night and broke the screen.
discuss the questions. Monitor and note how well C: Oh, how annoying!
students understand and use the new words. In feedback, D: I know. I’ll need to replace it, but I’m actually
briefly elicit comments, and check the meaning and thinking of getting one of those new model 8s
pronunciation of any words students had problems with. everyone’s talking about.
C: The Kotika ones?
3 Ask the students to point to any screens they can D: Yeah.
see in the photos to get them started. Then organise the C: Ooh! I see. Someone’s feeling rich, then!
class into pairs to find the other items. In feedback, elicit D: Why? What? Are they really expensive?
answers and drill the words for pronunciation. C: Well, they’re not cheap ... but they are amazing
phones. I mean, they look great, they’re nice and
Answers light and they’ve got a huge screen, so they’re
1 a screen can be seen in a, d and h great for playing games and watching videos on.
2 a plug can be seen in c D: Wow. OK. Well, I guess I should have a look at one
3 a keyboard can be seen in a this weekend, then.
4 a, c, d, f and g clearly show buttons with which
you can turn the machines on or off
5 in f, you can see where the battery goes
6 a, c d, f and g clearly show buttons you can press

15 TECHNOLOGY 159

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 159 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

3 Background language notes for teachers

E: Hi. How’re you?
F: Oh hi. What’re you doing here? • Here, the verb think is in the present continuous form
E: I’m trying to find a birthday present for my (i.e. I’m thinking now). After prepositions, e.g. of, we use
brother. It’s taking me ages. the -ing form.
F: What kind of thing are you looking for? • We use this form when the plan is just something in
E: Well, I’m thinking of buying him a digital camera, our minds now – we haven’t made any concrete plans
but I don’t know much about them! such as booking a ticket or putting down a deposit.
F: Well, Bonny does a really good one. It’s quite
strong, so it won’t break if you drop it … , it takes 8 Organise the class into pairs and give them
really good pictures – even in the dark – and it’s preparation time to think of what to say to make
not very expensive either. recommendations. You could introduce some language
E: OK. Well, that sounds good. to use, e.g. Why don’t you …? You could / should …
• When students are ready, model a typical conversation
5 106 Ask students to complete as much of the with a reliable student to get the activity started.
table as they can before they listen again. Monitor and correct any errors of use or pronunciation.
• When students are ready, play the recording again. Let
students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, 9 Ask students to work in pairs. Give students
elicit answers from the students. At the end, you may preparation time to think of ideas, and monitor to help.
wish to allow students to look at the audio script on • Once students are talking in pairs, monitor and note
page 211 to check their answers. how well they use the new structure. In feedback, write a
few incorrect sentences on the board and ask students to
Answers correct them.
1 Bell 6 screen
2 memory 7 games For further practice, see Exercises 1 and 2 in
3 battery 8 break the Grammar reference on page 188.
4 look 9 dark
5 light 10 expensive Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
1 I’m thinking of joining a gym.
6 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the 2 What brand are you thinking of buying?
questions. Monitor and note any errors or interesting 3 They are thinking of moving sometime next year.
language students use which you could discuss in 4 I hope he isn’t thinking of leaving the company.
feedback at the end. 5 Who are you thinking of asking?
6 They said on TV that they aren’t thinking of
Optional extra activity Ask students in groups to say changing the price.
why they bought their own mobile phone and / or tablet. 7 Which university is she thinking of applying to?
8 I’m thinking of trying to make my own computer.
Grammar be thinking of + -ing 9 Why is he thinking of retiring? He’s only 48.
10 Please tell me you aren’t thinking of marrying him!
Aim
to introduce and practise be thinking of + -ing to talk Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
about uncertain plans 1 e 2 b 3 c 4 f 5 a 6 d

7 Read through the information in the box as a class.

Then ask students to work individually to complete the Developing conversations
sentences. Elicit the first answer as an example in open
class. Let students compare their sentences in pairs
Do you know much about …?
before discussing answers as a class. Aim
to introduce and practise ways of asking to find out
Answers how much people know about general topics
1 ’m thinking of buying
2 is thinking of doing 10 Read through the information in the box as a class.
3 are thinking of going • Ask students to look at the topics in the box. Make
4 am thinking of changing sure they know the words, and ask which ones they
5 are thinking of buying would like to know more about. Ask students to add two
6 are thinking of going more topics.
7 am thinking of getting
8 is thinking of studying 11 You could get students started by getting the
class to ask how much you know about one of the topics
– give an honest answer. Organise the class into small
groups to ask each other the questions. Monitor and

160 OUTCOMES

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 160 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

note how well students ask and use the question. Note EMAIL ME THE LINK
any interesting language used to respond, and focus on
this in feedback.
Student’s Book pages 136–137

Optional extra activity You could extend this activity into Communicative outcomes
a mingle. Students walk round, ask different people, and In this two-page spread, students talk about
find out who knows most about history, Australia, etc. computers and the internet.

Conversation practice Vocabulary

Computers and the internet
Aim
to practise language from the lesson in a free, Aim
communicative, personalised speaking activity to introduce and practise words connected with
computers and the internet
12 This is an opportunity to bring together several
parts of the lesson, and for students to practise using all 1 Start by reading out the words in the box, and
the language they have learnt. pointing out the pronunciation. You could ask students
• Ask students to work individually to prepare what to listen and repeat.
they want to talk about first. Tell them to use their • Ask students to complete the dialogues. Let students
imagination and invent something to buy if they compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, use the
currently have no plans to buy anything! Monitor and context to check the meaning of words (e.g. a memory
help with ideas and vocabulary. stick is very small, you use it to keep copies of files or
photos). At the end, allow students to use dictionaries if
13 When students are ready, organise the class into they are still unsure of any words.
groups of four. Ask students to take turns asking and
answering about each other’s pieces of technology. You Answers
could extend this into a class mingle. 1 photo, email address
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new 2 computer, memory stick
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback. 3 website, link
4 software, download
14 Ask students to work in pairs and discuss what 5 files, email
advice they were given. Find out who gave the best advice. 6 video, search
• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language
that students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students Background language notes for teachers
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
• Point out the interesting collocations of verbs and
Optional extra activity Do a live listening. Tell students nouns in the sentences: lose a file, keep a copy, send a link,
what you are thinking of doing or buying this weekend. download from a website, check your emails, do a search.
• Note the stress is on the first syllable of all the words
Web research activity Ask students to research a specific in the box, except for computer.
topic relevant to English-speaking countries (e.g. New
Zealand history, Rolls Royce cars, cricket, the British 2 Ask students to match the nouns from Exercise 1
royal family). In the next lesson, students ask Do you to the groups of collocations. Elicit the first answer to
know much about …? and talk about the topic they have get students started. Let them compare answers in pairs
researched. before going through them as a class.

28 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM. Answers

1 email 4 files
Teacher development: using the video 2 computer 5 software
3 website
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in
various ways: 3 Organise the class into new pairs. Give students
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice a minute to prepare things to say individually. When
2 instead of the listening activity in some units, students are ready, ask them to discuss the questions.
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first Monitor and note any interesting things students say. In
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some feedback, ask what different students found out about
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way their partner and write up any useful phrases you heard
before having a go themselves. on the board.
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise.

15 TECHNOLOGY 161

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 161 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

Optional extra activity Do a language patterns activity. Teacher development: learning the alphabet
Write the sentences below on the board. Ask students to
translate them into their first language. Then ask them Learning the alphabet is an important part of developing
to translate them back into English. Ask students to literacy skills for students whose L1 alphabet is very
compare their English to the original. different to that used here. If some or all of your students
I’ll send you the link if you want to read it. use a different alphabet, spend more time on this area.
I’ll check if you like. Here are some suggestions.
If you want the software, you can download it from 1 Ask them to write the capitals of the letters in the table.
their website. 2 Write a set of five letters on the board at random and
You can turn the music down if you want. ask students to put them in alphabetical order.
If you need help, tell me. 3 Ask students to find words from the lesson in a
If it’s cheap, buy one for me. dictionary and say what order they come in.

Pronunciation 6 108 Read through the information as a class.

Provide one or two examples (e.g. www.cengage.co.uk;
Aim [email protected]).
to practise the pronunciation of the letters of • Play the recording. Students listen and write. Let
the alphabet students compare their answers in pairs before
discussing as a class.
4 107 Start by introducing students to the
phonemes (if your class are unfamiliar with them). Answers
Read out each sound and ask students to repeat, or 1 www.peiterzx.co.gu
ask students to guess and say how each phoneme is 2 [email protected]
pronounced. 3 Flat 4, 65 Farquhar Drive
• Play the recording. Students listen and repeat.

107 108
1 bcdegptv 1 A: www.peiterzx.co.gu. That’s p–e–i–t–e–r–z–x dot
2 flmnsxz co dot g–u.
3 ahjk B: OK, p–e–i–t–e–r–z–x dot co dot g–u.
4 quw A: Yes.
5 iy 2 A: My email’s [email protected]. That’s n–o–m–a–
6 o s–h–y at j–m–a–l dot com.
7 r B: OK, n–o–m–a–s–h–y, that’s all one word, right?
A: Yes. At jmal dot com.
3 A: Flat four, 65 Farquhar Drive. That’s f–a–r–q–u–h–
Background language notes for teachers a–r and d–r–i–v–e.
B: OK. Flat four, 65 Farquhar Drive – f–a–r–q–u–h–a–r.
There are twenty-six letters in the English alphabet. If A: That’s right.
you have students whose L1 isn’t European, you will need
to spend time making sure they are clear about the order 7 Students take turns to practise saying different
of letters in the alphabet (a useful skill when using a addresses. Monitor and correct any errors of use or
dictionary). pronunciation. In feedback, go over any areas students
• The pronunciation of the letters q /kjuː/ and w /double were having problems with.
juː/ are the two most likely to cause problems.
• There are twelve vowel phonemes used in British Optional extra activity If your students have internet
English, including short vowels (/e/, /ə/, etc.) and long access in class, dictate some web addresses and ask
vowels (/iː/, /ɑː/, etc.). There are eight diphthongs, them to find them. Choose learning websites or popular
including /eɪ/, /aɪ/ and /əʊ/. English-language websites (e.g. news websites).

5 Organise students into pairs or small groups to do Listening

this activity. You could make it competitive – ask groups
of four to say the alphabet, but if a person makes an Aim
error, they drop out. When another person makes an to give students practice in listening to and doing
error, the person who is ‘out’ rejoins the game. a questionnaire

Optional extra activity Ask students to spell out their 8 Set the scene. Ask: What is it? (a questionnaire);
middle name or family name. Other students in the class What is it about? (technology). Organise the class into
(or in groups) write down the letters. pairs to read the questionnaire and guess the questions.
Monitor and prompt. In feedback, elicit ideas, but don’t
reveal answers. Use the opportunity to check any key
words students may not know.

162 OUTCOMES

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 162 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

9 109 Play the recording. Students listen, check 8 If you buy a piece of technology, how do you
their ideas and write the questions. Let students try to learn to use it?
do this individually, maybe pausing after each question. a I ask someone to show me the very basic things.
Let them compare their answers with a partner before b I read the instructions and learn to do a few
writing answers on the board. Leave gaps for anything things. I’m not interested in the complicated
students didn’t catch, and play the questions one more things.
time if necessary. Stop after each question and elicit and c I just start playing about with it and teach
write up the full version on the board. myself. To find out more detailed things, I
watch videos or look at the instructions or their
109 and answers website.
1 How many computers do you have in your home? 9 What do you do if you have a problem with a
2 How long is your computer on every day? piece of technology?
3 How often do you check your email? a Get angry, shout and jump up and down – until
4 How many emails do you get every day? someone tells me I need to plug it in.
5 What kind of mobile phone do you have? b Check it’s plugged in and, if it is, call someone
6 What do you use your phone for? to repair it.
7 Have you ever done anything stupid on c Check everything is plugged in. Turn it off and
your computer? on again – and if it still doesn’t work, I repair it
8 If you buy a piece of technology, how do you myself.
learn to use it? 10 How often do you buy a new piece of technology?
9 What do you do if you have a problem with a a Hardly ever. Why do I need it when my old
piece of technology? things work?
10 How often do you buy a new piece of technology? b Sometimes. Some things are better, and I
change when my old things break.
10 110 Play the recording. Students listen and c All the time. I like to have all the latest things.
tick the answers that are true for them, to complete the
questionnaire. 11 Let students compare their answers with a partner
before discussing as a class.
110
1 How many computers do you have in your 12 Mix pairs so that students work with someone
home? new. The aim here is to get students to respond
a None. personally to the recording by sharing information from
b One. their own lives. In feedback, you could ask students with
c Two or more. interesting or funny stories to share them with the class.
2 How long is your computer on every day?
a Maybe an hour or two – if I turn it on. Optional extra activity Ask students to think of five
b Four or five hours. Most of the evening. pieces of technology they own (e.g. a TV, a mobile phone,
c I never turn it off. a tablet, a sat nav, a laptop) and to put them in order
3 How often do you check your email? of importance. Put students in groups to explain their
a Maybe once a day, maybe less. decisions.
b Two or three times a day.
c I check it all the time on my phone.
4 How many emails do you get every day?
a Nought to ten.
b Ten to thirty.
c Thirty to a hundred.
5 What kind of mobile phone do you have?
a The most basic pay-as-you-go phone.
b An OK phone with quite a good camera. It does
everything I need it to do.
c The very best, latest model.
6 What do you use your phone for?
a What do you mean? Phoning people, of course!
b I use the camera, I listen to music, and I
sometimes play games.
c Apart from the camera, I use the diary, Facebook,
maps – all kinds of things. I can’t list them all.
7 Have you ever done anything stupid on your
computer?
a Yes. I’ve deleted files on my computer by accident.
b Yes. I sent an email to the wrong person once.
c No, of course not.

15 TECHNOLOGY 163

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 163 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

IT’LL SOLVE ALL OUR PROBLEMS 7 It allows you to control everything in your house
from your phone: app.
Student’s Book pages 138–139 8 It allows you to save a lot of energy because it’s so
efficient: machine or some other technology such
Communicative outcomes as a boiler / or very efficient heater.
In this two-page spread, students practise talking
about technology. Optional extra activity With more confident classes, play
a game. Ask students to get together in pairs. Tell them
Vocabulary What technology does to sit so that one person in each pair can see the board,
but their partner can’t. Write a list of machines on the
Aim board, for example: dishwasher, laptop, camera, fridge,
to introduce and practise words connected with what watch. Student A must describe each machine in turn.
technology allows us to do Their partner must say the machine. The winner is the
first pair to describe and guess all five.
1 Ask students to match the sentence halves. Elicit the
first match to get them started. Let students compare Reading
their answers in pairs. In feedback, use the context to
check words and point out interesting collocations. At Aim
the end, allow students to use dictionaries if they are still to help train students to read for a general
unsure of any words. understanding and for specific information
• The idea of the exercise is to get students thinking
about the vocabulary in a simple way as well as to 3 Start by setting up the situation. Organise the
prepare them for the reading (which includes some of students into pairs to look at the title and photos and
this vocabulary) and the final speaking task where they discuss the questions. In feedback, elicit ideas and
will talk about their own experiences of technology. opinions from the students.

Answers Answers
1 c 2 b 3 d 4 a 5 f 6 g 7 h 8 e The writer is optimistic.
One text is about homes that make or save
electricity in some way, and the second is about
Background pronunciation notes farms that grow things in unusual ways and save
space.
Note the stress is on the second syllable of some of the
verbs: develop, produce, create, control. Optional extra activity Pre-teach key words. Write the
following pairs of words on the board and ask students
2 Ask students to work in pairs to think of ideas. Elicit to explain how they differ: problem / solution, electricity /
one or two to get them started. Monitor and note how energy, develop / produce, solar farms / solar cells. Tell
well students use the words. students to use their own knowledge or dictionaries to
• As you go through the answers you might get students explain the differences. Then ask them to use the words
to give examples of apps or machines. They can use to predict the content of the text.
commercial names or their own language if necessary.
Teacher development: pre-teaching
Possible answers
a could be 2, 3, 5, 6, 7
key words
b 1, 4, 8 Many teachers choose to pre-teach key words in a text,
if students will struggle to understand the text without
1 It allows you to keep all your files in one safe knowing them. Others think it better to leave students
place: phone app or computer software, or some to use context to work out the meaning. Students
other piece of technology (such as a memory have already done a lot of work on vocabulary in the
stick). vocabulary section above. However, it is still a good idea
2 It allows you to develop your own apps quickly to explain key words. See the optional extra activity
and easily: computer software. above for key words from this text and for a task to help
3 It allows you to check your heart rate easily: students work with them. Use the visuals on the page,
mobile app or a machine such as a heart monitor teacher definitions or translations, and / or dictionary
in a hospital. work to make sure students know the words. Get
4 It allows you to produce electricity at home: students to use key words to predict the content of
machine or technology, e.g. wind turbine, generator, the text.
solar panel.
5 It allows you to create tests for the vocabulary 4 Ask students to read and find the writer’s opinions.
you’ve learned: app or software (including the They need to find out what problems and solutions the
Vocabulary Builder on the Outcomes website). writer suggests. Let students compare their answers in
6 It allows you to solve problems with the computer pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
quickly: app or software.

164 OUTCOMES

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 164 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

Answers Grammar Adverbs

The writer thinks the biggest problems are the poor
economy, the growing population and the fact that Aim
the world doesn’t produce enough jobs, food or energy. to introduce and practise well and other adverbs
The writer is optimistic and suggests solutions: of manner
homes could become electricity producers and
we’ll have enough energy for all; we’ll grow food in 7 Read through the information in the box as a class.
perfect conditions. Then organise the class into pairs to ask questions. Give
them time to read the questions and responses first,
5 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the seven and check their understanding. Model the activity with a
things the writer mentions. Ask students to read the strong student first to get students started. Monitor and
article again to check their answers. Let students note how well students do the task. Correct any errors of
compare their answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit use or pronunciation.
answers from the students. Ask students to justify their
answers by saying what they read. 8 Organise the class into pairs to read the sentences,
underline the adverbs and verbs, and complete the rules.
Answers Monitor and note how well students do the task. Prompt
1 In many places the economy’s doing badly. students to complete the task as you monitor.
2 In Morocco they are building huge solar farms. • In feedback, elicit answers. Then ask students to check
3 Nano solar cells could be used in paint to put on in the Grammar reference on page 188.
the outside of houses.
4 Very, very small solar cells are being developed Answers
for offices. 1 The economy’s doing quite badly, but our
5 Red and blue LED lights help plants to grow very company is growing.
quickly. LED lights are bright, last longer than 2 I had a problem, but the company solved it
other lights and don’t get too hot. very quickly.
6 With LED lights, plants can be grown in a 3 I have an app that allows me to check my heart
cupboard. rate easily.
7 On pink farms, the farmer doesn’t need chemicals 4 Things in the digital world are changing very fast.
because conditions are perfect.
1 -ly 2 fast 3 very
6 Ask students to discuss the sentences in pairs.
Monitor and note students’ opinions and use of
language. Use the feedback time to open up students’ Students complete Exercises 1 and 2 in the
discussions to a class debate, and comment on good uses Grammar reference on page 189.
of language by students.
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
Optional extra activity There are some difficult words 1 slowly 4 badly, hard
in the article which students may not know (see below). 2 easily 5 well, nicely
At the end, ask students to find and underline words 3 late, early 6 happily, long
they don’t know and try to guess their meaning from the
context. Then explain them with examples, translation or Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
dictionary work. 1 efficiently 5 late
2 badly 6 louder
Background language notes for teachers 3 safely 7 worse
4 quickly and easily 8 harder
Note these difficult words in the article.
huge = very big
insect = very small animal (draw an ant and a butterfly Background language notes for teachers
on the board)
earth = here, the black stuff you grow plants in • In English, adjectives describe nouns and generally go
cupboard = furniture with doors and shelves, often in the before the noun, but adverbs describe verbs, adjectives
kitchen, where you keep food, plates, glasses, etc. and other adverbs. They generally go after a verb.
• We usually add -ly to adjectives to make adverbs but
Culture notes note that when an adjective ends with y, we change the y
to i: easy – easily.
LED (light-emitting diode) lights offer lower energy • Irregular adverbs which have the same form as the
consumption and a longer lifetime than incandescent adjective include: fast, hard, late, early, daily, straight and
light sources. They are also smaller and more robust. wrong.
nano-cells = very, very small cells • Students sometimes confuse adjective and adverbs
forms (a quickly runner) and put the adverb in the wrong
place (I changed easily the app).

15 TECHNOLOGY 165

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 165 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

Speaking 112
1 The software allows you to manage your money.
Aim 2 It’s a really amazing app.
to practise language from the lesson in a free, 3 I need to change the battery on my camera.
communicative, personalised speaking activity 4 It’s not hard to create a nice website.
5 They damaged the wall when they installed
9 Ask students to work individually to prepare the machine.
ideas. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. 6 It allows you to translate any language.
Then organise students into groups of four or five to 7 I save all my files in various places.
discuss the topics. You could ask one student to lead 8 I have to repair my washing machine.
the discussion while the rest take turns to comment. In
feedback, ask different groups to say what they found Optional extra activities Get students to find two more
out about each other. words in the unit with each of the sounds practised (/a:/,
• As students speak, go round and monitor, and note /æ/, /ɪ/, /ei/, /eə/, /ɒ/, /ə/, /ɔː/). Get students to write
down any interesting pieces of language you hear. two collocations or phrases for each word in the box in
• At the end, look at good pieces of language that Exercise 11. (These activities could be set as homework.)
students used and pieces of language students didn’t
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students Teacher development: using the sounds
better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
and vocabulary review
Optional extra activity Ask students to pull out their This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
mobile phones and show the app icons to others in their also reviews some key words and develops students’
group. Students take turns to ask about the icons and to ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
describe their function. Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable development on page 19).
worksheet on page 244 can be used at this point or at Sounds and correction
the end of the unit for further practice. In English, notoriously, the link between spelling and
pronunciation is often barely existent. Note here how ‘a’
Sounds and vocabulary review becomes /ə/ when it is not stressed and how it changes
to /ei/ when ‘e’ is added after the consonant in the
Aim spelling (mad / made; tap / tape, etc.).
to practise the sounds /ɑ:/, /æ/, /ɪ/, /eɪ/, /eə/, /ɒ/, /ə/,
/ɔː/; to listen and write down words in continuous For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the
speech Grammar reference on page 189.

11 111 Play the recording. Students listen and Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
repeat the sounds. 1 Is she thinking of changing jobs?
2 We aren’t thinking of making our own website.
111 3 I’m thinking of having children.
/ɑ:/, /æ/, /ɪ/, /eɪ/, /eə/, /ɒ/, /ə/, /ɔː/ 4 He’s thinking of buying a new one.
5 I’m not thinking of applying for a Master’s.
12 112 Give students a moment to look at the 6 Are they thinking of selling the company?
words in the box. Read the words out so that students
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or 1 confident 5 good
parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to 2 slow 6 well
reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence 3 late 7 bad, hard
for them to do this. Then play the recording again. 4 slowly 8 well, awful
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could
play the recordings further or play and pause them, but Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference
students should be able to write complete sentences 1 He speaks really quickly!
after two or three listenings. 2 Where are you thinking of moving to?
3 I’m thinking of complaining to the company
about it.
4 You look really nice in that suit.
5 He’s studying hard for his exams at the moment.
6 The camera works perfectly now.
7 We’re thinking of getting married next year.
8 You drive too fast.

166 OUTCOMES

65752_u15_pp158-166.indd 166 08/12/18 12:13 PM

 16 Words for Unit 16
LOVE
• In feedback, correct any errors students made or point
out the pronunciation of words students found hard
Aim to say.
to introduce the theme of the lesson and practise a set
of key, useful vocabulary using photos 4 Give students preparation time to think of more
words or phrases to go with the photos. Note that this
1 Organise the class into pairs to match the phrases is quite open, so students could include words for things
to the photos. Elicit the first match to get them started they can see in the photos, or describe the feelings of the
(photo 1 is hold the baby). Go round the room and check people, or say how they themselves feel about the photo,
students are doing the task and prompt if necessary. etc. Then organise them into new pairs to take turns to
Depending on how much they know, students may need say words and guess the photos.
help with a dictionary or teacher translation to do the
exercise. See Unit 1 for further suggestions. Optional extra activity End this stage by asking your
students to say which photos they liked and why.
2 113 Play the recording so that students can check
their answers. Let them check again with their partner
after they have listened once.
• Play the recording again. This time, ask students
to repeat the words. If students have any problems
saying any of the words, model the words yourself, and
encourage students to try again. Write up some of the
long, difficult words on the board, and mark the stress
(see pronunciation notes below).

113 and answers

1 hold the baby
2 Don’t slip!
3 make an appointment
4 I’m jealous!
5 protect your head
6 knock at the door
7 encourage each other
8 celebrate their anniversary
9 musical instruments
10 negotiate the price
11 be in love
12 go to a nightclub
13 remove the paint
14 plant some flowers
There are no photos to match I promise I will or
I don’t approve.

Background language notes for teachers

Point out some of the more fixed collocations: go to a

nightclub, make an appointment, celebrate an anniversary.
• Note the strong stress is usually on the first syllable
except: approve, appointment, negotiate, remove,
anniversary, encourage, protect.

3 Mix the pairs so that students are working with

someone new. Ask students to take turns to test each
other. The best way to instruct this task is to act it out
with a reliable student. Go round the room and check
students are doing the task and help if necessary.

16 LOVE 167

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 167 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

DID I TELL YOU MY NEWS? Answers

1 anniversary, together
Student’s Book pages 142–143 2 pregnant, baby
3 married, wedding
Communicative outcomes 4 a date, asked me out
In this two-page spread, students will practise talking 5 divorced, jealous
about relationships and giving news. 6 saved, move
7 broken up, getting on
Vocabulary Love and marriage 8 in-laws, approve

Aim 4 The aim here is to get students to use the new

to introduce and practise words and phrases to language in improvised conversations. Read through the
describe love and marriage example as a class before asking students to prepare
similar dialogues using different sentences from
1 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the Exercise 3. Go round and help with ideas and vocabulary.
questions. In feedback, check students understand the
meaning of the words. 5 Organise the class into pairs to act out and extend
the dialogues. Model an example with a reliable student.
Answers Monitor and note errors and examples of good use to
1 A girlfriend is a girl or woman you date, or go focus on in feedback.
out with.
A wife is a woman you are married to and live with. Optional extra activity Ask students to rewrite
A partner is a person you are in a long-term sentences so they are true for them or for people they
relationship with, e.g. you might live with them, know. Ask students to share any sentences about love
but you are usually not married to them. and marriage in their family.
2 Boyfriend, husband and partner
Listening
Optional extra activity Use the photo on the page
to brainstorm vocabulary. Ask: What event is this? (a Aim
wedding); What people can you see? (husband, wife, other to help train students to listen for specific information
family members – brother, sister, niece, nephew).
6 114 Start by setting up the situation. Ask
2 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the students to read the four sentences and check they know
questions. Elicit the first answer to get students started. all the words. Make sure students know there will be four
Monitor and note which words students know, and conversations and people will talk about relationships.
which they don’t. In feedback, elicit answers, and check Ask them to say what they expect to hear and what
words students are not sure about. information in the sentences might be wrong.
• Play the recording. Let students compare their answers
Answers in pairs. In feedback, elicit answers from the students.
Married couples: married + wedding, divorced +
jealous, in-laws + approve Answers
Unmarried couples: a date + asked me out 1 Owen has been with his girlfriend for around
Both: broken up + getting on, saved + move, three months. / Owen is moving in with his
anniversary + together, pregnant + baby girlfriend after around three months.
2 Her brother Gerrard Is going to get married to
someone she doesn’t like.
Background language notes for teachers 3 Fiona and Kieran are getting divorced because
Fiona wanted kids and he didn’t.
a date = when two people who like each other go out 4 She’s going on a date with a guy from her French
together, e.g. for meal or for a coffee, with a view to class. They’re going to do karaoke.
starting a relationship
ask (someone) out = ask someone to go out on a date 7 114 Ask students to read the sentences from the
break up = stop being together conversations and decide on the correct option. Students
get on = have a good relationship need to apply their understanding of grammar and lexis
in-laws = parents of your wife / husband rather than listening skills.
approve = say you think something / somebody is OK • When students are ready, play the recording again. Let
pregnant = going to have a baby students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback,
elicit answers from the students. Ask students to justify
3 Ask students to complete the sentences individually. their answers by saying what they heard. At the end, you
Elicit the first answer to get students started. Let may wish to allow students to look at the audio script on
students compare their answers in pairs before page 213 to check their answers.
discussing as a class.

168 OUTCOMES

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 168 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

Answers Go for a walk

1 have they been 5 tell Go on a picnic
2 good-looking 6 shame Do some volunteer / charity work together
3 sometime 7 seems Take a yoga or other fitness class
4 What’s 8 tall Play video games together
Take a music lesson together
114 Go to a used bookstore
1 Go gift shopping – not for each other, but for
A: Did I tell you Owen’s going to move in with somebody else
his girlfriend? Take a cooking class together
B: I didn’t know he had a girlfriend! How long have Visit a tourist hot spot in your town that neither of
they been together? you has been to before
A: Two or three months, I think. Attend a local film or music festival
B: That’s not long! What’s she like? Visit a new restaurant
A: She’s nice, and she’s very good-looking! Eat in
B: That’s great. I’m pleased for him. So, where are
they going to live? Developing conversations
A: Pickwick somewhere.
2
Did I tell you …?
C: Did I tell you my brother Gerrard is going to Aim
get married? to introduce and practise ways of asking for
D: No. When’s the wedding? information
C: Next May sometime.
D: That’ll be nice. So what’s his partner like? 9 Read through the information in the box as a class.
C: She’s quite annoying, actually. We don’t really • Ask students to complete the conversations. Elicit
get on. the first answer to get students started. Let students
D: Oh dear. compare their ideas in pairs.
3
E: Did I tell you Fiona and Kieran are going to Answers
get divorced? 1 are going to go / are going
F: No! Why’s that? 2 has
E: I think she wanted kids, but he didn’t. 3 met
F: Oh, that’s sad! How long have they been married? 4 have broken up
E: Not very long. Four years, I think. 5 have … found
F: What a shame. They’re both such nice people. 6 are going to have
E: I know. I hope we can stay friends with both
of them. 10 Ask students to practise the conversations in pairs.
4 As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, and
G: Did I tell you I have a date on Friday? correct students if they have problems.
H: No. Who with?
G: A guy in my French class. Conversation practice
H: So what’s he like?
G: He seems very nice. He’s quite quiet, but he’s funny. Aim
H: Is he good-looking? to practise language from the lesson in a free,
G: Yeah, not bad. He’s quite tall and he has lovely eyes. communicative, personalised speaking activity
H: OK. So what are you going to do?
G: We’re going to have a drink together and then we’re 11 This is an opportunity to bring together several
going to meet some of his friends for karaoke. parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
the language they have learnt.
8 Organise the class into pairs to discuss the questions. • Ask students to work individually. You could start by
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new brainstorming relationships that students could talk
language or interesting conversations to use in feedback. about. These could be people students know, or celebrity
• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language relationships. As students prepare, go round and help
that students used and pieces of language students with ideas and vocabulary.
didn’t quite use correctly during the activity.
12 Organise the class into groups of four. Ask
Optional extra activity Brainstorm possible things to do students to share their information and improvise
on a first date. Ask students in pairs or groups to order extended conversations.
them from the best idea to the worst. In feedback, have a • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
class debate. Below is a list of ideas. language or interesting conversations to use in feedback.

16 LOVE 169

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 169 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

• In feedback at the end, look at good pieces of language LOVE AT FIRST SIGHT
that students used and pieces of language students didn’t Student’s Book pages 144–145
quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
better ways of saying what they were trying to say. Communicative outcomes
In this two-page spread, students talk about how they
Optional extra activity Do a live listening. Tell students met people in their lives and things they have fallen
about relationships between people you know. in love with at first sight.

29 Refer students to the video and activities on the DVD-ROM. Speaking

Teacher development: using the video Aim
to introduce the theme of the lesson, to get
The video and activities on the DVD-ROM can be used in students talking
various ways:
1 as an alternative to the conversation practice 1 Organise the class into groups of four to discuss the
2 instead of the listening activity in some units, questions. In feedback, elicit ideas and examples.
particularly with weaker groups. Students can first • As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new
practise reading out the dialogues and work on some language or interesting conversations to focus on in
of the key phrases / structures in a controlled way feedback at the end.
before having a go themselves.
3 at the end of the unit as a revision exercise. Answers
love at first sight = falling in love with someone or
something the moment you see them
Examples include: Romeo falling in love with Juliet
when he first sees her at a ball; the prince falling in
love with Cinderella in the fairy tale.

Listening
Aim
to give students practice in listening for gist and for
specific information

2 Start by asking students to look at the photos. Ask:

What can you see? Elicit useful words from the listening:
a woman in a black dress with wings, a cottage, a rock band.
• Organise the class into pairs to discuss the photos.
In feedback, elicit a few ideas from students and write
a few of the things they suggest on the board. You
can refer to these phrases later, after listening, to see
whether students predicted answers.

Possible answers
a Perhaps the man met the woman at a beach bar
or nightclub and danced with her – it was love at
first sight because she looked so amazing; maybe
they fell in love while playing a virtual reality
game.
b Maybe someone saw the house when they were
driving past, and fell in love with it.
c Maybe the guy was a drummer or guitarist in a
band and a fan fell in love with him.

3 115 Play the recording. Students listen and match

the speakers to the photos. Let them compare their
answers with a partner before discussing as a class.

Answers
1 b 2 c 3 a

170 OUTCOMES

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 170 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

115 Grammar Past continuous

1 My husband and I spent two years looking for
the right place to live. We didn’t look seriously Aim
to begin with, but then I got pregnant and we to introduce and practise the past continuous to show
had to find somewhere fast. We saw five houses an action had started and was in progress at the time
every weekend for four months, but didn’t like that another action happened
any of them. One day, we were driving home from
another appointment when we suddenly saw it 6 Read through the information in the box as a
– the house of our dreams! And, incredibly, it was class. Ask students to read the sentences and complete
for sale. We knocked at the door and offered the the rules. Then ask students to check in the Grammar
price they were asking for it immediately. reference on page 189.
2 When I was a kid, I always loved music and
musical instruments. For my twelfth birthday, my Answers
uncle gave me a guitar – and it was love at first past continuous underlined, past simple in bold
sight. My uncle was a really important person 1 I was working in a Second Life nightclub when
for me at that time. He was playing in a band at one night, I met my future husband.
the time, and I went to see them one night. That 2 We were driving home from another appointment
had a big influence on me. After that, the guitar when we suddenly saw it – the house of our
became the centre of my world. I played it 24 dreams!
hours a day, seven days a week. Later, I studied 3 We weren’t getting on very well, so I started
music at university and now I make guitars for a spending a lot of time online.
living. All because of that special day!
3 I love Second Life, an online world where you 1 were 2 continuous 3 simple 4 when
create virtual characters – you design them,
choose their names and then create lives for
them. Last year, I was in a relationship, but we Students complete Exercise 1 in the Grammar
weren’t getting on very well, so I started spending reference on page 190.
a lot of time online. I was working in a Second
Life nightclub when one night I met my future Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
husband. He came in and it was love at first 1 was talking
sight. His ‘character’ soon asked my ‘character’ to 2 were you doing
marry him and I said yes. We were married online 3 wasn’t working
in July. He then asked me in the real world and I 4 were having
accepted. We haven’t actually met yet, but he’s 5 weren’t getting on
the one for me. 6 were sitting

Culture notes Background language notes for teachers

Second Life describes itself as the largest-ever 3D virtual The past continuous (was(n’t) / were(n’t) + the present
world created entirely by its users. It was launched in participle or -ing form of the verb) is often used when
2003 and has approximately 1 million regular users. setting a scene in a story. It describes actions that have
duration. Look at the examples from the listening and
4 115 Ask students to read through the nine compare:
sentences and decide whether they are true or not. Don’t I was working in a nightclub … (this is a repeated
confirm or reject anything at this stage. action over a long period)
• Play the recording again. Students listen and tick the … one night, I met my future husband … (this is one
true sentences. Let them compare their answers with a event within the time frame above)
partner before discussing as a class. We were driving home … (a longer action)
… we suddenly saw the house. (a shorter action that
Answers interrupts the longer event above)
1 b 2 a, b 3 c A timeline is useful here.

5 Organise the class into pairs or small groups to We saw the house
discuss the questions. In feedback, elicit ideas and
examples.
Past X Now
• As students speak, monitor and listen for errors, new We were driving home
language or interesting conversations to focus on in
feedback at the end. 7 Ask students to work individually to complete the
sentences. Elicit the first answer to get them started.
Optional extra activity Ask students to retell one of the Organise the class into pairs to check their answers.
stories from the listening in their own words. Monitor and note how well students use the past
continuous form.

16 LOVE 171

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 171 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

• In feedback, elicit answers or write them on the board shopping and elicit the sentence again. Then follow
for students to read and check. by miming other sentences: falling over, dropping a
bottle, losing your wallet, etc. You can forget about
Answers miming shopping, and just mime the interrupting
1 were having actions. Try to do this without speaking and before
2 was staying long students will be producing lots of sentences
3 was taking using the structure. You can put them in pairs to
4 were flying mime situations and elicit sentences.
5 was walking 2 Alternatively, after miming the sentence ‘I was doing
6 was doing some shopping’, you can write prompts on the board:
7 was watching meet / friend, fall, lose / wallet, drop / bottle. Point to
8 was listening these prompts to get students to produce sentences.

Speaking
Pronunciation
Aim
Aim to practise language from the lesson in a free,
to practise the stress on was and were in past communicative, personalised speaking activity
continuous sentences
10 This is an opportunity to bring together several
8 Organise the class into pairs to practise saying the parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all
sentences. Start by modelling the first one or by eliciting the language they have learnt.
a good model of the first one from students. Point out • Ask students to work individually to prepare the topic
the /wəz/ sound of was in the first sentence. they choose. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary.

9 116 Play the recording. Students listen and check 11 Then organise them into groups of four or five to
their answers. Play the recording again. Students listen share their stories. In feedback, ask different groups to
and repeat, and practise saying the sentences with say what they found out about each other.
correct pronunciation. • As students speak, go round and monitor, and note
down any interesting pieces of language you hear.
116 • At the end, look at good pieces of language that
1 I was doing some shopping when I met an students used and pieces of language students didn’t
old friend. quite use correctly during the activity. Show students
2 She was running for the bus when she fell. better ways of saying what they were trying to say.
3 They were working in Greece when it happened.
4 I wasn’t enjoying it, so I left. Optional extra activity Here are some famous quotes.
5 She wasn’t feeling very well, so she went home. Write them on the board and ask your students to talk
6 We weren’t getting on, so we broke up. about them.
I believe in love at first sight for houses – but not for people.
Do you believe in love at first sight, or should I walk past
For further practice, see Exercise 2 in the you again?
Grammar reference on page 190.
Web research activity Ask students to research examples
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference of love at first sight from literature (for example, Romeo
1 f 2 a 3 c 4 b 5 d 6 e and Juliet).

Communicative activity worksheet The photocopiable

Teacher development: situational drills worksheet on page 245 can be used at this point or at
the end of the unit for further practice.
Situational drills involve setting up a situation and
eliciting and drilling language from the context of that
situation. It works well as an extension to Exercise 9
above, providing extra practice of the form introduced.
1 Write ‘yesterday’ on the board. Then use mime to
elicit ‘I was doing some shopping’. Mime walking
along a supermarket aisle putting things in your
basket. Once students catch on and say something
like ‘You were doing some shopping’, model ‘I was
doing some shopping’ and ask students to repeat.
Then mime suddenly meeting a friend. Elicit and
drill the whole sentence: I was doing some shopping
when I met a friend. Get the class to say the sentence
chorally then individually. Now go back to miming

172 OUTCOMES

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 172 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

I PROMISE For further practice, see Exercises 1 and 2 in

the Grammar reference on page 190.
Student’s Book pages 146–147
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
Communicative outcomes 1 I won’t
In this two-page spread, students will practise 2 You won’t
making promises and reading and writing a poem. 3 I’ll
4 I’ll
Speaking 5 I’ll
6 I won’t
Aim 7 I will
to talk about promises; to set the scene and get
students talking Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
2 I’ll pay you back.
1 Ask students to discuss the questions in groups 3 I won’t lose it.
of four or five. In feedback, elicit ideas and check that 4 We won’t make any noise.
students understand the ideas. Point out the verbs that 5 I’ll look after it.
collocate with the noun promise (see below). 6 We’ll be back quickly / in five minutes.
7 I won’t stay long / more than two nights, etc.
Answers
a This means it is better to do things (e.g. organise
a day out with someone) than to say you will do Background language notes for teachers
things and not do them.
b This means it is good to make promises because it The modal verbs will and won’t + infinitive without
shows you want to try to do good things or make to have a variety of uses, but here students are being
people happy (e.g. it is better to promise to love introduced to just their use to make promises. Notice
someone, only for a relationship to fail later, than how will reduces to ’ll when used with pronouns and
it is to be the sort of person who never commits notice the /əʊ/ sound in won’t. In the short answers, the
to a relationship). verbs are stressed and given their full value.

Reading
Background language notes for teachers
Aim
Notice the collocation with promise: make a promise, to help train students to read poems for a general
keep a promise and its opposite break a promise. understanding and for specific information

Grammar 4 Start by pre-teaching poems and poets (the people

who write poems). Ask students to discuss the questions
will / won’t for promises in pairs or small groups. In feedback, elicit answers and
Aim ideas from the students.
to introduce and practise will / won’t for promises
5 Ask students to match the words to the meanings.
2 Read through the information in the box as a class. Let students compare their answers in pairs. In feedback,
Point out how will reduces to ’ll. Then ask students to elicit answers from the students. Let students use
work in pairs to make promises from the prompts. Elicit dictionaries to check, or provide example sentences to
the first one to get students started. show how the words work.

Possible answers Answers

1 I’ll call later. 4 I won’t be late. 1 let go 5 weeds
2 I won’t tell anyone. 5 I won’t make a mess. 2 double 6 remain
3 I’ll try harder. 3 encourage 7 trust
4 fade 8 trouble

3 Read through the information in the second box 6 Ask students to read the poems and match them to
as a class. Then ask students to work in pairs to make the titles. Let students compare their answers in pairs. In
conversations from the prompts. Again, elicit and model feedback, elicit answers from the students.
the first one to get students started. Monitor and note
how well students use and pronounce the forms. Answers
1 New born
Answers 2 Breaking up
1 I won’t 4 I won’t 3 In memory
2 I will 5 I will 4 A threat kept
3 I will 6 I won’t

16 LOVE 173

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 173 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

7 Ask students to work in pairs to decide who is Optional extra activity You could ask students to write
making the promises and who to. Monitor and note how the poem for homework. You could collect in the poems
well students understand the possible meanings of the and correct them.
poems here. In feedback, open this into a class debate
and ask students to justify their answers. Sounds and vocabulary review
Possible answers Aim
1 Could be from one partner to another, but more to practise the sounds /aʊ/, /ʌ/, /ɔː/, /ɒ/, /ʊ/, /uː/,
likely to be a parent to a child. /əʊ/, /ə/; to listen and write down words in
2 From one partner to another in a relationship – the continuous speech
first has betrayed the other and wants to repair
the relationship. 12 117 Play the recording. Students listen and
3 Could be a husband / wife to their partner after repeat the sounds.
they have left or died.
4 Between two partners in a relationship, or just 117
friends or even people in a business relationship, /aʊ/, /ʌ/, /ɔː/, /ɒ/, /ʊ/, /uː/, /əʊ/, /ə/
e.g. customer / client. One has let the other one
down, and that person no longer trusts them. 13 118 Give students a moment to look at the
They are asking for payment of a debt. words in the box. Read the words out so that students
can note their pronunciation. Play the recording one
8 Ask students to work in groups of four or five to sentence at a time. Students listen and note words or
discuss the questions. Monitor and help with ideas and parts of words they hear, then work in a group to try to
vocabulary. In feedback, ask different groups to explain reconstruct the sentence. Allow time after each sentence
lines they found hard. for them to do this. Then play the recording again.
Students listen and complete the sentences. You could
Speaking play the recordings further or play and pause them, but
students should be able to write complete sentences
Aim after two or three listenings.
to practise language from the lesson in a free,
communicative, personalised speaking activity 118
1 Her baby was born on Monday.
9 This is an opportunity to bring together several 2 I control how long my son spends on the computer.
parts of the lesson and for students to practise using all 3 Those flowers look lovely.
the language they have learnt. 4 It’s polite to hold the door open for people.
• Ask students to work in pairs to think of promises and 5 Knock on the door before you go in.
threats. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. 6 Her boyfriend’s not very good-looking.
Then, in feedback, elicit ideas from different pairs. 7 I’d love a house of my own.
8 You don’t have to remove your shoes.
Possible answers
1 I will never leave you. Optional extra activities Get students to find more
2 I won’t make a mess. words in the unit with the letter ‘o’ in them which have
3 I will learn more vocabulary / do my homework some of the sounds practised (/aʊ/, /ʌ/, /ɔː/, /ɒ/, /ʊ/,
on time. /uː/, /əʊ/, /ə/). Get students to write two collocations or
4 I will give you a test next week / I will give you an phrases for each word in the box in Exercise 13. (These
extra lesson after school. activities could be set as homework.)
5 I will get someone to come and help you.
6 We won’t cut funding / raise taxes. Teacher development: using the sounds
and vocabulary review
10 Ask students to work individually to write their
poem. Again, be available to help with vocabulary and This section allows you to focus on problem sounds but
answer questions. Encourage students to use ideas and also reviews some key words and develops students’
vocabulary they already have rather than looking up too ability to hear English through a dictation exercise.
many words in dictionaries. Every unit ends with this task, but you may do it at
other stages of the lesson if you prefer (see Teacher
11 When students are ready, organise them into development on page 19).
small groups of four or five to read out their poems. Sounds and correction
Alternatively, you could ask students to pass round their The letter ‘o’ is sometimes pronounced /ə/ when it isn’t
poems in groups, or you could pin poems to the wall and stressed. The /ʌ/ sound is very common in southern
ask students to circulate and read them. RP British English. To produce the sound put your
• At the end, point out good pieces of language that tongue low and between the middle and the back of
students used and pieces of language students didn’t your mouth, then make a short voiced sound with your
quite use correctly during the activity. mouth open.

174 OUTCOMES

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 174 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

For further revision, see Exercises 1–3 in the

Grammar reference on page 190.
VIDEO 8: SNOW MAGIC!
Student’s Book page 148
Answers to Exercise 1, Grammar reference
1 He wasn’t working yesterday so he couldn’t Aim
answer your email. to find out about some interesting and unusual
2 Were you living there when they met? technology; to improve students’ ability to follow and
3 I won’t tell him. understand fast speech in a video extract; to practise
4 They weren’t paying attention during the meeting. fast speech using natural stress patterns
5 I’ll do it for you.
6 Were you cycling when the big storm started? 1 Organise the class into pairs or small groups to
7 We were listening when you made that promise. discuss the questions. In a brief feedback session, elicit
8 I was driving too fast when the accident happened. students’ ideas and write up interesting ideas or pieces
of language on the board.
Answers to Exercise 2, Grammar reference
1 was playing, hurt Possible answers
2 found, was walking • When it’s hot and sunny, people who sell
3 met, were waiting sunglasses, bikinis, beach towels and sun block do
4 went, was playing well. Equally, hotel owners by the sea and ice cream
5 moved, was growing up sellers do well. In England, people buy barbecues
6 was riding, hit and garden furniture.
7 wasn’t enjoying, decided • When it’s cold and snowing, people go skiing, so
8 were visiting, hit the skiing and snowboarding industries do well,
and resort owners and lift operators in mountain
Answers to Exercise 3, Grammar reference resorts do well. People buy hats, gloves and coats,
1 I’ll call you tonight, I promise. and warm boots. Salt is needed on the roads.
2 What were you doing when this happened? • The picture shows a snow machine at a ski resort
3 I will always to love you. blowing out artificial snow. Ski resorts use these
4 I was running down the street when I fell and machines when the snow isn’t thick enough to ski
hurt my arm. or snowboard on.
5 The children were all studying quietly when I
went into the classroom.
6 Someone stole my bike when I was buying some Culture notes
things in the shop.
7 A: Don’t be late. Snowmaking is the production of snow by forcing water
B: I won’t. and pressurised air through a snow gun or snow cannon.
8 A: What did he say? It is mainly used at ski resorts to supplement natural
B: I don’t know. I wasn’t listening. Sorry. snow. This allows ski resorts to improve the reliability
of their snow cover and to extend their ski seasons
from late autumn to early spring. Indoor ski slopes use
snowmaking machines.

2 30 Give students time to read through the

questions first. As students watch the first part of the
video (up to 1.25), they should note their answers. Let
them compare their answers in pairs before discussing
as a class.

Answers
1 Taylors Falls, Minnesota
2 a ski resort
3 If there is no snow, he can’t open the resort.
4 mechanical engineering

Optional extra activity There is an interesting set of

collocations in the text connected to snow. Ask students
to give you collocations they notice: natural snow, make
snow, real snow, man-made snow, soft snow, snow covers
the trail, snowball, fresh snow, snow machine.

3 30 Ask students to read the summary first, and

guess or remember the missing words. Then play the
second part of the video (1.25–2.30) and ask them to

16 LOVE 175

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 175 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

complete the summary. Let them compare their answers Narrator: Snow has always been a very important part
in pairs before discussing as a class. of Raedeke’s life. His family bought Wild Mountain
28 years ago. Since that time he’s spent nearly every
Answers day on the mountain. Raedeke has also studied
1 water 6 sticks mechanical engineering, so he really understands
2 wind 7 very quickly snow-making machines.
3 freeze 8 soft Dan Raedeke: The best machine-made snow ever;
4 of better quality 9 night look how great that snow is.
5 lasts 10 half Part 2
Narrator: Snow making is a science, but it’s also an
4 30 Give students time to read the sentences, art. The person making the snow has to carefully
then play the third part of the video (2.31–4.10) and watch the water, the air temperature and the
ask students to choose the correct options. Let them wind direction.
compare their answers in pairs before discussing as a Dan Raedeke: If there’s wind it’ll actually blow it
class. around and allow it to freeze before it hits the ground.
That’s why the snow guns are always high in the air.
Answers Narrator: There are good things about both real snow
1 six 4 often and man-made snow. Real snow is drier, softer and of
2 for the rest of the winter 5 too much better quality for skiing, but man-made snow lasts for
3 a minute a longer time when there are a lot of people skiing.
Because Raedeke depends on snow for his business,
5 This exercise offers students the chance to relate he has some of the best snow-making technology
the topic of the video to their own experiences, ideas around. His newest machines are tall, thin poles called
and opinions. water sticks. They are able to produce a lot of snow
• Give students time to read the questions then put very quickly.
them in pairs to discuss them. Dan Raedeke: They make very soft snow, and it’s
• Monitor and listen to each group. Help with almost as good as snow from the sky, and in one
pronunciation and ideas if necessary. night we can cover this entire trail. They’re great.
• When most students have finished, stop the class and Narrator: Water sticks are always on half of the Wild
give some feedback, either by rephrasing some of the Mountain runs. On the other trails there are the very big
things students tried to say for the whole class or by snow guns. Raedeke then talks about the building that
asking students to complete sentences on the board. houses the pumps for making snow.
Part 3
Understanding fast speech Dan Raedeke: This is the nerve centre of the snow-
making system.
6 31 Tell students to work on their own for a few Narrator: He then explains that it takes good timing
minutes to practise saying the extract. Then play the to decide which ski runs need snow and which ones
recording. Students listen and compare what they said. don’t. The six pumps in the building control the water
that goes through all the pipes. When the water is
7 Encourage students to practise saying the extract turned off, Dave Lingran, the mountain manager,
several times. quickly removes the water from the pipes before it
freezes. If a pipe freezes, it’s useless for the rest of the
30 winter – and like the skiers on the hills, Lingran has to
Narrator: The city of Minneapolis is one of the be very careful too. Snow making needs a lot of water.
coldest places in the US. Winter there usually lasts Dan Raedeke: This is where we get all our water.
a long time. Even in winter, the area sometimes has Narrator: He is talking about the reservoir on top of
warmer weather and that means less snow. Most the mountain. The reservoir provides 3,000 gallons
people really like the warmer weather, but Dan of water per minute for the system. Raedeke often
Raedeke doesn’t like it at all. He needs snow for his spends all day and most of the night checking the
business. Raedeke owns the Wild Mountain ski area snow-making system.
in Taylors Falls, Minnesota. He usually tries to have Dan Raedeke: When we check the snow we want it
the ski area completely open by Thanksgiving, which like a good snowball and you can see it’s just a little
is in November, but sometimes warm weather and bit wet and so we will go to the gun and turn down
a shortage of natural snow can cause problems. the water.
When this happens Raedeke can’t open until Narrator: The process requires a lot of care. If there’s
late December. When nature doesn’t make snow too much water, the snow gets soft. If there’s too
Raedeke does. No, it’s not magic – Raedeke owns the little water, the snow doesn’t stay on the ground long
largest snow-making system in the area. enough. To prepare for the next day Raedeke operates
Dan Raedeke: Without snow making we could the snow machines all night. In the morning, the ski
probably never open, especially in a year like this; the runs will be covered with fresh new snow. So with
fields are still brown. good weather and a little snow magic Raedeke should
be able to keep his skiers happy all winter long.

176 OUTCOMES

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 176 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 16 LOVE

REVIEW 8
Student’s Book page 149

Aim
to consolidate vocabulary and grammar from
Units 15 and 16

Answers
1
1 were 5 you
2 late 6 We’re
3 wasn’t 7 will
4 Did 8 be
2
1 was 4 are
2 was 5 are
3 were 6 was
3
1 I can’t run very quickly because I have a bad leg.
2 He works too hard.
3 How well can you swim?
4 I didn’t do badly in my exam.
5 We arrived early so that we could get a seat.
6 It only worked successfully for a while.
6
1 fit 6 rate
2 app 7 energy
3 help 8 saves
4 fast 9 creates
5 allows 10 improve
7
computers: battery, button, keyboard, laptop, plug,
screen, tablet
the internet: download, link, search, website
love: anniversary, date, jealous, in-laws, pregnant
8
1 send 5 knock
2 delete 6 hold
3 produce 7 join
4 develop 8 keep
9
1 threatened, let go
2 trust, broken
3 argued, dishwasher
4 turn, plug
5 instructions, pressed

119 and answers to Exercise 4

1 We met when we were both studying in Germany.
2 I’m thinking of asking her to marry me.
3 I won’t do anything without talking to you first.
4 I saw it when I was staying in New York.
5 He crashed because he was driving too fast.
6 I’ll tell you when I hear more news.

16 LOVE 177

65752_u16_pp167-177.indd 177 08/12/18 12:14 PM

 AN INTRODUCTION TO
WRITING IN OUTCOMES
In this section, we will look at two broad reasons for For the real world The second broad reason for writing
writing in a foreign language: to practise and play, and is that students need to write a specific kind of text for
for the real world. We explain what we mean by them an assessment or for a ‘real life’ task such as sending
and how they may differ in teaching, tasks and feedback. an email. These texts are generic in some way. They
often have specific vocabulary (including large chunks
Practice and play The first reason for writing in a foreign or expressions) or grammar connected with them. They
language is simply to practise new language, experiment also have rules about the way they are presented, how
and learn more English. Writing may have significant they are paragraphed and ordered and other aspects of
benefits for students learning English. In contrast to discourse. The problem for foreign learners of English is
speaking, students have time to plan what they want that these rules of discourse might be different in their
to say; they can look words up in a dictionary, they can languages. Unlike speaking, where listeners might accept
check and re-write grammar and they may be more able errors because they can see other things to help interpret
to see how English works. That might then give benefits the message, with writing a reader may misunderstand
in terms of their overall competence in English. a message or even be offended when the rules or
Writing for the purpose of practice and play does not conventions of a genre are broken. For this reason,
depend on any particular genre or standard organisation; students need careful preparation for writing such texts,
it could be short sentences, paragraphs, dialogues, etc.; and feedback should be more thorough.
it could be about anything the student wants or it could The writing units in the Student’s Book aim to provide
be on a theme the teacher chooses; it could be random this careful preparation. They are based on genres
connections of sentences – true or imagined. Some commonly tested in international exams such as PET, FCE
grammar and vocabulary tasks in the Student’s Book and IELTS, or on functional writing tasks we may perform
are of this nature, with students having to complete at work or when studying in an English-speaking context.
sentences using their own ideas. Below are some
more tasks. The ideas focus on revising language, but it What’s in outcomes writing
doesn’t have to be so. Here are some ideas your students
could try:
units?
• Write a diary about your day, trying to include new Each double-page spread teaches a different style of
words or structures that you’ve learnt. writing. You can follow them in any order or do them
• Write five to ten lines of English every day about after every two units in the main Student’s Book. The
anything you like. units have the following sections.
• Write every day / week about a story in the news
you saw or read about. Speaking The units aim to be interactive. Speaking
• Write a poem or story using a new word you’ve activities provide a warmer, relate to the topic, discuss
learnt. the text types or may be part of planning for writing.
• Write a conversation based on one you had with
someone during the class. Writing The writing sections present model texts. While
• Write an imagined conversation with someone you there may be some basic comprehension questions
know, based on a topic you’ve studied. around these, the main focus is noticing useful language
• Write an imagined conversation that takes place in for the genre and how the texts are organised.
a particular place.
As these kinds of writing tasks are unconnected to any Key words This section focuses on words / expressions
particular genre, they require no ‘teaching’ or preparation, which link sentences and clauses and give texts
and can be set at any time. In terms of feedback, you coherence. They follow a similar pattern to grammar
may want to simply write a personal response to what exercises, with a short explanation or guided questions
the student wrote such as, This really made me laugh and a controlled practice.
or That’s interesting. Alternatively, you could engage in
a dialogue with the student by asking them genuine Vocabulary and grammar There are often short grammar
questions, which they answer in writing. You may want or vocabulary sections if there is a close relation to the
to correct aspects of the key structure or words that they text type. Note there’s no link to the Grammar reference.
practised, or use common errors from different students
as a way to re-teach language in class. However, we feel Practice This is a task for students to write a similar kind of
correction should be kept to a minimum with these kinds text to the one they looked at in Writing, and to incorporate
of texts. The aim is not assessment, it is to encourage some of the other language they have learnt in the unit.
students, to engage with them and get them to play This section can be set as homework or be done in class.
with language. Doing the practice in class can be interactive, particularly if
using a ‘process writing’ approach.

178 OUTCOMES

65752_em_w_intro_pp178-179.indd 178 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 Process writing phrases and sentences linked with simple connectors like
Process writing approaches focus on the fact that good and, but and because. You may need to reformulate ideas
writers often go through several stages to produce a and give more guidance where students are attempting
good piece of writing. They may: more complex sentences.
• brainstorm ideas
• write a plan Content and structure When you mark the texts you
• write a draft could ignore ‘grammar’ and individual vocabulary
• discuss their draft with someone mistakes and focus only on whether the writing answers
• write a second draft the question and is organised well. You simply write
• put it through a spell-checker comments on the writing or at the end. This is often
• have corrections made by someone quicker for you, the teacher.
• write the final draft. Marking this way trains students to appreciate the
Obviously, we don’t always go through these stages importance of these aspects of writing over basic
when we write, but in the case of our students, having ‘accuracy’. Readers in fact will often ignore mistakes if the
different stages and allowing for more than one draft overall structure of the text is clear and the content is
gives more opportunity for teaching and learning. In fact, relevant, logical and / or interesting.
brainstorming and planning stages are often included in However, students will want to know if their writing is
Practice or at some other stage of the lesson. However, correct unless you clearly warn them beforehand that
there is no reason why any of the stages above shouldn’t you’ll only deal with content and structure.
be done in pairs in class. Another way you might want to
incorporate a process approach is to give the Practice task Peer correction Students can also give feedback. Get
for homework before they do the actual writing lesson. them to read each other’s writing and evaluate the texts
They then re-write their work in light of what they learn. and / or suggest changes. To do this they really need a
‘mark scheme’; this could be a list of statements they tick
Marking and feedback or adapt such as:
There are a number of options available to teachers to • I enjoyed this.
mark and give feedback on students’ writing. • I wanted to know more about …
• I didn’t understand the bit about …
Using symbols You can mark essays using symbols above • You used some words / grammar I didn’t know how
the inappropriate word or grammar. Here are some to use.
examples: Another way is to give them marking criteria from an
• t = wrong tense established source such as the FCE exam. Check they’re
• wf = wrong word form (e.g. noun not adjective) not too difficult for your students.
• col = wrong collocation (e.g. the noun is the right The advantage of peer correction is that it’s interactive
meaning but doesn’t go with the verb) and based on genuine readers’ responses. It’s also easy
• voc = you have the wrong word (it makes no sense on the teacher! However, it is not so good for dealing
here) with language, apart from general statements, as
• prep = you need a different preposition students may not trust each other’s judgement – often
• pl = plural is wrong or should be plural with good reason! However, it is a useful stage and may
• sp = wrong spelling save you time by reducing mistakes or inconsistencies
• wo = the word order is wrong before you come to mark the texts.
• art = the article is wrong or absent
The idea of doing this is to make students notice their Writing and portfolios
errors and try to find answers. You could do this as
pairwork in class. It may help them to become more aware Whichever way you choose to correct the students’
of their common errors and edit their own work more texts, we suggest you get students to re-write them. This
carefully. The difficulty is that mistakes don’t fit neatly into would guarantee that the students focus on their errors
categories and students may still get the language wrong. and produce an improved text which they could then
You should mark the text again. keep in a portfolio. Portfolios of work are recommended
by the Common European Framework of Reference (CEFR)
Re-formulation You may simply want to cross out and and can provide evidence of students’ progress and level.
re-write things that are ‘wrong’ in the text. This may have
the advantage of teaching students the correct language
(though note they may still be unclear why it was wrong).
It may also be time-consuming for you and demoralising
for students if they see lots of crossing out.
In this case – and indeed with all cases of teacher
feedback – you need to strike a balance. At the beginning
of Elementary level, students may still not be able to
write much connected text other than a simple note.
They will learn to write short messages or a simple
personal letter, for example thanking someone for
something. They will learn to write a series of simple

AN INTRODUCTION TO WRITING IN OUTCOMES 179

65752_em_w_intro_pp178-179.indd 179 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 WRITING LESSONS
ANSWER KEY
1 FORMS 2 PEN FRIENDS
Student’s Book pages 150–151 Student’s Book pages 152–153

1 2
1 What’s your first name? 1 first 6 evenings
2 What’s your surname? 2 full 7 meeting
3 Do you have a middle name? 3 usually 8 playing
4 Where are you from? 4 foreign 9 brothers
5 Where do you live? 5 student 10 parents
6 What’s your telephone number?
7 What’s your email address? 4
8 When were you born? 1I play volleyball and golf.
2Bangkok is really crowded and polluted.
3 3I like reading, learning languages and computers.
Surname Abbott 4My brother lives in Dubai and my sister lives in
First name David Istanbul.
Middle name Sebastian 5 I live with my mum and dad, my sister, my aunt and
Gender Male ✓ my grandfather.
Nationality Canadian
Date of birth 4th October 1987 3 CARDS
Address 25 Cook Street, Dublin
Telephone number 07791–773–119.
Student’s Book pages 154–155
Email address [email protected]
1
4 1 a birthday card 4 a Valentine card
Country Nationality 2 a Christmas card 5 a get well soon card
Canada Canadian 3 a Mother’s Day card 6 a wedding card
the United States American
Ireland Irish 3
India Indian 1 Dear 4 love
Scotland Scottish 2 Best 5 best
England English 3 and
Australia Australian
China Chinese 4
Thailand Thai 1 d 2 c 3 f 4 b 5 a 6 e
Japan Japanese
France French 4 MAKING ARRANGEMENTS
Germany German
Italy Italian
Student’s Book pages 156–157
Poland Polish
Russia Russian 2
Spain Spanish 1 what 4 that
Brazil Brazilian 2 where 5 me
Mexico Mexican 3 four
Turkey Turkish
Egypt Egyptian 3
1 near 4 easy
5 2 on 5 can
1 the Brazilian football team 5 a Scottish bagpiper 3 from
2 Japanese geishas 6 French bread
3 an Italian pizza 7 a German car (BMW)
4 Chinese writing 8 the Canadian flag
(and others)

180 OUTCOMES

65752_em_wl_ak_pp180-182.indd 180 08/12/18 11:55 AM

 WRITING LESSONS ANSWER KEY

4 7
a Bedford Road 1 your email 4 the countryside
b station 2 a spare room 5 the weather
c Clarendon Street 3 cities 6 your plans
d Café Blue
9
5 1 d 2 e 3 c 4 b 5 a
1 do, finish 5 doesn’t open
2 is 6 arrives 11
3 don’t start 7 closes 1 like
4 leaves 8 ends 2 possible
3 necessary
7 4 weather
1 You can see the hotel when you come out of the 5 OK
station. / When you come out of the station, you can
see the hotel. 6 DESCRIBING FOOD
2 When you get to the end of Main Street, turn right. /
Turn right when you get to the end of Main Street.
Student’s Book pages 160–161
3 When you come out of the airport, take a bus to the
centre of town. / Take a bus to the centre of town 1 Possible answers
when you come out of the airport. a is noodle soup, from China or some other part of east
4 Call me when you get to the station. / When you get Asia (many countries have a type of noodle soup).
to the station, call me. b is called tagine, it’s a sort of meat dish from North
5 I’m going to go out and celebrate when I finish my Africa, Morocco or Algeria. It’s like a stew but it’s quite
exams. / When I finish my exams, I’m going to go out spicy. It’s really nice.
and celebrate. c is tacos, it’s from Mexico. The tacos are made from
corn, and they are filled with meat or beans.
5 VISITING FRIENDS d is a typical English dish, I had it when I was in London,
it’s roast beef and Yorkshire pudding. It’s nice.
Student’s Book pages 158–159 e is sushi, it’s a Japanese dish, sometimes it is made
with fish, or just with vegetables.
2 f is borscht, a soup made with beetroot, it’s from
1 beach 6 mosque central and eastern Europe, they eat it in countries
2 gallery 7 tower like the Ukraine and Poland.
3 church 8 waterfall
4 island 9 castle 2
5 lake 1 typical 5 pork
2 red 6 pasta
4 3 healthy 7 heard
1 planning 4 when 4 grill 8 share
2 like 5 where
3 Can 4
1 b 2 a 3 a 4 b 5 b
5
To [email protected] 5
Subject Visiting Germany! 1 I tasted the soup but it was too hot and I burnt my
Hi Frank, mouth!
I’m planning to come to Germany on holiday in April. 2 We have the best beef in the world and the lamb we
I’d like to visit you in Frankfurt, if possible. Can you produce is really good too.
send me an email to let me know if and when I can visit? 3 I make dinner at home most days, but my husband
Also, where else do you think I should go while I’m in and son cook too.
Germany? I’m only going to stay for about three weeks. 4 I don’t eat out round here because the restaurants are
Best, too expensive.
Tanya 5 He drinks a lot of cola and he eats too many sweets.
It’s not healthy.

WRITING LESSONS ANSWER KEY 181

65752_em_wl_ak_pp180-182.indd 181 08/12/18 11:55 AM

 WRITING LESSONS ANSWER KEY

7 DESCRIBING PHOTOS 8 MESSAGES

Student’s Book pages 162–163 Student’s Book pages 164–165

2 2
Text 1: her tail, cheer up, cute 1 Thanks 5 Lovely
Text 2: forest, protected, wolves 2 Sorry 6 Very sadly
3 In fact 7 Back
5 4 Great news 8 Listen
a It’s near where I live in Vancouver, so we often
go there. 4
Luckily, it was also a warm day, so we didn’t get cold. 2, 4, 5, 7 use note form. They might be handwritten
b We decided to walk across the river because we were messages, text messages or maybe quick emails. They’re
already so wet! written quickly to ask a question or to give an update or
some basic information.
6
1 I look so strange in this photo. 5
2 It was his birthday, so I made him a cake. 2 I’m sorry, I can’t come for the meal, I’m not feeling
3 It rained a lot, so we spent most of the holiday well. I’ll call you next week. I hope you all have a nice
indoors. time. Love …
4 I was so happy when I opened the present. 4 It’s great news about your new job. Congratulations.
5 You can’t see her very well in the photo because it was Do you want to meet for a drink sometime soon to
so dark. celebrate?
6 We missed our plane, so we had to wait in the airport 5 It was lovely to see you at the weekend. We really
for six hours. enjoyed it. Can you send us the photos you took when
you get the chance? Thanks. Love N.
7 7 I’ve gone to town. I’ll be back about eight o’clock.
1 You look so young there! Can you text me if you want anything from the
2 It snowed, so we didn’t go. shops?
3 I wanted to show you my dog, so I took a photo. Love …
4 You look so bored. Were you?
6
8 1 Can you go to the shops? Need milk and pasta.
1 look stupid 4 seemed nice 2 Had to go out. Dinner in fridge. Back at 11.
2 tasted horrible 5 sounded great 3 Going to be late – a lot of traffic. Hopefully be there
3 got really cold 6 looks bored 9.30.

7
1 about 5 about
2 for 6 for
3 in 7 for, at
4 for 8 to, at

182 OUTCOMES

65752_em_wl_ak_pp180-182.indd 182 08/12/18 11:55 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE
ANSWER KEY
1 PEOPLE AND PLACES 5 Is there a nice place to eat near here?
6 There aren’t any cheap hotels in the centre.
Student’s Book pages 166–167
Revision
be
Exercise 1
Exercise 1 1 I don’t like French food.
1 are 6 Is 2 I’m not hungry.
2 is / ‘s 7 are 3 She doesn’t work here.
3 are 8 Is 4 They’re not / They aren’t from this country.
4 am / ’m 9 is / ‘s 5 I don’t work at the weekends.
5 is / ‘s 10 are 6 He’s not / He isn’t in the office today.
7 They don’t live together.
Exercise 2 8 It’s not / It isn’t cold today.
1 I’m a French teacher. 9 There aren’t any shops in the village.
2 Where are you from? 10 There isn’t a hotel near the airport.
3 What time is it?
4 I’m not sure. Exercise 2
5 They are at the airport 1 doesn’t like 6 Is
6 It is not a big place. 2 aren’t 7 has
7 How old are your grandparents? 3 do … leave 8 Are
8 Is it cold in winter? 4 isn’t 9 don’t understand
5 aren’t, ‘re 10 does … live
Present simple
Exercise 3
Exercise 1 1 are 5 doesn’t
1 works 6 lives 2 do 6 don’t
2 like 7 don’t 3 has 7 is, works
3 get up 8 has 4 am, is 8 Does
4 you 9 doesn’t
5 do 10 they 2 FREE TIME
Exercise 2
Student’s Book pages 168–169
1 do 4 do
2 does 5 does Verb patterns
3 does 6 do
Exercise 1
Exercise 3 1 swimming 5 to be
1 do 5 Do, don’t 2 to go out 6 playing
2 does, don’t 6 don’t, do 3 to go 7 playing
3 does, doesn’t 7 Do, do 4 dancing 8 to decide
4 do
Exercise 2
there is / there are 1 My brother really likes reading.
2 I hate singing. I’m really bad at it.
Exercise 1 3 My parents want to have more free time.
1 There’s 5 There’s 4 I don’t really enjoy to working in an office.
2 There are 6 there are 5 I always try to go to bed before eleven.
3 There are 7 There are 6 I need to finish my homework before I go out.
4 There’s 8 There’s, there are 7 I’m not very good at playing the guitar.
8 She’s bad at drawing, but she enjoys doing it.
Exercise 2
1 There aren’t any jobs here.
2 There’s a lovely river in the town.
3 There are a lot of expensive houses in this area.
4 There aren’t any good shops here.

GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY 183

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 183 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

Adverbs of frequency Exercise 2

1 I’ll meet you at the bus station / at the bus stop / on
Exercise 1 the bus.
1 sometimes 4 usually 2 I’ll meet you in front of the cinema.
2 hardly ever 5 never 3 I’ll meet you on the corner of Wall Street and Broad
3 never 6 always Street.
4 I’ll meet you at reception / in the reception area / in
Exercise 2 the hotel lobby.
1 I often sleep until twelve on Sunday mornings. 5 I’ll meet you at the airport / at the check-in desk / in
2 My parents hardly ever do sport. the departure lounge.
3 I don’t go shopping very often. 6 I’ll meet you in the café, next to the window.
4 I never decide what to do in my family.
5 A: Do you ever go out dancing? Pronouns, possessive adjectives and ’s
6 A: What time do you usually get up?
Exercise 1
Countable and uncountable nouns 1 Your 5 My parents’ car
2 Their 6 It’s
Exercise 1 3 She 7 mum’s
1 a 4 a, much 4 us 8 They, them
2 some 5 any, much
3 a lot of, much 6 any, any Exercise 2
1 Where do your parents live?
Exercise 2 2 My dad’s part of the family are from Malta.
1 one 3 one 5 some 3 What’s their address?
2 some 4 some 4 My boyfriend’s sister lives with us.
5 It’s not my money; it’s Andrew’s.
Revision 6 I don’t like the government’s ideas.

Exercise 1 can / can’t

1 love, usually 4 often, like
2 hardly ever, need 5 hate, never Exercise 1
3 want, very often 6 hate, always 1 Can you move?
2 Can you take me in the car?
Exercise 2 3 Can I phone you later?
1 I like meeting new people. 4 Can you set the table?
2 I want to buy a computer game. 5 Can I open the window?
3 Do you like listening to music? 6 Can I make a sandwich?
4 I hardly ever go to the cinema.
5 I sometimes chat on the internet. Exercise 2
6 I usually play tennis on Wednesdays. 1 can’t 4 can’t
7 What time do you usually get home? 2 can’t 5 can
8 Do you ever go out dancing? 3 can’t 6 can

Exercise 3 Revision
1 Do you have any white paper?
2 Does he have a job at the moment? Exercise 1
3 Do you want a tissue? 1 There, one, behind / opposite
4 Do you need an alarm clock? 2 in, on, next
5 Do you have any scissors? 3 It, front, on
6 Do you need any help?
Exercise 2
3 HOME 3 his 7 brothers’
4 his 8 your
Student’s Book pages 170–171 5 their 9 our
6 school’s 10 her
Prepositions of place
Exercise 3
Exercise 1 1 can’t, on, between, Can
1 at 6 next 2 on, my, his, son’s, can’t
2 in 7 on
3 on 8 in
4 on 9 between
5 on 10 on, on

184 OUTCOMES

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 184 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

4 HOLIDAYS Past simple questions

Student’s Book pages 172–173 Exercise 1
1 What did you do last night?
Past simple 2 What film did you see?
3 Was it good?
Exercise 1 4 Who did you go with?
2 I went shopping and got some new boots. go, get 5 Where did you buy your shoes?
3 I was lucky. I found €20 on the pavement. be, find 6 Were they very expensive?
4 I slept badly because I drank too much coffee. 7 Did you get anything else?
sleep, drink 8 Do you usually go shopping there?
5 We met at school. I sat next to her in class. meet, sit
6 I spent three years in Japan. I taught English there. Exercise 2
spend, teach 1 f 3 d 5 h 7 c
7 I saw her yesterday and she said hello to you. see, say 2 a 4 g 6 b 8 e
8 My son made dinner for us yesterday. It wasn’t great,
but I ate it. make, be, eat Revision
9 She told me she swam five miles last Saturday.
tell, swim Exercise 1
1 worked 6 stayed 11 saw
Exercise 2 2 met 7 put 12 walked
1 went 6 told 11 swam 3 made 8 sat 13 played
2 made 7 laughed 12 were 4 moved 9 stopped 14 studied
3 sat 8 watched 13 got 5 wanted 10 tried 15 could
4 ate 9 was 14 had
5 talked 10 loved 15 slept Exercise 2
1 a go b went
Past simple negatives 2 a left b leave
3 a feel b felt
Exercise 1 4 a had b have
1 didn’t 6 didn’t 5 a was b is
2 wasn’t 7 didn’t 6 a get b got
3 didn’t 8 wasn’t 7 a know b knew
4 weren’t 9 weren’t 8 a sleeps b slept
5 wasn’t 10 didn’t
Exercise 3
Exercise 2 1 A: Where did you go on holiday?
1 There weren’t any cheap hotels in the old town, so we 2 B: We went to the Czech Republic.
stayed outside the city. 3 A: Did you stay in Prague?
2 I was only in Cairo for two days. I didn’t have time to 4 B: No, we didn’t. We rented an apartment in the
see anything. mountains.
3 I didn’t email or phone anyone for two weeks! It was 5 A: Was it nice?
good to relax. 6 B: Yes, it was. We had a great time.
4 I was very tired, so I didn’t do anything last night. 7 A: What did you do?
5 I didn’t go anywhere on Sunday. I just stayed at home 8 B: We didn’t do much. We read, we swam in the lake –
and relaxed. just relaxed.
6 We stayed in the mountains. We didn’t see anyone for 9 A: Did you like the food?
almost a week. 10 B: Yes, we loved it! We ate out a lot.
7 I looked in ten different shops, but I couldn’t find any 11 A: How long were you there?
wine. 12 B: Two weeks. We arrived back yesterday.
8 He didn’t try any local food. He just ate burgers
all week. 5 SHOPS
Exercise 3
Student’s Book pages 174–175
2 We didn’t go to bed very late.
3 The hotel wasn’t very cheap. that / this / these / those
4 I didn’t have a very busy weekend.
5 People weren’t very friendly. Exercise 1
6 We didn’t stay a very long time. 1 That 5 are
7 My parents weren’t very happy. 2 this 6 that
8 The water in the room wasn’t very hot. 3 are 7 those
4 ones 8 this

GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY 185

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 185 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

Exercise 2 6 EDUCATION
1 The one with pink stuff on top.
2 … I prefer the other ones you tried on before. Student’s Book pages 175–176
B: What about these black ones?
A: … Which ones are cheaper? Modifiers
3 … The red ones are five euros a kilo and the green ones
are 4.50. Exercise 1
4 … do you have this one in a medium? 1 It’s quite cold in here. Can we turn on the heating?
B: No. Sorry. There are only extra large ones or the 2 Thanks for inviting us. We had a really great time.
small ones. 3 It isn’t very interesting. We always do the same
things.
Present continuous 4 He’s OK, I guess, but he’s quite strange!
5 He’s really good at sciences. He gets A grades.
Exercise 1 6 My teachers were very helpful, so that made the
1 Can you come back later? I’m making dinner. course easier.
2 Where is he going now?
3 Are you looking for something? Exercise 2
4 She’s talking to her mother on the phone. 2 a bit difficult 5 a bit lazy
5 They’re building some apartments opposite my house. 4 a bit boring 8 a bit strange
6 Shhh! The baby’s sleeping.
7 He’s not ready. He’s getting dressed. Comparatives
8 I’m not going outside now. It’s raining.
Exercise 1
Exercise 2 1 easier
1 do you do 2 shorter
2 Do your parents live 3 more popular
3 I’m writing 4 more friendly / friendlier
4 I’m sitting 5 worse, colder
5 are you looking for, I think 6 better, more interesting
6 He’s just brushing, Do you want 7 more difficult

Revision Exercise 2
1 better 4 more expensive
Exercise 1 2 warmer 5 bigger
1 ‘m, on, coming 3 worse
2 one, these
3 are, Do, The, the Revision

Exercise 2 Exercise 1
2 Who is Tamara talking to? 1 The film’s not very good.
3 I’m looking for a job at the moment. 2 The class was not very interesting.
4 I’m not feeling very well. 3 The school’s not very big.
5 Are you waiting for someone? 4 I’m not very warm.
6 You’re making a mess. Clean the table when 5 The exam was quite difficult.
you finish. 6 The rent for my flat is quite cheap.
7 He went into town. He’s doing some shopping. 7 The school I work for is quite near to here.
8 Henry and Terry are not coming, so we can start the 8 He got quite low grades.
meeting now.
Exercise 2
Exercise 3 2 Your class is a higher level than mine.
1 We’re staying in the Grand Hotel. 3 You are better at sciences than me.
2 I’m not working at the moment. 4 Chinese is more useful than French.
3 Who are those people over there? 5 My daughter is taller than my son.
4 What’s she doing in Australia? 6 My dad is tidier than my mum.
5 They’re having a meeting. 7 This year is more difficult than last year.
6 Can I have that red one? 8 My exam results are worse than yours.

Exercise 3
1 quite / really 4 than
2 is 5 very
3 bit 6 more

186 OUTCOMES

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 186 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

7 PEOPLE I KNOW 8 PLANS

Student’s Book pages 177–178 Student’s Book pages 178–179

Auxiliary verbs going to

Exercise 1 Exercise 1
1 can’t 5 does 1 b 2 f 3 d 4 a 5 c 6 e
2 did 6 didn’t
3 do, doesn’t 7 do Exercise 2
4 I’m not 8 can 1 are going to go
2 are going to celebrate
Exercise 2 3 am going to get
1 is 4 can, can’t 4 isn’t going to like
2 does 5 isn’t 5 are your cousins going to stay?
3 didn’t 6 did 6 is it going to take?
7 are you going to meet
have to / don’t have to 8 ’m going to miss; ’m not going to see

Exercise 1 Exercise 3
1 have to 6 have to 1 I’m not going to do anything special tonight.
2 have to 7 don’t have to 2 How are you going to get home?
3 has to 8 has to 3 Where are they going to go on holiday this year?
4 have to 9 sing 4 What is your sister going to study?
5 doesn’t have to 10 tell 5 How much is it going to cost?
6 I’m going to have dinner with my parents tonight.
Exercise 2
1 have to leave would like to + verb
2 don’t have to wait
3 has to do Exercise 1
4 have to work 1 get, lose 4 start, become
5 doesn’t have to go 2 retire, relax 5 leave, get
3 learn, go 6 save, buy
Revision
Exercise 2
Exercise 1 A
A 1 Would you like a cup of tea?
1 c 2 f 3 e 4 b 5 a 6 d 2 Would you like a seat?
B 3 Would you like a cigarette?
1 No, she isn’t. 4 Would you like a drink?
2 No, I wasn’t. 5 Would you like some more cake?
3 Yes, they are really. 6 Would you like milk in your coffee?
4 Yes, I can. B
5 Yes, she does. 1 b 2 f 3 a 4 c 5 d 6 e
6 No, she didn’t.
Revision
Exercise 2
2 … but I do. Exercise 1
3 … but we always do on Sunday. 1 is 5 would
4 … but Juan did. 2 to 6 to
5 … but my sister does. 3 like 7 are
6 … I did too! 4 are 8 not

Exercise 3 Exercise 2
1 I have to go. 1 I’m not going to
2 He has to work late. 2 I’d like to
3 Do you have to pass it? 3 I’m going to
4 She doesn’t have to travel far to get to work. 4 I wouldn’t like to
5 Do we have to stay? 5 Would you like to
6 We don’t have to get up early tomorrow. 6 I’m going to

GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY 187

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 187 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

Exercise 3 Exercise 2
1 this weekend 1 h 3 e 5 b 7 f
2 later this afternoon 2 c 4 d 6 g 8 a
3 sometime in the future
4 this summer Exercise 3
5 sometime in the next few weeks 1 Have you visited
6 later this evening 2 did you arrive
7 in the next few years 3 have you been
8 sometime in the next three or four months. 4 Did you enjoy
5 Have you looked
9 EXPERIENCES
10 TRAVEL
Student’s Book pages 179–181
Student’s Book pages 181–182
The present perfect
too much, too many and not enough
Exercise 1
1 Has, to 4 tried, haven’t Exercise 1
2 been, like 5 visited 1 is 4 is
3 ever, have, you 2 are 5 are
3 are 6 is
Exercise 2
1 Have you been, went Exercise 2
2 I’ve been, I came, did you stay 1 too many 4 too much
3 did you arrive, have you been, we went, loved 2 too 5 too many, too much
4 Have you tried, took, it was 3 too much 6 enough, too
5 Have you visited, I’ve been, I went, did you like
Superlatives
Past participles
Exercise 1
Possible answers to Exercise 1 1 the hottest 5 worst
– past simple and past participle the same: had-had, left- 2 most 6 easiest
left, made-made 3 loudest 7 nicest
– past simple and present form similar, past participle 4 busiest 8 tallest
different (often a different vowel sound): see-saw-seen,
take-took-taken, throw-threw-thrown Exercise 2
– past participle ending in -n or -en: broken, fallen, taken, 1 the best, better
thrown 2 hottest, hotter
– past participle ending in -t: leave-left, feel-felt 3 the oldest, older, the youngest
– past participle and / or past simple changes vowel 4 the quietest, louder
sound: break-broken, find-found, forget-forgot, go-gone, 5 smaller, biggest
lose-lost, take-took, leave-left, feel-felt 6 the most boring, better
(Note this is often combined with a t or n ending on
the past participle.) Revision

Exercise 2 Exercise 1
1 seen 5 (correct) 1 too many cars 4 too much rubbish
2 forgotten 6 made 2 too many people 5 not enough
3 (correct) 7 (correct) 3 the easiest way 6 fastest
4 taken 8 cut
Exercise 2
Exercise 3 1 cheapest 5 nearest
1 saw, Have you seen 2 quickest 6 most exciting
2 Have you lost, left, took 3 funniest 7 hottest
3 got up, missed, haven’t stopped, haven’t eaten 4 most interesting 8 nicest

Revision Exercise 3
1 the 5 the
Exercise 1 2 much 6 really
1 bought 6 drove 11 put 3 enough 7 worst
2 choose 7 feel 12 sell 4 lots 8 too
3 come 8 got 13 stole
4 cut 9 known 14 took
5 done 10 leave
188 OUTCOMES

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 188 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

11 FOOD 12 FEELINGS
Student’s Book pages 182–184 Student’s Book pages 184–185

me too, me neither and auxiliaries should / shouldn’t

Exercise 1 Exercise 1
1 Me too. 4 I do. 1 you should 4 we should
2 Me neither. 5 I wouldn’t. I don’t. 2 you shouldn’t 5 they shouldn’t
3 I don’t. 6 Me neither. I’m not. 3 he should 6 she should

Exercise 2 Exercise 2
1 neither, too 1 cook more 5 less sugar
2 can, too 2 longer 6 harder
3 Me neither, I don’t, Me too 3 do more 5 concentrate more
4 more exercise 6 less time, more time
Explaining quantity
because, so and after
Exercise 1
1 a lot of Exercise 1
2 any 1 so 5 because
3 a lot of / quite a lot of 2 After 6 so
4 a lot of, any 3 because 7 after
5 much 4 After 8 because
6 any / many, a lot of
7 many / any, No, not many / Yes, quite a lot. Exercise 2
8 much, some / quite a lot 2 I’m very stressed because I have my final exams soon.
3 He really wanted the job, but he didn’t get it, so he’s
Exercise 2 quite upset.
1 many 5 much 4 After they lost the final, he sat on the sofa and cried
2 a bit of 6 a few for an hour!
3 a few 7 a bit of 5 I really love opera, so I’m really looking forward to
4 much 8 many going to see La Traviata.
6 After I moved to London, I met my wife.
Exercise 3 7 I’m happy because I’m going to go on holiday next
1 different, a bit of is less week.
2 different, any is less
3 different, any is less (any means ‘do you ever eat Revision
sweets?’, many means ‘do you eat a lot?’)
4 same Exercise 1
5 same 1 should see 4 should take
6 different, some is less 2 shouldn’t drive 5 shouldn’t eat
3 should be 6 shouldn’t carry
Revision
Exercise 2
Exercise 1 2 We should take the bus.
1 a lot of 4 any 3 I’ve been tired all day because I didn’t sleep well last
2 any 5 a lot of, many night.
3 quite a lot of 6 some, a few 4 He shouldn’t drive so fast.
5 After the accident, he didn’t need to go to the
Exercise 2 hospital.
1 some 5 little 6 He’s not feeling very well, so he’s gone to bed.
2 me 6 (correct)
3 do 7 wouldn’t Exercise 3
4 (correct) 8 do 1 shouldn’t 5 more
2 more 6 should
Exercise 3 3 watch 7 so
1 some 4 few 4 because 8 doesn’t
2 lot 5 a
3 a 6 much

GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY 189

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 189 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

13 NATURE 14 OPINIONS
Student’s Book page 186 Student’s Book pages 187–188

might and be going to will / won’t for predictions

Exercise 1 Exercise 1
1 We’re going to 4 It’s going to 1 they’ll 5 won’t
2 We might 5 possibly 2 there’ll be 6 you’ll
3 We’re going to 6 She may 3 will the meeting start 7 probably won’t
4 won’t 8 will
Exercise 2
1 f 2 d 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 e Exercise 2
A
Present perfect to say how long 1 I expect you will need to take a test.
2 I don’t expect it will be necessary.
Exercise 1 3 I expect next year will be quite difficult.
1 How long have you been here? 4 I doubt they will offer me the job.
2 How long have you lived here? 5 I doubt it will be very expensive.
3 How long have you done that? 6 I doubt he will listen, but I can ask him.
4 She has had that dog for five years. B
5 I have lived here for three months now. 4 I don’t think they will offer me the job.
6 I haven’t had it very long. 5 I don’t think it will be very expensive.
6 I don’t think he will listen, but I can ask him.
Exercise 2
1 For about ten years. Adjective + verb
2 Quite a long time now – nine or ten years, maybe.
3 so it’s twelve years now. Exercise 1
4 Not very long – only a few months. 1 to find 5 to read
5 so it’s almost twenty years now. 2 to walk 6 to see
3 to park 7 not to worry
Revision 4 not to offer 8 not to vote

Exercise 1 Exercise 2
1 They said it might rain later. 1 c 2 b 3 e 4 f 5 d 6 a
2 I might not be in the office tomorrow.
3 She might call you this afternoon. Revision
4 It said there’s going to be a storm tonight.
5 We’re going to go to Bulgaria for our holiday this year. Exercise 1
6 My dad’s going to drive us to the station. 1 They won’t win.
2 Will he get the job?
Exercise 2 3 It was difficult not to laugh in that situation.
1 known 5 had 4 I probably won’t see you before Christmas.
2 been 6 seen 5 I don’t think the economy will improve this year.
3 lived 7 felt 6 Is it easy to find work?
4 wanted
Exercise 2
Exercise 3 1 to read 5 to move
1 I might not see you tomorrow. 2 will lose 6 won’t happen
2 We are going to finish the work by Tuesday. 3 to eat out 7 not to help
3 She has been there for twelve years now. 4 to travel 8 will make
4 I’m not going to do it. I’m too busy.
5 They might possibly move to the country next year. Exercise 3
6 How long have they lived there? 1 It was lovely to see you again.
2 It won’t cost too much.
3 What will you do with the money you won?
4 Was it difficult to learn Russian?
5 It’s difficult not to think about it.
6 It’s not rude to talk about money in my country.

190 OUTCOMES

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 190 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY

15 TECHNOLOGY 16 LOVE
Student’s Book pages 188–189 Student’s Book pages 189–190

be thinking of + -ing Past continuous

Exercise 1 Exercise 1
1 I’m thinking of joining a gym. 1 was talking 4 were having
2 What brand are you thinking of buying? 2 were you doing 5 weren’t getting on
3 They are thinking of moving sometime next year. 3 wasn’t working 6 were sitting
4 I hope he isn’t thinking of leaving the company.
5 Who are you thinking of asking? Exercise 2
6 They said on TV that they aren’t thinking of changing 1 f 2 a 3 c 4 b 5 d 6 e
the price.
7 Which university is she thinking of applying to? will / won’t for promises
8 I’m thinking of trying to make my own computer.
9 Why is he thinking of retiring? He’s only 48. Exercise 1
10 Please tell me you aren’t thinking of marrying him! 1 I won’t 5 I’ll
2 You won’t 6 I won’t
Exercise 2 3 I’ll 7 I will
1 e 2 b 3 c 4 f 5 a 6 d 4 I’ll

Adverbs Exercise 2
2 I’ll pay you back.
Exercise 1 3 I won’t lose it.
1 slowly 4 badly, hard 4 We won’t make any noise.
2 easily 5 well, nicely 5 I’ll look after it.
3 late, early 6 happily, long 6 We’ll be back quickly / in five minutes.
7 I won’t stay long / more than two nights, etc.
Exercise 2
1 efficiently 5 late Revision
2 badly 6 louder
3 safely 7 worse Exercise 1
4 quickly and easily 8 harder 1 He wasn’t working yesterday so he couldn’t answer
your email.
Revision 2 Were you living there when you met?
3 I won’t tell him.
Exercise 1 4 They weren’t paying attention during the meeting.
1 Is she thinking of changing jobs? 5 I’ll do it for you.
2 We aren’t thinking of making our own website. 6 Were you cycling when the big storm started?
3 I’m thinking of having children. 7 We were listening when you made that promise.
4 He’s thinking of buying a new one. 8 I was driving too fast when the accident happened.
5 I’m not thinking of applying for a Master’s.
6 Are they thinking of selling the company? Exercise 2
1 was playing, hurt 5 moved, was growing up
Exercise 2 2 found, was walking 6 was riding, hit
1 confident 5 good 3 met, were waiting 7 wasn’t enjoying, decided
2 slow 6 well 4 went, was playing 8 were visiting, hit
3 late 7 bad, hard
4 slowly 8 well, awful Exercise 3
1 I’ll call you tonight, I promise.
Exercise 3 2 What were you doing when this happened?
1 He speaks really quickly! 3 I will always to love you.
2 Where are you thinking of moving to? 4 I was running down the street when …
3 I’m thinking of complaining to the company about it. 5 The children were all studying quietly when …
4 You look really nice in that suit. 6 Someone stole my bike when …
5 He’s studying hard for his exams at the moment. 7 A: Don’t be late. B: I won’t.
6 The camera works perfectly now. 8 A: What did he say?
7 We’re thinking of getting married next year. B: I don’t know. I wasn’t listening. Sorry.
8 You drive too fast.

GRAMMAR REFERENCE ANSWER KEY 191

65752_em_gr_ak_pp183-191.indd 191 08/12/18 11:50 AM

 TESTS
UNIT 1 TEST VOCABULARY
5 Put the words in the box in the correct categories.
GRAMMAR
Brazil Central America China Kenya
1 Complete the dialogues with the words in brackets Saudi Arabia Asia
and the correct form of be.
1 A: Hi, how ? (you) Countries: 1 2 3 4
B: fine, thank you. (I) Parts of the world: 5 6
2 A: Where from? (she) /6
B: from Paris. (She) 6 Complete the sentences with one word. The first letter
3 A: How old ? (Dan) is given.
B: 25. (he) 1 A waiter works in a r .
4 A: from Costa Rica? (your parents) 2 An works in a hospital.
B: No, from Spain. (they). 3 A teacher works at a s .
/8 4 As a works in a clothes shop.
2 Match the question beginnings (1–6) to the 5 A police officer works at a p s .
endings (a–f). 6 Ad works at home in a studio.
1 Where /6
2 How many 7 Complete the sentences with the opposite to the
3 How adjective in bold.
4 Who 1 I live in a busy city, not a q village.
5 Do 2 My country is h in summer but very cold
6 What time in winter.
3 My parents have a big house, but I have a
a do you go to the office? s flat.
b you like your job? 4 The cafés are cheap, but the restaurants in the city
c do you finish work? centre are e .
d languages do you speak? 5 Beaches on the island are beautiful and clean, but the
e do you work with? city beach is d .
f do you live? 6 My life is interesting but my job is b .
/6 I don’t like it.
3 Match the answers (a–f) to the questions (1–6) in /6
Exercise 2. 8 In each group (1–6), three words are similar and one
a At about 6 o’clock in the evening. word is different. Which word is different?
b I take the train. 1 mosque, church, cathedral, hospital
c I work with my brother. 2 cinema, doctor, park, shop
d I live in Sydney. 3 town, school, village, city
e Just one – English. 4 nurse, boring, famous, safe
f Yes, it’s very interesting. 5 kids, people, hours, wives
1 2 3 4 5 6 6 French, Japan, Spain, Brazil
/6 /6 / 50
4 Complete the dialogue with words from the box. You
can use the words more than once.

there’s there are Are there Is there

there isn’t there aren’t

Shotaro: 1 any interesting places in

your town?
Amy: Yes, 2 an old church in the centre.
Shotaro: 3 a park?
Amy: No, 4 a park, but 5 some
nice gardens near the river.
Shotaro: 6 a university?
Amy: No, students go to the next town.
/6

192 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 192 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 2 TEST 6 Match the sentence beginnings (1–6) to the endings

(a–f).
1 At the weekend, I usually go
GRAMMAR 2 I often do
3 Before work, I have
1 Complete the sentences with the correct form of the 4 In the evening, I always watch
verbs in brackets. 5 I enjoy writing
1 I enjoy (cook) for friends. 6 We finish
2 I don’t want (go) out this evening.
3 We need (do) the shopping. a my homework on the bus.
4 Adam hates (get) up early. b school at three o’clock.
5 Try (learn) these words. c emails to my friends.
6 Simon loves (watch) football on TV. d to bed very late.
7 I hate (be) late for school. e a coffee in a café.
/7 f the news on TV.
2 Put the words in order to make sentences. /6
1 always / We / dinner / in the evening / have 7 Complete the text with verbs from the box. Use each
2 grandmother / Our / us / usually / visits / on Sunday verb once.
3 to bed / in the afternoon / sometimes / go / I
4 often / I / do / don’t / my homework take watch say do turn off read
5 hardly ever / go / My parents / in summer / on holiday listen close
6 Mark / never / to / the theatre / goes / at weekends
7 Amy / works / in the morning / at home / occasionally On Mondays, we have Russian lessons at Olga’s house.
8 doesn’t / William / like / at the weekend / working / At the beginning of the lesson we 1 our
usually mobile phones and we 2 the window.
/8 We don’t want to hear the traffic! Then the lesson starts.
3 Complete the sentences with a, an, some, any, much, We 3 to our teacher, Olga, and we
many or a lot of. 4
a lot of notes. She talks a lot! We often
1 I have good job in the city. 5
stories and we sometimes 6
2 There aren’t interesting programmes on videos or short films. Then we 7 what
TV. Not one! we think about the films or stories. We get a lot of
3 There aren’t people in the shopping homework and we try to 8 our homework
centre. In fact, there are only about twenty people here. before the next lesson.
4 ‘Do you have brothers or sisters?’ ‘Yes, /8
I have one sister.’ 8 Complete the sentences with the words in the box.
5 Kelly has free time these days. She only There is one word you don’t need.
works for two days every week.
6 I don’t have money. dictionary water mobile phone scissors
/6 money pen
4 Choose the correct word to complete the text.
In 1 a / any / a lot of European countries, supermarkets 1 I write things with a .
and big shops are usually open on Sundays, but in 2 I find new words in a .
Austria there aren’t 2 some / much / many places open. 3 I need to buy things.
On Sundays, Austrians often go out, so you can go in a 4 I use my to talk to friends.
café and buy 3 a / many / any coffee or 4 much / some / 5 I drink in class.
any cakes or sandwiches. But Austrians don’t usually go /5 / 50
shopping. 5 A / Some / A lot of shops are open, but not
many. Only bakeries, petrol stations and shops at railway
stations and airports are open.
/5

VOCABULARY
5 Match the activities to a word.
1 cooking a pictures
2 watching TV b songs
3 going to a concert c food
4 drawing d music
5 singing e programmes
/5

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 193

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 193 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 3 TEST 5 Diana has a new mobile phone. It’s great.

is great.
6 Fiona has a brother. His name is Ed.
GRAMMAR name is Ed.
/6
1 Look at the map. Complete the dialogue with words in 4 Correct the mistakes underlined in 1–6.
the box. 1 I can no swim. I need lessons.
2 ‘I can help you?’ ‘Oh, yes. Do you have a book about
shoe volleyball?’
bank café post office shop bookshop 3 We can to drive you to the station. Are you ready?
Hart Street 4 I’m sorry. I not can come to the party.
5 ‘You can tell me what time it is?’ ‘Yes. It’s 3 o’clock.’
restaurant clothes museum art cinema 6 You no can use your mobile phone in here.’
shop gallery /6

bus station
VOCABULARY
5 Complete the sentences with words in the box.

between on opposite in front of chemist’s post office sports centre bank

next to behind shoe shop café bookshop clothes shop

Luis: Hi. I don’t know the town very well. Are there any 1 I got some money at the .
good places to go? 2 I bought aspirin at the .
Patrick: Well, Hart Street is good. It’s in the centre of 3 We need to go to the to buy boots for
town and there is a lot to do there. There’s a great café Joe.
1
Hart Street. It’s 2 the bank 4 Can you send this letter at the ?
and 3
the clothes shop. I often go there. 5 I often buy something to read at the .
There’s a beautiful garden 4 the café. It’s 6 I bought this new jacket in the near the
very busy in summer. There’s an art gallery 5 cinema.
the museum and the cinema. It’s 6 the bus 7 I want a coffee. Is there a near here?
station. I go there to see the paintings and drawings. 8 I often go swimming at the .
Luis: OK. Thanks. /8
/6 6 Choose the correct option.
2 Complete the sentences with the correct pronoun or 1 It’s not in an apartment:
possessive adjective. a bathroom b garden c balcony
1 My sister cooks own breakfast every 2 It’s not usually in a bedroom:
morning. She doesn’t eat with us. a fridge b bed c chair
2 Jo and Peter need to do homework 3 It’s not usually in a kitchen:
before Friday. a cupboard b chair c bed
3 Mr Clark is often late for work because 4 It’s never in a living room:
gets up late. a toilet b sofa c table
4 We want to paint the living room, and dad says he 5 It’s never in a bathroom:
hopes to help . a cupboard b bed c chair
5 We live in the city centre. house is next 6 It’s never outside:
to the theatre. a balcony b kitchen c garden
6 My parents are happy because are on 7 It’s only in a bathroom:
holiday. I’m at work! a cupboard b shower c sink
7 I know you like George, but do you love ? 8 You can sit on it:
8 Can you help ? I can’t carry this on a fridge b chair c sink
my own. /8
/8 7 Match the sentence beginnings (1–8) to the
3 Complete the second sentence in each pair so it means endings (a–h).
the same as the first. Use possessive ’s. 1 Can you set a my jacket. It’s cold.
1 Andy has a sister and she’s very tall. 2 I need to put on b in the cupboard.
is very tall. 3 I always brush c the table, please?
2 My parents have a villa. It is in Portugal. 4 Please put that back d a flat with two friends.
is in Portugal. 5 We always wash e our hands before we eat.
3 Jack has a brother. He can’t swim. 6 I share f my teeth in the morning.
can’t swim. 7 Can you cut g dinner for the family.
4 Adam has very long hair. 8 I often make h the vegetables, please?
is very long.
/8 / 50

194 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 194 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 4 TEST VOCABULARY

5 Write the missing month in each list.
GRAMMAR 1 a June b c August
2 a February b c April
1 Complete the sentences with the past simple form of 3 a September b October c
the verb in brackets. 4 a April b c June
1 On Saturday I (play) computer games 5 a December b January c
with my cousins. /5
2 My mum (not cook) dinner last night. 6 Write the ordinal numbers as words.
3 I (walk) to school because there weren´t 1 May 9th
any buses. 2 June 1st
4 They (not dance) at the party. 3 August 3rd
5 My brother (travel) to Ireland last 4 May 22nd
summer. 5 September 11th
6 We (be) late for school. 6 July 17th
/6 /6
2 Put the words in order to make past simple questions. 7 Choose the correct option.
1 get / did / Harry / home / when / ? 1 We rented / went a boat for the day. It wasn’t expensive.
2 swimming / did / Ann / go / last Sunday / ? 2 I always fly / take first-class when I go to New York.
3 did / on holiday / take / what / you / ? 3 We don’t want to rent / spend a lot of money on
4 the beach / where / was / ? holiday.
5 did / visit / how many / they / museums / ? 4 I love going / taking sightseeing. I want to see all the
6 go / Oliver / to / the art gallery / did / ? old buildings.
/6 5 Rent / Take the bus from the station to the city centre.
3 Complete these answers to the questions in Exercise 2. 6 We usually spend / stay with friends in Edinburgh.
Use the same verb as in the question, and any other /6
words necessary. 8 Complete the text with the missing prepositions.
1 Harry at seven o’clock. 1
July the 7th last year, we flew
2 No, she didn’t. She last Saturday. 2
Miami 3 British Airways.
3 I a lot of summer clothes and a big towel. We stayed 4
a hotel near Disneyland, and
4 It near the village. visited the famous theme park. Every evening, we went
5 They any museums! They think they’re 5
for dinner in an expensive restaurant. This
boring. year, we don’t want to spend a lot of money. We want to
6 No, he didn’t. He to the bookshop. stay 6 a bed and breakfast or 7
/6 friends here in England!
4 Complete the text with the past simple form of the /7 / 50
verbs in the box. Use each verb once.

be not / go walk get read have

go play

Last weekend, the weather 1 hot and

sunny, so we 2 to the beach with some
friends. When we 3 there, we 4
volleyball next to the sea. We 5
into the sea
because it was very cold! We 6 lunch and
7
books and magazines. At about six, we
8
back to the car and went home. It was a
great day!
/8

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 195

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 195 10/12/18 12:31 PM

 TESTS

UNIT 5 TEST VOCABULARY

5 Complete the sentences with the words in the box.
GRAMMAR
pair litre kilo cup piece
1 Complete the questions with one word in each space.
1 ‘How apples would you like?’ ‘Six, please.’ 1 I bought a new of jeans.
2 ‘ I have some oranges, please?’ ‘Yes, of 2 We went to the market to get a of
course.’ tomatoes.
3 ‘ ones would you like? The red ones or the 3 Would you like a small of cake?
green ones?’ ‘Oh, the green ones, please.’ 4 How much is a of petrol?
4 ‘How are the lemons?’ ‘Oh, one fifty a kilo.’ 5 I need a nice of tea. I’m thirsty.
5 ‘ are those made of?’ ‘Plastic.’ /5
6 ‘Anything ?’ ‘No, thanks.’ 6 Match the words in the box to the sentences.
/6
2 Complete the sentences with this, that, these or those. opportunities retired growing
1 Did you eat biscuits on the table in the sad manage
living room? They aren’t there now.
2 tests here on my desk don’t have names 1 My dad is 66. He stopped working last year.
on them. 2 I do everything in the shop. I tell the shop assistants
3 Did you buy banana at the market? It what to do.
tastes bad. 3 Our company is big now, and it’s getting very big!
4 Ask police officer over there for 4 The company is doing well and there are often new jobs.
directions. 5 We are unhappy and feel bad.
5 Can we go and look at bag in the shop /5
window at Millett’s? 7 Choose the correct option.
6 Can you carry boxes outside up to my 1 I work in a big shop. I am only but I want
bedroom? to be a manager one day.
/6 a an assistant b a partner
3 Complete the sentences with the correct present 2 Press the button and take the to the top
continuous form of the verbs in brackets. floor.
1 Will is upstairs. I think he (play) computer a rise b lift
games. 3 My dad works as a security in a big shop.
2 I (draw) a picture. Can you see what it is? When people steal things, he stops them.
3 Henry is in bed. He (not feel) well right a worker b guard
now. 4 At the end of the day, we take money out of the
4 Susan and her brother are outside. They . There are often thousands of euros.
(take) photos of the garden. a tills b escalators
5 Dad (work) in the kitchen. 5 Customers try clothes on in the rooms.
6 They (not go) on holiday because they a wearing b changing
have no money. 6 There are some pullovers on the top . It’s
7 Hurry up. Harry and Tom (wait) for us. very high. Can you get them?
8 I (not work) at the moment. There aren’t a place b shelf
any jobs. /6
/8 8 Complete the text with the missing words. The first
4 Write present continuous questions from the prompts. letter is given.
1 A: you / go / to the party / ? I work in the 1m department of a large
B: No, I’m not. I’m busy. department 2s . We sell men’s suits, trousers
2 A: Jamie / play / football / right now / ? and jackets. I work on the 3g floor near the
B: Yes, he is. We want to go and watch him. 4
m entrance. Hundreds of people come
3 A: the shop / make / money / ? in through that door every day so I’m always busy.
B: Yes, it is. The business is successful. My wife also works in the shop. She’s upstairs on the
4 A: what / you / do / at the moment / ? 5
f floor in the 6b department.
B: Oh, I’m studying at college. She sells make-up and perfumes. Downstairs, in the
5 A: where / Dan / live / ? 7
b , there’s a café. At break time, I take the
B: He’s in Paris – just for this month. 8
e down to the café for a cup of coffee, and
6 A: why / you / cook pasta / ? sometimes I see my wife there!
B: Everybody’s coming to my house for lunch!
/6 /8 / 50

196 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 196 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 6 TEST VOCABULARY

4 Circle the negative word.
GRAMMAR 1 a nice b popular c lazy
2 a difficult b helpful c modern
1 Choose the correct option. 3 a interesting b friendly c boring
1 The course was really / not very interesting. I learned 4 a patient b nice c strange
a lot. 5 a expensive b modern c interesting
2 Our guide wasn’t quite / very patient. I think she was /5
bored. 5 Match the subjects in the box to the descriptions.
3 The college is quite / very expensive. Only rich people
go there. PE biology marketing medicine history
4 The weather was really / quite awful. It rained every engineering literature computing
day.
5 The film was OK. Yeah. It was quite / really good, but 1 You learn about animals and plants.
not great. 2 You study people and events from the past.
6 Some people on the trip weren’t really / very happy 3 You learn how to design a webpage.
with the hotel. 4 You do sport and get fit.
7 My flat is nice, but it’s not very / quite big. 5 You study this subject to become a doctor.
8 The house isn’t very / quite clean at the moment. We 6 You learn about building planes or bridges.
had a party yesterday. 7 You learn how to work in business and sell things
/8 8 You read books by famous writers from the past.
2 Complete the sentences with the comparative form of /8
the word in brackets. 6 Complete the sentences with the languages.
1 The weather yesterday was a lot (warm) 1 People speak R in Minsk, Moscow and
than today. Vladivostok.
2 This exercise is (difficult) than the last 2 Many people from South America speak S .
one. 3 In Canada, Algeria and Vietnam, you meet F
3 Paris is (romantic) than any other city. speakers.
4 Tomorrow, we’re catching the train at seven. We need 4 In many Middle East countries, like Kuwait and
to get up (early) than normal. Lebanon, people speak A .
5 Ivan’s (good) at English than his brother. 5 In Switzerland, many people speak G .
6 You need to be (careful) with your 6 More people speak C than English.
money. /6
7 The weather is (bad) today. 7 Choose the correct words to complete the text.
8 Hilltown is (far) from here than I thought. I’m an art teacher. I am very 1 creative / positive /
/8 caused – that’s why I can draw and paint interesting
3 Complete the text with the comparative form of the pictures. I am also good at 2 solving / learning /
words in brackets. explaining things to students who don’t understand.
Quebec is a province in the east of Canada. It is My evening classes 3 start / finish / train at 7 and go
1
(large) than any other province in Canada. on to 10 o’clock in the evening every Tuesday. Courses
20% of people there speak English, but French speakers 4
last / cost / share three months – from January to
are 2 (common), and a lot of people are March. I enjoy 5 paying / doing / giving my students
bilingual. All the street signs are in French and English. lots of help.
Quebec City is the capital city, but the other main city, /5 / 50
Montreal, is 3 (big), 4 (famous)
and 5
(exciting). Winters are very cold in
Quebec, and it is 6 (cold) in the north than
in the south. Summers in the south of the province are
a lot 7 (warm) and 8 (nice)
than people think. Temperatures are sometimes 35°C in
summer. My best friend is from Quebec. He says that the
Quebecois are 9 (funny) and 10
(intelligent) than English-speaking Canadians, but I don’t
think that’s true!
/ 10

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 197

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 197 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 7 TEST VOCABULARY

4 Complete each sentence with the male or female form
GRAMMAR of the word in bold.
1 I have two sons and a d .
1 Complete the answers with the correct auxiliary verbs. 2 My grandmother married my g in 1960.
1 ‘Can Sylvia swim?’ ‘Yes, she .’ 3 I have an older brother and a younger s .
2 ‘Did you see Paul at the concert?’ ‘No, I .’ 4 Tom’s wife is younger than Melanie’s h .
3 ‘Is Amy coming to class today?’ ‘No, she .’ 5 My uncle and a live in France.
4 ‘Do you have an apartment near here?’ ‘Yes, I 6 I live with my mum and d .
.’ 7 We went out with Tom and his new girlfriend, and
5 ‘Is she your cousin?’ ‘Yes, she .’ Karen and her new b .
6 ‘Are these your books?’ ‘Yes, they .’ 8 I have a cousin called Tomas and a c called
7 ‘Are you tired?’ ‘Yes, I .’ Magda. They live in Prague.
8 ‘Did you go to Tom’s house yesterday?’ ‘No, I /8
.’ 5 Complete the sentences with one word. The first letter
/8 is given.
2 Complete the sentences with have to, has to, don’t 1 Can you l after the baby for twenty
have to or doesn’t have to. minutes? I have to go to the shop.
1 We get up early tomorrow because we 2 Tim often t funny jokes.
are flying to New York at 7 a.m. 3 I have to e the dishwasher every day.
2 Patrick write an essay about Shakespeare. 4 We usually d the washing at the
It’s part of his course and the teacher wants the essay weekend.
before Friday. 5 Ip up my children from school at
3 Samantha get a job because her parents 4 o’clock.
are very rich. 6 My family s songs at Christmas.
4 I leave the party at 10. The last bus is 7 Can you f the dog when we are away?
at 10.15. 8 Having a bath m me feel good.
5 My mother is a teacher. She read 9 Is a house in the centre with two
students’ homework every evening. It’s part of her job! friends.
6 We walk to school. I’ve got a new car! 10 When did you l college?
7 Jim and Harry go to work. It’s Sunday and / 10
the factory is closed! 6 Circle the noun that is the best match for the
8 What time does Harry leave tomorrow? adjective.
/8 1 clever a students b celebrities
3 Complete the text with the missing auxiliary verbs. 2 strict a children b parents
A: Do you like living at home? 3 loud a guitarists b librarians
B: No, I 1 really. I have to do a lot of 4 funny a police officers b comedians
housework, but my sister 2 ! And my mum 5 reliable a doctors b criminals
always tells me what to do, and so 3 my 6 quiet a opera singers b nurses
dad. It’s annoying! /6 / 50
A: So, are you looking for somewhere else?
B: Yes, I 4 , but apartments are too expensive.
A: I have some friends who 5 looking for
someone to share their house. Do you want their
phone number?
B: Yes, I 6 ! But is it cheap?
A: Yes, it 7 . It’s cheaper than an apartment
anyway.
B: Is it near college?
A: No, it 8 , but it’s on a bus route. John gets
the bus to college, but David and Sam 9 .
They work in town.
B: Can you ask them about it?
A: Yes, of course I 10 . They’re going to be very
happy!
/ 10

198 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 198 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 8 TEST VOCABULARY

5 Complete the sentences with the correct verb.
GRAMMAR
did get do go for (*2) getting go to have
1 Put the words in order to make going to sentences. plays wrote
1 be / tomorrow / going / I’m / late / to
2 They / going / aren’t / stay / hotel / to / at / that / 1 Adam tennis every Tuesday.
again 2 I an email to my uncle in South Africa
3 going / go / to / out / weekend / next / She / isn’t last week.
4 watch / going / new / that / to / We’re / watch / film 3 Can you me something to eat? A
5 do / Peter / to / going / What / is / tomorrow / ? sandwich, perhaps.
6 aren’t / stay / They / for / to / lunch / going / 4 Would you like to a walk this afternoon?
/6 5 We some shopping on Saturday
2 Write the dialogue from the prompts. Use going to. afternoon.
1 you / go / on holiday this year / ? 6 On Valentine’s Day, we’re going to a
2 Yeah! We / visit Malta for the first time / . romantic dinner at home.
3 Wow! Where / you / stay / ? 7 You’re ill. You need to the doctor’s.
4 We / book a hotel on the island / . 8 How about a taxi home? It’s too far to
5 Jenny / travel with you / ? walk.
6 No. She / have a holiday with her boyfriend / . 9 I usually my homework at the weekend.
7 Really? Where / they / go / ? 10 How often do you a run?
8 I think they / drive to the south coast / . / 10
/8 6 Match the sentence beginnings (1–7) to the
3 Correct the mistake in each sentence. endings (a–g).
1 I’d like go for a walk later today. 1 Jill would like to win
2 You would like a cup of tea? 2 In 2016, she had
3 I really like to have kids one day. 3 Jill and her husband are going to move
4 Andy no would like to lose his job. 4 In 2012, Jill got
5 Would you like playing a musical instrument? 5 In 2015, Jill stopped
6 She’d like really to help you. 6 Jill wants to become
/6 7 Jill left
4 Complete the dialogue. Write two words in each space.
A: Would you 1 have something to eat a to a bigger house outside London.
before you leave? b rich and famous one day.
B: Yes, please. I’m hungry and I’m 2 to get c the lottery.
anything to eat until we get to Edinburgh. d married to Tony.
A: OK. 3 like to have a cheese sandwich or e a baby.
some hot food? f smoking.
B: Oh, a sandwich, please. And I’d 4 have g home when she was 23.
some tomato on it. Is that OK. /7
A: That’s fine. How long is the train journey 7 Choose the correct words to complete the text about a
5
take? political party.
B: Five hours. I’m going 6 really tired when We are 1 for / after hard-working people and businesses.
I get there. We want to 2 cause / improve education, 3 lose / create
/6 jobs and 4 help / cut businesses to make more money. We
want to 5 cause / provide more opportunities for people
because we think that this 6 is / makes good for the
economy and 7 saves / causes money for the government
and for ordinary people.
/7 / 50

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 199

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 199 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 9 TEST VOCABULARY

4 Choose the correct option.
GRAMMAR 1 We’ve missed / forgotten / lost the bus. The next one
is in forty minutes!
1 Put the words in order to make sentences. 2 The dog has done / made / fallen a mess in the
1 Tokyo / Have / been / ever / you / to / ? garden. Can you clean it?
2 I / tried / Indian / never / have / food / . 3 Try not to hurt / break / fall yourself. It’s dangerous on
3 a / pullover / bought / Jack / has / new / . the ice.
4 Simon / seen / Has / film / that / ? 4 Mike’s lost / missed / forgotten to ring his dad, and it’s
5 ever / you / broken / leg / Have / your / ? his birthday.
6 haven’t / the / We / train / missed / . 5 Pete’s missed / broken / lost his passport. He can’t go
7 ticket / forgotten / I / my / have / . on holiday.
8 found / hasn’t / Joe / wallet / his / . 6 We took / made / went the wrong bus and went to
/8 Heston, not Histon.
2 Complete the sentences with the correct past simple 7 Somebody fell / hurt / broke the window in the
or past participle form of the words in the box. kitchen and got into our house.
8 I hurt / feel / fall ill. I think I’ll go home.
lose take fall see make do cut feel 9 Sam hurt / broke / fell down the stairs and broke his
arm.
1 I’ve never down the stairs. 10 I’ve forgotten / missed / taken Tim’s telephone
2 Have you any money down the back of number. Do you know what it is?
the sofa? / 10
3 I’ve my finger. It really hurts. 5 Match the sentences (1–6) to the adjectives (a–f).
4 Jim has a cake for Mary’s birthday. 1 I sat in the garden in the sun all day.
5 Yesterday, I a great film at the cinema. 2 I was in a play and I forgot what to say.
6 What have you to your hair? It’s green! 3 I went for a job interview.
7 I’ve ill all week. 4 My grandfather died.
8 Last week, I a maths exam. 5 I saw a horror film on TV.
/8 6 Our neighbours played loud music.
3 Complete the text with the past simple or present
perfect form of the verb in brackets. a stressful
1
(you / be) to Mexico? If not, you really b sad
should go! My brother and his girlfriend 2 c relaxing
(fly) there last week. They’re having a great time. They d annoying
3
(not visit) the city of Merida yet, but they e embarrassing
4
(see) the famous old Mayan city at f scary
Chichen Itza. I hope they 5 (take) a lot /6
of photos when they were there! Yesterday, they 6 Complete the sentences with the correct form of the
6
(go) to Tulum by bus. It is a small town verbs in the box.
near a beautiful beach and ancient ruins. They are there
now. They 7 (not climb) up to the ruins, but call give lie lose miss steal use wait
they 8 (swim) in the sea there. In fact, they
9
(go) for a swim early this morning. Then 1 We had to for a bus for two hours. We
they 10 (send) me an email and told me all were so annoyed.
about it! I’d like to go to Mexico one day! 2 We the police because we saw two men
/ 10 in our garden at night.
3 I played tennis with Jerry and the match.
He’s better than me and always wins.
4 George a speech at the conference. It was
very good.
5 You can’t your mobile phone in the
cinema.
6 I love on the beach when it’s sunny.
7 At the nightclub, somebody my bag and
all the money in it.
8 We arrived late at the airport and our
flight.
/8 / 50

200 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 200 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 10 TEST 4 The Isle of Man is (large) island

in the Irish Sea.
5 Cardiff is (big) city in Wales.
GRAMMAR 6 London is (expensive) city in
the UK.
1 Circle one incorrect way of saying the time. 7 Milford Haven is (busy) port in
1 12.15 Wales.
a twelve fifteen c quarter past twelve 8 Summer is (good) time to visit.
b fifteen to twelve /8
2 2.30
a half past two c two thirty VOCABULARY
b half three
3 8.45 5 Complete the sentences with one word. The first letter
a quarter before eight c quarter to nine is given.
b eight forty-five 1 I’m standing on the p at the
4 12.05 railway station, waiting for the train.
a five to twelve c five past twelve 2 I want to go to the centre. Do I g
b twelve oh five o the train at New Street?
5 6.20 3 I’d like a f -class ticket. Is it
a twenty past six c six twenty expensive?
b six and twenty 4 The timetable says the train gets here at 5, and it’s
6 3.25 5.15. Is there a d ?
a three twenty-five c twenty-five past three 5 I took the d train from Oxford
b twenty-five to three to London. I didn’t have to change.
/6 6 I’d like a r ticket to Bristol.
2 Choose much or many to complete the sentences. I want to come back before seven in the evening.
1 Penny has too much / many homework. She can’t do 7 The ticket usually costs £20 but I got a d
it all! because I’m a student. It only cost £12.
2 Tokyo is very crowded. There are too much / many 8 I want a s ticket to Dover,
people! please. I’m not coming back.
3 I’m so busy! I have too much / many things to do today! /8
4 Heathrow Airport, near London, has too much / many 6 Choose the correct option.
flights. 1 The buses all night.
5 Some people eat too much / many fast food. a walk b run c drive
6 I didn’t sleep last night because I drank too much / 2 My car down yesterday. It’s in the
many coffee yesterday evening. garage now.
/6 a broke b fell c came
3 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar 3 You need to the 8.30 bus in front of
meaning to the first sentence. Use a verb and too the supermarket.
much, too many or not enough. a go b catch c have
1 There are a lot of cyclists on the road. It’s too busy! 4 I enjoy my bike at the weekend.
There cyclists on the road. a riding b driving c taking
2 There are a lot of cars in London. It’s dirty! 5 The bus driver has a different route
There cars in London. into the centre because there is too much traffic.
3 I have very little free time. I need more! a played b done c taken
I free time. 6 Have you ever a flight?
4 There are only a small number of airports in my a missed b lost c forgotten
country. This is a bad thing! 7 Can you me up at the station?
There airports in my country! a lift b make c pick
5 We have a lot of tourists in my city. I think it’s bad. 8 I the flight on the internet.
We tourists in my city. a booked b took c went
6 Politicians get a lot of money in my country. It’s bad. /8
Politicians money. 7 Match 1–4 to a–d, and 5–8 to e–h, to make
/6 compound nouns.
4 Complete the sentences about the UK with the 1 bus a bike
superlative form of the adjective in brackets. 2 mountain b restaurant
1 The River Severn is (long) river 3 street c performer
in England. 4 seafood d stop
2 Ben Nevis is (high) mountain
in Scotland. 5 swimming e band
3 The Giant’s Causeway is 6 live f driver
(famous) tourist place in Northern Ireland. 7 bike g pool
8 taxi h lane
/8 / 50
© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 201

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 201 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 11 TEST VOCABULARY

5 Match the sentence beginnings (1–6) to the
GRAMMAR endings (a–f).
1 Do you have a your order, please?
1 Match the statements (1–5) to the responses (a–e). 2 Are you ready b a table for four?
1 I’m not going to eat there again. a Really? I do. 3 I’ll have c any vegetables?
2 I don’t eat a lot of chocolate. b Oh, I don’t. 4 Can I take d include service?
3 We’d prefer to cook at home. c Really? I am. 5 Would you like e to order?
4 I’ve never tried Georgian wine. d Oh, I wouldn’t. 6 Does the bill f the fish, please.
5 I love milk shakes. e Really? I have. /6
/5 6 Choose the correct answer.
2 Complete the responses with one word. 1 Which do you pay?
1 ‘I hate loud restaurants.’ ‘Me .’ a the order b the bill c the table
2 ‘I don’t go out much.’ ‘Oh, we .’ 2 Which do you eat last?
3 ‘Penny can’t eat nuts.’ ‘Me .’ a the starters b the dessert c the main course
4 ‘We’re spending the ‘Really? I not.’ 3 Which is a main course?
weekend at home.’ a chicken b soup c ice cream
5 ‘I wasn’t happy with ‘Oh, we .’ 4 Who works in a restaurant?
the menu.’ a a customer b a waiter c a meal
/5 5 How do you say that you have eaten enough?
3 Choose the correct option. a I’m well-cooked b I’m busy c I’m full
1 I haven’t been to much / many restaurants. /5
2 There are a lot of / much people in here this evening. 7 Write the words in the box in the correct list.
3 Have you eaten in some / any really expensive
restaurants? apples coffee cheese oranges butter
4 It costs a lot of / many money to eat in this restaurant. potatoes onions cream beef lamb
5 Some / Any very good cooks have worked here. chicken kiwis spinach tea
6 I haven’t watched much / many cookery programmes.
/6 1 dairy products:
4 Complete the sentences with some, any, much or 2 vegetables:
many. 3 fruit:
1 I left my wallet at home today. I haven’t got 4 meat:
money with me. 5 drinks:
2 Hurry up. We haven’t got time. The flight /7
leaves in forty minutes. 8 Complete the text with either the adjectives from the
3 I’m going to the post office to get stamps. box or their negative form.
I need four, I think.
4 I can’t speak French, but I’m getting healthy forgettable happy friendly
better. I’ve had ten lessons! popular usual
5 I haven’t got my camera, so I can’t take
photographs. When she was a child, Amy Lord was very 1
6 There weren’t chairs in the hall so at school. She cried a lot. She was 2
everybody had to stand up. with the other children. They didn’t really like her and
7 Yesterday evening I went to a restaurant with sometimes they were very 3 and
friends of mine. didn’t talk to her. So Amy spent a lot of time on her own
8 ‘Would you like biscuits?’ ‘No, thank you. – cooking. It was an 4 hobby for a
I’m not hungry now.’ young girl. Many children like eating 5 ,
9 There aren’t shops open today. The sweet food like chocolate and sweets, but not many want
supermarket is open and the bakery, but the other to cook difficult French dishes. Amy became a very good
shops are closed. cook! Today, she is one of the best cooks in the world, and
10 I didn’t make money last weekend. About prepares fantastic, 6 dishes in one
twenty euros, that’s all. of the most famous restaurants in Paris.
/ 10 /6 / 50

202 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 202 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 12 TEST 6 Complete the sentences with the correct adjective to

describe feelings.
1 I don’t know what you said to Jo but she’s very
GRAMMAR u . She’s crying.
2 Ted was a by the poor service
1 Correct the mistakes in the sentences. and decided to complain to the manager.
1 I think you should to relax. 3 Mum seems so h today. She’s
2 What we should do this evening? smiling and joking with everybody.
3 You should no work at the weekend. 4 The kids are e about the trip.
4 He shoulds help other people. They’re really looking forward to it.
5 Maybe you should going jogging. 5 I’m lying on the beach in the sun, with nothing to
6 He doesn’t should wear that hat. worry about. I’m feeling very r .
/6 6 I have an important exam tomorrow. I’m so
2 Put the words in order to make sentences. s . What if I fail?
1 outside / own / You / on / shouldn’t / your / go / . 7 My dad was very a when I
2 need / I / take / just / aspirin / to / an / . crashed his car. He shouted and shouted!
3 just / cut / a / It’s / small / . 8 I’ve worked hard all day, I’m very t
4 you / Maybe / holiday / a / take / should / . and I want to go to bed.
5 something / fine / I’ll / eat / to / be / after / I / have / . /8
6 shouldn’t / today / work / You / to / go / . 7 Complete the headlines with the correct form of the
/6 verbs in the box.
3 Choose the correct word to complete the sentences.
1 After / Because lunch, we went for a walk. damage celebrate open kill hit build
2 We had a lovely meal so / because we all felt full and protest cause
happy afterwards.
3 Susie was angry so / because the service in the 1 PEOPLE FREEDOM
restaurant was really bad. In a big party, thousands of people went into the
4 After / So the restaurant closed, the waiters ate their streets.
dinner. 2 STORM CITY CENTRE
5 We walked home after / so the match finished. Many buildings fell down after a violent storm.
6 We decided to go to the beach because / so the 3 TWO PEOPLE IN ACCIDENT
weather was really nice. A man and a woman are dead after an accident.
/6 4 PRIME MINISTER NEW UNIVERSITY
4 Complete the text with because, so or after. The prime minister made a speech as students arrived
Last Sunday was a long day. My mum came back from for their first day.
holiday, 1 I went to the airport to pick her 5 LOCAL GOVERNMENT NEW SPORTS
up. Unfortunately her flight was delayed 2 CENTRE
the weather was bad, 3 I had to wait at the The government is starting work on a new centre for
airport. 4 I had something to eat, I went to sports in Hutton.
the bookshop and looked at the books. I wanted to buy a 6 HEAVY TRAFFIC DELAYS
book for my sister 5 she likes reading, but Many people going on holiday spent hours on the
I didn’t find a good one. 6 an hour or two, motorway today.
my mum arrived and we drove home. When we got home, 7 FOOTBALLER WITH COINS
I put my hand in my pocket for my keys. They weren’t Bobby Clark of Melchester United was hurt when a fan
there. I had to drive back to the airport 7 threw coins.
they were in the bookshop. I got home and went to bed at 8 STUDENTS AGAINST COST OF RENT
midnight 8 a very long day. Thousands of students are complaining about the
/8 price of accommodation.
/8 / 50
VOCABULARY
5 Match the problems (1–8) to the advice (a–h).
1 a headache a put a plaster on it
2 a cut b eat a sandwich
3 a cough c take antibiotics
4 an infection d take an aspirin
5 a burn e stop smoking
6 feeling hungry f don’t move it and wait for
7 feeling tired the ambulance
8 a broken leg g sit down and relax
h put some ice on it
/8

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 203

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 203 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 13 TEST VOCABULARY

5 Circle the one option that is not correct for each
GRAMMAR sentence.
1 There was a storm yesterday.
1 Put the words in order to make sentences. a It was cold and wet.
1 later / might / It / today / rain / . b It was very windy.
2 are / definitely / to / We / going / play / . c It was dry and sunny.
3 She / possibly / win / the / might / award / . 2 Today, it’s –5°C.
4 might / The / over / come / later / students / not / . a It’s warm and windy.
5 It / going / be / day / not / nice / is / a / to / . b There’s snow and ice.
/5 c It’s cold and dry.
2 Choose the correct option. 3 It’s going to rain tomorrow.
1 The company might the fine. a We’ll get wet.
a to pay b It might be cold.
b not pay c It won’t be cloudy.
c definitely pay 4 There’s ice on the ground.
2 The government is going get jobs. a It’s a cold day.
a help people b It’s a windy day.
b to help people c It’s a warm day.
c helping people 5 It’s over 30°C.
3 The factory might . a There’s snow.
a possibly close b It’s sunny.
b definitely close c It’s too hot.
c perhaps to close /5
4 The office manager is definitely . 6 Complete the sentences with words in the box.
a going to leave
b might leave flat surrounded pollution farm violent forest
c may to leave
5 There may a lot of changes. 1 All the chemicals in the river are causing a lot of
a be b to be c going to be .
/5 2 The land is . There are no hills
3 Complete the present perfect sentences with two or and you can see for miles.
three words. 3 We walked through a full of
1 How long (you / work) in the tall trees.
factory? 4 On our , we have a lot of cows
2 Grant (know) Jenny for and sheep.
twenty years. 5 gangs in the city centre have
3 Jane (feel) ill all day. caused a lot of damage.
4 How long (Thomas / live) 6 Our house in the country is by
with you? fields.
5 I (have) a bad headache all day. /6
6 How long (you / be) a farmer? 7 Write the words in the box in the correct list.
7 We (not make) any money
this year. cow dog horse fox pig cat sheep
8 James (not play) in the football
team for weeks. 1 wild animals:
/8 rat
4 Complete the text with the correct present perfect 2 farm animals
simple or past simple form.
My family 1 (own) this farm in
the Lake District for more than eighty years, and 3 pets:
I2 (live) here all my life.
I3 (meet) my wife when she /7
4
(move) to the village near our 8 Match the verbs (1–6) to the words in a–f to make
farm in 2010. We 5 (get) married collocations.
four years later. So, my wife 6 (not 1 make a your hand
live) on the farm for very long, but she loves it here. This 2 chase b on your legs
summer the weather 7 (be) very 3 play c a mess
wet for weeks and we 8 (work) 4 jump d disease
long hours in the fields, but it’s OK – it’s the only life 5 cause e other animals
we want. 6 bite f with your pet
/8 /6 / 50

204 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 204 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 14 TEST VOCABULARY

4 Match the adjectives (1–5 and 6–10) to the sentences
GRAMMAR (a–e and f–j).
A
1 Put the words in order to make sentences. 1 entertaining a It made me cry.
1 party / was / your / what / like / ? 2 predictable b The acting was really bad.
2 here / is / what / food / like / the / ? 3 sad c You know how it’s going to end.
3 brother / like / what / younger / your / is / ? 4 scary d I really enjoyed it.
4 what / are / new / like / students / the / ? 5 terrible e The monster made me scream.
5 is / garden / the / like / what / ?
6 was / what / meeting / like / the / ? B
/6 6 strange f I didn’t understand the film.
2 Complete the sentences with will or won’t and the 7 brilliant g It made me laugh.
correct form of the verb in brackets. 8 funny h The murderer killed a lot of
1 They are on holiday for two weeks so they 9 depressing people.
(be) here tomorrow. 10 violent i It was the best film I’ve ever seen.
2 If you eat too much, you j I felt very sad for a long time.
(probably / feel) ill. / 10
3 I don’t think she (pass) the 5 Choose the correct option.
exam. She hasn’t done the work. 1 In my country, wages are high / strong / big at the
4 Don’t stay out too late. You moment.
(probably / get) up on time tomorrow. 2 Our health service is clear / polite / efficient. It works well.
5 Go home and relax. The match 3 In a low / weak / lazy economy, it’s hard to get a job.
(start) for hours. 4 I don’t really get / take / bring on with my neighbours.
6 If the weather is good, the plane They aren’t friendly.
(leave) on time. 5 The storm will have a bad situation / loss / effect on
7 Go to bed and you (feel) the local area.
better tomorrow. I’m sure of that. 6 Nadal is hurt, and will miss / lose / fall the rest of the
8 It’s Samantha’s birthday next month. She season.
(be) eighteen. 7 My country has a warm crime / forecast / climate.
9 We (sell) any more tickets. It rains in winter but it’s never cold.
The game has started now. 8 People are friendly and closed / open / dark in my country.
10 City (probably / win) the /8
match. They are better than United. 6 Circle the one option that can’t be used to complete
/ 10 each sentence.
3 Complete the sentence so the meaning is the same as 1 Let’s work
the first two sentences. a together b each other c with our friends
1 Running a marathon? It’s easy! 2 We need
It’s easy . a insurance b treatment c efficient
2 Finding a job in the town? It’s impossible! 3 We support
It’s impossible . a together b each other c other people
3 Climbing mountains in winter? It’s dangerous! 4 There’s a lot of
It’s dangerous . a wages b crime c unemployment
4 Shopping online? It’s cheap. 5 They don’t talk
It’s cheap . a much b friendly c to us
5 Living here? It’s good. 6 I always lock
It’s good . a the door b the neighbours c my house
6 Getting a good job? It’s important. 7 I had a bad fall and injured
It’s important . a my car b myself c my arm
7 Watching TV all day? It’s boring. 8 My health insurance paid for the
It’s boring . a medicine b treatment c crime
8 Playing football on the beach? It’s fun. /8 / 50
It’s fun .
/8

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 205

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 205 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 15 TEST VOCABULARY

4 Complete the sentences with one word in each space.
GRAMMAR The first letter is given.
1 I use my t to take notes at
1 Complete the sentences using the correct form of the meetings, and sometimes to play online games.
words in brackets. 2 Can you look at my l , please?
1 I (think / go) to Spain this summer. The keyboard isn’t working.
2 We (think / buy) a new car. 3 You can use this h if you don’t
3 My wife (think / do) a yoga course. want to leave your hair wet after a shower.
4 They (think / work) abroad. 4 I left my c in the hotel room, so
5 (you / think / change) your job? I can’t take any photos!
6 I hope (you / not think / sell) your house! 5 Don’t leave the dirty plates on the table. Put them in
7 I (think / buy) the book on the Internet. the d .
8 Why (she / think / learn) a new language? 6 Oh no! I’ve dropped all this sugar on the floor! Is there
9 My friend (think / try) some traditional food from av c ?
your country. 7 Please pick up all the dirty socks and put them into the
10 What (she / think / do) this evening? w m .
/ 10 8 Please switch off your m
2 Choose the correct option. p during the film.
1 He left the room quiet / quietly because he didn’t /8
want to disturb you. 5 Choose the correct option.
2 It’s a hard / hardly job. I have to work at weekends. 1 A: My computer is so slow.
3 You need to organise your work efficient / efficiently if B: I think you need to restart / install it. If that doesn’t
you want to do everything on time. help, you’ll need to restart / install new software.
4 I think you need to buy a new computer because this 2 A: How do I save / download the software from the
one is very slow / slowly. website?
5 I did the test easy / easily. It only took me ten B: Just press this button. Then you have to open the
minutes. file to install / build it on your computer.
6 Don’t keep your medicine on the table. Put it in a 3 A: I always keep copies of important files on this
safe / safely place. software / memory stick!
7 The team has played bad / badly this year. B: That’s a good idea, but they’re very small, it’s easy
8 Put the plates in the dishwasher careful / carefully. to lose them! I keep copies online / on an email
9 It’s a difficult / difficultly problem to solve. because it’s safer.
10 Harry gives money generous / generously to charity. 4 A: What was the book you were talking about?
/ 10 B: I don’t remember. Do a link / search for ‘Book prize’.
3 Complete the second sentence with the adverb form Or I’ll email you a link / search from my computer
of the adjective in the first sentence. later.
1 Joe’s Spanish is very good. /8
Joe speaks Spanish . 6 Circle the one option (a–c) that does not collocate with
2 Penny’s a dangerous driver. the verb.
Penny drives . 1 check
3 The people here are fast workers. a emails b your heart rate c films
The people work . 2 keep
4 We were happy as we walked home. a files b documents c problems
We walked home . 3 produce
5 Simon gave bad advice to the students. a development energy c software
Simon advised the students . 4 install
6 It’s easy to write with this. a an app b a memory stick c a programme
I can write with this . 5 save
/6 a a file b a heart rate c a photo
6 restart
a a programme b a light c a computer
7 create
a a file b a website c a memory stick
8 control
a the situation b the temperature c tickets
/8 / 50

206 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 206 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 TESTS

UNIT 16 TEST VOCABULARY

5 Circle one word in each list that can refer to both male
GRAMMAR or female people.
1 a parent b wife c father
1 Complete the sentences with the past continuous. Use 2 a boyfriend b partner c husband
a pronoun and verb from the box. 3 a in-laws b brothers c daughters
4 a aunt b sister c cousin
you / not listen I / sit we / have she / wait 5 a girlfriends b relatives c sons
she / carry they / try we / not learn he / play 6 a a married couple
b a guy from work
1 Sorry I missed your call. in the c his girlfriend
garden and I didn’t hear my phone. /6
2 When the police caught the men, 6 Complete the questions with the correct word or
to climb out of a small upstairs phrase from the box.
window.
3 While the picnic, it started to approve broken up anniversary date
rain. jealous divorced asked her out pregnant
4 Why for us outside the club? married get on
5 to me. That’s why I got angry.
6 football in the garden when 1 A: How long have you been ?
you got back? B: Oh, four years now.
7 Amy hurt her back while some 2 A: When is your wedding ?
heavy boxes. B: On June 6th.
8 anything on the course so we 3 A: Why has Sally with Danny?
decided to stop going. B: Because they were arguing all the time.
/8 4 A: I saw Penny. She said Tim has
2 Complete the sentences with the past simple or past .
continuous form of the verbs in brackets. B: Really? I don’t believe it!
Sue: Hi Tom. I 1 (not see) you at 5 A: Is Julie ?
school last Monday. Was anything wrong? B: Yes, she is. She’s due to have the baby in April.
Tom: Yeah, I guess. I 2 6 A: Have Paul and Sue decided to get
(have) an accident. I 3 ?
(drive) to school on Monday morning when B: Yes, they don’t want to be married any longer.
I4 (go) off the road 7 A: Do your in-laws of you?
and 5 (hit) a tree. B: No. They didn’t want their daughter to marry me.
I6 (think) too much about 8 A: Is Adam of Claire?
my exam and I stopped concentrating. B: Yes. She has a better job than him.
Sue: Oh, no! Was it serious? 9 A: Do you well with Mark?
Tom: No, fortunately. But I 7 B: Yes. We do a lot of things together.
(feel) a bit strange after the accident so 10 A: Do you have a on Friday?
I8 (decide) to go home. B: Yes. I’m going to the cinema with Harry.
Sue: You missed an English lesson – about accidents. / 10
While you 9 (walk) home 7 Complete the sentences with the words in the box.
after your accident, we 10
(learn) how to describe an accident in English! double remain trust weeds let faded
/ 10 trouble encourage
3 Write promises using the prompts.
1 Don’t worry! I / clean the car later 1 The sofa was red, but now it has
2 It’s OK. I / not call the police . It isn’t a bright colour now.
3 We / eat out next week, I promise 2 We haven’t done any gardening for two years! The
4 Yes, I love you. I / marry you garden is full of .
/4 3 We bought the painting for £1,000 and sold it for
4 Respond to the sentences with I will or I won’t. £2,000. So, we made our money.
1 A: Remember to post the letter. 4 I’ve tried to people to join our
B: OK. club by telling them how much fun it is.
2 A: Don’t make a mess in the living room. 5 Hold on to the ladder. Don’t
B: OK. go! I don’t want to fall off.
3 A: You mustn’t tell Jo about the party. 6 Andrew has decided to with
B: Don’t worry. the company. He isn’t going to leave.
4 A: You need to call your grandmother. 7 We were in a small boat at sea and the storm was
B: OK. getting worse. We were in .
/4 8 I don’t Pete. He isn’t honest.
/8 / 50
© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 207

65752_em_test_pp192-207.indd 207 08/12/18 11:52 AM

 REVIEW TEST 1 UNITS 1–6 4 Choose the correct verb from the box to complete
each sentence.

Grammar put get go spend cost

have listen stay close last
1 Complete the sentences with one word.
1 Where he from? 1 What time do you usually lunch?
2 you have a lot of free time these days? 2 Do you up before eight in the morning?
3 How students are there in your class? 3 Do you want to to some music?
4 There isn’t food in the fridge. It’s empty. 4 Please the window. It’s cold in here.
5 Polly left bag on the bus. It’s the only 5 I often swimming in the morning
one she has! before work.
6 What time you get home last night? 6 Wait a minute. I need to on my shoes
7 Jo and Sue’s house is over there, the before I do any gardening.
right, next to the church. 7 One day, I want to in a beautiful hotel in
8 My sister waiting outside at the Venice.
moment. 8 Did you a lot of money in London? It’s
9 The room is attractive than other rooms expensive!
in the hotel. 9 How long does your course ?
10 I’m not doing very on the course. I got a 10 How much did your course ?
D for my last essay. / 10
/ 10
2 Complete the text with the correct form of the verbs Listening
in brackets.
My life now 5 Listen to the interview and choose the correct
When I 1 (be) a teenager, I answers. Each question has only one correct answer.
2
(leave) my country and 3 1 What do we find out about Amanda Jackson?
(come) to England. I 4 (not know) what a She owns a clothes shop.
I wanted 5 (do) with my life. Now, I b She’s an assistant in the clothes department of
6
(do) an Engineering course at university. I a shop.
7
(not have) much free time, but that’s OK. c She works in a very large camera shop.
I love 8 (study), and I hate 9 2 Where in the shop was the customer when Miss
(have) nothing to do. I can Jackson saw her?
10
(be) lazy when I’m older! a near the window
/ 10 b near the escalator
c near the coats and jackets
Vocabulary 3 What did the customer look like?
a She was very tall with long hair.
3 Complete each list with one word from the box. b She was short with fair hair.
c She was tall with short hair.
bank package escalator waiter quiet 4 What did Miss Jackson see when she went outside?
kitchen second train afternoon sink a a tall man in a red car
b a small man in an old car
1 nurse artist c an old man in a small car
2 morning evening 5 What did Miss Jackson do when the customer left
3 bookshop post office in a car?
4 letter stamp a She followed her in her car.
5 safe boring b She phoned the police.
6 bedroom bathroom c She told her shop manager about the crime.
7 third twelfth / 15
8 car boat
9 bath toilet Speaking
10 lift entrance
/ 10 6 Talk about one of the following topics.
• a memorable holiday
• a course you are studying now
• your hobby
/ 15

208 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 208 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

Reading Writing
7a Read the text and choose the best title. 8 Write one of the following.
a The world’s largest supermarket • a description of a famous shop in your country
b A history of British supermarkets • an entry on a social media site describing your house
c The life of Jack Cohen or flat
d Tesco – a British success story • three messages – one to a friend who has a birthday,
/3 one to a friend in hospital, and one to a friend who has
7b Read the text again and decide if these sentences are his driving test tomorrow
true (T) or false (F). / 15 / 100
1 Tesco is bigger than any other supermarket company
in the world. T/F
2 There are more Tesco supermarkets in Britain and
Ireland than there are in Asia. T/F
3 Before he started Tesco, Jack Cohen worked in a
market. T/F
4 T. E. Stockwell had the idea of calling the supermarket
Tesco. T/F
5 City centre Tescos only sell food products. T/F
6 There are banks inside Tesco Extra Stores. T/F
/ 12
Title: ______

Tesco has more supermarkets than any other company in

the UK, and there aren’t many bigger supermarket chains
in the world. There are more than three thousand Tescos
in towns all over Britain and Ireland, and there are three
thousand more in countries in other parts of the world,
including China and Japan. In Malaysia and Thailand, no
other supermarket chain is bigger than Tesco.
Tesco started in 1919 when a young man called Jack
Cohen started selling food from a market stall in the
East End of London. On his first day, Mr Cohen made a
profit of £1 from sales of £4. Five years later, in 1924, Jack
bought a lot of tea from a man called T. E. Stockwell. Jack
decided to combine the initials of Mr Stockwell, T, E and
S, and the first two letters of his own surname, C and O,
to make a name for his stall – TESCO. And that was the
name Jack used when, in 1929, he opened his first Tesco
supermarket in North London.
Today, Tesco runs many different types of shops. Some
of the smaller shops are in city centres, and they sell
basic things that everybody needs, like bread and milk,
chocolate bars and toilet paper, sandwiches and sweets.
Outside the city centres, you can often see huge Tesco
superstores or the even bigger hypermarkets called
Tesco Extra Stores. These sell everything from TVs and
mobile phones to exotic fruit and unusual types of
meat. Tesco also has online services. For example, you
can bank online with Tesco. It really is one of the most
important companies in Britain, and it employs hundreds
of thousands of people, and makes millions of pounds in
profit every year.

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 209

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 209 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

REVIEW TEST 2 UNITS 7–12 4 Choose the correct option.

1 My dad often funny jokes.
a tells b says c speaks
Grammar 2 Have you the washing?
a made b done c been
1 Complete each sentence with an auxiliary or modal 3 We for a walk in the country yesterday.
auxiliary verb. Use negative forms if necessary. a got b had c went
1 you like to go for a walk later today? 4 Arthur an important meeting.
2 It’s Sunday, so we have to work today. a goes b has c does
3 ‘Are you feeling tired?’ ‘Yes, I .’ 5 When did you married?
4 ‘Did you bring the map?’ ‘No, I . I’m sorry.’ a have b go c get
5 ‘I’ve never played American football. 6 The factory has closed and a lot of people have
you?’ ‘Yeah! I was born in the States.’ their jobs.
6 ‘I haven’t been to that new nightclub.’ ‘Really? Well, a lost b missed c thrown
you . You’d really like it.’ 7 I fell off the ladder and myself.
7 Louise lost her passport. She’s looked a broke b hurt c forgot
everywhere for it. 8 You need to the 22 bus to the centre.
8 ‘I don’t like gardening.’ ‘Really? We . We a go b get c make
spend hours in the garden every weekend.’ 9 My legs feel a bit this morning because
9 ‘You don’t look well. Are you OK?’ ‘No, I . I walked 15 kilometres yesterday.
I don’t feel well at all. a sick b burnt c stiff
10 ‘I’ve never seen the film Titanic.’ ‘Oh, I . 10 STUDENTS AGAINST GOVERNMENT
But it was a bit too romantic for me. CUTS
/ 10 a CAUSE b PROTEST c DAMAGE
2 Complete the text with one word in each space. / 10
I’m seventy now, I’ve retired and I don’t 1
to work anymore. I have lots of free time, 2 Listening
I’m 3 to go on a round the world trip. I’d
4
to see the Taj Mahal in India and the Great 5a Listen to the news and put the stories in the order
Wall of China before I die. Why? Well, I really want to they are mentioned. The first has been done for you.
visit them 5 I think they are two of the a MAJOR SHOP SHUTS
6
amazing places in the world. I’m not b NEW ROAD PLANNED 1
7
to take 8 luggage with me c CHANGING TIMES FOR FATHERS
on my trip – just a small, light backpack. I have some d CLEVER FOOD?
money, but I certainly haven’t got 9 money /3
to stay in expensive hotels, and, in my opinion, tourists 5b Listen again and choose the correct answers. Each
spend 10 much time in international hotels question has only one correct answer.
and never really see the real places they are visiting. 1 In the first story, why are some people angry about the
/ 10 motorway?
a The number of cars will increase.
Vocabulary b People will lose their jobs.
c Travellers will have to pay more.
3 Decide which word does not go in each group. 2 What can’t you buy at Millers?
1 words to describe male relatives a sofas and chairs
a aunts b uncles c sons b books and magazines
2 words to describe personality c hats and coats
a stressful b quiet c strict 3 How did scientists find out how good chocolate was
3 words to describe experiences for your intelligence?
a embarrassing b annoyed c scary a They did tests on students in England.
4 words to describe train tickets b They used students at American universities
a single b delay c first-class to test it.
5 words to describe food in a restaurant c They did scientific tests on themselves.
a the bill b the dessert c the starter 4 Why does Rosie say that more dads are spending time
6 words to describe dairy products looking after their children?
a cream b nuts c butter a They have more free time after work.
7 words to describe meat b They sometimes don’t want to work.
a pork b garlic c steak c Sometimes their partners have better-paid jobs.
8 words which have a negative form using un- / 12
a healthy b fair c difficult
9 words to describe health problems
a a cold b a head c a cough
10 words to describe positive feelings
a bored b excited c relaxed
/ 10
210 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 210 10/12/18 12:32 PM

 TESTS

Speaking
Writing
6 Talk about one of the following topics.
• your family 8 Write one of the following.
• a place you have been to • a review of a restaurant you have visited
• your plans for the weekend • a description of places to visit in your city
/ 15 • an email to a friend suggesting a place to go to and a
time and a place to meet
Reading / 15 / 100

7a Read the text. Which paragraph (A–C) gives the

answer to each question (1–3).
1 Why is the world’s largest family so large?
2 How many people are there in the world’s biggest
family?
3 Where does the world’s largest family live?
/3
7b Read the text again and decide if these sentences are
true (T) or false (F).
1 Some of the family have left home. T/F
2 Men and women in the family do the same jobs
about the house. T/F
3 Ziona is older than all the other people in
his family. T/F
4 Ziona might get married again one day. T/F
5 Many of Ziona’s wives didn’t have much
money when they got married. T/F
6 Ziona makes all the important decisions
in the family. T/F
/ 12
The world’s largest family
A
In the mountains of northern India near Bangladesh,
there is a very unusual family. They all live together in the
same house, and they spend a lot of time together. Every
day, the men in the family look after their animals and
the food they are growing, but they always return home
for meals. The women do the cooking and cleaning. And
there is a lot of cooking! Why? Well, this is the world’s
largest family. Their home has four floors and a hundred
rooms, but it is very crowded!
B
Ziona is in his seventies, and he is the head of the world’s
biggest family. He got married to his first wife Zathiangi
when he was seventeen and she was twenty, but he
didn’t stop there. Amazingly, today, he has thirty-nine
wives and more children and grandchildren than any
other person in the world, and he says that he doesn’t
want to stop getting married or having kids! One of
his sons told us that Ziona married most of his wives
because they were poor, and he wanted to be kind and
to help them. That’s why the family has got larger and
larger. In the family’s religion, a man can marry any
woman he wants to.
C
In the house, everybody looks after Ziona, but it seems
that the women make most of the decisions. To make
sure there is enough food for the family each day, the
oldest wife, Zathiangi, has to organise all the other
mothers to prepare over thirty chickens for dinner. There
are ninety-four people to feed in the family, including
Ziona and all his wives, children and grandchildren. It
can’t be easy to remember all the names!

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 211

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 211 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

REVIEW TEST 3 UNITS 13–16 4 Choose the correct option.

1 The film was boring and . At the end, the
two characters fell in love. I knew that from the start!
Grammar a predictable b entertaining c strange
2 The economy is quite at the moment.
1 Complete the dialogues with one word. There aren’t many jobs.
1 ‘How long have you married?’ ‘Oh, two a easy b weak c efficient
years.’ 3 that button on the keyboard and you
2 ‘ you walking home when you had the will see the photos.
accident?’ ‘No, I wasn’t.’ a Turn b Press c Pull
3 ‘Are you thinking going away for 4 Where does the battery ? I can’t find an
summer?’ ‘No, we’re staying at home this year.’ opening.
4 ‘How can Jo play the guitar?’ ‘Brilliantly! a make b go c do
She plays professionally.’ 5 You should visit the company’s new . It
5 ‘I don’t think she win.’ ‘Me neither.’ looks really good.
6 ‘Where you living this time last year?’ ‘In a file b link c website
Portugal.’ 6 I’ve all my photos on a memory stick.
7 ‘Don’t forget to bring a coat.’ ‘OK. I .’ a searched b saved c written
8 ‘Do you think it’s to snow later?’ ‘Oh, 7 I can’t these problems without your
definitely, yes.’ help.
9 ‘Have you waited long?’ ‘Yes! I’ve been here a solve b control c check
an hour!’ 8 Solar panels a lot of electricity and we
10 ‘Do you speak Arabic?’ ‘Yes, but not well.’ can use that for light and heat.
/ 10 a take b produce c develop
2 Complete the text with the correct form of the words 9 I a date with Tom on Friday. We’re going
in brackets. to the cinema.
For readers who 1 (think) of 2 a have b do c go
(visit) Shetland – a group of islands north of Scotland – 10 Jo and Andy have divorced. They don’t
here’s some useful advice. Firstly, the people are very love each other anymore.
nice and friendly and it’s easy 3 (talk) to a done b got c made
people there. Of course, it’s important 4 11 The story was so . I felt sad and wanted
(remember) that Shetland is more than 170 kilometres to cry at the end.
from mainland Scotland, so you probably 5 a terrible b violent c depressing
(not find) a lot of designer products on sale in the shops! 12 Adam broke with his girlfriend because
People there do a lot of shopping online. Shetlanders they weren’t getting on.
eat very 6 (healthy) and you can buy a a at b up c down
lot of fresh fish, meat and vegetables. People work / 12
7
(hard) but enjoy their free time, and there
are lots of festivals. When I 8 (grow) up there Listening
in the 1990s, my favourite festival was Up Helly Aa. Every
January, we celebrated the festival by burning a big ship! 5 Listen to the interview and choose the correct
I9 (live) in Glasgow for four years now, but I answers. Each question has only one correct answer.
still love going back to Shetland. You should go, too. You 1 Where did the two journalists watch Living in the City?
10
(have) a great time, I promise. a In Paris
/ 10 b In New York
c In London
Vocabulary d In two different cities
2 At the start of the musical, what do we find out about
3 Complete each list with one word from the box. Casey?
a She dreams of being in New York.
screen sheep married cloudy b She wants to see London.
hill dishwasher partner sunny c She comes from New York.
d She’s never been to Hollywood.
1 rain, wet, 3 What happens to Casey in the musical?
2 field, forest, a She gets married to a Frenchman.
3 plug, keyboard, b She gets better at singing.
4 hot, dry, c She gets better at French.
5 cow, pig, d She becomes rich and famous.
6 vacuum cleaner, hairdryer, 4 What does Hanne think about the musical?
7 husband, boyfriend, a It was predictable.
8 wedding, anniversary, b It was really funny.
/8 c The story was quite interesting.
d It wasn’t very romantic.

212 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 212 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

5 What do both Hanne and Tom agree on? C

a They liked the acting. In Mawsynram, in the west of India, there are a small
b They enjoyed some of the songs. number of villages that are famous for their weather.
c They didn’t like the acting. 3
That’s because the roads are often under
d The ending was unpredictable. water. People from the villages carry extremely large
/ 15 umbrellas called ‘knups’ which are big enough to cover
their bodies. No other people on earth get this much rain.
Speaking D
Local people can’t remember the last time it was raining
6 Talk about one of the following topics. in Death Valley, in California in the USA. Usually, there are
• your relationship with a relative you are close to only about two centimetres of the wet stuff a year, less
• if you prefer to live in the city or the country, and why than any other place in the world. 4 When
• your mobile phone and what you use it for I arrived there in July, it was so hot it was impossible to
/ 15 get out of the air-conditioned car.
E
Reading Russia has a reputation for icy cold weather, but, because
the country is so large, there are places in the far south
7a Read the text and match the correct titles to the that are warmer than the Mediterranean in summer.
paragraphs (A–E). There are two titles you don’t need. 5
Another interesting place is Petropavlovsk-
1 The world’s warmest place Kamchatsky, a city on the Kamchatka peninsula where it
2 A country that can be very cold, very hot or very wet rains all the time. It is famous for being the wettest place
3 The world’s windiest city in the country.
4 The world’s wettest place / 10
5 The world’s driest place
6 The world’s sunniest place in summer Writing
7 The world’s coldest place in winter
/5 8 Write one of the following.
7b Read the text again and put these sentences in the • an email to a friend giving your news
correct place (1–5). • a description of your favourite photo
a Of course, you won’t really get a chance to do any • a review of a film, play or book
sunbathing in this land of snow and ice. / 15 / 100
b But it is the heat that surprises visitors.
c They damage buildings and are sometimes very
dangerous.
d The city of Sochi is popular with tourists for this
reason.
e Always unbelievably warm, and surrounded by forest,
the area is sometimes difficult to get to.

Extreme Places
A
Many of the world’s cities are on the coast. In winter,
when it’s cold, icy rain and big storms arrive from the
sea, and they cause a lot of problems. 1
Wellington, in New Zealand, has more storms than any
other city in the world – storms that blow people from
their feet and throw trees into the air. Every day, even
in summer when it’s very hot and sunny, people find
it difficult to walk along the street, and impossible to
control their umbrellas!
B
When we think of the Arctic, we think of warm clothing
and an incredibly cold, snowy land of empty spaces. But,
in May and June, when the days never end, and the sky
is always blue, it is probably the best place in the world
for sunshine. 2 It’s usually around –10°C,
and on a really windy day it’s not easy to stop your towel
blowing away.

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 213

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 213 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

MID-YEAR TEST UNITS 1–9 Vocabulary

4 Complete the sentence with one word. The first letter
Grammar is given.
1 Donald is from North America, but his wife Alejandra
1 Choose the correct option. is from S America.
1 Where work? 2 My sister’s a nurse and works in the h in
a do you b are you c you are the centre.
2 I want early tomorrow morning. 3 My home town feels very s . There isn’t
a leave b to leave c leaving any crime or violence.
3 my homework at the weekend. 4 I went to the c to buy some aspirin and
a Always I do b I do always c I always do toothpaste.
4 I don’t have money on me. Sorry. 5 Jerry and Sue are sitting on the s in the
a more b much c many living room.
5 The students haven’t done homework. 6 The menswear department is on the g
a they b them c their floor.
6 Harry didn’t tennis yesterday. 7 We took the e to the first floor of the
a play b plays c played department store.
7 Jerry work on Sundays. 8 Jack is a l student. He lies in bed all day
a hasn’t to b doesn’t have to c isn’t have to and does no work.
8 Have you ever your mum’s birthday? 9 My mum’s brother, my u , is called Tony.
a forget b forgot c forgotten 10 One day, I’d like to s my own business.
/8 11 Jim fell off his bike and h himself.
2 Complete the sentences with one word. 12 It was really e when I fell down the steps
1 aren’t any interesting shops in my in front of my boss.
home town. / 12
2 We hardly see Rachel these days. 5 Choose the correct verb to complete each group of
3 Do you have brothers or sisters? collocations.
4 I use your mobile phone? I need to call
my mum. go stay wash get open do
5 you go away last weekend? turn listen win make move learn
6 How much are shoes over there at the
back of the shop window? 1 married / a degree / divorced
7 The meeting wasn’t long. 2 your homework / the washing / some
8 The film was funnier the book. shopping
9 Amy didn’t like the restaurant much, but I 3 to bed / for a walk / home
. 4 to the radio / and write what you hear / to
10 you like to go for a coffee? the words
/ 10 5 the window / your book / the door
3 Complete the text with the correct form of the words 6 on the air conditioning / up the radio / off
in brackets. the gas
My brother 1 (usually / live) in a small 7 your clothes / the dog / your hair
flat in Birmingham, but, right now, he 2 8 with friends / in a hotel / at home
(stay) in a really expensive hotel in Los Angeles. Why? 9 the game / the lottery / $1 million
Well, he 3 (make) a film – in Hollywood! 10 to ride a bike / Arabic / how to do
He looks like the famous film star Gerard Butler, so something
he is Mr Butler’s ‘double’ in a new adventure film. 11 house / to the country / to a new
Actually, he’s 4 (tall) than Mr Butler, apartment
but his eyes, nose and face look the same. He’s very 12 a mess / lunch / me feel good
excited about the experience. He 5 (do) / 12
some acting when he was at university, but he
6
(never / be) in a film before. Of course, he would like
7
(become) a film star one day. In the
future, when he’s back in England, he’s going
8 (take) acting lessons.
/8

214 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 214 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

Listening 4 What do we find out about Cook’s tours in the 1860s?

a They only went to European countries.
6a Listen to a conversation between two students b The first tour went to Switzerland.
and choose the correct answers. c They were cheaper than other tours.
1 Who has to obey more rules? a Mike b Paula d They went to Asia, Europe and North America.
2 Who has to do more housework? a Mike b Paula 5 What did Thomas Cook do in the 1870s?
/2 a He stopped organising tours.
6b Listen again and choose the correct answers. Each b He lost a lot of money.
question has only one correct answer. c He started taking more holidays himself.
1 What does Paula say about her course at university? d He did more than just plan holidays.
a She thinks the course is boring. / 15
b The exams are really difficult. The first holidays
c There are a lot of essays to write. In 1841, an Englishman called Thomas Cook had a really
d She did badly in the exams. good idea. He asked the Midland Counties Railway to
2 Where does Paula live? help him to organise a trip for a group of five hundred
a in an apartment people. Everybody on the trip paid one shilling (five pence
b at the university in modern British money) and the Railway Company
c with one other girl gave them a ticket on the same train. It was good for
d in the city the Railway Company because there were a lot of people
3 What does Paula have to do? on the train, and good for Mr Cook because some of the
a wash her clothes on Sundays money from the tickets went to him. And the travellers
b stay at home in the evening were happy, too. Their tickets weren’t cheaper than the
c wash the dishes before going out usual price, but they got free food on the journey and
d tidy all the bedrooms they didn’t have to worry about where to go and when,
4 What can’t Mike do at the university? because Mr Cook was there to help them. They only
a cook his own food travelled twenty kilometres, and came home on the same
b play his guitar in the music room day, but their trip was historical. It was the first holiday
c invite friends to stay organised by a travel company, and the start of the
d eat dinner at the university holiday industry.
/8 Next, Thomas Cook started to plan sightseeing holidays
to London and Edinburgh in spring and autumn, and
Speaking trips to the British seaside in the summer. Railways were
new, and a lot of people were excited about travelling
7 Talk about one of the following topics. for the first time, but they didn’t know where to stay or
• your favourite store or shopping mall where to eat, so Cook’s holidays became more and more
• an important teacher in your life popular. It was a lot more expensive to travel with Cook’s
• what you’re going to do in the summer company, but it was also safer and more relaxing for
/ 10 these early travellers. In the 1860s, Cook started ‘grand
tours’ to Europe. More people had money to spend on
Reading holidays and they wanted to see the world. First, Cook
took a group of people to Paris, then he organised trips
8 Read the text and choose the correct answer. to Switzerland and Italy. Later, there were even tours to
1 What do we find out about the first organised holiday Egypt and the United States.
by train? In 1872, Cook started working with his son. He didn’t
a the food people ate on the trip want to go on trips himself now. He was over sixty!
b the number of people on the trip He was more interested in planning trips to exciting
c the destination of the trip places, and selling things people needed for travelling –
d the day the trip started bags and suitcases, walking shoes and guide books, for
2 Why were the travellers on the first organised holiday example. He and his son opened a shop in London, and
by train happy? became rich and famous.
a It was only a short trip.
b It wasn’t stressful because they didn’t have to plan Writing
things.
c It was not an expensive trip. 8 Write one of the following.
d It wasn’t crowded because they were the only • an email to a penfriend saying what you did on your
travellers. holidays
3 What type of trips did Cook organise in the summer in • a description of your house or apartment
the 1840s? • The life of a famous person. Write an essay, describing
a trips to London or Edinburgh the life of a famous person you know about.
b trips to places near the sea / 15 / 100
c trips to places in different countries
d sightseeing holidays

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 215

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 215 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

END-OF-YEAR TEST 1 UNITS 1–16 Vocabulary

4 Choose the correct word.
Grammar 1 Dave asked me out / on / at. We’re going to the cinema
on Friday.
1 Complete the text with the correct form of the verb or 2 Patrick is a strict / reliable / quiet friend. He is always
adjective in brackets. there to help me when I need him.
I1 (work) in Chicago ten years ago when I 3 I have to go. I have to pick for / down / up my son from
2
(decide) to try ten-pin bowling. At first, I school.
3
(not understand) the rules, and I wasn’t 4 Can you put / set / make the table for dinner, please?
very good, but it was great fun. These days, ten-pin 5 My parents are away so we’re looking from / after /
bowling is my life! I 4 (become) a big fan of past the dog for the weekend.
the sport, and I 5 (go) bowling every week. 6 Foxes can cause / make / provide a lot of damage.
I6 (improve) very 7 (slow), 7 Do you know much after / about / for computers?
and I think I’m a lot 8 (good) than I was 8 I’ve developed / controlled / deleted all my files by
ten years ago. In the United States, a lot of people love accident. They’re all gone!
9
(go) bowling and at weekends, it isn’t /8
unusual 10 (see) hundreds of people taking 5 Decide which word does not go in each group.
part in a competition. It’s quite difficult 11 1 a receptionist b studio c civil servant d nurse
(win) a competition, but they are good fun. If you want 2 a twelfth b first c twenty-one d fortieth
12
(try) the sport, you should 13 3 a wife b aunt c brother d daughter
(call) your local ten-pin bowling club. Over 100 million 4 a garlic b juice c spinach d carrots
people in the world enjoy 14 (do) the sport. 5 a ice b rain c storm d field
In the future, I think ten-pin bowling 15 (be) 6 a infection b headache c antibiotics d cough
an Olympic sport. /6
/ 15 6 Complete the sentences with the correct verb from
2 Choose the correct option. the box.
1 We arrived at three o’clock the
afternoon. lost paid made set went broke missed hurt
a in b at c on
2 How long there? 1 Last night, I my alarm clock for 7 a.m.
a you have been before I went to sleep.
b have been you 2 Harry dinner last weekend. He’s a good
c have you been cook!
3 I open the window, please? 3 On our first day in Rome, we sightseeing.
a Can b Will c Should It was great.
4 Sam hasn’t done homework. 4 Jack himself when he fell out of the tree.
a he b his c him He cut his arm and his back was stiff.
5 There are too people in the lift. 5 Tom and Jill up last weekend. I’m
a many b much c enough surprised. I thought they loved each other.
6 I’m thinking going to Greece for my 6 Last weekend, we the football match 3–0.
holidays. It was very disappointing.
a to b for c of 7 Unfortunately, we the last bus and had
7 This is the amazing day of my life. to walk home.
a most b much c more 8 I haven’t the bill. How much is it?
8 ‘I didn’t like the film.’ ‘Me .’ /8
a too b also c neither 7 Choose the correct option.
9 The pop concert was free, we didn’t 1 The security was standing near the main
have to buy a ticket. entrance of the shop.
a so b because c after a servant b guard c maker
10 We would like tennis tomorrow. 2 Claire goes to one of the most
a play b playing c to play universities in the state.
/ 10 a popular b patient c confident
3 Complete the questions with the correct form of the 3 It was the worst day of my life! It was so !
verbs in brackets. a relaxing b stressful c exciting
1 What (she / do) over there? I can’t 4 I feel . I think I’ve eaten something bad.
see her. a sick b stiff c hurt
2 Why (I / should) go to that university? 5 Be careful. That animal .
3 (they / ever / visit) Rome? a chases b damages c bites
4 (they / build) the hospital in the 1920s? 6 The new programme allows you to
5 What (you / sing) when I walked into the problems. It will really help you.
room? a save b solve c keep
/5

216 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 216 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

7 When do you your homework? to the road. Drivers got out of their car for a coffee and
a do b make c set something warm to eat at the cafés. Often the food for
8 Use this towel to dry . sale was really expensive but the drivers had to pay.
a you b yourself c you up So, why did it happen? Natural disasters – snow storms
/8 or heavy rain storms, for example – have caused many
of the world’s worst traffic problems, but that wasn’t
Listening why the problem on National Highway 110 began. The
problem started because people were working on the
8 Listen to the radio programme and choose the road, and many drivers had to slow down or stop. It was
correct answers. Each question has only one correct a really busy time of day so the queue got longer and
answer. longer until nobody was moving, and, after the problem
1 What does Morag say about the word Hogmanay? started, there were some small accidents. These made
a It is hard to pronounce. the problem worse.
b It is an old English word. After the traffic problem ended, the Chinese government
c Nobody knows what it means. decided to make changes. They didn’t want to have
d It describes a summer festival. problems again in the future. They didn’t want to
2 The Hogmanay Festival lasts … stop cars travelling on the road, but they made larger
a from Christmas to New Year. vehicles go on different roads, and they stopped people
b from December 31st to January 2nd. from working on roads at very busy times. This has
c for just one day. helped a lot. Today, National Highway 110 is busier and
d longer in other countries. more crowded than ever before, but drivers haven’t
3 What does Morag say about the song? experienced the traffic problem of August 2010 again.
a She says how old it is.
b She says what it is about. 10 Read the text and choose the correct option.
c She says that people dance to it. 1 In the article about a really bad traffic problem, we
d She says they sing it outside. find out …
4 People visit their neighbours’ houses and … a how many cars were on the road.
a take food and drink with them. b that a number of roads had problems.
b sing a traditional song. c how long people were in their cars.
c stay there for the night. d how many people tried to help.
d eat their neighbours’ food. 2 The article says that cars on the National Highway …
5 In the north of Scotland, they … a didn’t move for days.
a don’t sing Auld Lang Syne. b had to leave the road.
b sometimes have fire festivals. c only moved slowly.
c stay indoors. d often broke down.
d visit people they don’t know. 3 A lot of people …
/ 10 a brought medicine for the drivers.
b sold water to drivers.
Speaking c gave warm food to drivers.
d didn’t want to help the drivers.
9 Talk about one of the following topics. 4 What caused the problem on the National Highway?
• where you keep things in your bedroom a really bad weather.
• a course you are doing b bad driving.
• the weather in different seasons in your country c road works.
/ 10 d a bad accident.
5 What changes have the Chinese government made to
Reading stop problems on National Highway 110?
a They have built another new road.
Too much traffic! b Most cars can’t use the road now.
Do you think there is too much traffic on the roads? Read c They have made the road quieter.
about one of the worst traffic problems in history, and d People can’t work on the road at busy times.
the next time you are in really bad traffic, remember that / 10
it might be worse!
In August 2010, hundreds of people spent eleven days Writing
in their cars on China’s National Highway 110. They had
to drive really slowly, and had to keep stopping all the 11 Write one of the following.
time, so they moved only one kilometre every day. Many • an email making arrangements with a friend to go
drivers had to eat, sleep and wash inside their cars. A shopping
small number of local people came out to help, bringing • a letter to a penfriend describing a festival in your
water and medicine, but there were also many other country
people who wanted to make money from the situation. • a description of a friend
Many street sellers brought food and water and sold / 10 / 100
it to drivers, and some people started small cafés next

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 217

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 217 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

END-OF-YEAR TEST 2 UNITS 1–16 3 Complete the questions with the correct form of the
verbs in brackets.
1 (you / enjoy / visit) the old castle last
Grammar weekend?
2 (Harriet / drive) when you had the
1 Write the correct form of the verb or adjective in accident?
brackets to complete the text. 3 How long (you / have) those shoes?
It’s three o’clock in the afternoon, and I 1 4 What (Karen / do)? Is she an artist?
(sit) in a café in central London. Later this afternoon, 5 (Graham / see) the film? I think it’s the
world-famous chef Roland LeNoir 2 (be) here type of film he likes.
to give a talk. I’m early because I want 3 /5
(have) the best seat in the place. LeNoir 4
(open) his first restaurant in 1996 in a small village in Vocabulary
northern France, and it was soon the 5
(popular) restaurant in the region. He 6 4 Choose the correct word.
(work) there when a well-known journalist from a food 1 The town centre is safe / patient / cheap at night. There
magazine 7 (visit). The journalist loved the aren’t any violent gangs.
food, and Lenoir soon became famous and moved to 2 We often do / go / have a coffee before school.
Paris. It isn’t easy 8 (run) a restaurant in the 3 In class, turn over / off / through your mobile phone.
capital city, but LeNoir’s restaurant was successful. In No calls, please!
2000, he 9 (produce) his first cookery book. 4 Jill likes saying / telling / looking jokes.
LeNoir 10 (write) over twenty cookery books 5 I’d like to go for / at / to a walk in the hills near here.
in his career, and I love 11 (read) them. I 6 The dog has made / done / given a mess in the garden.
12
(try) hundreds of his recipes, and if you 7 Our holiday was very embarrassing / scary / relaxing.
like cooking, you should 13 (try) them, too. We just sat on the beach all day.
This evening, he’s going 14 (talk) about 8 Do we get from / after / off at this stop or the next
French cooking in the 1920s. I 15 (look) one? I don’t want to miss it.
forward to meeting him for the first time! /8
/ 15 5 Decide which word does not go in each group.
2 Choose the correct option. 1 a Chinese b Arabic c Brazil d French
1 Could you pass me book over there? 2 a sink b shower c toilet d kitchen
a that b those c this 3 a ground floor b escalator c basement d second
2 Wesley did quite in the exam. floor
a bad b worse c badly 4 a station b platform c flight d bus stop
3 What time are we there? 5 a stomach b burnt c arm d back
a going to get 6 a screen b tablet c plug d keyboard
b go to get /6
c going to getting 6 Complete the sentences with the correct verb from
4 John didn’t the exam. the box.
a pass b to pass c passed
5 In the UK, houses are expensive in take move play empty
London than in other cities. write give feed put
a more b much c most
6 up late. 1 Could you the dishwasher, please? I did it
a We get often b Often we get c We often get last time.
7 I’m thinking a new jacket. 2 We’re going to house in the New Year. We
a of buying b to buy c for buying want a bigger place.
8 I play tennis tomorrow, but I’m not sure. 3 Do you feel ill? You should an aspirin.
a can b should c might 4 David can the guitar really well.
9 Jenny didn’t buy the dishwasher it was 5 I often emails to friends on Sunday
expensive. mornings.
a so b because c after 6 One minute. I have to on some make-up
10 favourite football team is Real Madrid. before I go out.
a Jo her b Jo’s c Jo has 7 I’d like to you some information about
/ 10 next year’s classes.
8 I’m away next weekend. Can you the
dog? He likes to eat twice a day.
/8

218 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 218 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

7 Choose the correct option. Speaking

1 Tom has bought a new for the living
room. 9 Talk about one of the following topics.
a sink b sofa c bed • what you eat on weekdays and at the weekend
2 We need to improve the health service. I am • when and where you met your best friend or your
having more nurses in hospitals. partner
a for b on c over • an experience that changed your life
3 When did you married? Was it last year? / 10
a have b go c get
4 ‘What would you like for your main ?’ ‘Oh, Reading
the chicken, please.’
a food b course c dessert A useful technology?
5 I have copies of photos on my memory . There is a lot of new technology for sale these days, from
I’ll put it in the laptop so we can see the photos. tablets and laptops to electric cars and solar panels,
a stick b file c key but it isn’t always easy to know what to buy. We don’t
6 Andy doesn’t on very well with his know how well the things will work. They might not
father-in-law. They don’t talk much. be good value for money, and they might not be very
a go b make c get useful two or three years from now. We may have to buy
7 Petra usually gets up very early the something more modern later. And we might not use
morning. them very much or forget about them and leave them in
a in b on c at a cupboard.
8 Where’s the nearest post ? I need to buy Weston, a major electronics company, is going to start
some stamps. selling a new product next month. I’ve seen it and will try
a station b shop c office to describe it in this blog, but you have to decide if it is
/8 a good thing to buy or not. It’s a smartwatch, and many
experts love it. It looks like a watch, so you wear it on
Listening your arm, but it has a screen and you can use it to look
at websites, make calls and send texts or emails. It costs
8 Listen to the conversation and choose the correct a lot, but if the high price isn’t a problem for you, this is
answers. Each question has only one correct answer. a really useful thing to carry around. You can check when
1 When did Ellie’s new Spanish course start? you’ve got a message, or see who’s calling, and it feels
a this morning like the future.
b yesterday The question is: do you really need one? Most people
c last weekend don’t really need to buy a smartwatch. Smartphones
d four days ago are cheaper, and in some ways, they are better. You can
2 What was Ellie’s teacher like? take better photos with them, for example. But for really
a strict but very helpful busy people who are always travelling, smartwatches
b hard to get on with can be helpful. You don’t need them at home or in the
c funny and patient office, but they’re great when you’re exercising or in
d a quiet person another situation where using a typical smartphone isn’t
3 How does Ellie compare her teacher now to her practical. I spent yesterday wearing the new smartwatch,
teacher last year? and it was very comfortable and not too heavy. I didn’t
a Her teacher now is better at Spanish. think the design was very good, but I enjoyed using
b Her teacher now is more helpful. the webcam and listening to music. Surprisingly, the
c Last year’s teacher was friendlier. webcam was better than the one on my laptop. Is a
d Last year’s teacher was much louder. smartwatch for you? You decide.
4 What does Ellie say about her class?
a There will be twelve students in the class during 10 Read the text and choose the correct option.
the course. 1 In the first paragraph, the writer says that …
b Two students are a lot older than the other a most new machines are good ideas.
students. b many new machines are good value.
c All the students come from England. c some new machines aren’t useful for long.
d There are students from England and other d we might lose some machines easily.
countries in the class. 2 The writer says that the new smartwatch from
5 What does Ellie tell us about Jill? Weston is …
a She comes from Canada. a on sale now.
b She has a job in London. b difficult to describe.
c She went to South America last year. c something he wants to buy.
d She has studied Spanish for a long time. d popular with experts.
/ 10

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning TESTS 219

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 219 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS

3 The writer says that with the new smartwatch from Writing
Weston, you can …
a save money. 11 Write one of the following.
b take great photos. • a description of an important day in your life
c send and receive messages. • an invitation to a friend – invite them to a special
d change the screen. event and describe what you will do there
4 The writer says that … • a blog post – describe a place you have been to
a he prefers a smartphone to a smartwatch. / 10 / 100
b a smartwatch might be useful for some people.
c smartwatches don’t have a camera.
d office workers might enjoy having a smartwatch.
5 The writer says that the new smartwatch from
Weston …
a was not easy to carry around.
b was heavier than he thought.
c had a surprisingly bad webcam.
d didn’t have the best design.
/ 10

220 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Test_pp208-220.indd 220 08/12/18 11:53 AM

 TESTS ANSWER KEY
UNIT 1 8
1 pen 4 mobile phone
1 2 dictionary 5 water
1 are you, I’m 3 is Dan, He’s 3 money
2 is she, She’s 4 Are your parents, they’re
2 UNIT 3
1 f 2 d 3 a 4 e 5 b 6 c
3 1
1 d 2 e 3 b 4 c 5 f 6 a 1 on 3 opposite 5 between
4 2 next to 4 behind 6 in front of
1 Are there 4 there isn’t 2
2 there’s 5 there are 1 her 4 us 7 him
3 Is there 6 Is there 2 their 5 Our 8 me
5 3 he 6 they
Countries: Brazil, China, Kenya, Saudi Arabia 3
Parts of the world: Central America, Asia 1 Andy’s sister 4 Adam’s hair
6 2 My parents’ villa 5 Diana’s new mobile phone
1 restaurant 4 shop assistant 3 Jack’s brother 6 Fiona’s brother’s
2 nurse 5 police station 4
3 school 6 designer 1 I can’t 4 I can’t come
7 2 Can I 5 Can you tell
1 quiet 3 small 5 dirty 3 We can drive you 6 You can’t use
2 hot 4 expensive 6 boring 5
8 1 bank 5 bookshop
1 hospital 3 school 5 hours 2 chemist’s 6 clothes shop
2 doctor 4 nurse 6 French 3 shoe shop 7 café
4 post office 8 sports centre
UNIT 2 6
1 b 2 a 3 c 4 a 5 b 6 b 7 b 8 b
1 7
1 cooking 5 learning 1 c 2 a 3 f 4 b 5 e 6 d 7 h 8 g
2 to go 6 watching
3 to do 7 being UNIT 4
4 getting
2 1
1 We always have dinner in the evening. 1 played 4 didn’t dance
2 Our grandmother usually visits us on Sunday. 2 didn’t cook 5 travelled
3 I sometimes go to bed in the afternoon. 3 walked 6 were
4 I don’t often do my homework. 2
5 My parents hardly ever go on holiday in summer. 1 When did Harry get home?
6 Mark never goes to the theatre at weekends. 2 Did Ann go swimming last Sunday?
7 Amy occasionally works at home in the morning. 3 What did you take on holiday?
8 William doesn’t usually like working at the weekend. 4 Where was the beach?
3 5 How many museums did they visit?
1 a 3 many 5 a lot of 6 Did Oliver go to the art gallery?
2 any 4 any 6 much 3
4 1 got home 4 was
1 a lot of 3 a 5 Some 2 went swimming 5 didn’t visit
2 many 4 some 3 took 6 went
5 4
1 c 2 e 3 d 4 a 5 b 1 was 4 played 7 read
6 2 went 5 didn’t go 8 walked
1 d 2 a 3 e 4 f 5 c 6 b 3 got 6 had
7 5
1 turn off 4 take 7 say 1 July 3 November 5 February
2 close 5 read 8 do 2 March 4 May
3 listen 6 watch 6
1 ninth 3 third 5 eleventh
2 first 4 twenty-second 6 seventeenth

TESTS ANSWER KEY 221

65752_em_Tests Answer Key_pp221-227.indd 221 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 TESTS ANSWER KEY

7 3
1 rented 4 going 1 larger 6 colder
2 fly 5 Take 2 more common 7 warmer
3 spend 6 stay 3 bigger 8 nicer
8 4 more famous 9 funnier
1 On 5 out 5 more exciting 10 more intelligent
2 to 6 in 4
3 with 7 with 1 c 2 a 3 c 4 c 5 a
4 in (or at) 5
1 biology 5 medicine
UNIT 5 2 history 6 engineering
3 computing 7 marketing
1 4 PE 8 literature
1 many 4 much 6
2 Could 5 What 1 Russian 4 Arabic
3 Which 6 else 2 Spanish 5 German
2 3 French 6 Chinese
1 those 4 that 7
2 These 5 that 1 creative 4 last
3 this 6 those 2 explaining 5 giving
3 3 start
1 is playing 5 is working
2 am drawing 6 aren’t going UNIT 7
3 is not feeling 7 are waiting
4 are taking 8 ’m not working 1
4 1 can 5 is
1 Are you going to the party? 2 didn’t 6 are
2 Is Jamie playing football right now? 3 isn’t 7 am
3 Is the shop making money? 4 do 8 didn’t
4 What are you doing at the moment? 2
5 Where is Dan living? 1 have to 5 has to
6 Why are you cooking pasta? 2 has to 6 don’t have to
5 3 doesn’t have to 7 don’t have to
1 pair 4 litre 4 have to 8 have to
2 kilo 5 cup 3
3 piece 1 don’t 6 do
6 2 doesn’t 7 is
1 retired 4 opportunities 3 does 8 isn’t
2 manage 5 sad 4 am 9 don’t
3 growing 5 are 10 can
7 4
1 a 2 b 3 b 4 a 5 b 6 b 1 daughter 5 aunt
8 2 grandfather 6 dad
1 menswear 5 first 3 sister 7 boyfriend
2 store 6 beauty 4 husband 8 cousin
3 ground 7 basement 5
4 main 8 escalator 1 look 6 sings
2 tells 7 feed
3 empty 8 makes
UNIT 6 4 do 9 share
5 pick 10 leave
1 6
1 really 5 quite 1 a 2 b 3 a 4 b 5 a 6 b
2 very 6 very
3 very 7 very UNIT 8
4 really 8 very
2 1
1 warmer 5 better 1 I’m going to be late tomorrow.
2 more difficult 6 more careful 2 The aren’t going to stay at that hotel again.
3 more romantic 7 worse 3 She isn’t going to go out next weekend.
4 earlier 8 farther 4 We’re going to watch that new film.
5 What is Peter going to do tomorrow?
6 The aren’t going to stay for lunch.

222 OUTCOMES

65752_em_Tests Answer Key_pp221-227.indd 222 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 TESTS ANSWER KEY

2 6
1 Are you going to go on holiday this year? 1 wait 5 use
2 Yeah! We’re going to visit Malta for the first time. 2 called 6 lying
3 Wow! Where are you going to stay? 3 lost 7 stole
4 We are going to book a hotel on the island. 4 gave 8 missed
5 Is Jenny going to travel with you?
6 No. She’s going to have a holiday with her boyfriend. UNIT 10
7 Really? Where are they going to go?
8 I think they are going to drive to the south coast. 1
3 1 b 2 b 3 a 4 a 5 b 6 b
1 I’d like to go for a walk later today. 2
2 Would you like a cup of tea? 1 much 4 many
3 I’d really like to have kids one day. (or I would …) 2 many 5 much
4 Andy wouldn’t like to lose his job. 3 many 6 much
5 Would you like to play a musical instrument? 3
6 She’d really like to help you. 1 There are too many cyclists on the road.
4 2 There are too many cars in London.
1 like to 4 like to 3 I don’t have enough free time.
2 not going 5 going to 4 There aren’t enough airports in my country!
3 Would you 6 to be 5 We have too many tourists in my city.
5 6 Politicians get too much money.
1 plays 6 have 4
2 wrote 7 go to 1 the longest 5 the biggest
3 get 8 getting 2 the highest 6 the most expensive
4 go for 9 do 3 the most famous 7 the busiest
5 did 10 go for 4 the largest 8 the best
6 5
1 c 2 e 3 a 4 d 5 f 6 b 7 g 1 platform 5 direct
7 2 get on 6 return
1 for 5 provide 3 first 7 discount
2 improve 6 is 4 delay 8 single
3 create 7 saves 6
4 help 1 b 2 a 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 a 7 c 8 a
7
UNIT 9 1 d 2 a 3 c 4 b 5 g 6 e 7 h 8 f

1 UNIT 11
1 Have you ever been to Tokyo?
2 I have never tried Indian food. 1
3 Jack has bought a new pullover. 1 c 2 a 3 d 4 e 5 b
4 Has Simon seen that film? 2
5 Have you ever broken your leg? 1 too 4 ’m
6 We haven’t missed the train. 2 do 5 were
8 Joe hasn’t found his wallet. 3 neither
2 3
1 fallen 5 saw 1 many 4 a lot of
2 lost 6 done 2 a lot of 5 Some
3 cut 7 felt 3 any 6 many
4 made 8 took 4
3 1 much 6 any
1 Have you been 6 went 2 much 7 some
2 flew 7 haven’t climbed 3 some 8 some
3 haven’t visited 8 have swum 4 much 9 many
4 have seen 9 went 5 any 10 much
5 took 10 sent 5
4 1 b 2 e 3 f 4 a 5 c 6 d
1 missed 6 took 6
2 made 7 broke 1 b 2 b 3 a 4 b 5 c
3 hurt 8 feel 7
4 forgotten 9 fell 1 butter, cheese, cream 4 beef, lamb, chicken
5 lost 10 forgotten 2 potatoes, onions, spinach 8 tea, coffee
5 3 apples, oranges, kiwis
1 c 2 e 3 a 4 b 5 f 6 d

TESTS ANSWER KEY 223

65752_em_Tests Answer Key_pp221-227.indd 223 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 TESTS ANSWER KEY

8 5
1 unhappy 4 unusual 1 c 2 a 3 c 4 c 5 a
2 unpopular 5 unhealthy 6
3 unfriendly 6 unforgettable 1 pollution 4 farm
2 flat 5 Violent
UNIT 12 3 forest 6 surrounded
7
1 1 fox 3 dog, cat
1 I think you should to relax. 2 cow, horse, pig, sheep
2 What should we do this evening? 8
3 You shouldn’t work at the weekend. 1 c 2 e 3 f 4 b 5 d 6 a
4 He shoulds help other people.
5 Maybe you should go jogging.
UNIT 14
6 He shouldn’t wear that hat. 1
2 1 What was your party like?
1 You shouldn’t go outside on your own. 2 What is the food like here?
2 I just need to take an aspirin. 3 What is your younger brother like?
3 It’s just a small cut. 4 What are the new students like?
4 Maybe you should take a holiday. 5 What is the garden like?
5 I’ll be fine after I have something to eat. 6 What was the meeting like?
6 You shouldn’t go to work today. 2
3 1 won’t be 6 will leave
1 After 4 After 2 will probably feel 7 will feel
2 so 5 after 3 will pass 8 will be
3 because 6 because 4 probably won’t get 9 won’t sell
4 5 won’t start 10 will probably win
1 so 5 because 3
2 because 6 After 1 It’s easy to run a marathon.
3 so 7 because 2 It’s impossible to find a job in the town.
4 After 8 after 3 It’s dangerous to climb mountains in winter.
5 4 It’s cheap to shop online.
1 d 2 a 3 e 4 c 5 h 6 b 7 g 8 f 5 It’s good to live here.
6 6 It’s important to get a good job.
1 upset 5 relaxed 7 It’s boring to watch TV all day.
2 annoyed 6 stressed 8 It’s fun to play football on the beach.
3 happy 7 angry 4
4 excited 8 tired A
7 1 d 2 c 3 a 4 e 5 b
1 celebrate 5 builds B
2 damages 6 causes 6 f 7 i 8 g 9 j 10 h
3 killed 7 hit 5
4 opens 8 protest 1 high 5 effect
2 efficient 6 miss
UNIT 13 3 weak 7 climate
4 get 8 open
1 6
1 It might rain later today. 1 b 2 c 3 a 4 a 5 b 6 b 7 a 8 c
2 We are definitely going to play.
3 She might possibly win the award.
UNIT 15
4 The students might not come over later. 1
5 It is not going to be a nice day. 1 ’m thinking of going
2 2 ’re thinking of buying
1 b 2 b 3 a 4 a 5 a 3 is thinking of doing
3 4 ’re thinking of working
1 have you worked 5 have had 5 Are you thinking of changing
2 has known 6 have you been 6 you aren’t thinking of selling
3 has felt 7 haven’t made 7 ’m thinking of buying
4 has Thomas lived 8 hasn’t played 8 is she thinking of learning
4 9 is thinking of trying
1 has owned 5 got 10 is she thinking of doing
2 have lived 6 hasn’t lived
3 met 7 has been
4 moved 8 have worked

224 OUTCOMES

65752_em_Tests Answer Key_pp221-227.indd 224 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 TESTS ANSWER KEY

2 REVIEW TEST 1
1 quietly 6 safe
2 hard 7 badly 1
3 efficiently 8 carefully 1 is 6 did
4 slow 9 difficult 2 Do 7 on
5 easily 10 generously 3 many 8 is
3 4 any 9 more
1 Joe speaks Spanish very well 5 her 10 well
2 Penny drives dangerously. 2
3 The people here work fast. 1 was 6 am doing
4 We walked home happily. 2 left 7 don’t have
5 Simon advised the students badly. 3 came 8 studying
6 I can write with this easily. 4 didn’t know 9 having
4 5 to do 10 be
1 tablet 5 dishwasher 3
2 laptop 6 vacuum cleaner 1 waiter 6 kitchen
3 hairdryer 7 washing machine 2 afternoon 7 second
4 camera 8 mobile phone 3 bank 8 train
5 4 package 9 sink
1 restart, install 3 memory stick, online 5 quiet 10 escalator
2 download, install 4 search, link 4
6 1 have 6 put
1 c 2 c 3 a 4 b 5 b 6 b 7 c 8 c 2 get 7 stay
3 listen 8 spend
UNIT 16 4 close 9 last
5 go 10 cost
1 5
1 I was sitting 5 You weren’t listening 1 b 2 a 3 b 4 a 5 c
2 they were trying 6 Was he playing 7a
3 we were having 7 she was carrying d
4 was she waiting 8 We weren’t learning 7b
2 1 F 2 T 3 T 4 F 5 F 6 F
1 didn’t see 6 was thinking
2 had 7 felt REVIEW TEST 2
3 was driving 8 decided
4 went 9 were walking 1
5 hit 10 were learning 1 Would 6 should
3 2 don’t 7 has
1 I’ll clean the car later. 3 am 8 do
2 I won’t call the police. 4 didn’t 9 ’m not
3 We will eat out next week, I promise. 5 Have 10 have
4 I will marry you. 2
4 1 have 6 most
1 I will. 3 I won’t. 2 so 7 going
2 I won’t. 4 I will. 3 going 8 much
5 4 like 9 enough
1 a 2 b 3 a 4 c 5 b 6 a 5 because 10 too
6 3
1 married 6 divorced 1 a 3 b 5 a 7 b 9 b
2 anniversary 7 approve 2 a 4 b 6 b 8 c 10 a
3 broken up 8 jealous 4
4 asked her out 9 get on 1 a 3 c 5 c 7 b 9 c
5 pregnant 10 date 2 b 4 b 6 a 8 b 10 b
7 5a
1 faded 5 let a 2 b 1 c 4 d 3
2 weeds 6 remain 5b
3 double 7 trouble 1 a 2 b 3 a 4 c
4 encourage 8 trust 7a
1 B 2 C 3 A
1 F 2 F 3 F 4 T 5 T 6 F

TESTS ANSWER KEY 225

65752_em_Tests Answer Key_pp221-227.indd 225 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 TESTS ANSWER KEY

REVIEW TEST 3 END-OF-YEAR TEST 1

1 1
1 been 6 were 1 was working 9 going
2 Were 7 won’t 2 decided 10 to see
3 of 8 going 3 didn’t understand 11 to win
4 well 9 for 4 have become 12 to try
5 will 10 very 5 go 13 call
2 6 am improving 14 doing
1 are thinking 6 healthily 7 slowly 15 will be
2 visiting 7 hard 8 better
3 to talk 8 was growing 2
4 to remember 9 have lived 1 a 3 a 5 a 7 a 9 a
5 won’t find 10 will have 2 c 4 b 6 c 8 c 10 c
3 3
1 cloudy 5 sheep 1 is she doing 4 Did they build
2 hill 6 dishwasher 2 should I 5 were you singing
3 screen 7 partner 3 Have they ever visited
4 sunny 8 married 4
4 1 out 5 after
1 a 3 b 5 c 7 a 9 a 11 c 2 reliable 6 cause
2 b 4 b 6 b 8 b 10 b 12 b 3 up 7 about
5 4 set 8 deleted
1 c 2 a 3 c 4 a 5 b 5
7a 1 b 2 c 3 c 4 b 5 d 6 c
A 3 B 6 C 4 D 5 E 2 6
7b 1 set 5 broke
1 c 2 a 3 e 4 b 5 d 2 made 6 lost
3 went 7 missed
MID-YEAR TEST 4 hurt 8 paid
7
1 1 b 2 a 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 b 7 a 8 b
1 a 2 b 3 c 4 b 5 c 6 a 7 b 8 c 8
2 1 c 2 b 3 b 4 a 5 b
1 There 6 those 10
2 ever 7 very 1 c 2 c 3 b 4 c 5 d
3 any 8 than
4 Can 9 did END-OF-YEAR TEST 2
5 Did 10 Would
3 1
1 usually lives 5 did 1 am sitting 9 produced
2 is staying 6 has never been 2 will be / is going to be 10 has written
3 is making 7 to become 3 to have 11 reading
4 taller 8 to take 4 opened 12 have tried
4 5 most popular 13 try
1 South 7 escalator 6 was working 14 to talk
2 hospital 8 lazy 7 wrote 15 am looking
3 safe 9 uncle 8 to run
4 chemist’s 10 start 2
5 sofa 11 hurt 1 a 3 a 5 a 7 a 9 b
6 ground 12 embarrassing 2 c 4 a 6 c 8 c 10 b
5 3
1 get 7 wash 1 Did you enjoy visiting 4 does Karen do
2 do 8 stay 2 Was Harriet driving 5 Has Graham seen
3 go 9 win 3 have you had
4 listen 10 learn 4
5 open 11 move 1 safe 5 for
6 turn 12 make 2 have 6 made
6a 3 off 7 relaxing
1 a 2 b 4 telling 8 off
6b 5
1 c 2 d 3 c 4 c 1 c 2 d 3 b 4 c 5 b 6 b
8
1 b 2 b 3 b 4 a 5 d
226 OUTCOMES

65752_em_Tests Answer Key_pp221-227.indd 226 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 TESTS ANSWER KEY

6
1 empty 5 write
2 move 6 put
3 take 7 give
4 play 8 feed
7
1 b 2 a 3 c 4 b 5 a 6 c 7 a 8 c
8
1 c 2 c 3 b 4 d 5 b
10
1 c 2 d 3 c 4 b 5 d

TESTS ANSWER KEY 227

65752_em_Tests Answer Key_pp221-227.indd 227 08/12/18 11:54 AM

 TESTS AUDIO SCRIPTS
eating or drinking chocolate might improve
REVIEW TEST 1 UNITS 1–6 your intelligence. In tests with students at their
CD 3 TRACK 1 university, they found that chocolate-eaters
I = inspector, J = Amanda Jackson completed maths tests much quicker than other
I: Are you Amanda Jackson? students. Now they want to do tests at American
J: Yes, I am, that’s right. universities.
I: And you own this shop? 4 And finally, a new report says that more men
J: Oh, no, no. I just work here. I’m … er … one of the shop are looking after children in the home than ever
assistants. before. More mums are going back to work,
I: OK. Well, I’m Inspector Hawkins. I understand that leaving dad with the kids. Here’s Rosie Cumber.
you saw one of the customers taking things from ‘Today ten per cent of children spend their day
your department this morning. Is that right? with dad. The economy is weak, so a lot of men
J: Not exactly. I work in womenswear, but I saw have lost their jobs, and nowadays wives often
somebody take something from the electrical earn more than their partners. That’s why there
department. It’s on the same floor, you see. Anyway, are so many stay-at-home dads.’
she took a camera.
I: OK. So, what exactly did you see? REVIEW TEST 3 UNITS 13–16
J: Well, I saw the customer – she put the camera in her CD 3 TRACK 3
bag. Then she walked out of the shop, but she didn’t
pay for anything. P = presenter, H = Hanne, T = Tom
I: Where exactly were you when you saw her? P: This week, the new musical Living in the City opened
J: Well, I was over there in the coats and jackets in London’s theatre district. Journalists Hanne
section, near the escalator. The customer was near Linberg and Tom Hales went to see it there, and here
the window, right over there. I saw her very clearly. they are today to tell us about it. So, Hanne, what is
I: What did she look like? Living in the City about?
J: Well, she was very short and she had white trousers H: Well, it tells the story of Casey, a singer from a small
and a long coat. Oh, and she had short, fair hair. town in America. At first, she hopes to be a star in
I: OK. So, what did you do? the New York theatre, but before she can go there,
J: Well, I followed her outside. She got into a small, red things change. So she doesn’t go to New York, or
car. There was another person in the car – a tall man, Hollywood, …
with glasses. P: Or London.
I: Then what did you do? H: No. No, she doesn’t. She goes to Paris. And that’s
J: Well, I went back into the shop and told the the story really. It’s about an American girl with
manager about the shoplifter. She phoned the police. not much money in a strange city. She can’t speak
And, well, here you are. French, at first, but then she quickly learns the
I: Well, thank you very much for your information. language. She doesn’t know anyone, but of course
she can sing brilliantly. And she falls in love with a
REVIEW TEST 2 UNITS 7–12 good-looking Frenchman.
CD 3 TRACK 2 P: OK. Don’t tell us what happens in the end! Did you
enjoy it?
Hello and welcome to News Today at six o’clock. H: Well, it’s romantic and sometimes funny, but
1 The government has introduced plans to build a new not funny enough, and the love story, well, you
motorway north of the capital city. Many people are know what will happen in the end, so it isn’t very
for the idea, saying that it is going to create jobs, interesting. I was a bit bored, to be honest. But some
help businesses and save more time for travellers. of the songs were quite good.
Others are angry, and say it is going to cause a lot of P: Tom, what did you think?
pollution. Two years ago, the government promised T: Well, I don’t really agree with Hanne. I enjoyed the
to cut the number of cars on the road. Some people relationship between Pascal and Casey and I thought
say that there will be more cars now because of the the two young stars acted brilliantly.
new motorway. H: Mmm. I didn’t think the acting was that good.
2 Millers, one of the country’s largest department P: OK. Tom.
stores, is going to close. The company began in the T: I quite liked some of the songs, too, especially Love
1930s, and at one time had eight large stores in by the River. That’ll be a hit, I think. And I thought the
different parts of the country. Today, there is only love story was interesting. I really did.
one store, selling menswear and womenswear and
furniture for the home. Sadly, it has lost a lot of
money and the management have had to make
plans to close its doors.
3 We all know that chocolate is great to eat. But
is it good for you? A team of scientists at an
English university have told News Today that

228 OUTCOMES

65752_em_Test_Audioscripts_pp228-229.indd 228 08/12/18 11:51 AM

 TESTS AUDIO SCRIPTS

MID-YEAR TEST UNITS 1–9 the 2nd. In Scotland, January the 1st and the 2nd
are both national holidays, so people have longer
CD 3 TRACK 4
parties!
M = Mike, P = Paula P: So, what exactly do people do at Hogmanay?
M: Hi, Paula. Are you enjoying life at university? M: People have parties at home with family and friends,
P: Yeah. It’s brilliant. There are lots of things to do there, and they sing a special song called Auld Lang Syne.
and my course is really interesting. It isn’t easy to P: Oh, yes.
do all the homework though. I have to write a lot of M: Yes, it’s about remembering friends and we only sing
essays and I don’t always finish them on time. The it at midnight on Hogmanay. It’s unusual, I think.
teachers have been angry with me a few times. Many countries prefer to dance or eat or drink, but
M: Really? our tradition is to sing this song. After midnight,
P: Yes. I’m afraid so. But I’m not doing badly. I think I’m some people then visit their neighbours’ houses.
going to do well in the exams at the end of the year. They walk outside into the cold weather. They take
M: And you’re not living at the university, are you? You’re black coal, or fruit cake, or whisky, the famous
sharing a house in the city. How’s life in your house? Scottish drink. It is good luck to be the first person to
Are you enjoying it? visit a house. And it is good luck if the first person to
P: Yes, I am, actually. It’s fun, most of the time. But visit your house is a tall, dark man!
living with three other girls is hard sometimes. We’ve P: Really? Is it different in the north of Scotland?
had to make some strict rules. M: Well, no. They have the same traditions. However,
M: Really? sometimes they also have bonfires and fire
P: Yes. For example, one rule is that we have to wash festivals. It can be noisy and dangerous so pets and
the dishes before we go out in the evening. Oh, and small children stay indoors! And the festivals are
we can’t use the washing machine on Sundays. It’s popular. People come from all over the world to see
noisy and the others want to study. What about you, Hogmanay for themselves.
Mike? Are you enjoying living in your room in the P: OK. Well, thanks for telling us about Hogmanay,
university? Morag.
M: Well, yes. It’s easy living there. There’s a kitchen, so
I can cook, but only when I want to. They give us END-OF-YEAR TEST 2 UNITS 1–16
breakfast, lunch and dinner at the university. And, of CD 3 TRACK 6
course, I don’t do any cleaning or tidying. They clean
my room every day. It’s great. D = Dan, E = Ellie
P: Lucky you. I have to clean and tidy all the time. But D: Hi Ellie. Did your Spanish course start today?
aren’t there a lot of rules? E: Hi Dan. No, I had the first lesson on Saturday
M: Well, yes, there are. We can’t invite friends to stay, for morning. Three days ago. I spent yesterday and this
example, or play musical instruments in our rooms morning doing my homework. I really enjoyed the
because it’s noisy! I have to go to the music room to lesson though, and I’m really looking forward to the
practise my guitar. next one.
P: Oh no, too many rules for me. I prefer living with D: And was the teacher good?
friends. E: Oh yes. I think she’s better than the teacher we had
M: Well, I like being at the university. I have more free on last year’s Spanish course, because she’s more
time because I don’t have to wash, clean and tidy like patient and helpful. She’s very funny, too. Her name’s
you! Gemma. It’s hard to say her name. She talks fast and
really loud. Perhaps that’s because she’s Spanish! It’s
END-OF-YEAR TEST 1 UNITS 1–16 difficult to understand her accent sometimes but I’m
CD 3 TRACK 5 sure it will get easier.
D: So, what are the other students like?
M = Morag, P = presenter E: There were twelve of them, but I think we’re
P: On today’s programme I’m talking to Morag going to have more in the next class. Two people
MacDonald from the Scottish Tourist Organisation. didn’t come because the college didn’t send them
Hello, Morag. information about the course start date. Everyone is
M: Hello. about the same age, so that’s great.
P: OK. So, we’re going to talk about Hogmanay. What D: And they’re all English?
exactly is Hogmanay, Morag? And did I say it E: Most of them are, yes. But there is a Canadian guy,
correctly? too. He’s probably the best in the class. I think he did
M: Yes, yes, you did. OK. Well, Hogmanay is a very old a lot of Spanish at school. And then there’s a Scottish
Scottish word and we use it to describe the New Year girl called Jill. She moved down here to London only
festival in our country. We don’t really know what last month, and she’s working for a big computer
the word means. company here. She wants to learn Spanish because
P: Really? she hopes to go to South America next year. I think
M: No, we don’t! The festival starts on December the her company does a lot of business there.
31st and lasts longer than the New Year festival in D: OK. Well, it all sounds great. Good luck with the next
England. There, people go back to work on January lesson.

TESTS AUDIOSCRIPTS 229

65752_em_Test_Audioscripts_pp228-229.indd 229 08/12/18 11:51 AM

 1 WHO ARE YOU?
Choose a famous person you know a lot about. It’s important that the rest of the class know this
person. Imagine you are this person and answer the questions below.

What do you do?

Where do you work?

How old are you?

Where are you from?

Where do you live?

Who do you live with?

How many languages do you speak?

What do you do in your free time?

Have you got any brothers or sisters?

Now interview your classmates and answer their questions. Can you guess which famous people
they are? Write your answers in the table.

Student name: Student name: Student name:

Famous person: Famous person: Famous person:

Student name: Student name: Student name:

Famous person: Famous person: Famous person:

Student name: Student name: Student name:

Famous person: Famous person: Famous person:

Student name: Student name: Student name:

Famous person: Famous person: Famous person:

230 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 230 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 2 GOOD FRIENDS
Complete the form with your own information.

1 Interests

What do you enjoy doing?

I enjoy ______________________.

I think ______________ is boring but _______________ is interesting.

I love _______________ in the evening, and I enjoy _________________ at the weekend.

I hate _____________ and I think _______________ is boring.

2 Sports

What sports do you like doing or watching?

I love ______________________.

I often ____________________, and I sometimes ___________________.

I hardly ever ________________, and I never _____________________.

I often watch ________________ on TV, but I never watch ________________.

3 Weekend activities

What do you do at the weekend?

At the weekend, I often ___________________ and I sometimes __________________.

On Friday evening, I usually ___________________.

On Saturday, I often _____________________, but I never ____________________.

On Sunday, I always ____________________.

I like spending time with ___________________.

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 231

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 231 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 3 GUESS THE PHRASE

A B

Brush your teeth Lie on the sofa

Look in the mirror Eat your breakfast

Put things in the fridge Hang the washing

Watch the TV Have a shower

Take an aspirin Cut vegetables

Work on the computer Talk on the phone

C D

Lie down Open the cupboard

Get dressed Cook the dinner

Make dinner Wash the dishes

Put on make-up Watch a film

Send an email Listen to music

Set the alarm clock Clean the kitchen

E F

Wash your hair Put on your shoes

Read a book Wash your hands

Drive a car Cut your hair

Put on the air-conditioning Set the table

Get a towel Dry your hair

Share a pizza Clean the house

232 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 232 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 4 WHAT DID WE BOTH DO?

A B

Yesterday evening Last Saturday

What / do? What time / get up?

Who / be / with? What / have for breakfast?

What / have for dinner? Where / go?

What / watch on TV? What / do?

How / feel? Who / meet?

What time / go to bed? What time / go to bed?

C D

The last public holiday A concert or festival

When / be? Who / see?

Who / spend / with? When / go?

Where / go? Who / go with?

How / celebrate the day? have / good time?

Where / stay? Where / sleep?

eat / drink / anything special? When / come home?

E F

Your birthday Your holiday

When / your birthday? Where / go?

Who / be / with? Who / go with?

What / do? Where / stay?

What / eat and drink? What / do?

What presents / get? What places / visit?

How / feel? When / go?

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 233

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 233 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 5 SHOPPING
Work in groups. Student A starts, and has to talk for one minute about topic 1. The speaker must
not pause or hesitate, and must not repeat the same information. If the speaker does this, another
student must say STOP. The first person to say STOP continues talking about the
same topic for the time that is left. Repeat with the other boxes, with students taking turns
to start.
For each turn, one person in the group is the referee. The referee must:
1 read out the questions in the box.
2 time the student who is talking.
3 stop the timer when other students say STOP, and decide if the challenge is good.
4 restart the time for the next speaker and award a point at the end of the minute.

1 What I wear 2 The last thing I bought 3 Shopping for food

What are you wearing now? Think about the last piece of When do you usually go food
clothing you bought. shopping?
What do you usually wear for
work / college? What did you buy? Where do you go and why?

What do you usually wear at Where did you buy it? What do you buy and how
the weekend? much do you spend?
Why did you buy it?
What’s your favourite piece of
clothing? How much was it?

4 A department store 5 Shopping online 6 My favourite shop

Do you have a department Do you shop online? What’s your favourite shop?
store in your town?
What products do people What can you buy there?
What is its name? sometimes buy online?
Why do you like it?
Where is it? What was the last thing you
bought online? What is the last thing you
How big is it? bought there?
Why did you buy it?
What can you buy there?

7 Sales 8 New shops 9 Shopping

When are the sales in your Are any new shops opening or Do you enjoy shopping? Why
country? closing in your city? / Why not?

When did you last go to the What sort of shops are they? How often do you go
sales and what did you buy? shopping?
What sort of shops do you
Are sales a good idea? Why / need in your city and why? Who do you go with? Why?
Why not?
How do you spend your day
when you go shopping?

234 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 234 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 6 THE COMPARISON GAME
Work in groups. Turn over a card. You have two minutes to think of as many similarities and
differences as you can between the two things on the card. One student must note your ideas. Do
the same with the next card until you have no more time!

1 2 3 4

pen café newspaper lift

and and and and

pencil restaurant magazine escalator

5 6 7 8

house teacher test biology

and and and and

flat professor exam chemistry

9 10 11 12

clock school training course supermarket

and and and and

watch university university course department store

13 14 15 16

jumper parents hotel dishwasher

and and and and

T-shirt relatives bed & breakfast washing machine

17 18 19 20

chair bookshop sports centre clean

and and and and

sofa library gym wash

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 235

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 235 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 7 INTERESTING RELATIONSHIPS
Complete the mind map below to show your relationships to six different people. The information
in the box explains what the different lines show. Read the explanation, and write the names of six
people in the circles.

A short line is for someone you are close to, and who is important to you (e.g. a
family member, an old friend).
A longer line is for someone who is less important (e.g. someone you work with).
A solid line is for someone you see often.
A dotted line is for someone you don’t see often.

Think about how to describe your relationship to each person. For example:
This is my sister Kate. She’s friendly and has two children – I see her every day because she lives
near my house.
This is my friend on Facebook, Ivan. We’ve never met but I sometimes read his blog.

Now work in a group. Explain your mind maps and ask follow-up questions to find out more.

YOU

236 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 236 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 8 ARE YOU GOING TO …
Complete the follow-up questions in the worksheet. Then ask and answer the questions in your
class, and note down the information in the worksheet. You must not ask one person more than
two questions.

Are you going to … Yes? Name? Follow-up question Answer

1 … eat out this evening? Where ____________________

_________________________?

2 … watch TV this evening? What _____________________

_________________________?

3 … do any sport or exercise What _____________________

this week? _________________________?

4 … go to a museum or an art What _____________________

gallery at the weekend? _________________________?

5 … cook dinner this evening? What _____________________

_________________________?

6 … go sightseeing at the Where ____________________

weekend? _________________________?

7 … learn anything new this What _____________________

year? (a language, a hobby, etc.) _________________________?

8 … visit friends or relatives at Who _____________________

the weekend? _________________________?

9 … go to any celebrations this Where ____________________

year? (a wedding, birthday, etc.) _________________________?

10 … go to a concert this year? Who _____________________

_________________________?

11 … start a new job later When ____________________

this year? _________________________?

12 … travel anywhere this year? Where ____________________

(on holiday, for studies, etc.) _________________________?

13 … do any new courses, What _____________________

classes or training this year? _________________________?

14 … move house in the next Where ____________________

two years? _________________________?

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 237

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 237 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 9 BINGO
Talk to your classmates and ask questions starting Have you ever …? Do you …? or Did you …? Write
the names of people who answer yes. Try to fill a row across or a column down. When you have
completed a row or column, shout BINGO!

Find someone who …

B I N G O
B … has tried … watched a … has lost their … has moved … has a birthday
Indian food film yesterday passport or house three this month
identity card times or more

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________

I … has broken … likes cooked … got up before … has been in a … has missed a
his / her arm or tomatoes 9 last weekend film or a play flight
leg

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________

N … has three or … always does … is doing an … has planned … has looked after
more aunts the housework evening course their next children
at the weekend holiday

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________

G … has bought … played a … has given … likes reggae … has shared

someone a team sport last flowers to music a room with a
present in the weekend someone brother or sister
last week

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________

O … has cooked … eats eggs for … is not feeling … has lived … hasn’t watched
dinner this week breakfast well today abroad TV this week

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________

238 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 238 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 10 SUPERLATIVES QUESTIONNAIRE
Ask questions in your group to find out the information below. Write the name of the person and
their answer. For example, for question 1, ask: What shoe size are you? Write the name of each
person you ask, and their shoe size.

1 Who has the biggest shoe size?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

2 Who is the tallest?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

3 Who has the most brothers and sisters?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

4 Who lives the furthest from the school?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

5 Who gets up the earliest?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

6 Who goes to bed the latest?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

7 Who has the longest surname?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

8 Who has been to the most countries?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

9 Who has the strangest hobby?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

10 Who can cook the most interesting meal?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

11 Who has had the most pets in their lifetime?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

12 Who eats the biggest breakfast?

1 _________________________ 2 _________________________ 3 _________________________

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 239

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 239 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 11 DO YOU HAVE A HEALTHY DIET?
Look at the prompts in each section and think about how to ask the questions. Write two questions
of your own in each section. Then ask and answer the questions in your group and complete the
worksheet with your answers.

1 Drinks

Student A Student B Student C Student D

How much / coffee / afternoon?

How many / cups of tea / day?

How much / sugar / coffee or tea?

How often / buy / bottle of cola / week?

How many / glasses of water / day?

_____________________________?

_____________________________?

2 Healthy food

Student A Student B Student C Student D

How much / fruit / week?

What / breakfast?

How often / salads or vegetables?

How often / fish?

How many / eggs / week?

_____________________________?

_____________________________?

3 Unhealthy food

Student A Student B Student C Student D

How many / chocolate bars / week?

How often / fast food / week?

How much / cheese / week?

How many / sweets / day?

How often / red meat?

_____________________________?

_____________________________?

240 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 240 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 12 WHAT SHOULD I DO?
Write two pieces of advice for each situation. Work in groups and decide on the best advice for each
situation.

an important job interview a bad headache

You should . You should .

You shouldn’t . You shouldn’t .

a long plane journey inviting vegetarians for dinner

You should . You should .

You shouldn’t . You shouldn’t .

a bad stomach ache the first day in a new job

You should . You should .

You shouldn’t . You shouldn’t .

meeting your new boyfriend or girlfriend’s a stiff back

parents for the first time
You should .
You should .
You shouldn’t .
You shouldn’t .

going to a friend’s wedding your boyfriend or girlfriend’s parents are

coming to stay for the weekend
You should .
You should .
You shouldn’t .
You shouldn’t .

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 241

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 241 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 13 WHAT ARE YOUR PLANS?
Complete the worksheet with your plans for the future. Use might and be going to. Then work
in groups to discuss your plans. If your plans are not definite, explain why (e.g. I need to save
some money, I need to do well in my exams, etc.). Ask the other students in your group follow-up
questions about their plans.

Jobs and career:

Studies:

Family:

Shopping:

Hobbies:

Social activities:

Going out:

Sport / keeping fit:

Health / food and drink:

Holidays:

Weekend:

This evening:

242 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 242 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 14 WHAT WAS THE QUESTION?

What’s your boss What was your first What’s your house
like? teacher like? or apartment like?

What’s your What was the What was your first

bedroom like? weather like day at school like?
yesterday?

What’s your sister or What was your first What’s your oldest
brother like? job like? friend like?

What’s your garden What’s your pet What was your last
like? like? holiday like?

What’s your kitchen What’s your home What was your

like? town like? weekend like?

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 243

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 243 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 15 TECHNOLOGY

LAPTOP MOBILE PHONE FILE VACUUM CLEANER

You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say:
laptop mobile file vacuum, cleaner
computer phone Hoover
smartphone You can say: clean
You can say: lose
plug You can say: copy You can say:
screen call keep dirty, use
keyboard send document switch on
download text carpet
press a button

RADIO WASHING MACHINE MEMORY STICK DIGITAL CAMERA

You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say:
radio washing memory digital
wash stick camera
You can say: machine
listen You can say: You can say:
turn on / off You can say: put in photo
turn on / off take out take
put in, take out keep
press a button files

DISHWASHER SCREEN BATTERY FRIDGE

You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say:
dishwasher screen battery fridge
wash refrigerator
dish You can say: You can say: freezer
look at electricity
You can say: icon put in You can say:
turn on TV, computer, tablet take out turn on
turn off goes turn off
put in put in
take out take out
press a button kitchen

COMPUTER KEYBOARD APP HAIRDRYER

You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say:
PC keyboard app hairdryer
computer program hair
You can say: dry
You can say: use You can say:
plug computer download You can say:
screen type use plug
keyboard icon electricity
download install use
turn on wet

PLUG TABLET WEBSITE TV

You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say: You can’t say:
plug tablet website TV
television
You can say: You can say: You can say:
electricity screen look at You can say:
put in use icon plug
take out turn on / off TV, computer, tablet screen
turn on turn on / off
watch

244 OUTCOMES © National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 244 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 16 HOW WELL DO YOU KNOW ME?

Clothes and fashion Plans

Find out what clothes your partner likes, Find out what your partner is going to do
what they wear at work or at school, this evening, at the weekend, next summer,
what they wear at the weekend, what after the course, in the future.
their favourite colours are, and what they
don’t like.

Work Food

Find out about your partner’s job now, Find out about what your partner usually
where they work and what they do in eats for breakfast, lunch and dinner, what
their job. food they like and dislike, what they never
eat, what they ate yesterday, and what they
Find out about jobs they had in the past, are going to eat this evening.
jobs they want to have, or are going to try
to get. Find out what they cook and how often.

Holidays People I know

Find out where your partner usually goes Find out the names of people in your
on holiday, who they usually go with, where partner’s family, what they do, where they
they went last summer and what they did, live, how old they are, and what their
and where they plan to go for your next interests are.
holiday.

Education Going out

Find out where your partner went to school Find out what your partner usually does in
and / or university, what subjects they the evening or at the weekend, how often
studied, what subjects they enjoyed, who they go out, where they go and who with.
their favourite teacher was, what they are
studying now.

© National Geographic Learning, a part of Cengage Learning COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 245

65752_em_Comm Activities_pp230-245.indd 245 08/12/18 11:49 AM

 TEACHERS’ NOTES TO
COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES
1 WHO ARE YOU? 3 GUESS THE PHRASE
Aim: to practise using present simple questions to ask Aim: to practise vocabulary from Unit 3 and earlier
for personal information units for activities around the house
Genre: mingle Genre: groupwork (or pairwork)
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
student in the class. three students in the class. Cut out the six cards on
Procedure: Write Famous people on the board. Ask each sheet.
students for the names of some famous people and Procedure: Introduce the activity by miming three or four
write up ten or more. Ask: Why are they famous? of the activities on the cards and asking students to say
• Hand out one worksheet to each student. Tell students which phrase you are miming.
to choose a famous person. You could limit students to • Organise the class into groups of three. Each group
the names on the board, or tell them to choose someone gets one worksheet – cut into six cards and placed face
they know well. Give them five minutes to prepare down. The first student in each group turns over a card.
answers to the questions, imagining they are the famous They must act out the six phrases on their card in order,
person. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. using mime. The other two students must guess and
• When students are ready, ask them to stand up, walk say the phrases on the card correctly. As soon as they say
round the class, and find a partner. Students take turns the correct phrase, the first student must move on to
to ask and answer questions, imagining they are the miming the next word. Once they have guessed all the
famous person they have chosen. After three minutes, phrases, it is the turn of the second student to turn over
say: Change. Students must write down the name of a card and mime the phrases.
the person they spoke to and the name of the famous • Once all six cards have been used, find out which
person they think they were pretending to be. group guessed quickest or got most right.
• Students find a new partner. They repeat the questions Alternative
and answers. They can do this several times. At the end, • You could make this activity very competitive. Put
put students in pairs or threes. Ask them to compare students in pairs not threes. Make sure the six cards
what they found out. held by each pair are in the correct order (i.e. A to F). On a
signal, tell Student A in each pair to turn over the first card
2 GOOD FRIENDS and mime the phrases. Students work against the clock. As
soon as one pair has mimed and guessed all six phrases
Aim: to practise using like / love + -ing and present they shout STOP. Check that they guessed all six correctly
simple with frequency adverbs to talk about interests, and award a point. Move on to the second card.
sports and weekend activities
Genre: mingle or groupwork 4 WHAT DID WE BOTH DO?
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
student in the class. Aim: to practise using the past simple to ask about
Procedure: Ask: What do you enjoy doing at the weekend? events
Elicit a few answers from students in the class. Genre: pairwork
• Hand out one worksheet to each student. Give Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
students five minutes to write answers to the questions. pair of students in the class. Cut out the six question
Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. cards on each photocopy.
• When students are ready, ask them to stand up, walk Procedure: Introduce the activity by asking some
round and talk to three different people. Students take questions in open class: What did you do yesterday
turns to ask and answer the questions on the worksheet. evening? When was your birthday? What time did you get
In feedback, ask students to say which student they have up last Saturday?
most in common with and why. • Organise the class into pairs. Each pair gets one
Alternative worksheet – six cards cut out and face up, with Card A
• Once students have written out their personal on top. Tell students they are going to ask and answer
information profiles, ask them to pin them on the past simple questions about yesterday evening (the topic
classroom walls. Organise the class into pairs. Tell them on Card A). Tell them they must find three things they
to walk round in pairs, read all the profiles, and decide on both did. For example, perhaps they both went to the
which pairs of students have the most similar interests cinema, or were with friends. Tell them they can ask extra
and why. questions if they want. At the end, ask pairs to say what
three things they both did.
• Change the pairs so students have a new partner, and
repeat with card B, and so on.

246 OUTCOMES

65752_em_CA_Notes_pp246-249.indd 246 08/12/18 11:48 AM

 TEACHERS’ NOTES TO COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES

5 SHOPPING 7 INTERESTING RELATIONSHIPS

Aim: to practise using present and past tenses to talk Aim: to practise describing people and relationships
about shopping experiences Genre: individual and pair- or groupwork
Genre: groupwork Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every student in the class.
group of four students in the class. Procedure: Introduce the activity by drawing a mind map
Procedure: Introduce the activity by talking about the on the board like the one on the worksheet, and writing
last thing you bought for one minute. Then tell students your name in the middle.
that they are going to talk about different topics for one • Now write the names of six people you know in
minute. the other boxes. As you do, talk about the person (and
• Organise the class into groups of four. Each group explain the line). A short solid line is for a person you
gets one worksheet. Student A must talk for exactly one have a strong relationship with and see a lot (e.g. This is
minute about the topic in the first box (1 What I wear). my sister Kate. She’s friendly and has two children – I see
They must not stop talking or repeat sentences they have her every day because she lives near my house). A short
already said. If they do, another person can say STOP. If dotted line is for a person you have a strong relationship
the referee agrees that they paused too long or repeated, with but don’t see a lot (e.g. This is my best friend from
the person who said STOP takes over talking for the rest university, Tom – he lives in America and he’s a scientist).
of the minute. So, if they challenged after 40 seconds, A long solid line is for a person you don’t have a strong
they have to talk for twenty more seconds. The person relationship with but see a lot (e.g. This is my boss Mr
speaking after one minute gets 1 point. Hall – he’s not very friendly). A long dotted line is for a
• Ask one student in each group to be ‘referee’ for each person you don’t have a strong relationship with and
round. Their job is: don’t see a lot (e.g. This is my friend on Facebook, Ivan.
1 to read out the questions in box 1. We’ve never met but I sometimes read his blog).
2 to ask another student to start talking. • Organise the class into pairs. Each student gets a
3 to decide on whether any challenge is good. photocopy. Tell them to write the names of people they
4 to say STOP after one minute and give a point to know next to each of the four lines as in your model.
the winning player. Tell them to prepare to describe their people and their
• After the first round, move to box 2 and change the relationship. In pairs, students take turns to describe
referee. After nine rounds, find out which student in each their people. Their partners listen and ask questions.
group won most points. They must also write two interesting facts about each
of the people their partner talks about. In feedback, ask
6 THE COMPARISON GAME different students to say what they found out about
their partner.
Aim: to practise describing the differences between • If you wish, you could do this activity in groups of four.
words
Genre: groupwork 8 ARE YOU GOING TO …
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
group of four students in the class. Cut out the cards on Aim: to practise questions with going to
each sheet. Genre: mingle or groupwork
Procedure: Introduce the activity by writing pen and Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
pencil on the board and eliciting how the two things are student in the class.
similar and different. Procedure: Introduce the activity by asking a few
• Organise the class into groups of four. Each group gets questions using going to for plans round the class.
one set of cards, placed face down in a pile. Ask students • Ask students to read the questions in the first column
to turn over card 1. They have two minutes to think of as and write follow-up questions using going to. Monitor
many similarities and differences as they can between and help with ideas and vocabulary.
the two things on the card. Say STOP at the end of two • Ask students to walk round, ask questions and note
minutes, and ask students to turn over the next card. answers. The rule is that they can only ask the same
Continue for as long as you have available. person two questions, then they must change partner.
• At the end, elicit ideas students have. If you want to If their partner says No, they write nothing on their
make the game competitive, award points for the group photocopy. If they say Yes, they write their name and the
with the most or best ideas. Then ask students to move answer to the follow-up question.
on to card 2 and repeat the activity. • When a student has completed their form, end the
• In a student-centred activity, students can time activity. Ask that student to say what they found out
themselves and should try to get through as many cards about people in the class.
as possible, and note as many ideas as they can in the
time available.

TEACHERS’ NOTES TO COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 247

65752_em_CA_Notes_pp246-249.indd 247 08/12/18 11:48 AM

 TEACHERS’ NOTES TO COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES

9 BINGO 11 DO YOU HAVE A HEALTHY DIET?

Aim: to practise question forms (especially present Aim: to practise much, many and quantity
perfect) Genre: groupwork
Genre: mingle Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every three students in the class.
student in the class. Procedure: Introduce the activity by asking a few How
Procedure: Introduce the activity by asking a few Have much …? and How many …? questions in open class.
you ever …? and Do / Did you …? questions open class. • Give out the worksheets. Ask students to get into
• Ask students to look at the worksheet and think about groups of four and work together to form How much
how to form the questions. Go round and solve any ..? and How many …? questions to ask about the
problems. information they need to find out. Ask them to add two
• Ask students to walk round, ask questions and write more questions for each topic.
down the name of any person who answers yes to a • Once they have prepared their questions, ask students
question. The aim is to complete a row (across) or column to ask and answer the questions in their group and
(down) of five names. It must be a row or column – not a note the answers. In feedback, find out what each group
diagonal or zig-zag. When a student has completed a row found out about their classmates.
or column, they shout BINGO! Stop the game. Check the Alternative
answers. Then continue the game – who can be the next • If time is limited, you could cut each worksheet in
person to complete a row or column? three and allocate one category only to each group.
• You will need to set a few rules:
1 You can only ask a student a maximum of three 12 WHAT SHOULD I DO?
questions before moving to a new partner.
2 You must have a different name in each box in a Aim: to practise giving advice
completed row or column. Genre: groupwork
3 (optional) You may wish to ask students to ask Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
a follow-up question (e.g. Did you watch a film student in the class.
yesterday? What was its name? Did you like it? Who Procedure: Introduce the activity by writing a situation
was in it?). on the board, and asking students what you should or
shouldn’t do. For example, write: a long train journey.
10 SUPERLATIVES QUESTIONNAIRE Students might say: You should take a book or your laptop
or You shouldn’t eat a lot of food.
Aim: to practise comparatives and superlatives and • Ask students to look at the worksheet and read the
question forming situations. Check any vocabulary problems.
Genre: groupwork and mingle • Ask students to work individually to write a should and
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every shouldn’t sentence for each situation. Monitor and help
student in the class. with ideas and vocabulary.
Procedure: Organise the class into groups of three and • When students are ready, ask them to work in groups
give each group a worksheet. of four or five to decide on the best two statements for
• Tell students they are going to do a survey in their each situation. At the end, take feedback from the class
group. Firstly, they must decide which questions to ask to and find out the best pieces of advice from each group.
find out the information they need. Give students two or
three minutes to prepare. UNIT 13 WHAT ARE YOUR PLANS?
• When they are ready, model the activity by eliciting the
first question: What shoe size are you? or What shoe size Aim: to practise talking about plans for the future
do you take? Ask the question of three students in the Genre: groupwork
class, or have students ask one another in open class, and Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
note the answers they give on the board, e.g. student in the class (or one per group of four to save
1 Anna 39 2 Pablo 44 3 Ahmed 45 paper).
Ask which student has the biggest shoe size and circle Procedure: Introduce the activity by asking What are your
that answer on the board. plans for the weekend? Elicit some suggestions from the
• Then tell students to ask and answer questions to class. Check students are using might and be going to
complete the rest of the worksheet. correctly, and prompt them if necessary.
• At the end, take feedback from the class and find out • Ask students to complete the sheet with their plans
who in the class has the biggest shoe size, who is the for the future in all the different categories. Depending
tallest, etc. on the class and the time available you could ask them
to write one sentence with might and one sentence with
going to, or you could just ask for one sentence for each
heading.

248 OUTCOMES

65752_em_CA_Notes_pp246-249.indd 248 08/12/18 11:48 AM

 TEACHERS’ NOTES TO COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES

14 WHAT WAS THE QUESTION? 16 HOW WELL DO YOU KNOW

Aim: to practise what … like? and descriptions
ME?
Genre: groupwork Aim: to practise talking about topics on the course
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every Genre: pairwork and whole class
group of four in the class. Cut each worksheet into Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
fifteen cards. pair of students in the class.
Procedure: It is a good idea to model this activity first. Procedure: Organise the class into pairs. Give out the
Write What ... like? on the board, and explain that you worksheet. Ask the pairs to look at the worksheet and
are going to answer a question with What ... like? and find out as much as they can about each other in the
students have to work out what the question is. Take a different topic areas.
card, without letting anyone see, and say, It’s a new / old • Depending on the time available, you might want to
building with lots of classrooms and students. Students cut the worksheet up and have each pair of students
must guess: What’s the school like? only ask about two or four topic areas, or they can ask
• Organise the class into groups of four or five. Give about all eight topics. Set an appropriate time limit,
each group a pile of fifteen cards and ask them to shuffle e.g. 20 minutes for the whole sheet, ten minutes for
them and place them in a pile face down. Student A four topics.
turns over a card, without letting the other students • Ask one pair to come to the front of the class and
see, and must answer the question on the card without stand or sit facing the class. Tell the rest of the class
saying any of the words in the question (e.g. He’s funny they can now ask three questions about the first topic
and friendly but he works hard and wants me to work – clothes and fashion, e.g. What is your favourite colour?
hard. He has a big office on the top floor. His door is What do you wear at the weekend? Make a note of the
always open.). The other students in the group must try questions that are asked on the board. Both students
to guess the What … like? question on the card (so the must write down their own true answer to the question
answer to the example is What’s your boss like?). The on a piece of paper. Then each student must say what
student who says the exact question first gets the card. they think their partner’s answer is. Give points for each
• Now it is Student B’s turn. They turn over the next answer they guess correctly.
question card and answer the question. You may want • Repeat the process with a different pair of students
to make a rule that the speaker must say at least three and a new topic area.
sentences before others can guess the question.
• At the end, find out which student in each group
guessed most questions.

15 TECHNOLOGY
Aim: to practise talking about technology
Genre: pairwork
Before the lesson: Photocopy one worksheet for every
eight students in the class. Cut into four strips along the
cutting lines. (Have an extra set of four strips to hand out
just in case.)
Procedure: It is a good idea to model this activity first.
Tell the class to guess which piece of technology you are
describing. Then describe a TV (e.g. It’s in my living room.
You can turn it on and watch films or programmes).
• Organise the class into pairs. Student A in each pair
gets a different strip of five words to describe. Say Go.
Student A describes the five words but can’t use the
‘can’t say’ words and must try to use the ‘can say’ words.
Student B guesses. It’s a race – which Student B can
guess all five first? That pair gets a point.
• Students pass on strips from one pair to another.
This time Student B gets the strip and describes and A
guesses. Make sure each pair of students gets a different
strip to the first time. Again, say Go, and make it a
competition. In round 3, A describes and B guesses, and
in round 4, B describes and A guesses.

TEACHERS’ NOTES TO COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVITIES 249

65752_em_CA_Notes_pp246-249.indd 249 08/12/18 11:48 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY
3
UNIT 1
1 What are / do you do? I do / ’m a teacher.
Workbook pages 4–5 What are / do you teach? I ’m / teach English
2 What is / do your job? I ’m / work a designer.
1
Where are / do you work? I ’m / work in a studio in Tokyo.
1 Hi 2 ’m 3 ’s 4 meet
Are / Do you enjoy your work? I / I’d love it.
2
4
1 is 3 is 5 are
1 Where does he live?
2 are 4 are 6 is
2 Who do you live with?
3 3 What time do they get up?
1 ’s 3 ’s 5 ’re 4 What do you do in your free time?
2 ’re 4 ’re 6 ’s 5 How do they travel here?
4 6 How many languages do / can you speak?
1 What’s your first name? 3 Where are you from? 5
2 What’s your surname? 4 Which part? a 3 b 1 c 5 d 6 e 2 f 4
6 6
a 2 b 3 c 1 d 4 1 Do you work in an office?
7 2 Do they work in a secondary school?
1 c 2 b 3 a 3 Does she speak Italian?
8 4 Does he play football?
1 USA 3 da Silva 5 Argentina 5 Do you and your family live in Scotland?
2 Julio 4 teacher 6 the north 7
9 1 No, I don’t 4 No, he doesn’t.
1 Brazil 3 Italy 5 Kenya 2 No, they don’t. 5 No, we don’t.
2 Japan 4 China 3 No, she doesn’t.
10 8
1 Poland 3 Canada 5 Spain 1
2 Mexico 4 Saudi Arabia 9
11 1 Mancini 3 restaurant 5 Italy
Africa: Kenya 2 waiter 4 Verona 6 London
Asia: China, Japan 7 English
Europe: Poland, Italy, Spain 10
the Middle East: Saudi Arabia Job application
North America: Canada First name: Ben
Central America: Mexico Surname: Herman
South America: Brazil Address: 24 Lime Street, Oxford, OX12 1LS
12 Telephone: 01842 71204
Japan: 2 syllables Kenya: 2 syllables Italy: 3 syllables Current occupation: Art teacher
13 Email address: [email protected]
Japan Kenya Italy Country of origin: England
14 Position applied for: designer
Brazil China Mexico
Describe yourself in 20–30 words.
15 I’m an art teacher. I work in an art college / a college in Oxford,
1 I’m from 3 are you 5 your mum a beautiful city in the middle of England. I want to work as a
2 It’s in 4 the capital 6 Which part designer in Cape Town.
16 11
1 capital 3 north 5 middle 2
2 east 4 south 6 west
12
1 a Angelika b Jianyu c Salima
Workbook pages 6–7 2 a Germany b China c Morocco
1 3 a in a school b in a government c in a hospital
1 nurse 4 shop assistant 7 waiter office
2 teacher 5 civil servant 8 police officer 13
3 receptionist 6 designer 1 S 2 J 3 A 4 J
2
a 4 c 8 e 2 g 6
b 5 d 1 f 7 h 3

250 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 250 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

Workbook pages 8–9 Workbook pages 12–13

1 1
1 river 4 church 7 cathedral
have go get
2 traffic 5 factory 8 restaurant
3 palace 6 university 9 park breakfast out for dinner up
10 beach a shower out dancing home from work
2 a coffee to bed
1 rivers 3 parks 5 traffic (has no plural)
2 beaches 4 factories 6 palaces lunch to a concert
3
1 There are 3 There aren’t 5 There are 1 get 3 have 5 have 7 go 9 go
2 There’s 4 There isn’t 2 have 4 have 6 get 8 go 10 go
4 3
1 There isn’t 4 There’s 7 There aren’t 1 get 2 drink 3 have 4 go 5 go
2 There are 5 There isn’t 8 There are 4
3 There aren’t 6 There are 100% always
usually
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 1 sometimes
1 occasionally
1 waiter 3 designer 5 assistant hardly ever
2 servant 4 student 0% never
2 5
1 in 2 of 3 in 4 for 5 in 1 always 3 usually 5 occasionally
2 hardly ever 4 never
3
1 a job 3 long hours 5 at the police station 6
2 there 4 at night 1 I usually do my homework before dinner.
2 She always goes out dancing on Saturdays.
4
3 They sometimes have lunch at home.
1 b 2 c 3 e 4 a 5 d
4 We never watch TV at weekends.
5 5 He hardly ever gets home from work before 9pm.
1 cathedral 3 beach 5 museum
7
2 university 4 factory
1 B 2 C 3 A
UNIT 2 8
Workbook pages 10–11 1 F 3 T 5 F 7 F
2 T 4 F 6 T
1 9
Across 1 premiere 2 club 3 message 4 sofa
4 swimming 5 walking
10
Down a 3 b 1 c 5 d 8 e 9
1 studying 2 dancing 3 reading 4 shopping f 2 g 7 h 10 i 4 j 6
2 11
1 c 3 a 5 b 7 f 2 pencil 4 dictionary 6 rubber
2 e 4 g 6 h 8 d 3 window 5 paper 7 paper
3 12
1 watching TV 5 playing the guitar 1 c 3 f 5 b
2 going to the cinema 6 going out to dinner 2 d 4 a 6 e
3 doing sport 7 meeting new people
4 listening to music 8 playing computer games Workbook pages 14–15
4
1
1 want 2 like 3 want 4 like 5 want 6 want
1 scissors 3 relax 5 cathedral
5 2 window 4 manager 6 dictionary
1 meeting 3 swimming 5 to go
2
2 wants 4 Do (you) like 6 doesn’t (really)
1 relax 2 early 3 computer
like
4
6
2 C 4 C 6 U 8 U
1 want 4 What 7 where
3 U 5 U 7 C
2 sounds 5 What 8 At
3 Where 6 Is 9 at 5
2 some 3 a lot 4 an 5 some 6 a lot
8
Jack d Emily b Daniel c 6
Will f Grace e Chloe a 2 an 5 a 8 many
3 any 6 much 9 a
9
4 some 7 a lot 10 an
1 F 2 T 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 T
7
1 name 3 live with 5 do you like
2 live 4 you do 6 do at the weekend

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 251

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 251 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

8
Workbook pages 18–19
1 Jack Jenkins
2 Location: Sheffield, UK 1
3 with my flatmates, Dave and Andy Across
4 Occupation: Student 1 TV 4 cupboard 9 fridge
5 Hobbies: swimming, playing computer games, chatting with 2 alarm clock 7 sofa
friends on the internet Down
6 Favourite weekend activities: going to the cinema, watching 1 towel 5 bed 8 sink
football on TV, playing football with friends. 3 mirror 6 table
9 2
1 I live in 4 In my free time, I like 1 living room 2 kitchen 3 bedroom 4 bathroom
2 I live with 5 At the weekend, I usually
3
3 I’m a
1 kitchen 5 living room 9 bed
2 fridge 6 sofa 10 bedroom
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 2 3 table 7 TV
1 4 sink 8 bathroom
1 your mobile phone 3 a conversation 4
2 TV 4 homework
Subject Object Pronoun Adjective
2
1 c 2 f 3 d 4 b 5 a 6 e I me my mine
3 You you your yours
1 notebook 3 games 5 ticket He him his his
2 life 4 station
She her her hers
4
1 learn 3 film 5 scissors We us our ours
2 new words 4 sounds They them their theirs
5
1 any kids 3 lunch 5 a coffee
5
2 go to the theatre 4 a short sleep
Conversation 1
UNIT 3 1 My 2 We
Conversation 2
Workbook pages 16–17
1 our 2 her
1
Conversation 3
1 bank 4 sports centre 7 post office
1 our 2 Our 3 his 4 their
2 café 5 clothes shop 8 shoe shop
3 bookshop 6 chemist 6
1 mine 3 Bella’s (jacket) 5 Dave’s
2
(toothbrush)
a 5 c 4 e 8 g 7
2 theirs 4 hers 6 ours
b 2 d 1 f 3 h 6
7
3
1 mine 3 hers 5 My
1 café 3 bookshop 5 chemist
2 John’s 4 ours 6 his
2 post office 4 bank 6 clothes shop
8
4
3
1 at 3 on 5 between 7 on
2 on 4 next to 6 opposite 9
1 G 2 G 3 R 4 R 5 G 6 R
5
1 The hotel is on the left / on the right. 10
2 The hotel is between / opposite the cinema and the 1 going out 3 living room 5 the countryside
department store. 2 near 4 small 6 old
3 The university is at / on the end of this street.
Workbook pages 20–21
4 The chocolate factory is at / on the right.
5 The church is opposite / between the cinema. 1
6 The museum is next to / opposite the internet café. 1 e 2 f 3 a 4 b 5 d 6 c
6 2
1 on, opposite 3 on 5 between 1 plates 3 sandwich 5 make up
2 at 4 next to 6 opposite 2 hair 4 dog 6 music
7 3
1 send a package / some money 1 clean 3 table 5 on
2 get lunch / a package / some stamps / a jacket / a coffee / 2 put 4 set 6 sink
some money / some aspirins 4
3 change some money 1 can’t 3 can 5 can
4 have lunch / a package / some stamps / a jacket / 2 can’t 4 can’t 6 can’t
a coffee / some money / some aspirins
5
8 1 Can you 3 Can you 5 Can I
1 send 3 have 5 get 2 Can I 4 can you 6 Can you
2 exchange 4 have 6 get
6
9 1 He can come to the meeting tomorrow.
3 2 Can you help me with this homework, please?
10 3 You can’t smoke in here.
1 Gibbs 3 Wharton 5 0914671903 4 Can I use this towel?
2 June 4 630 6 café 5 We can’t use this room today.
6 I can’t find my keys.
252 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 252 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

7 12
1 a 2 b 3 b 4 a 5 a 6 b 1 Hiro went to Hawaii alone / with his family.
9 2 Hiro thought his hotel was good / bad for families.
1 b 2 c 3 Elisa had a good / bad holiday.
4 Elisa was happy / unhappy when her holiday ended.
10
5 Manny liked / didn’t like the sea and the beaches in Maui.
1 on the corner 3 by bus 5 along the road
6 Manny spent a day / week in bed.
2 opposite the house 4 two
11 Workbook pages 24–25
1 Hi 4 café 7 bus 1
2 33 5 pub 8 clothes shop
3 Lime 6 restaurants 9 Student’s own name T J A N U A R Y N E
E A P I O Y O H O K
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 3 A S R M B R C L V T
1 J E I M A E T A E E
1 buy 3 brush 5 share J U L Y O P O I M S
2 send 4 change 6 wash N F N P G E B E B E
2 D E C E M B E R E P
1 on 3 down 5 off
2 up 4 up E B T P W A R E R T
3
P R A L F R R S A E
1 dinner 3 your room 5 the sea A U G U S T D C S M
2 tidy 4 bread M A Y C N R N G H B
4 S R V A E P B O Y E
1 b 2 e 3 a 4 d 5 c O Y E L I C T B E R
5
1 study 2 balcony 3 sink 4 apartment In order: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August,
September, October, November, December
UNIT 4 2
Workbook pages 22–23 1 spring 2 summer 3 autumn 4 winter
3
1
1 b 2 e 3 f 4 a 5 c 6 d
1 was / were 5 came 9 read
2 had 6 see 10 needed 4
3 did 7 show 1 The fourth of July. 4 The twelfth of October.
4 go 8 play 2 The twenty-fifth of April. 5 The first of May.
3 The third of November.
2
The irregular verbs are: be, have, do, go, come, see and read. 6
1 I didn’t get up early.
3
2 She didn’t have a great holiday.
1 had 3 read 5 did
3 They didn’t take me out for dinner.
2 saw 4 came 6 played
4 There wasn’t a large dog on the table.
4
5 We didn’t go to the cinema last Friday.
1 spent 4 stayed 7 bought
6 You didn’t do your homework at the weekend.
2 was 5 watched 8 took
3 were 6 went 9 cooked 7
1 That film wasn’t very long.
5
2 There wasn’t anything to do.
Conversation 1: photo b
3 There wasn’t anyone I knew at the party.
Conversation 2: photo c
4 I didn’t buy anything at the shops.
Conversation 3: photo a
5 We didn’t go anywhere last weekend.
6 6 She wanted it but she didn’t have any money
1 nice 2 interesting 3 bad
8
9 1 didn’t go 5 was 9 didn’t get
/t/ /d/ /Id/ 2 went 6 didn’t rain 10 weren’t
3 didn’t take 7 didn’t do 11 had
cooked showed wanted 4 stayed 8 bought 12 didn’t want
liked rained chatted 9
relaxed tried needed Conversation 1: photo b
Conversation 2: photo c
10 Conversation 3: photo a
1 10
11 Bella: had fish for dinner, got some presents
Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Claire: visited her sister, went to a rock festival
The weather was good ✓ ✗ ✓ Rob: left home at one, saw some of the match
Maui was nice ✓ ✓ ✓ on TV
The food was good ✓ ✓ ✗ 11
The rooms were clean ✓ ✓ ✗ 1 F 3 T 5 F
The staff were friendly ✗ ✓ ✓ 2 T 4 T 6 T

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 253

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 253 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

Workbook pages 26–27 UNIT 5

1 Workbook pages 28–29
a hotel c taxi e money g car
1
b sightseeing d train f boat h swimming
2 colour material clothes food shape
1 sightseeing 3 a taxi 5 a hotel red wool jacket fruit long
2 a day in Rome 4 to Tokyo 6 with friends white wood shoes meat small
3 green plastic shirt cake short
1 fly 3 stay 5 rent
2 spend 4 go 6 take yellow leather jeans cheese square

4 brown cotton dress fish round

2 2
5 Across
3 cake 4 jacket 5 shirt 6 fish
1 b 2 e 3 f 4 a 5 d 6 c
6 Down
Hi Evie 1 dress 2 meat 3 cheese 4 jeans
We got back from Japan this morning. We had a great time! On 3
Monday we went sightseeing. We saw Tokyo Tower (it’s like the 1 jeans 3 jacket 5 meat
Eiffel Tower, but it’s red!) and the Imperial Palace. It was really 2 cheese 4 fish 6 cake
interesting. 4
The next day we spent two hours walking around the Meiji 1 meat 2 short 3 white 4 cotton 5 yellow
Shrine. Then we went shopping in Harajuku. We loved it! In 5
the evening we went to a restaurant. We had sushi. It was 1 This 3 This 5 This
delicious! 2 These 4 These 6 This
On Wednesday we rented a car and went to Tokyo Disneyland. 6
I enjoyed it but James didn’t like it. The weather was good all 1 those 3 those 5 that
the time – it was sunny every day! 2 that 4 Those 6 that
I hope you and the family are well. 7
1 this 3 these 5 this
See you soon,
2 those 4 that 6 this
Love Sophie 8
7 Conversation 1: picture b
1 Did Sean cook lunch? Conversation 2: picture c
2 Did you go to a concert? Conversation 3: picture a
3 Was Paul ill?
9
4 Did they watch TV?
Items ticked: 1, 3, 4, 9
5 Were her earrings expensive?
6 Did Brenda stay in bed yesterday? 10
Conversation 1
8 1 T 2 F
1 Did you go on holiday anywhere? Conversation 2
2 Was the food good? 3 T 4 F
3 How was your summer? Conversation 3
4 Was it very expensive? 5 T 6 F
5 Where did you stay?
11
9 1 How much are the 4 Anything else?
1 Where did you go (on holiday)? 2 What are they made of? 5 Can I have some
2 Who did you go with? 3 How many 6 How much
3 Was the weather good? 13
4 Were the people friendly? 1 13 3 316 5 2040
5 Did you have a good time? 2 150 4 590 6 14,000
6 How long were you there for?
14
American English British English
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 4 1 120 ✓
1 2 318 ✓
3 214 ✓
1 free 3 sunny 5 warm
4 3060 ✓
2 clear 4 rainy 6 fun 5 1030 ✓
2 6 9040 ✓
1 a taxi 3 a bed and breakfast 5 to Rome
2 fire 4 a taxi
3
1 snow 2 stay 3 laugh 4 rain
4
1 the 2 a 3 a 4 The 5 a
5
1 e 2 d 3 a 4 c 5 b

254 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 254 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

5
Workbook pages 30–31
1 menswear 5 sports
1 2 security guard 6 womenswear
1 They are sleeping. They’re sleeping. 3 beauty department 7 changing rooms
2 He is doing the shopping. He’s doing the shopping. 4 shop assistant
3 We are studying at university. We’re studying at university. 6
4 I am watching TV. I’m watching TV. 1 b 3 a 5 e 7 f
5 You are working hard. You’re working hard. 2 h 4 d 6 c 8 g
6 She is growing fast. She’s growing fast.
7
2 1 b 2 e 3 d 4 a 5 c 6 f
1 They aren’t sleeping.
2 He isn’t doing the shopping. Vocabulary Builder Quiz 5
3 We aren’t studying at university.
4 I’m not watching TV. 1
5 You aren’t working hard. 1 unhappy 3 down
6 She isn’t growing fast. 2 top 4 go in
3 2
1 We’re having 1 cheese 2 customer 3 bananas 4 department
2 ’m talking 3
3 are staying 1 jumper 3 an unusual 5 growing
4 aren’t selling 2 bottom 4 leather 6 toy
5 ’s watching
4
6 is doing
1 on 2 of 3 up 4 in 5 for 6 by
7 isn’t working / ’s not working
8 are (you) going 5
1 e 2 d 3 a 4 c 5 b
4
1 We’re having a sale this week. UNIT 6
2 They’re watching TV.
3 We’re doing well. Workbook pages 34–35
4 Are you studying at university? 1
5 How are you feeling today? 1 friendly 3 popular 5 lazy 7 helpful
6 I’m working hard. 2 boring 4 strange 6 nice 8 difficult
5
2
2
positive: friendly, popular, nice, helpful
6 negative: boring, strange, lazy, difficult
3
3
7 1 friendly 3 popular 5 strange
2 2 difficult 4 lazy
8 4
1 1838 3 nineteenth 5 2009 1 helpful 3 friendly 5 lazy
2 1852 4 300 6 14 2 expensive 4 varied
10 5
1 Paris 3 sells 5 popular 1 varied 3 modern 5 friendly
2 good value 4 large 6 work at Shinsegae 2 patient 4 expensive 6 popular
Centum City
6
Workbook pages 32–33 1 Chemistry 3 Law 5 Medicine
2 Geography 4 Maths 6 Biology
1
1 Brad. In Japan. 2 Suchart. In New York. 7
1 Marketing 3 IT 5 Engineering
2
2 Literature 4 PE 6 History
a 2 b 3 c 4 d 1
3 8
Student’s own answers. 1 IT 2 Medicine 3 Literature
4 9
Model answer: 1 How are 3 What are 5 Are you
2 Are you 4 class are 6 Where are
Dear Isabella
We’re having a great time here in Japan. 10
I’m writing this postcard from a restaurant. 3 Sentences 1, 3, 4, and 6 contain the weak form of ‘are’.
We’re eating dinner and looking at the city. 11
The view is amazing. bad – good
There’s a lot to do here. We’re staying boring – interesting
in a hotel and can walk to most of the Isabella Conti difficult – easy
interesting places. Yesterday we visited an via Venezia 89 friendly and nice don’t have opposites here.
art gallery. It was fun. Verona 9800
Italy 12
But the best thing about this place is the 1 It’s very interesting
shopping! We went shopping yesterday 2 I don’t like the teacher.
afternoon. I bought a T-shirt. We got 3 It’s quite difficult.
something for you too! 4 She’s not very well.
5 The other students are really friendly.
Love,
6 I did very well in my exams.
Francesco

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 255

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 255 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

13 2
1 going 3 good 5 very 7 sure 1 older 3 more expensive 5 further
2 enjoying 4 like 6 subject 2 taller 4 better 6 easier
15 3
1 c 2 e 3 a 4 b 5 d 1 younger 3 cheaper 5 nearer
2 shorter 4 worse 6 more difficult
16
1 Law 2 English 3 Engineering 4
1 taller 5 faster 9 more creative
17 2 more intelligent 6 higher 10 more interesting
1 F 2 F 3 T 4 T 5 T 6 F 3 older 7 slower
4 better 8 worse
Workbook pages 36–37
5
1 1 Chinese 3 Japanese 5 Spanish
2 2 German 4 Russian 6 Turkish
2 6
1 d 2 e 3 a 4 b 5 c 1 Spanish 3 Turkish 5 Japanese
2 Chinese 4 Russian 6 German
3
1 university 3 2.5 5 eighteen 7 1965 7
2 30 4 1636 6 Iceland 8 private 1 The writer liked the teacher.
4 2 The writer thought the lessons were interesting.
1 c 2 e 3 f 4 b 5 d 6 a 8
5 Student’s own answers.
1 did 6 finished 11 enjoyed 9
2 started 7 lasted 12 had Model answer
3 finished 8 cost 13 failed My favourite teacher was called Takako Yamada, my English
4 lasted 9 paid 14 passed teacher. I loved the subject and I was a good student.
5 started 10 borrowed She was a big woman with black hair. She was friendly,
6 which is why I liked her.
2 When did the course start? What made her a good teacher was that her lessons were
3 When did it/the course finish? interesting and she was very creative. The time always went
4 How long did it/the course last? by quickly in her classes. I’ll never forget Takako Yamada!
5 How much did it/the course cost?
6 Did you have an exam?
7 Did you pass it/the exam? Vocabulary Builder Quiz 6
8 Did you enjoy it/the course?
1
7 1 impatient 3 unimportant 5 unfriendly
✓✓ ✓ ✗ ✗✗ 2 unpopular 4 unhelpful
very / really quite not very not
2
8 1 decision 3 problem 5 grade 7 idea
1 James is quite lazy. 2 break 4 skill 6 half 8 grade
2 The other students are very nice.
3
3 These books are really interesting.
1 with 2 in 3 – 4 for 5 in 6 –
4 My classmates are quite friendly.
5 My university is very expensive. 5
6 My new teacher is really good. 1 f 2 c 3 e 4 a 5 d 6 b
9 UNIT 7
1 aren’t very friendly 4 isn’t very good
2 ’s not very popular 5 aren’t very interesting Workbook pages 40–41
3 aren’t very expensive 6 isn’t very difficult 1
10 1 grandfather 5 son 9 brother
1 really 2 quite 3 great 4 very 2 grandmother 6 daughter 10 sister
3 husband 7 uncle 11 cousin
Workbook pages 38–39 4 wife 8 aunt
1 2
Adjective Comparative 1 grandfather 4 husband 7 cousin
old older 2 daughter 5 wife 8 grandmother
one syllable tall taller 3 uncle 6 sister
big bigger 3
easy easier 1 Keira 4 Ben 7 Kate
-y -ier funny funnier 2 Alexa 5 Judy and Alan 8 Paolo
lazy lazier 3 Carlo and Beatrice 6 Sam
expensive more expensive 4
more + adj interesting more interesting 1 Can you swim? 5 Does she speak English?
creative more creative 2 Did you go out yesterday? 6 Is he Sue’s brother?
3 Are they married? 7 Are you a student?
far further
4 Can you hear me?
irregular forms good better
bad worse

256 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 256 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

5 7
1 can 3 are 5 does 7 am 1 They have to go to school on Saturdays.
2 didn’t 4 can’t 6 isn’t 2 We don’t have to do any homework tonight.
3 I have to see the doctor today.
6
4 I emptied the dishwasher, so John doesn’t have to.
1 Do 3 Did 5 Is 7 Does
5 Toby doesn’t have to go to work today.
2 Am 4 is 6 were
6 A teacher has to work very hard.
7 8
1 main 3 main 5 auxiliary Paul: oldest friend
2 auxiliary 4 main 6 auxiliary Martina: step grandfather (i.e. Martina’s grandmother’s
8 second husband)
2 9
Paul
9
1 at school 3 once or twice a year
1 a sister 3 five 5 doesn’t live
2 nice, funny, reliable 4 once a year
2 mother 4 forty 6 and son
Martina
10
1 when Martina was ten 3 most days
1 or sisters 5 How old
2 positive, strong, strict 4 once or twice a week
2 your parents 6 Do you live
3 How many languages 7 Are you 10
4 do they (your parents) 1 T 2 T 3 F 4 T 5 F 6 T
11 Workbook pages 44–45
1 b 2 c 3 f 4 a 5 d 6 e
1
13
1 They live in Ohio. E F I T A N T W Q H
2 I share an apartment with two other students. U T D K S A O T U W
3 There’s a party at our college. O C N O T Q E X I N
4 It’s our graduation party.
L A G Y R M R R E I
5 I want to work here in New York City.
6 I have a job at the Bank of America.
C O N F I D E N T J
L P U L C B L R L R
Workbook pages 42–43 E U L D T R H N I G
1 V O F U N N Y W M A
1 games 6 the dog E S B T M S O B T M
2 a story at bedtime 7 the cat R E L I A B L E F V
3 the dishwasher 8 jokes
4 the light switch 9 a story
2
5 games 10 my baby brother
1 strict 3 clever 5 fit 7 quiet
2 2 funny 4 confident 6 loud 8 reliable
1 empty the dishwasher 3
2 pick up my son from school 1 funny 3 quiet 5 clever
3 repair the light switch 2 strict 4 reliable 6 fit
4 read a story at bedtime
4
5 feed the dog
Jason: confident, funny
3 Luis: nice, speaks three languages
1 look after 3 read 5 play Kerry: clever, quiet
2 tell 4 sing 6 feed
5
4 1 L 2 K 3 J 4 L 5 J 6 K
necessary not necessary 6
I 1 confident 3 reliable 5 nice
You have to don’t have to 2 young 4 loud 6 quiet
We 7
They 1 and 3 and 5 but
He 2 but 4 but 6 and
She has to doesn’t have to 8
It 1 Amalia, Laura’s sister
5 2 in Copenhagen
1 don’t have to 5 have to 3 she’s a (medical) student
2 has to 6 has to 4 clever, confident, friendly, loud, funny
3 doesn’t have to 7 have to 5 she makes her laugh and really understands her
4 don’t have to 8 doesn’t have to 6 once a month
7 go shopping, go to the cinema
6
1 You don’t have to 4 Tim has to 9
2 I don’t have to 5 Daisy doesn’t have to Student’s own answers.
3 We have to 6 Mia and Betty have to

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 257

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 257 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

10
Workbook pages 48–49
Model answer:
This is a photo of me with my best friend, Flavio. He lives in 1
Bologna. He’s an engineer. Flavio’s very clever and funny. He can be 1 have a baby 5 get married
a bit loud sometimes, but he’s reliable too. We see each other once 2 won the lottery 6 stopped working
a month. We like to go for a drink and something to eat. 3 move house 7 got divorced
4 left home 8 start (my own) business
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 7 2
1 2 have a baby
1 best friend 3 girlfriend 3 get married
2 grandmother 4 housework 4 stopped working
5 won the lottery
2 6 moved house
1 on 2 up 3 up 4 after 7 started (his own car sales) business
8 get divorced
3
1 confidently 3 cloudy 5 reliable 3
2 Luckily 4 cleaner 6 education 1 ’d like to visit 4 ’d like to start
2 ’d like to learn 5 ’d like to be
4 3 ’d like to save 6 ’d like to have
1 set 3 affect 5 repair
4
2 trust 4 feed 6 make
1 We wouldn’t like to visit Australia.
5 2 I wouldn’t like to learn Russian.
1 c 2 d 3 b 4 e 5 a 3 They wouldn’t like to save money.
4 You wouldn’t like to start your own business.
UNIT 8 5 I wouldn’t like to be rich.
Workbook pages 46–47 6 She wouldn’t like to have a dog.
5
1
1 like 3 doesn’t like 5 wouldn’t like
1 c 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 d 6 e
2 ’d like 4 Do you like 6 Would you like
2
1 have a meeting 4 go for a walk 6
2 play tennis 5 do the shopping 1, 3 and 5
3 go home 6 write an email 7
3 1 Taurus 3 Leo 5 Gemini
1 have 3 do 5 go 2 Cancer 4 Aries 6 Taurus and Leo
2 play 4 get 6 go for 8
4 1 c 2 d 3 e 4 f 5 a 6 b
1 ’m going to 4 ’re going to
2 ’re going to 5 ’re going to be Workbook pages 50–51
3 ’s going to 6 ’s going to 1
5 1 crime
1 I’m going to write a letter to my sister. 2 tax
2 We’re going to go home early because we’re tired. 3 improve
3 Tom’s going to study for the test in his bedroom. 4 tourists
4 You’re going to meet my new friends at the party tonight. 5 safety
5 My parents are going to drive to my house. 6 save
7 cause
6
8 be nice
1 isn’t going to come 4 aren’t going to go
9 help
2 not going to stay 5 isn’t going to be
3 aren’t going to have 6 aren’t going to finish 2
+ –
7
provide help create traffic problems
1 going to be 4 ’m going to see
provide a service lose money
2 ’re going to have 5 Is (he) going to bring
create jobs cause problems
3 ’re going to need
save money cause crime
9 make people richer make people poorer
go shopping in London attract tourists lose tourists
10 be good for the environment be bad for the
1 K 2 J 3 K 4 J 5 J 6 J reduce / cut tax environment
11 increase tax
1 T 2 F 3 F 4 T 5 T 6 F cut jobs

12 3
1 gonna 4 going to 1 tax 3 jobs 5 tourists 7 money
2 going to 5 gonna 2 cause 4 make 6 lose
3 gonna 6 gonna 4
14 1 because 3 so 5 so
1 What do you want to see? 2 so 4 because 6 because
2 How about Michel’s Café at seven o’clock? 5
3 What are you doing tonight? Department store, cinema and shops
4 Do you want to go for a coffee first? 6
5 Do you want to go out somewhere? She’s for the building.
15
a 3 b 5 c 1 d 4 e 2

258 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 258 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

7 12
FOR AGAINST Veronica Veronica’s husband
create jobs increase crime 1 Been to Egypt before ✗ ✓
provide a service reduce parking spaces in town 2 Been to Luxor ✓ ✓
make shopping easier increase pollution 3 Seen the Sphinx ✗ ✗
attract people to the town increase noise 4 Been to St Catherine’s ✓ ✗
increase business for local shops it’s bad for the environment 5 Been to the Red Sea ✓ ✓
8 13
Model answer: 1 F 2 T 3 T 4 F 5 F 6 T
I think it’s a bad idea because it’s going to reduce parking
spaces in town. I also think it’s going to increase pollution, so it’s Workbook pages 54–55
going to be bad for the environment. Finally, I think it’s going to 1
increase noise and crime, so I’m against this shopping mall. 1 c 3 a 5 g 7 f
2 e 4 b 6 d
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 8 2
1 1 his name 5 you
1 f 2 d 3 b 4 e 5 a 6 c 2 my homework 6 worst
2 3 car 7 idea
1 plan 3 date 5 pollution 4 your sleep
2 competition 4 noise 3
3 2 took the wrong turn 5 missed my flight
1 plan 2 cut 3 run 4 blog 3 hurt himself 6 felt ill
4 forgot to lock the door 7 make a mess
4
1 c 2 e 3 b 4 f 5 d 6 a 4
Across
5 1 did 3 broke 4 seen 6 stolen
1 library 2 lottery 3 divorced 4 abroad 8 fallen 9 fell 11 saw
UNIT 9 Down
1 done 2 cried 4 stole 5 broken
Workbook pages 52–53 7 made 10 lost 12 won
1 5
1 have 3 Have 5 hasn’t 1 c 2 a 3 b
2 haven’t 4 has 6 Has
6
2 1 a 2 c 3 b
1 Have you been to Prague? 4 Have you seen Room?
7
2 No, I haven’t. Have you? 5 Yes, we have. Have you?
1 two hours 4 £90
3 No, but I’d like to go. 6 No. Is it good?
2 good weather 5 four hours
7 Yes, it’s amazing.
3 160 feet 6 a chef from Hello Sushi restaurant
3
8
1 been 3 haven’t 5 went 7 see
1 just for special days, because it’s ‘a special present’
2 have 4 go 6 seen
2 slow and peaceful because it’s done ‘quietly’ and describes
4 the balloon flight
1 have 3 Has 5 haven’t 3 above you, because you’re ‘looking up’
2 have been 4 you ever 6 she hasn’t 4 it’s used for attaching things, and it’s ‘strong’
5 5 the person and the rope
1 have been 4 haven’t seen 7 has been 6 strong and well; it describes the sushi
2 have seen 5 hasn’t seen 8 has seen 9
3 hasn’t been 6 haven’t been a 2 b 1 c 5 d 3 e 6 f 4
6
Workbook pages 56–57
1 I have been to Paris more than ten times.
2 Have you ever been to New York? 1
3 Ella has never seen Star Wars. relaxing, stressful, annoying, boring, sad, embarrassing,
4 When did you go to Poland? exciting, scary
5 Paul hasn’t been to Spain. 2
7 1 boring 4 relaxing 7 sad
1 + 3 − 5 − 7 + 9 + 2 embarrassing 5 scary 8 exciting
2 − 4 + 6 + 8 − 3 stressful 6 annoying
8 3
1 You should! 2 Don’t! 1 The train is cheaper.
( (

9 2 We love it!
1 You should! 4 Don’t! 7 Don’t! 3 She arrived two weeks ago.
(

2 Don’t! 5 Don’t! 8 You should! 4 We slept in a tent.

(

3 You should! 6 You should! 5 It was a great experience.

( (

6 He fell and broke his arm.

11
(

Tick (✓) photos of St Catherine’s Monastery and the Valley of 5

the Kings. 1 delicious 3 relaxing 5 beautiful
2 interesting 4 friendly

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 259

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 259 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

6 4
1 Coldplay. 1 buses 4 get 7 catch
2 It was hot and sunny. 2 number 5 taxis 8 station
3 He / She was so happy he / she couldn’t speak. 3 run all night 6 charge
7 5
a 3 b 1 c 2 1 He’s driving too fast.
8 and 9 2 This bag isn’t cheap enough for me.
Model answer: 3 It’s too early to go.
Have you ever seen the ‘Mona Lisa’? Last month I saw it for 4 This film is too long.
the first time, in the Louvre museum, in Paris. I went with my 5 I can’t buy it. I haven’t got enough money.
girlfriend. 6 You aren’t walking fast enough. Hurry up!
The Louvre was really interesting. We saw a lot of great 6
paintings. The building is amazing, too. It was a cold day and countable: accidents, buses, drivers, people
there were a lot of people there. We waited in a long line to see uncountable: crime, pollution, traffic, water
the painting. 7
For me, it was great to see this famous painting. I wanted to 1 many 3 enough 5 much
see it for a long time, and I was very excited. It was a small 2 enough 4 many 6 much
painting, but really beautiful. 8
1 too 3 n’t enough 5 too
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 9 2 too much 4 enough 6 Too many
1 9
1 make 3 give 5 take 7 feel The Silk Road journey is the longest.
2 check 4 call 6 lose 10
2 1 e 2 d 3 a 4 f 5 b 6 c
1 in 3 on 5 in 7 on 11
2 down 4 up 6 of 1 4,000m 3 three 5 evening
3 2 Lake Titicaca 4 Romania 6 west
1 stressful 3 happen 5 check
2 sad 4 embarrassing 6 cooler
Workbook pages 62–63
4 1
1 b 2 e 3 d 4 a 5 c 1 change money 3 go shopping, go cycling, go dancing
2 stay, eat 4 get some exercise, get a haircut
UNIT 10 2
Workbook pages 58–59 1 stay 4 go cycling 7 get a haircut
2 change money 5 eat 8 go dancing
1 3 get some exercise 6 go shopping
1 d 2 f 3 b 4 c 5 a 6 e
4
2 Adjective Superlative
1 single 4 cash 7 delay
short adj. fast the cheapest
2 return 5 platform 8 line
hot the hottest
3 second class 6 direct
4 -y the -iest easy the easiest
1 thirty 3 thirty-five 5 fifteen 7 half dry the driest
2 o’clock 4 quarter 6 ten 8 past the most + adj expensive the most expensive
5 interesting the most interesting
1 five fifteen 4 one thirty irregular good the best
2 eleven twenty 5 six twenty-five bad the worst
3 quarter to six 6 two forty-five
5
6 1 the hottest 4 the best
1 a 2 b 3 a 4 b 5 a 6 a 2 the driest 5 the fastest
8 3 the cheapest
Conversation 1 = picture b 6
Conversation 2 = picture c 1 the slowest 4 the most expensive
Conversation 3 = picture a 2 the worst 5 the wettest
9 3 the coldest
1 station 3 have to 5 isn’t 7
2 bus 4 don’t know 6 50% 1 Get off the coach at the Hilton Hotel, call Sarah and wait.
10 She is going to pick you up from there.
1 c 2 e 3 d 4 a 5 f 6 b 2 We’re not very far from the city centre. It takes under half an
hour to get to Oxford Street.
Workbook pages 60–61 3 Get the underground from Shepherds Bush.
1 4 Oxford Street and Regent Street are great places to go
1 plane 2 train 3 bus 4 bike 5 taxi 6 car shopping.
5 And go to Soho for lunch. Try Caldo – it does great food and
2 there’s a lovely atmosphere. There are lots of great little
1 taxi 2 car 3 bus 4 train 5 bike 6 delayed restaurants in Soho.
3
1 park 3 pick 5 pay 7 wait
2 lock 4 run 6 book 8 stop

260 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 260 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

8
Student’s own answers.
Workbook pages 66–67
9 1
Student’s own answers. meat dairy fruit vegetables drinks
chicken butter kiwis garlic wine
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 10 beef cream bananas carrots water
lamb cheese apples onions beer
1 pork milk oranges spinach juice
1 home 3 a car 5 some cash
2
2 well 4 the journey
1 g 3 d 5 a 7 b
2 2 c 4 f 6 e
1 haircut 3 taxi driver 5 first class
3
2 return ticket 4 seafood
1 salt 3 spices 5 beans
3 2 pasta 4 rice 6 seafood
1 lock 3 delay 5 vote
4
2 park 4 taste 6 charge
1 milk 3 Onions 5 pork
4 2 beef 4 juice 6 cheese
1 down 2 to 3 off 4 up
5
5 1 me too 2 me neither 3 disagree 4 disagree
1 platform 3 passengers 5 journey
6
2 direct 4 transport
1 I don’t 3 Me neither 5 Me too
UNIT 11 2 Me too 4 I do
8
Workbook pages 64–65 1 don’t 3 wouldn’t 5 am
1 2 didn’t 4 can 6 have
1 service 5 table 9 main 9
2 dessert 6 starter 10 menu 1 Mi Casa 2 Johnny B’s
3 get 7 order
10
4 booked 8 bill
1 T 2 T 3 F 4 F 5 T 6 F
Hidden word: vegetarian
11
2
starter main course dessert
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mi Casa seafood chicken with ice cream,
W W W W C C W C C C
tomatoes and chocolate
vegetables, cake
3 pizza
1 Are you ready to order? W
2 Would you like any dessert? W Johnny B’s fish, salad of steak, eggs –
3 And for your main course? W beans and peas
4 I’m afraid the fish has finished. W 12
5 I’d like the steak, please. C 1 liked 3 nice 5 wasn’t
6 Can I get some ice cream, please? C 2 but 4 friendly
7 Yes. For starters, I’ll have the salad, please. C
8 OK. Then, I’ll have the chicken. C Workbook pages 68–69
4 1
1–7, 2–6, 3–5, 4–8
Countable nouns Uncountable nouns
6
1 a cup of tea 6 a bottle of wine apple chocolate
2 some steak 7 a cup of coffee biscuit coffee
3 a glass of red wine 8 coffee ice cream
egg fish
4 some fish 9 pasta with sauce
5 some water soft drink fruit
7 sweet meat
Carol has: white wine, fish, some water, a cup of tea vegetable sugar
Steve has: white wine, steak, extra vegetables, coffee ice cream
2
8 1 a lot of, any, some 3 much
1 C 3 S 5 SC 7 N 2 many 4 many, much, any
2 N 4 C 6 C
3
9 1 much 4 quite a lot of 7 any
1 b 3 f 5 d 7 e 2 many 5 many 8 a lot of
2 c 4 a 6 g 3 any 6 a lot of 9 some
10
1 Are you ready to order now sir?
Yes, I’d like the steak and a salad please.
Don’t you want a starter?
No, thanks – just a main course and a glass of red wine.
2 Can I get you anything else?
No, thanks. Can I have the bill please?
Of course. We usually add 10% for service.
No problem. Can I pay by credit card?
Yes, sir, a credit card is fine.

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 261

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 261 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

5 6
1 You should lie down.
employed unemployed
2 You should stop smoking.
fair unfair 3 You shouldn’t carry those heavy bags.
forgettable unforgettable 4 You should get some fresh air.
5 You should put cold water on it.
friendly unfriendly
6 You shouldn’t go to work.
happy unhappy 7
healthy unhealthy 1 b 2 d 3 a 4 e 5 c
8
popular unpopular
1 You look terrible. Are you OK?
tidy untidy Yes, I’m just a bit tired.
usual unusual Maybe you should lie down.
No, really. I’m fine.
6
2 You’ve cut your hand! It looks really bad.
1 unhappy 4 unemployed 7 unfair
Oh, it’s nothing.
2 popular 5 tidy 8 unforgettable
Maybe you should go to the hospital.
3 unhealthy 6 friendly 9 unusual
No, really. I’ll be fine.
7 3 Would you like some more cake?
1 Hi 2 Best wishes No, thanks. I’ve had enough.
8 Are you sure?
1 a party Yes, thanks. It was delicious.
2 Saturday 10th March 4 Would you like me to come round tonight?
3 Angela’s birthday It’s OK, thanks.
4 It’s at La Coupole on the corner of rue Dauphine and avenue But Mark’s away and you’re all alone in that big house.
Robespierre. No, really. I’ll be fine on my own.
5 8.00pm to midnight 10
6 a friend 1 A: Are you OK?
B: I’ve got a headache.
9 and 10 A: Maybe you should take an aspirin.
Model answer: B: No, it’s nothing.
Hi Nicola 2 A: Are you OK?
We’re having a lunch on Sunday 7th July to celebrate Philippe’s B: No, my stomach hurts and I feel sick
birthday. A: Maybe you should lie down. Would you like some water?
It’s at home from 12.00p.m. to 5.00p.m. B: No, thanks. I’ll be fine.
Bring a bottle and a friend. 3 A: Ow! I’ve burnt my hand.
Let me know if you can come. B: You should put some cold water on it.
Best wishes, A: No, it’s OK. I’ll be fine.
Francoise
11
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 11 Jenny
12
1 1 headache 4 take more care of himself
1 c 2 f 3 b 4 e 5 a 6 d 2 go home 5 foot
2 3 chest 6 go to the hospital
1 hungry 3 terrible 5 unforgettable 13
2 unfair 4 unhealthy 1 On Friday 4 no
3 2 for more than a week 5 a chair
1 weight 3 employed 5 service 3 his chest, leg and arm 6 blue
2 starter 4 combinations
4
Workbook pages 72–73
1 add 3 recommend 5 include 1
2 order 4 avoid
U WG A H T I R E D
5
1 pepper 2 cream 3 pork 4 nuts H A P P Y E W R X I
L N N P T I M E C H
UNIT 12 O G A N T E T L I O
Workbook pages 70–71 L R M B O I U A T H
1 N Y W I T Y R X E B
1 head 3 arm 5 back 7 leg
R I E N Y L E E D N
2 chest 4 hand 6 stomach 8 foot
2
S T R E S S E D R M
1 sick 3 burnt 5 cut 7 cough U S I Y I O S I H S
2 headache 4 stiff 6 broken U P S E T B D A V N
3
1 OK 3 hungry 5 ill 2
2 hurts 4 cold 6 infection 1 tired 3 stressed 5 upset 7 angry
5 2 annoyed 4 excited 6 happy 8 relaxed
1 He should go to hospital. 3
2 They should take the day off. positive: happy, excited, relaxed
3 You should come with us. negative: upset, tired, stressed, angry, annoyed
4 We shouldn’t cancel the party.
5 She should listen to my advice.
6 You shouldn’t eat too much.

262 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 262 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

4
UNIT 13
1 d 3 b 5 a 7 c
2 g 4 f 6 e Workbook pages 76–77
5 1
1 upset 3 stressed 5 annoyed 7 angry 1 snow 4 storm 7 cloudy 10 hot
2 excited 4 tired 6 happy 2 dry 5 ice 8 wet 11 cold
6 3 rain 6 windy 9 sunny 12 warm
1 Kim 3 Tony 5 Ellie 2
2 Pritpal 4 Lara 1 sunny / warm 3 hot 5 cloudy
7 2 dry 4 wet / rain 6 storm
1 b 2 d 3 e 4 a 5 c 7 snow / cold
8 3
1 eleven 3 studies 5 continue 1 spring 2 winter 3 summer 4 Autumn
2 woman 4 didn’t help 4
9 1 I’m going to meet 5 I might get
1 stop smoking 3 the past 5 the truth 2 might have 6 I’m going to cook
2 she feels 4 his/the doctor. 3 I’m going to have 7 I’m going to see
4 might go 8 might do
Workbook pages 74–75 5
1 1 might 3 are going to 5 might
2 After 4 because 6 so 2 ’re going to 4 might 6 ’s going to
3 so 5 After 7 because 6
2 1 We might have to leave early.
2 open 4 kill 6 damage 8 cause 2 They’re going to phone us when they arrive.
3 hit 5 build 7 protest 3 Lin isn’t going to see her friends next week.
3 4 You might not get the job.
2 kills 4 damages 6 build 8 celebrate 5 It’s going to be cold and wet tomorrow.
3 opens 5 hits 7 protest 6 It might snow tomorrow.

4 7
1 I have fallen in love with my best friend’s girlfriend. The weather is going to be good.
2 About four months ago. 8
5 1 c 2 b 3 d 4 a
1 Paragraph 3 2 Paragraph 1 3 Paragraph 2 9
6 1 T 2 T 3 T 4 F 5 F
He’s married with a child, and he’s in prison at the moment. 10
Paolo is thirty-two and I’m twenty-one 1 b 3 a 5 g 7 e
7 2 d 4 f 6 c
Model answer: 11
Dear Gabriella 1 Who with? 3 How? 5 Why?
2 Where? 4 How long for? 6 What for?
You are in a difficult situation and you need to think carefully 7 What time?
about what you’re going to do.
Firstly, Paolo is in prison at the moment. What is his crime? Is Workbook pages 78–79
it going to make life difficult for you? Is this the type of person 1
you want to be with? Across
Secondly, he is married and has a child. Maybe his wife is the 2 in bad condition 9 rubbish 14 crime
same age as him. Does he really want a relationship with you? 5 horse 11 pollution 15 factory
How often is he going to want to see his child? 7 crowded 12 hills
Here’s my advice, Gabriella. You should think very carefully Down
before going any further with Paolo. I don’t think you should 1 violent gangs 6 surrounded by 13 farm
wait for him. I think you should find someone your age and 3 forest 8 fields 15 flat
enjoy your life right now. 4 grass 10 block of flats 16 convenient
Best wishes 2
Agony Aunt traffic, shopping, weather
3
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 12 1 F 2 T 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 T
1 4
1 b 2 e 3 a 4 c 5 d 1 C 2 S 3 C 4 S 5 C 6 S
2 5
1 earned 2 joined 3 burnt 1 didn’t like 3 slow 5 bored
4 carried 5 cancelled 2 crowded 4 prefers 6 happy
3
1 to 2 in 3 up 4 on 5 off
4
1 smile 3 warm up, warm-up 5 cough
2 protest 4 burn
5
1 c 2 e 3 b 4 a 5 d

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 263

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 263 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

Workbook pages 80–81 UNIT 14

1 Workbook pages 82–83
1 rat 3 cow 5 horse 7 pig 9 sheep
1
2 cat 4 dog 6 fox 8 rabbit
1 film 3 musical 5 theatre
2 2 play 4 concert
1 rat 3 sheep 5 cow
2
2 fox 4 dog 6 horse
1 funny 2 scary 3 sad 4 violent
3
3
has/have, past participle
1 strange 3 predictable 5 brilliant
4 2 depressing 4 entertaining 6 terrible
1 been 3 lived 5 worked
4
2 studied 4 known 6 had
1 b 2 e 3 d 4 a 5 f 6 c
5
5
1 have worked 3 have lived 5 have had
1 like 3 What was
2 have known 4 have been 6 have studied
2 nice 4 the food
6
7
1 How long have you worked in your company?
Aisha: exciting, funny
2 have you known your best friend
Julie: entertaining, strange, funny
3 long have you lived in this city?
Rashid: terrible, silly
4 How long have you been together with your partner?
5 How long have you had your mobile phone? 8
6 How long have you studied English? 1 T 2 F 3 T 4 F 5 F 6 F
7 9
Students’ own answers 1 A 2 J 3 R 4 A 5 J 6 R
e.g. I’ve known my best friend (for) ten years. 10
8 Review 2 best matches the Listening.
1 How long have you had your cat?
2 They have been together for years.
Workbook pages 84–85
3 Has he known her for long? 1
4 We have studied English for more than ten years. 1 speak 3 win 5 look after 7 live
5 How long has she lived here? 2 find 4 work 6 be
6 Have you worked here for a long time? 2
10 1 will live to be 100 5 will speak Chinese
City 2 will win the World Cup 6 ’ll be rich one day
Exciting and busy Shops open 24/7 3 ’ll work abroad 7 will find life on other planets
Lots of things to do A lot of traffic and pollution 4 will look after the
Crowded and noisy A lot of problems with crime environment
Country 3
Lots of fresh air Peaceful and quiet 1 won’t 3 will 5 will
You need a car to go anywhere Boring – nothing to do 2 will 4 won’t 6 won’t
There aren’t many shops Relaxing 4
11 1 will 3 won’t 5 will
Paragraph 1: c introduction 2 will 4 will 6 won’t
Paragraph 2: b description of the place 5
Paragraph 3: a summary 1 I’ll see you tomorrow.
12 and 13 2 Will they arrive before the party tonight?
Student’s own answers. 3 There won’t be enough money to pay for the tickets.
4 OK
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 13 5 We’ll probably be a bit late.
6 Do you think you’ll ever be rich?
1
1 flood 3 house 5 hill 6
2 forest 4 animal 1 a 2 b 3 a 4 a 5 b 6 a
2 8
1 down 3 by 5 in Sports 3 Financial news 4
2 on 4 on National news 2 Show business 1
International news 5
3
1 a 3 a 5 - 9
2 the 4 the 6 a 1 two years 4 Marc Van Rijn 7 more than 60 years ago
2 three 5 €3 million
4
3 yes 6 80,000
1 climb 2 smell 3 chase 4 reach
10
5
1 Yes. 4 Unhappy.
1 attention 3 flooding 5 photo
2 No, probably not 5 You accuse someone of something bad.
2 scary 4 chemicals
3 It’s a bad thing. 6 No.
11
a 3 b 4 c 6 d 1 e 5 f 2

264 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 264 10/12/18 12:32 PM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

Workbook pages 86–87 UNIT 15

1 Workbook pages 88–89
Economy Crime People Climate Healthcare 1
jobs murder friendly warm treatment 1 plug 3 vacuum cleaner 5 mobile phone
2 digital camera 4 hairdryer 6 tablet
wages safe open cold insurance
2
unemployment violence don’t talk dry 2 mobile phone 4 plug 6 digital camera
to you 3 hairdryer 5 tablet
much
3
1 They’re thinking of buying a house.
2 2 I’m thinking of giving £500 to charity.
1 nice 3 weak 5 good 3 Sue’s thinking of coming for coffee tomorrow.
2 friendly 4 insurance 6 problem 4 We’re thinking of seeing him in concert.
3 5 John’s thinking of giving up smoking.
1 open 3 problem 5 very good 7 wages 6 Are you thinking of leaving the country?
2 talk 4 lock 6 strong 4
4 1 ’m thinking of joining 5 are (you) thinking of taking
1 d 3 g 5 b 7 f 2 is thinking of buying 6 ’re thinking of selling
2 c 4 a 6 e 3 ’re thinking of going 7 ’m thinking of writing
5 4 is thinking of learning
1 It’s difficult to find work. 5
2 It’s easy to see a doctor when you’re ill. cars geography tennis cows computers
3 It’s really nice to have a close community.
4 It’s helpful to learn another language. tyres countries balls milk DVD
5 It’s important not to criticise your neighbours. engine oceans net grass email
6 It’s good to meet someone from the same place.
6 6
1 It’s cheap to keep your house warm. 1 Do you know much about geography?
2 It’s great to have people you can talk to. 2 Do you know much about cars?
3 It’s important to live in a warm climate. 3 Do you know much about computers?
4 It’s interesting to learn something new. 4 Do you know much about cows?
5 It feels good to help other people. 5 Do you know much about tennis?
6 It’s lovely to sit in the garden on a warm day. 8
7 1 biro 4 photographic film
The film is called Prejudice and the stars are Juan Santinez and 2 dishwasher 5 battery
Carter Jones. 3 barcode
8 9
1 c the present day 3 d A chase All the items in the pictures are mentioned.
2 b In San Francisco 4 c OK 10
9 1 c 2 f 3 e 4 a 5 d 6 b
Student’s own answers. 11
1 F 2 T 3 F 4 T 5 T 6 F
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 14
1 Workbook pages 90–91
1 peace 3 brilliant 5 strong 1
2 ending 4 unemployment 1 search 3 online 5 a search
2 2 a website 4 the internet 6 a link
1 insurance 3 killing 5 acting 2
2 treatment 4 fighting 1 email 4 send 7 website
3 2 received 5 memory stick 8 link
1 support 3 see 5 win 3 deleted 6 check 9 online
2 expect 4 play 6 injure 4
4 1 ahjk 4 o 6 flmnsxz
1 brilliant 3 strong 5 clear 2 bcdegptv 5 quw 7 r
2 open 4 depressing 3 iy
5 5
1 d 2 a 3 c 4 b 1 c 2 a 3 b
6
1 b 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 b 6 b
7
1 w 2 h 3 e 4 h 5 e 6 w
8
(Last century’s finest) 2
9
a 3 b 1 c 4 d 2
10 and 11
Student’s own answers

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 265

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 265 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

12
Model answer:
UNIT 16
I think the best invention of the 20th century is the telephone. Workbook pages 94–95
I don’t understand how it works, but I know I couldn’t live
1
without it!
People all over the world use telephones to talk to their friends A U D I V O R C E D M
and families. When you need help, you can use the telephone to P N M E Y E U J A S O
call the police or hospital. P WN U Q A R E K E F
I use a telephone every day in my job. I couldn’t do my job R L W I F E O A R P S
without one! I can call people in other countries and talk to O E S E V O R L R A E
them. I use my telephone a lot in my personal life, too, to call V U J N R E P O I R S
my friends and make arrangements.
E C R E U T R U A T I
In my opinion the telephone is the best invention of the 20th
A U I D S P E S D N L
century because I don’t know anyone who hasn’t got one. It’s
useful and helpful. It can even save your life! W E D D I N G N A E N
Y A T A B R N S P R O
Workbook pages 92–93 H E V T O G A I WE Y
1 D H U S B A N D B P O
Eric asks to see a digital camera, games console, laptop and X W T A R Z T Y E O I
mobile phone.
2 1 partner 4 husband 7 jealous
1 £1,800 3 light 5 making calls 7 games console 2 wife 5 approve 8 anniversary
2 bag 4 eight 6 £300 3 pregnant 6 wedding 9 divorced
3 2
1 this is the latest model 4 surf the Net 1 get 3 get 5 have
2 with software fully loaded 5 send text messages 2 have 4 save 6 have
3 it’s Wi-Fi ready 6 state-of-the-art 3
4 1 get divorced 3 have a baby 5 get married
a 1 b 4 c 6 d 2 e 5 f 3 2 save money 4 have a date
4
5
1 out 2 on 3 in 4 up 5 up
2 develop your own apps
3 solve problems 5
4 check your heart rate 1 c 2 e 3 d 4 a 5 f 6 b
5 control everything 6
6 save energy 2 has 4 saw 6 have 8 is
7 keep your files in one place 3 get 5 meet 7 got 9 seen
8 create vocabulary tests
8
6 Rob and Granny
Across
9
1 create 2 produce 5 solve 6 keep
1 Rob – Shelley’s father
Down 2 Mum – Rob’s mother
1 control 3 develop 4 check 5 save 3 Shelley – Rob’s daughter
7 4 Kevin – Shelley’s old boyfriend
1 badly 4 hard 7 quickly 5 Pam – Rob’s wife
2 early 5 late 8 quietly 10
3 well 6 loudly 9 slowly 1 good 3 work 5 on a beach
8 2 is 4 professor 6 a few days
1 badly – well 4 quickly – slowly 11
2 early – late 5 ‘hard’ doesn’t have an opposite. 1 get married 4 known 7 divorce
3 loudly – quietly 2 broke up 5 sure
9 3 fell in love with 6 happy
1 loudly 3 well 5 badly 7 hard 9 quickly
Workbook pages 96–97
2 early 4 late 6 slowly 8 quietly
1
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 15 1 was having 3 was staying 5 was eating
2 was listening 4 were shopping 6 were visiting
1
2
1 by 2 about 3 on 4 in
1 She wasn’t having lunch with her family.
2 2 He wasn’t listening to music in his bedroom.
1 power 3 camera 5 cleaner 3 I wasn’t staying with friends in Jakarta.
2 stick 4 machine 4 They weren’t shopping at the mall opposite the cinema.
3 5 I wasn’t eating the packet of biscuits that you gave me.
1 press 3 delete 5 develop 6 You weren’t visiting your family on the farm.
2 produce 4 save 6 drop
4
1 search 3 download 5 video
2 list 4 design
5
1 d 2 a 3 e 4 c 5 b

266 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 266 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY

3 5
1 Were you talking about me? Model answer:
2 Was she walking to work? The love story of Antony and Cleopatra
3 Were they buying some new clothes? Mark Antony was a Roman General and Cleopatra was the
4 Was he calling his sister on the phone? queen of Egypt. One day, they met and fell in love. A short time
5 Were your parents having a nice time? later, Mark Antony returned to Rome and married Octavian’s
6 Was I spending too much time online? sister. Then Mark Antony left Octavian’s sister and returned
4 to Cleopatra. A short time later, Antony and Cleopatra got
1 was watching … came 3 was leaving … started married. Octavian was angry and sent an army to fight them.
2 were living … bought 4 were going … broke Antony and Cleopatra lost. Then Antony thought Cleopatra was
dead, so he killed himself. Finally Cleopatra killed herself after
5
seeing Antony dead.
1 was living 5 noticed 9 had
2 was working 6 thought 10 got married
Vocabulary Builder Quiz 16
3 was sitting 7 was walking
4 came 8 looked 1
6 1 c 2 e 3 b 4 a 5 d
1 W 2 W 3 S 4 W 5 W 6 S 2
1 high 2 trouble 3 an anniversary
7
1 I was watching TV at home. 3
2 What were you thinking about? 1 up 3 at 5 on 7 for
3 She wasn’t looking for a boyfriend. 2 of 4 of 6 of
4 I was making a coffee in the kitchen. 4
5 They were eating outside under the trees. 1 plant 3 trouble 5 promise
6 We weren’t playing tennis when you saw us. 2 break 4 lift
9 5
Two of the couples got married. 1 b 2 d 3 a 4 e 5 c
10
1 snake 3 fifteen 5 Qays
2 to the 4 over 6 another man
Underworld
11
1 T 2 T 3 F 4 T 5 F 6 T

Workbook pages 98–99

1
1 Will you call me every day?
2 I’ll tell you when I hear more news.
3 Don’t worry, I won’t tell anyone.
4 See you later. I won’t be late.
5 I promise I won’t make a mess.
6 I promise I’ll pay you back tomorrow.
2
1 c 2 a 3 d 4 f 5 e 6 b
3
1 A: Bye. Take care. B: I will. Bye.
2 Don’t worry. I won’t forget.
3 Will you call me?
4 He will be here by five o’clock.
5 Why won’t you help?
4
The greatest love story
Romeo and Juliet lived in Verona. Their families were enemies.
One night, they met at a party and fell in love. Then they got
married. A short time later, Juliet’s cousin killed Romeo’s friend
in an argument. Then Romeo killed Juliet’s cousin. Juliet’s father
told her he wanted her to marry someone else. Juliet pretended
to be dead but she was only sleeping. Romeo thought she was
dead, so he killed himself. A short time later, Juliet woke up, saw
Romeo dead and killed herself. Finally, the families of the two
lovers stopped fighting and became friends.

WORKBOOK ANSWER KEY 267

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 267 08/12/18 11:46 AM

 AUDIO CD TRACKLIST

CD 1: Units 1–8 CD 2: Units 9–16 CD 3: Class tests

Unit 1 Unit 5 Unit 9 Unit 13 Track 1 Review test 1
Track 1 Track 32 Track 63 Track 91 Track 2 Review test 2
Track 2 Track 33 Track 64 Track 92 Track 3 Review test 3
Track 3 Track 34 Track 65 Track 93 Track 4 Mid-year test
Track 4 Track 35 Track 66 Track 94 Track 5 End-of-year test 1
Track 5 Track 36 Track 67 Track 95 Track 6 End-of-year test 2
Track 6 Track 37 Track 68 Track 96
Track 7 Track 38 Track 69 Track 97
Track 8 Track 39 Unit 10 Unit 14
Unit 2 Unit 6 Track 70 Track 98
Track 9 Track 40 Track 71 Track 99
Track 10 Track 41 Track 72 Track 100
Track 11 Track 42 Track 73 Track 101
Track 12 Track 43 Track 74 Track 102
Track 13 Track 44 Track 75 Track 103
Track 14 Track 45 Track 76 Track 104
Track 15 Track 46 Unit 11 Unit 15
Track 16 Unit 7 Track 77 Track 105

Unit 3 Track 47 Track 78 Track 106

Track 17 Track 48 Track 79 Track 107
Track 18 Track 49 Track 80 Track 108
Track 19 Track 50 Track 81 Track 109
Track 20 Track 51 Track 82 Track 110
Track 21 Track 52 Track 83 Track 111
Track 22 Track 53 Unit 12 Track 112

Unit 4 Unit 8 Track 84 Unit 16

Track 23 Track 54 Track 85 Track 113
Track 24 Track 55 Track 86 Track 114
Track 25 Track 56 Track 87 Track 115
Track 26 Track 57 Track 88 Track 116
Track 27 Track 58 Track 89 Track 117
Track 28 Track 59 Track 90 Track 118
Track 29 Track 60 Track 119
Track 30 Track 61
Track 31 Track 62

268 OUTCOMES

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 268 08/12/18 11:46 AM

65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 269 08/12/18 11:46 AM
65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 270 08/12/18 11:46 AM
65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 271 08/12/18 11:46 AM
65752_Ans_Key_p250-272.indd 272 08/12/18 11:46 AM